This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at http : //books . google . com/|
;'VT/ £. M
HARVARD
COLLEGE
LIBRARY
r
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
■-£>
BOOK TV.
THE
X ASHTADHYAYI/>F PACINI. ..,,;;
TRANSLATED INTO ENGUSH
fer
SRISA CHANDRA VASU, B. A.„
Provincial Civil Service, N. W. P.
&tnztt%\
Published by Sindhu Charan Bose,
at the Panini Office,
1896.
(All righto rtiervtd.y
• ' /.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
IndTN
-5451
\ N
> ?>
\
4-
'.*
, K
<r"
/
15-S
Digitized by
w
Digitized by
Google
fui ) JL Mh * "'* ■
ar^u fyffis-'f
£Jaruar& Cnlfoge
Stbranj
THE BEQUEST OF
PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT
1SS0-I916
OPIN
I
Profi
I have s<
such a wo
the Comn
I
• Profi
The I
'that the a
as possit
amongst '
paper, pri
Pro)
• Nothi
of a trust
Sanskrit
known tc
this court
1
Pro)
The woi
credit' ti
valuable «•
grammar more help than he can find anywhere else,
sale in Europe (and correspondingly in America).
)P SANSKRIT.
• • .From what
lould I have given for
P&nini's Sutras and
finishing your work.
February \ 1892. — • *
le Public shows clearly
:>n as exact and pithy
bt claim a high place
iskrit Grammar. The
(cellent
\rd April, 1893.— • •
doubt, than to get hold
the standard work of
ake this valuable work
\ of ancient India in
June, 1893.—* * •
"and executed, doing
J in my opinion, very
in student of the native
It ought to have a good
Professor V. Fausbol, Copenhagen, 15th June, 1893. — # # # It appears to
me to be a splendid production of Indian industry and scholarship, and I value
it particularly on account of the extracts from the Kasika.
Professor Dr. R. Pisehel, Hlale (Saale), 27th May, 1893.—* # # I have
gone through it and find it an extremely valuable and useful book, all the more
so, as there are very few Sanskrit^scholars in Europe who understand P&nini.
Pandit Lalchandra Vidyabhaskar, M. R. A. S. (London), Guru to H. H.
the Maharaja of Jodhpur.
55ifir%rf snTRTj^^^K *i^w*iiPRrg*siw4JtF*nn 1
uuie^uta wnf%treF*nftars 4iMi**ffi«h*iuii?ita' 11 3 ti
^Ǥr^RRRf%r^n? Urn sr*j*<rer vgfttftpivftivtti 11 1 11
A^lMHWHlHW^iJi^ P*i3NftH*Mq : srftftyff% 11 v u
vftvwt 3faH^i^uy*Sm* Prf m5iMW<i^fii<lm 1
*St*kh arootsTOrarart v&t mww* *mf&tw 11 1 11
««^fin^Hii^ii|Mit «rtn^tivftrt <r s^ift >#hh 11 • 11
OPINIONS OF THE PRESS.
The Indian Union, ( Allahabad), 26th November, iSpi. — * * * The original
Text and Commentaries, carefully edited with English notes and explanations;
bespeak of much diligence, care and ability ; and those of the English-reading
public who have a taste for Sanskrit cannot be too thankful to Babu Sris
Chandra for offering them so easy an access to the intricate regions reigned
over by that Master Grammarian. • • • We recommend this book to all
English-knowing lovers of the Sanskrit Language.
The Tribune, (Lahore), pth December, iSpr. — * * * The translator has
spared no pains in preparing a translation which may place PAnini's celebrated
work within the comprehension of people not deeply read in Sanskrit The
paper, printing and the general get-up of the book before us are admirable,
and considering the size of the book (it is estimated to extend 2000 pages)
the price appears to be extremely moderate.
The Amrita Bazar Patrika, (Calcutta), /Sth December, iSpi. — * • • Judging
from the first part before us, we must say that Babu Sris Chandra has suc-
ceeded well in the difficult work of translation, which seems to us to be at
once lucid, full and exact. It is no exaggeration to say that Babu Sris Chandra's
translation, when completed, will claim a prominent place among similar works
by European Sanskrit Scholars.
The Hope, (Calcutta), 20th December, /Spi.—* * * The get-up of the
publication is of a superior order, and the contents display considerable pains^
taking on the part of the translator.
The Arya Patrika, (Lahore), 22nd December, i8pi. — * * * The talented
Babu has rendered a great service to the cause of Sanskrit literature by produ-
cing the sort of translation he is engaged upon. • • • His effort is most
laudable and deserves every encouragement
Karnatak Patra, (Dharwar), jth February, /Sp2. — * * * Mr. Vasu gives
ample proof of his competency to undertake the work which is not an easy task
even to learned Sanskritists.
The Punjab Times, (Rawalpindi), iyth February, /Sp2. — * * • Babu
Sris Chandra is well-known for his scholarly attainments. He has* done the
translation in a lucid and clear English. We can strongly recommend it to those
who wish to study Sanskrit Grammar through the medium of English.
The Mandalay Herald, j/st December, rSpi. — * * * Students and readers
of classic language of India are much indebted to the learned Pandit for his
translation of this scientific work on the grammar and philology of the Sanskrit
language.
Tlu Arya Darpan, (Shahjahanpur,) February, iSp2.—+ * * Such a work
has been a desideratum. It is well got up, and praiseworthy. We wish it every
success.
Digitized by
Google
OPINIONS OF THE PRESS (continued). '"•-•' x
The Allahabad Review, January \ 1892. — • # • The translator ha* done
' his work .conscientiously and faithfully. The translation of such a work into
English, therefore, cannot but be a great boon to all students of the science
of language and of Sanskrit literature in special. The translator deserves the
help of the Government and the Chiefs of India.
The Maharaila (Poona), 4th July, rSpj. — # * • If we may judge frbm
the first part which lies before us, it wijl prove a very valuable help to the stu-
dent of P&nini. • * So far as it goes it is creditably performed, and there-
fore deserves patronage from all students of Sanskrit and the Education
Department
Indian Mirror (Calcutta), 17th March, iSpf. — • • • The manner in
which the publication is being pushed through, speaks volumes in favour of the
learning and patriotism of its editor, Babu Sris Chandra Vasu. The whole
work when completed will bean invaluable guide to the study of Sanskrit litera-
ture and especially to the English speaking students of the Sanskrit language.
Lucifer (London), March /Sp6. — • • • We are pleased to find
that the translation is clear and easy and the extracts from the KAshika are not
only very numerous but also valuable. The large number of references to the pre-
ceding sOtras for the formation of 4 padas ' will save much time and trouble,
and obviate a difficulty which discourages many from the study of Pftnini.
Indeed the English translation of the grammar could rightly be called " P&nini
Made Easy." • • * It can be recommended as of great impor-
tance, not only to all who wish to have a general knowledge of PAnini but also
to the few who desire to master the great grammar thoroughly and enjoy all
its benefits.
RATES OF SUBSCRIPTION
Payable in advance, Jor the complete work, including postage.
Indian •• — ••• Rs. 20 O O-
Forelgn — ... ••• £ 2
Payable by instalments, per volume, excluding postage.
Indian ... ... Ra. 8
Foreign ... ... £ 6
Payable at the end of publication, for the complete work, excluding postage.
Indian •- Rs. 80 O O
Foreign ... .- .~ £ 8
All communications to be addressed to
SINDHU CHARAN BASU
Publisher of Panini,
Benares Cantonment. . .
N.-W. P., India.
T. P. Works, Benares
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
y a ;i a i j
: ;X7»-
2l 3^/-'^;?
i, ; v :; /• »•
r*
HARVARD
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
Digitized by
Google
v.
TO THE
H*n'ble J$ir Jolur (ftdjp, §t., #. #,
CHIEF JUSTICE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES,
THIS WORK
is,
WITH HIS LORDSHIP'S PERMISSION,
AND IN RESPECTFUL APPRECIATION OF HIS LORDSHIP'S
SERVICES TO THE CAUSE OF ADMINISTRATION OF
JUSTICE AND OF EDUCATION
IN
THESE PROVINCES,
BY HIS LORDSHIP'S HUMBLE SERVANT /
THE TRANSLATOR
"5
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
3TO ^WI SHOT* <JT^ I
BOOK FOURTH.
Chapter First._- ,.
.. ^. , .*i K *•— - ^uaiunaia-uvduuva or " Collective
aggregate of these three words.
Q. All affixes are placed after the base (See Sfltra III. f. 2); the
affixes treated of in the last Book were to be placed after the root fdh&tu');
the remaining affixes taught in Books Fourth and Fifth, will therefore, be
placed after all such bases Jj$fif which arc not roots (dh&tu) ; and such bases
remaining arc pritipadika and feminine words, What i* then the necessity
-J
Digitized by
Google
j
Digitized by VjOOQLC
3&\lt
I ', /. »; ^
3TO : ^pW^FT WT* qR s I
BOOK FOURTH.
Chapter First.
1. (From this point forward as far as the end of
Book Fifth, whatever we shall treat of, should be understood
to come), after what ends with the feminine affixes sft, or «n^ f
or after a Nominal stem.
This is an •adhikAra' aphorism pure and simple. It simply Consist*
of terms which other aphorisms, in order to complete their sens$, are under
the necessity of borrowing. In other words, this sfltra points out the base
sr^f<r to wich the affixes beginning with 3 treated of in the next sAtra, and
ending with 3T^(V. 4. 151), are to be applied.
The sfttra consists of three words* The term ^ is a common name
for the three affixes &** *R\, and <sffa H The term *n*» is the common name
for the three affixes ?nr, ?T* and *rra II These are feminine affixes and are
taught from sfltra 4 to 65 of this chapter. The word mfimfta means 'a Nominal
stem ' and has been defined in sfltra I. 2. 45, 46, 1, e. that which is possessed of
a meaning, not being a root or an affix ; or what ends with a Kfit or a Tad"
dhita affix. The word CTftf mfdMfHl<l is a Samahara-dvandva or Collective
aggregate of these three words.
Q. All affixes are placed after the base (See Sfltra III. I. 2); the
affixes treated of in the last Book were to be placed after the root ('dhAtu');
the remaining affixes taught in Books Fourth and Fifth, will therefore, be
placed after all such bases iTfjfir which are not roots (dhatu) ; and such bases
remaining are pratipadika and feminine words, What is then the necessity
Digitized by
Google
6cx| Casb Affixes. [ Bk. IV- Ch. !• 5 i
or making this sfltra, when these pratipadik* , $c» are the only bases left to us
to apply the affixes taught herein-aftej ^ j . ; . A Y , u v
A. To this we reply, the necessity, of \ making this sfltra arose from
the following considerations : that the word * a qit k *rftrrfvfiT<t should qualify the
words 'J*' •%?!*/ 'the letter «r/ *«T3?r?nT*\ and 'd^/ wherever used in
the following sOtras. So that, where a rule says: "let such an affix be
applied to a Vpddha word," we must understand it to mean, "let such
an affix be applied to a Vpddha word which is a pratipadika, or which
ends with 'hi' or 'Ap'; and not to every Vpddha word." The principal aphorism,
besides the present, which regulates the application of Taddhita affixes, is IV,
i. 82, which declares : — "The taddhita affixes, on the alternative of their being
employed al all, come after the word that is signified by the first oftht words in
construction? Thus IV. 1. 157 says; — The affix fi?Hj s added, according to the
opinion of Northern Grammarians, in the sense of ' descendant/ after a word
which is entitled to the designation of Vpddham, provided it does not end
with a Gotra affix." Thus the idea, * the son of Amragupta,' may be expressed
either by the phrase • hiujihwwO or by adding the affix * phift ' to the first
of the word in construction, viz, • amraguptasya/ which is a Vpddha word
(I. 1. 73> But can we apply the affix •phift* to the first of the word in
construction in the following, 'grnn flifluiHWHam' , because the word *j flan Am*
the genitive plural of 'jfta', is a Vpddha word? Certainly not, because
the word ' pratipadikat ' must be read into this sOtra IV. I. 157, and the
affix ' phift • should be added after that Vpddha word which is in its crude*
form also a Vp'ddham, and not that which becomes Vp'ddham only in
construction. Now the pratipadika of 'jfi&n&m' is * jfta ', the latter is not a
vpddham, therefore, the rule does not apply to it So also the word 'jfta' is a
vpddham in its pratipadika state ; but in the following phrase, it loses its
vpddha nature; ■jrft ai£HH4Wi ' meaning 'the son of two wise Brah-
man ladies'. Still the affix 'phift 9 must be added to the word 'jftyor',
because its pratipadika is a vpddha word. (2) Similarly the word 'ttf^t 9
(sfltra IV. I. 160 ; ' the affix phift is applied diversely to a non- vpddha word,
according to the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians') must be qualified
by the word ' pratipadika '; otherwise it would lead to similar incongruous
results as in the last aphorism. (3) Similarly the word *Vl in SAtra IV. 1. 95
the affix f^is added after a word which ends in the letter *c ') must be qua*
lified by the word 'pratipadika'; that is to say, the word in its crude-form
must end in ar» and not necessarily when it is in construction. If it were not
so; then the affix •fxr' will apply only to the word 'WW 9 in 'Wf APf^WL but
will not apply to the words • ^TO: \ or • TOPim' in the phrases • wrart<l*q**
or • *wf m^* 1 H Bu$ the affix • %* ' applies to all these three words.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. 1 §. 1 ] The Case Affixes. r toj
(4> Similarly thfc- word Sr^^n^:' in IV. 2. 44, (the affix %r< i*
added to a word which has the grave accent on its beginning), must be qualP
fied by the word pr&tipadika. That is, the word in its crude form must have
the grave accent on its initial, though in construction, it may or may not have
grave accent Otherwise, the affix Tr! will apply to the. words 'irfs*
and 'tTT*' which in construction are anud&tt&di as in < *n*t fa^TO-'
**THt ftsTTO' (VI. I. 168); but which in their crude-forms (*r^ t f^O
are ud&tt&di. And conversely, the affix *if^/ will not apply to the word
t Hs f THi > ' which in construction is ud&tt&di, as, ^iw^ f^T^/ but which in
its crude-form is anudAtttdL
(S> Similarly the word < cj^^ in IV. 4. 7, (the affix «*^
is employed after words consisting of two vowels, when the sense is that of
crossing), must be qualified by the word pr&tipadika. That is, the word in
its pr&tipadika state must consist of two vowels, though in construction it
may consist of more than two syllables. Otherwise, this affix will not apply
to the word vSh in the phrase **&* s^fir*, while it will apply to the
words t ?vm t and '*4^f in the phrases, •qro fTCSt.' •****T Wfir'. But this
is undesirable;
Q Why have we employed the word 'dy-Ap* in the aphorism ? Is
not the word prAtipadika wide enough to include the words ending with the
feminine affixes, by virtue of the paribhAsh&: — "A pr&tipadika denotes*
whenever it is employed in grammar, also such a crude-form as is derived
from it by the addition of an affix denoting gender,"' ?
A. Not so. The paribhishA you quote applies to that case, where
there is a rule, relating to an individual word-form, given in the Sfttra itself In
other words, "this paribhasha is applicable when a word is employed in grammar
which either denotes prttipadikas generally (as the word c pr&tipadika ' does
in this sOtra) or denotes a praticulaf pr&tipadika, (such as the words >«*r f *f*ft,
«rf?HT, *r?PT, and srcfo in II. 1. 67)." That is, in II. 1. 67 % the masculine form
yuvA, also includes the feminine : but not so every-where. Moreover the words,
^T, 8?r^ have been employed in the Sfitra, in order to make the Taddhita affixes
applicable to feminine words ending in long f (^t) or long *rr far;). Thus the
feminine of *^x^\ and 'qfrf is, *^t*', and 'tfWF, the feminine of
fejf and 'HT 3 ^ is ^ijr and t m^x 9 1 After these words we can apply the
Taddhita affix nr< s as l ^n^ra , t sfiPRTCr,' ^JITO', and '*<HM<J' n
Now, had we not used the word 'hy-ftp' in the SOtra, and wished to
express the same idea as is done, say, by the word •kalitari, • we could not
have got this form at alL •
Digitized by
Google
6q6 The Crse Affixes I Bk. IV, Ch 1. 5. 2
Q. The word nn* takes #Kby IV. 1. 42; to which when frr^is added,
the vowel is shortened by VI. 3. 43; and we shall get the form wfifcTOtt Why
" do you then say that the Taddhita affixes could not be applied, but for the
words iiy-Ap ?
A. To this we answer, that by the rule of vipratishedha, the Taddhita
would have debarred the feminine. Thus, when feminine alone is meant and
not comparison, we shall have m#k ; and when comparison alone is meant and
not feminine, we shall have *m*X; but when both feminine and comparison are
meant, then would arise the difficulty; and according to the general maxim, the
Taddhita would have debarred the feminine. But by using the word hy-ftp, it
is shown that/rrf the feminine affixes are to be added, and then the com-
parison making affixes.
*fcr 11 ^TFsrfinft^rni **rpr- Rtmn n^Fn w
2. (After what ends with the feminine termina-
tions sft or sift, or after a Nominal stem the following case
affixes are employed for declension) :—
Singular.
Dual.
Plural
1st
su (s)
au
jas(as)
2nd.
am
aut (au)
fcis (as)
3rd.
t*(&)
bhy&m
bhis
4th.
ne(e)
bhy&m
bhyas
5th.
ftasi (as)
bhyftm
bhyas
6th.
has (as)
OS
Am
7th.
hi (I)
OS
sup (su]
In the above affixes, letters like * in 3 are 'anubandhas' employed
either for the sake of facility of pronunciation, or as distinguishing marks.
The final 5 is employed for the sake of forming the praty&h&ra jy^, which is
the collective name for the above 21 case-affixes. The force and meaning of
these affixes have already been explained in a former part of this work ; and
therefore, need not be repeated here. We shall now give examples of the
application of these affixes to words formed by &t\ 9 as, thH \ (\ ; by #lr^ as,
^;by#T^asfiT^;by^as^5T;by?T^as^5cr5rr; and by ^m, as *srfta-
iFUff ; and lastly to a pr&tipadika. as. 3*^1
Digitized by
Google
Bk.IV.Ch. I. 53]
The Case Affixes."
607
gfwft l
Singular
Dual
Plural
1st
%*id
5*T*
2nd
JfcHlfll
ywf
wnfh
3rd
jjnuf
$HlflnHl
iJHlflft:
4th
yift
$HlO**Hl
*JHlOM|: * *
5th
JHprf:
^"HlflHIl^
$*lrfl*V
6th
<ij»ii«i|j
5pn^h
wfrfHl*
7th
^•ii^iHL
'firth
^51 1
>
1st
IJT5C
«*
tijjn
2nd
«*5Ht
«*
^5**
3rd
*i5*r
*S$pitt*L
^giffi*
4th
fjijA
isjimm
• *{p*t
5th
m^i^u*
isigTHirc
^IJW
6th
*a§wn
nrj^h
vs^im<
7th
515 ram
ISC^*
*5*3
rff 1
i
1st
m
f^ft
f*f*
2nd
itol
!*ft
ITO
3rd
f^i
l^I^WL
t^*
4tn
¥*
f^f^nc
to**-
5th
JEW
I*^*ir*
pr^
6th
rr**
f*$fc
rum
7th
rrf* '
f*ft*
f9
The words tiffi and ^rrjrft are declined like ynd ; and *ym and
tfirftarrazir are declined like i!^r M
•
reWTTO II \\ D M^lR M W^IH >
«* *k.
jnr. 11
•TmJRmi
WT ^MHHiWH^IHS 1*1411*1*41 5W3UWII
3.
When feminine nature
is to be indicated, the
affixes which we shall treat of hereinafter must be employed.
This is an ;
adhikara sfitra pure and simple. The phrase 'when feminine
nature
is to be indicated', must be read in
all the following aphorism^
upto 8
1 inclusive.
The anuvritti of the word '
1 pratipadika ' should be read
into this sfltra, from the first stitra, not so, however, the anuvritti of the words
1 ^H*T* ' ; for we are now going to form words by the application of tf and
wir^ affixes.
. . .
Digitized by
Google
6o8
The Feminine Affixes. [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. §. 4
4 The affix *l* is employed to indicate feminine
nature, after the Nominal-stem « aja ' &c, and after the stems
ending in 6hort *r II
Of the affix «*, the letters *and * are f*. the real affix is m 9 The
letter ^indicates that the affix has anudatta accent (III. I. 4) '. the letter <,»
employed to distinguish this affix from nr»and »l* U
The words t** &c, are given below. Thus «nr « a he goat,' ««r 'a she-
soaf. The words ending in shorty are such as, *W* whose feminine w.l be
Lm U The word ** is used in the aphorism, the indicatory * shows (I. I.
£51* the short „ having one matrashould be taken ;and not the long « •
Pritipadikas that end in long w. such as ^n^t or ^ (III. 2. 74) do not
form their feminine by taking **. but are both mascuhne and fenumne.
Thus, s** 4^ «W^ 'the auspicious-gomg, nectar-dnnkmg Brahmant .
Ld thefcminine of such words been formed by *r. then the case^affix *of
the nominative singular would have been elided after them (VI. 1. 68>
Following are the words belonging to the «**rf| class :—
l am «nv 8. q«* q*w 3 - ***** 52™
Jv* B The above words denote « jati' or kind and though they end in
short IT in the masculine, they would have taken, but for the present sutra,
the affix « htsh ' (IV. 2. 63) in the feminine.
: 7. *m *** 8. fr» frn ». «n* mr
10 TO TOT U *l W M. ft«W «*WW
M £ The above six words are descriptive of age, and though they
end in short * in the masculine, but for the present sutra, they would have
taken the affix « *ft* (IV. 1. 20) in the feminine.
13. sfrmw, Sfr^; w - «wwww mmwxt;
N.B. These two words are formed by the affix «w, and being faf,
would have taken tf* (I V. 1. 1 3) but for this sutra.
15. tfs*. thro W «*** » ^^
17. *rt^FTR«, nflwwft *8. y** » Z!? r
1». fiT*«, f^VCTHj 20. fr**» PTWIi
\
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. 1. 5. 4 1 The Feminine Affix «i* i 609
N. B. The above words ending in • phala' would have taken the affix
gtsh (IV. I. 64) but for their enumeration in the • ajAdi * class ; ■ foror * when
a Dvigu Compound forms its feminine as Pnw ; when a Bahuvrihi Com*
pound, its feminine is fcftft II
21. f^Jf , *R2*W; 22. hi^**, *I?3«!T*
23. OTT^*?, *>F¥5*IT; 24. ^WTjn, HT^3**T?
25. WIS*?, WCI&vif; 26. q^5«f , TO3«OT;
The above words ending in y? would have taken ?lsh by IV. 1. 64.
27. jf fir
B. N. But the feminine of jry is jj^t when the meaning is 'the wife
of a fi&dra ' ; so also when the word 5[f is compounded with the word inpj as>
H\$\\)£t € a woman of 'ivfjf ' class *.
The term ' H^9 * is applied to the caste of Abhiras : and this com*
pound word would Lave taken the affix 'ti*' by the rule of tadanta vidhl
given in I. \. 72, but for the v&rtika, viz • jpr *!TT$tT Sjtf ^rfifr' It might be
objected that the tadanta vidhi cannot apply here on the strength of the
following maxim : — M That which cannot possibly be anything but a prAtipa-
dika does not denote that which ends with it, but it denotes only itself*
Therefore, the word * lAdra ' which cannot be anything but a pr&tipadika, does
not denote 'mah&-fOdra'. This objection is futile : the very . fact of this
v&rtika indicates by implication (jft&paka), that with regard to the application
of the feminine affixes, the tadanta-vidhi is valid and does apply. Thus we
have the forms like srffrftrft »tf?nfrrfl and syflproft
28. ^^ ctit 29. ^flui^ *f*TfT 30. \s(f^ ^(ftar
N. B. The above words end in consonants and would not have takeo
t *TX but for their being included in the *«nirff class.
» si. *%i &m 32. «ftv *flre? 33. wr <mr
B. N. The above words denoting matrimonial realtion would have
taken the affix 'Alsh' by IV. t. 48L
34. sT*pr «T?^r The word 'mfila' preceded by the negative particle
naii, would have otherwise taken 'Msh' by IV. I. 64.
jf*r ii ip4Ki*)»3r *i*w^l*w *iiftwR3w ftraf ^Hro^t nqRt m
5. The affix ^r* is employed, in forming the femi-
nine, after Nominal stem ending in qf or in ^ I
Of the affix &* f the letter qr is taken in order to make a common
term with ^\% and tfft; and thesis taken to distinguish ti from those
Digitized by
Google
6io The Feminine Affix <tft m [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. §. f
affixes; the real affix is f l Thus, *jjr ;—/. zrfft ; |$— / ^fif ; ***** -/ Jf**^ ;
<yft<nsr 11*11 q<nfansfacr:, % (feprf^)ii
6. And after what has an indicatory'uk* (gr, 55 or *e)
the affix ^ is employed, in denoting the feminine.
The Tfisa praty&h4ra meaning *, i£ and ** I Wherever it is possible
to make these letters indicatory, in whatever way it may be, that wotd-form
is called ^Fnj I That which ends with such a word is meant here. A
pr&tipadika pure and simple, not formed by an affix, may be 3f*nt, thus the
pronoun h*t$ among the sarvan&mas: an affix may be 3f*H( as the affixes
Sfftg and v%, and therefore, the words formed by these affixes will be *Fnj ;
similarly a letter may be zfitu as £ meaning n in VI. 4. 127, ("g is the
substitute of the final of an inflective base ending in aqSpj &c")
Thus, *&H ' honored ' sir.— -f. *re§T ' madam \ Applying the rule of
tadantavidhi, we have flrfcPPT^— s?ftTO?lr 'most exalted lad/. Similarly
q^Rl (formed by adding u% III. 2. 124 \ forms the feminine qn^cft, the 311
comes by VII. 1. 82. So also q*reft *a female sacrificing*; vrfri ST$tff a
mare 9 *
Vdrt: — Prohibition must be stated in the case of verbal roots having
an indicatory *uk\ Thus the roots &*r 'to fall down', toy 'to fall down'
have indicatory * ; and we get from these roots, the pa&tipadikas like 4<giU<l
andqdjv^j, (III. 2.76). TheTOra^OTSFft, w^un?T%ll Here, the feminine
is not formed by adding #jv I
Vdrt:— The prltipadikas ending with^ the verb 'anchu', however,
take the affix g**l As, jjnft, jrfWr, iM«.
7. The affix c ;#ni! is added, in forming the feminine
to the stems that end in the syllable 3% &&d ^ is the sub-
stitute of the final of such syllable.
Thus tf^ (Ui>&di IV. 1 1 5) f. tfrtf * a female artisan • ; <ft*t f. «fcft # a
young woman, a stout woman ', *re^ f. tifrfi * night* ($r+**fa* III. 2. 75) lit that
which destroys light, So also TO^rf^ *l
\
Digitized by
Google
fiic I V. Ch. !. § 10 ] At* 611
Words ending In *n arc formed by the affixes ^rf^ (III. 2. 103)
W&{* and qft% (III. 2. 74)1 These words end in Hand consequently would
have taken ^t^ even by IV. 1. 5 ; the necessity of the present sOtra arose In
order to teach the change of ^ into ^in case of words ending in ^M
Vdrt: — If the affix q^is ordained to be added to a word ending In
f^, (a letter of f^ pratyahaha), and is thus immediately preceded by a soft
consonant then this rule does not apply, that is to say, there is neither the
application of the affix ^t* nor the change of \ into ^11 Thus *r?^T^ is both
masculine and feminine as, ^2*-*T STgW: or sr^rtl * a Brahman brother or sister
in arms'. In ^rbi the tn* is preceded by ^ which is a letter of ^ class, but
as ^ is not ordained to be applied to ^but to *£, and we get the ^ indirectly
by guna, the vartika does not apply to such a case. Hence qrcft N
m^s^d<^iH ll * 11 <rufa II *n^, grerereFira ( fsraf ^fr? ) II
8. The affix '^fri' is optionally employed in the
feminine, after a Nominal-stem ending with word * pad, 1
The word qrf becomes qrj when final in certain Bahuvrihi compounds
(V. 4. 140)1 Thus fsFTPX is both masculine and feminine, or it may optionally
form its feminine by long f (^t^). In the latter alternative, the form will be
fijpfft, the word m\ being replaced by <T^ by VI. 4. 130^ (as read with I. 4. 18).
Similarly Prroi or Pnit ; ^wn^or *igtqft II
*t#t 11 *> 11 q^rft 11 ct*, ^r%, ( fenrf wf ) n
9. The affix snj is employed in the feminine, after
a Nominal-stem ending with the word l pad', when the word
denotes a verse of the Rig- Veda.
This debars 3*K M Thus ftqnp m\ 'a Rik verse consisting of two quarter
verses ' ; similarly firm St?>» *TJ*nT ^J II Why do we say u when denoting a*
Rik verse " ? Observe fiprft **f*TT * Dcvadatta (a woman) having t\vo feet \
* ^ ^^rrf^pr: n i© n q^nft n *, <*?, v-n*ui^*r., ( f^raroc ) n
?nr: n ** sg%»*i: ^rarft^w infirtff^i: ^ibn^i mfa n
10. The feminine affixes are not employed after
the stems called '<*< (I. 1. 24), and after *&&? &c.
This prohibits all feminine affixes that would otherwise have present-
ed themselves. Thus <n*r OT3F*: 'the five Br&hmagi ladies'. So also TO.
HI, T5F &c arc feminine as well as masculine. The following words belong to the
2
Digitized by
Google
Gir rfh^B [ bk. iv. Ch 1. 5. 14
Svasr&di class : — sror * a sister \ lpfaf ' a daughter ' ; HHl^l * a husband's sister \
UHir 4 a husband's brother's wife ', »ffirr • a mother ', fij^P ' three '. ^nnt* * four '.
to 11 « n q^ n to: ( ^ ferof ) ii
11. The affix #hx is not employed after a Nomi-
nal-stem ending in the syllable n^ II
By. IV. I. 5, pr4tipadikas ending in 1^ would have taken the affix
?f\% in as much as they end in s^; but the present stitra prohibits that Thus
UHH ' a string ' is both neuter and feminine ; and is declined as follows : — L 9.
*Ptf; d. <HHI-ft, pi. ^pfTC: II Similarly qptf, 4IHl-T», qpinn M
Here by using the term ipj we mean words formed by an affix whose
effective element is ip^, such as the affix Hppt (U^ftdi IV. 144) in the words
^nr^(^r+»TR^) and mn^; as well as words which end in ^ which does not re-
present an affix. This is done on the strength of the following paribh&sha : —
wrftrovr «ryirenfan *M « Ki«i ** sr^<TNf* gqfsrafc r 11 "Wherever i^or fsjor
«T^onr^ f when they are emyloped in grammar denote by I. 1. 72 something
that ends with sr^ or f sj or BT^or ipj, there «r^, fs^, snj, and VT represent these
combinations of letters both in so far as they possess, and also in so far as they
are void of, a meaning." Therefore, words like tffa^ and mfaqflmu where ipj
is not an affix, but an integral part of the word, are also governed by the pre-
sent sfltra. Thus, ^far, sffapfti tffaFP hj[%hT^HT» JMUWWU^l and ^fdHf^HH'* II
wft *44*fl& B ?R B <4<*lft II WP, srpfHfc:, ( fern ^t^ 1 ) H
12. The affix ^rc^is not employed to denote the
feminine, after a Bahuvrihi compound ending in si? it
This refers to those Bahuvrihi compounds in which the penultimate is
not elided. Of the Bahuvrihi compounds which lose their penultimate letter, it
Is optional to employ this affix or not ; as it will be taught in IV. 1. 28. Thus
ffr$^ ' possessed of beautiful joints ' is both masculine and feminine. As tjrofr
JprcWt, gro«r: ; so also Jjqprf, grofrofr and g^refa: ll In these cases the penuti-
tnate sr of ^ or ^ is not elided. See VI. 4. 1 37.
Why do we say u after Bahuvrihi compounds " ? Because after any
other 'compouds, this rule will not apply. As <MH<JM< is an AvyayibhAva
compound, its feminine will be srfiftnfl 11
5T^FIT! H4IH^d<^IH II \\ 11 **&{* II 5T*, ^TH^f, «Mld<<MlIy («R:
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. 1. 5. 14] tftv* • 613
13 The affix ^p^ comes optionally after both these,
viz. the Nominal-stem ending in *RC, and a Bahuvrihi compound
ending in z*% R
Of the affix ;*r*, the letter ^indicates that the affix is to be added
after the elision of the fc (I. 1. 64) of the base. Thus qPf^+TT^-^ITl+in'-^Pn;
This being an optional rule we have 1. s mm d % <rf*r or mm^t,pi 9 mnt: oriinii: ;
similarly with HRT* as, tfrer, $R or stol<ft, €far: or tffapf: II
So also in Bahuvrihi compounds ending in v(\. As :— -
*Ea*r, raj^r or hmjmi3 i , **rnir: or rantm : u
*&om, «rgcr?r or inKrwftr. *n^w or ^^w^ m
Why do we say "optionally" ? So that the option may apply to sGtra
IV. I, 7 also; i. e. when a pr&tipadika ending in *^ t which can be regarded as
ending in sr^, is a Bahuvrihi compound, then the change of *f into ^ and the
application of #r* are optional • we may apply the affix 5Tt instead. As :— »•
*&>for or ^frrft ; *rj<ffaT or ^Hft 11 :
sr-jro&rrac 11 ?« 11 *i^Tftr n zfz 4mhA«iml ri
14. The following rules apply to a Nominal-stem
which is not a subordinate term in a compound.
This is an adhik&ra aphorism pure and simple, and has governing-
force upto IV. 1. 77: and prohibits the application of affixes to 'upasarjanasV
That is to say, whatever we shall treat of hereafter, {is to be understood
to apply to such terms only, which are not upasarjana or a subordinate term
in a compound. ( I. 2. 43 ). Thus the next s&tra declares "the affix htp is added
in forming the feminine after what ends in short bt, if the affix with which it
ends has an indicatory ^, & c" Thus the word «{»t*K is formed by the affix c
(III.) 2. 16), and ends in w?. The feminine of this word will be formed by ^V^
as ffi^Q , similarly to^TC— -f**V**fk l But if these words being the last members
of a compound, are treated as upasarjana (I. 2. 43), then they will not take
the affix -£i\ in the feminine. Now in a Bahuvrihi compound, all the com-
ponent members are upasarjana, (II. 2, 35) ; therefore, the feminine of such
compounds will not take ^ II Thus, *a$vmj or syRnrcr H*?X II Similarly I V. 1. .
63 says, "the affix #t^ is added after words denoting jAti " as, qfT^^ft, $5rft 11
But where these words are upasarjana, 'htsh' will not be added : as, *y*FFpr
As a general rule, tadanta-vidhi (I, 1, 72) docs not apply to compounds ; but the present
sutra indicates by implication that the tadanta-vidhi applies to compounds for the purpote*
Digitized by
Google
614 *Km [Bk.IV.Ch.LS. is
of tlie application of feminine affixes. For had it not been so, there would have been no
necessity of making the present sAtra ; for a rule applicable to a simple word as such, would
not have applied to it when it was part of a compound — whether subordinate (npasarjana), or
principal (pradhAna). But the present sutra indicates that the tadanta-vidhi does apply, if
the word does not become a subordinate member, but is regarded as the principal member, of
a compound.
The feminine of 3T*vr=fiPC or «i«K*hK will be ap*renft or •i«il<tilQ> in as
much as the second member here is pradh&na : the word 'kumbha-k&ra *
being formed by aim (1 1 1, 2, I ), and thus making it possible to apply #h^ by
IV. i. 15. The affix sr^ referred to in the next sutra refers to the krit-affix
*T* (III. 2. 1), as well as to the Taddhita affix sr* M
f^^l^H^^<1»^M^d^^ ^^ dM^H^<^ : M V% II **5jft II
15. The affix #rJs added, in the feminine, after the
Nominal-stems ending in short sr, if the affix with which it ends
has an indicatory ar, or if the affix be J,or aro^, or sis^
or 3Fm^ f or ^* f or m^r, or ^rj f or s*^, or z^ or qjsr
or «hi^B
The word 3T^« ' ending in short ht' is understood here by anuvfitti
from IV. 1. 4 ; and qualifies the affixes above-mentioned, wherever neces-
sary. This debars the affix *pf of IV. 1. 4. We shall give example of each
seriatim (1) Thus, m., 55^ f., ag^ft m., h^^K f, f?ntfV (*re+t=*rv*"f ; the
final 3? is elided by .VI. 4. 148.) The word kuru-chara is formed by ? (III. 2.
16). of which ^is indicatory.
Q. It might be objected, "why is not the affix &\ added after the
words <nrepT, formed by the affix *rR^(lII. 2. 124) in as much as this affix
is a substitute of t**; and because 5*^ has an indicatory ^, therefore, its sub-
stitute will also be supposed to have an indicatory ^(1. 1. 57)/*
A. To this we reply, 'the affix <** is not fa^ as it has two indicatory
letters, $ and ?£.
Q. If that be so, affixes like fj£ should also be called no (Z\
affixes, as they have also two indicatory letters.
A. To this we reply, that if pot be not regarded f^H , then the indicatory
^of Fj^finds no scope any where: as the indicatory ^of W has its scope in sOtra
111. 4. 79, Therefore, the feminine of «prapf will be^RPTni Similarly, the indi-
\
Digitized by
Google
bk. iv.ch. i.j. is ] *n* 6*$
catory ^ of augments will not cause the application of the affix ^t* ; thus
qfam Prcit II Here the feminine of qf^r is formed by UT and not f. This is
indicated by sfttra IV. 3. 23, which says "augment 5^ is added to the affixes
,$q and £*$". If the e of h^ could have made the affix f*?j for the purposes
of this present sfltra ; the anubandha ^ had been unnecessarily added to the
affixes a and &a in the above.
(2) Of words ending in f we have, m, £rr°fa f. srta^nfl so also t Vnr4t
The m stands for the affix *^j ; and it is replaced by ^ (VII. 1. 2> Thus
^npif + f^ (IV. 1. i2o)»*pprf + <pi = sft<phf (VII. 2. 118). There fa no affix
which is merely M without any indicatory letters ; and denoting the feminine ;
the only affix, as said above, is ifj II Therefore, the following maxim does not
apply here : — " When a term void of anubandhas (indicatory letters) is im-
ployed in grammar, it does not denote that which has an anubandha attached
to it", and we cannot say that the m of this sfttra refers to the anubandha-less
v of V. 3. 102 which is always Neuter.
(3) Of words in m*j, we have already said that the affix •?* here
refers to both the Kjit and the Taddhita affix •aij*. Thus with the kpt affix
•aj>* we have sp^RR and mu^K (III. 2. 1), the feminine of which fa g>*M*fflO
and 3«U<*>lO H With the Taddhita affix 'a^* we have vfhpr* (IV. 1. 92), the
feminine of which is afrwft II Sometimes words formed by the addition of
the affix <* are operated upon as if they were formed by «r; II Thus ^Hh
OTrcft are the feminine of ^fft and fttto (IV. 4. 62), sometimes words formed
by <* are not so treated, as frnrt* nter (IV. 2. 57).
(4) Words formed by bt» as tfira f. *to#. «5tf<TPT, f. «fa<TPft. (I V. 1. 86>
Though by IV. 1. 73 the affix &^ would have come after the words ending in
«T*t, the re-employment of this affix in the present sfttra is for the purpose
of preventing the application of the affix 3^ which would have presented
itself by IV. 1. 63 ; that fa even when • jAti ' is indicated, * gfsh' fa not to be
employed here,
(5) The three affixes iron;, TO^, and , *nc^ are added by V. 2. 37 ; as,
TOPrfT. **ltfl,**HI«0 'reaching to the thigh'. Similraly STTJSTreft, HTj^lft, Wjsfnftl
(6) So also with words formed by ffq^ (V. 2. 42). As TP^nft * of
which the parts are five ' so also trcnft II
(7) So also with words ending in z^ (IV. 4. 1) as, •Ttfwft 'a female
dicer ', OTttf^rtf. The w is replaced by f^ (VII. 3. 50).
(8) Similarly with words ending in *w (V. 1. 18) : as, ffnroft 'elegant .
The affixes ^5 and r% are separately enumerated in this sOtra, in order to
exclude the affix z^ &c. For had the word w merely been used, then it would
have meant all the three affixes **, z\ and sn, which is not desired.
Digitized by
Google
616 tt%* [ Bic IV. Cil 1. 1 f 7
(9) Similarly with words ending in qp? (III. 2. 60) as, *nr*ft, «nrft II
(10) So also with words ending in s*^ (III. 2. 163) as |**fl * swift \
wft n
V&rt : — In addition to the foregoing, there should have been the
enumeration of the affixes 5T|J and fsr^ (IV. 1. 87) and f^R^i (IV. 4. 59) and
i3n^(III. 2. 56) and of the words q&n and 35* *a youth'. Thus §rfit * a fe-
male \ fifFft * a male \ qH?l<t{l * a female spear bearer \ ni^^ q ft ' enriching ;
H^ft or n^jft • a young woman '.
*inraqi « m*p*r* otcro* 11
16. The affix ;^ is employed, in denoting the
feminine, after a Nominal-stem ending in < ^ > (IV. 1. 105).
Thus iTF$+^«»TF$+t (VI. 4. i48)-ni*+t (VI. 4. iso)-ntff 'a
female descendant of Garga * ; so also qntf II
Y&rt : — This rule applies when the affix zp^ denotes a descendant,
and not otherwise. Therefore f will not be applied to form the feminine of
\qi of tffr+in? (IV. 3. 10). Its feminine will be V^r • living on or /elating to
an island \
The separation of this sfttra from the last, (for the affix t^ could well
have been included in the same), is for the sake of the subsequent aphorisms;
in which the anuvfitti of *f>x only runs and not of others.
siraf fk wfsici: i) t« n u^iPl 11 xrr^f, *?r., df^c<i: y ( t*p f^nif ) II
17. In the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians,
the affix ' shpha ' is employed after what ends with the affix
' yaft ', and it is to be regarded as a Taddhita affix.
Of this affix *ff the letter ^ is indicatory (I. 3. 6), and shows that the
words formed by this affix will take ' nish ' (IV. 1. 41). The feminine nature
is here manifested by these two affixes jointly, viz by • shpha ' and ~* hish *.
The object of saying that ' shpha ' is to be regarded as a taddhita affix, is that
the word so formed may get the designation of pr&tipadika (I. 2. 46). The
affix q? is replaced by the substitute WW (VII. 1. 2> Thus «Tn4+*ff+*t\
-Tmfaoft; so also qregrerft il This being an optional rule, we have in the
alternative, urtf and qrsft H
The word wn u every where ", of the next sfltra is to be read into
this, by a process inverse to that of anuvfitti, in order to prohibit the applica-
Digitized by
Google
-Bk.IV.Ch.-LS. 19] ***• 6l ?
tion of those rules even which would otherwise debar this. Thus IV. I. 7$
says : — 'the affix ««n* comes after •n**!' M Here HM<V ends in *w, and by IV. I.
16, the word grr re r would have taken the affix hip: IV. 1. 75 debarred this.
But according to Eastern Grammarians, here also the affix * shpha' will be
added. Thus nn*uq«fl II
*ht g ftfediK^d^ yr: nun *ruft n *Hfc* f <aifildift *d^iw,
("to: Rj^n^K )
18. The affix * shpha* is invariably added in the
feminine after the words beginning with ' lohita * and ending
with 'kata', when they take the affix yan.
The words Hrf^cf &c are a subdivision of GargAdi class ( IV. 1. 105 >
The present sOtra makes the application of the affix *ff, compulsory while
it was optional in the last The word sct refers to the independent pr&tipadi-
ka 5uT in the said subdivision, which follows immediately after the word *jftr,
and not to the word 3^%S< f of the same class, where the word *r*T ls not an
independent full nominal-stem but a member only. Thus mffeqnrft , frfftTOTO'ft
Kdrikd ^|M %}<h& $ * 4iW44H f*^ I
l^tw ^^rnft vhivb m TOtircn ii
For the purposes of the application of «ff and sj^r, the word TO<f
which is enumerated in the Gagap&tha after the word qpq ( See IV. 1. 105 )
should be regarded as if it stood immediately before q^ and after «KW n
Thus we have mchc^4m«fl ( with ** \ and Vfi&fr with *r$ f meaning m^y^nm
BFTP 'the pupils of S&kalya'.
*hk«<4Jl|U£<hlV44Nl II \*JH M^lft II M?t<^4-«l«i*IVIIHj % (fewfuh) II
?f%T5 n &i<w\ *ci°^<*f ffiro wf feqt «v irerat wfa u
19. The affix 'shpha* is added, in the feminine,
after the words *&X*&t and 4j|<i£<h I
The word £\ K m is formed by adding the affix *n to the base ^$ (IV.
I. 151); this word, ending in «?, would have formed its feminine by *jv (IV. I.
4), but for the present stitra. So also by IV. 1. 1 19, the word q|°f3? is formed
by «r*f added to ir^f; and the feminine of m&i?dOka would have been formed
by nip ( IV. 1. 15 ), but for the present aphorism, which supersedes that affix;
Thus ^r^inpit, m°$fii*fl m
How do you expain the form 4rn?ft in the phrase ^rcft^FTf ?
Digitized by
Google
618 *H M [ Bk. IV. CH. t. §. 2f
We explain it by saying that ^MV is not the feminine of srk^I; but of
qlfor, formed by adding %rir to 3P5 by sfttra IV. 3. 12a
Vdrt: — The word srmft should be enumerated along with kauravya
and man^fikya. Thus STTg^RT^ M The word * Mi^fi is formed by the affix f*^
added to the word BT*nc ; the word 'asuri' would, therefore, have taken the affix
*qpir in forming the further derivative (IV. 2. 112). But according to the opinion
of Patanjali, the word, asuri' should form its further derivative (called also
Vrfq^T) by taking the affix BT (IV. 2. 1 14). Thus *TT*|<fcf: ST^T (fa ifr^ M
^rcrfsr sncrfr 11 Ro n q^ift n *wfa, sraft, ( f^wr #nj )
20. The affix '^ni* is employed, in the feminine,
after a Nominal-stem ending in 3T and denoting early age.
The word TO: means the condition 6( the body as dependent upon
tims; such as, youth, old age &c. Words expressive of early age form their
feminine by f, though ending in a? II Thus, jmrifr 'a girl'. Rfitffa 'a young
girl' *£ft «a she-kid'.
Why do we say denoting 'early age?' Observe toRrt 'an old woman';
spCT 'an old woman*. Why do we say ending in *T? Observe ftjy, which is both
masculine and feminine.
Vdrt : — The sfltra should have been iroft TOI% 'words expressive'of
not old age' ? Thus qnjft 'a young woman', (MiyH 'a young woman'. These
words denote the second stage of life, and not the first, i. e. they denote women
who have attained their maturity. .
How do you explain the form qjs^r *a girl? This is an exception, and
Panini himself uses the word 'kanya' showing that it is a valid form; as In
sfltra IV. 1. 116.
The words like 4-dWWU 'an infant girl that does not know how to lie
down properly' fTif^HmfHl 'a female infant whose feet are still tender and red'
do not directly, but metaphorically, express age, and hence are not governed
by this rule. ./—
?f^P ii fi^Vi^iiyir^^R^Hfy^r^^^w^rfS H
21. The affix l ^x^ comes in the feminine after a
Nominal-stem ending in short st, which is a 'Dvigu* compound.
Thus ?w*$t 9 HW^\ 11 But we find Pnrar 'the three myrobalans', because
this is one of the words spoken of as '^ni &c' (IV. 1. 4).
Digitized by
Google
I
fe^r-mifod-^+^vi : , *, zfea-^s, ( ^n^flcft: ) it
22. The affix jsfpiJs not employed, when a Taddhita
affix is elided, after a Dvigu compound ending in a word not
denoting a mass or measure ; or in 'bista', 'Achita*; and
'kambalya'.
This debars 'hip 1 which otherwise would have presented itself by
virtue of the last s&tra. The words f^T: 'a weight of gold equal to 80 Rakti-
kas', Bnr^TcT^ 'a measure of 10 cart-loads or 80,000 totals'; and SF*^ 'a mea-
sure', all denote measure; and are the only words expressing measure to
which this rule applies. The word <rft*fpr means 'measure', as distinguished
from ^OT *a Numeral', See V. 1. 19, &c.
Thus qvMiK g is a Dvigu compound, meaning 'purchased for five horses.'
Here the Taddhita affix anw (V. 1. 37) giving the sense of 'purchased with*
has been elided by V. 1. 28. This compound does not end in a word denoting
parimana techincally so called or a measure. The feminine of this word will not
be formed by iftn but by zt% 9 thus, ^^TOf 4 a female purchased for five horses'.
The words denoting 'time' or 'number* are not words denoting 'mea-
sure' as understood in this sfitra by the word 'parimana'. Thus, ff^qf, 'a two
years old female jchild', fitfqf 'a three years old female child* (V. 2. 37 Vart.)
So also fi^rar 'a female purchased for two hundreds', similarly ftrcrr M So
also with the words r^tff &c. As fofire n 'purchased for two bistas', ftfrair,
dtf^nrr, dMiftdi, fH*4«ir, and fli*«i«u, &c
Why do we say 'not ending in a word denoting a Parimana or a
'measured Observe Siroft, j^roft * a female purchased for two or three
adhaka". Here adhaka means a measure equal to 7 lb. 1 1 oz. avoir.
Why do we say 'when a Taddhita affix is elided ' ? In 'Samahara
Dvigu' compounds, the affix 'hip' will apply. Thus q^^mft 'an aggregate of
five horses', so also TOPtft I
*hi^i-cUdi &% 11 *3 11 **&& 11 ^p^-«Fcrrac §&, ( ficnt: afed^fa
^t?5f )||
23. The affix #^ is not employed after an adjectival
Dvigu compound, ending in the word l *si*g\ where the Tad-
dhita affix is elided, when the compound means a field.
3
Digitized by
Google
620 tfv II [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. § 2$.
Thus ft3>PCT *hpffr& ' a division of a field of the measure of. two k&Q-
£as.' Here, the word ft5?T*g is a Dvigu compound ending in 4 kan£a'; the
Taddhita affixes denoting measure enjoind by V. 2. 37, have been elided by
the vdrtika < sprp*f 3f ftfttfSfapr given under the same stitra. The feminine,
therefore, of this word will not be formed by 'hip' but by ejv; so also Pwn
The term 'kaij^a' is a word expressive of non-measure.; and, therefore,
the prohibition contained in the last sfltra applies to it ; the present sfttra is
made to regulate this prohibition. That is to say, the prohibition contained in
the last s&tra is not universally applicable in the case of Dvigo compounds
ending in 'kaij^a'; it applies to cases where the compound refers to superfici-
al land measure. Therefore we have, ftcfireft **$: 'a rope two kaij^as long •;.
Rch^j) 1^5: 'a rope three kagflas long'.
^V4lcMH|ul^4d<^lH II V* « <1^tA II JWcfc SWI^, *r*4<H«IH,
( fg*fc dfed^fa*^ ) » » *
24. The affix € ^nj is not optionally employed
after a Dvigu compound, where the Taddhita affix is elided,
when the compound ends in the word 'purusha', referring to
measure.
Thus f$$PCT or ffcffifl <rifeiT 'a mote two purusha wide' so also Prj^t
or BiuwC &c The present sfltra ordains an option where IV. 1. 22 would have
made the prohibition universal. Why do we say 'when referring to measure'?
Observe ftj^TT *a female purchased in exchange for two males; No option
is allowed here. Where the Taddhita affix is not elided, the present rule does
not apply. Therefore in Samahara Dvigu we have ftg^ or Prj^ft 11
«a£feva<a ^ 11 % 11 <r?rft 11 «5*ft!fc aram s?r* ( %*rf ) 11
25. The affix, '^^ is employed, in the feminine, after
a Bahuvrihi compound ending in the word Mhas an udder*.
Thus the Bahuvrihi compound of f^ 'a bowl' and 3re*r will be,$*3t-
*flj; then the final of ftdhas is replaced by the substitute «PR^(V. 4. 131) ;
thus we have as^fte* ; which would have been liable to the rules IV. I. 12, 13.
ante; the present sOtra enjoins ^^ instead. Thus 3**ftwft (VI. 4. 134) 'a
woman with full bosom 9 ; q?p*ft ' a cow with udders like jars'.
Why do we say • after a BahOvrihi compound' ? Observe UlHT aro-UT-
Unr: (II. 2. 4) which is a Tatpurusha compound.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. I. § *7. ) *H • 6 «
The Sfltra IV. I. 28 also is debarred in this case : for though the pen-
ultimate *? is elided by the VI. 4. 134, yet rule IV. I. 28 does not apply here
The substitution of «n for the final of 9^*^ takes place only then,
when the feminine nature is to be expressed and not otherwise. Therefore
in the masculine we have iffpiT s^W • the big-bosomed cloud '.
^rer ferof ) a
26. The affix #1, corner in the feminine, after a
Bahuvrihi compound ending in 'Adhas', beginning with a Nu-
meral or an Indeclinable.
This sfltra ordains 'nip 9 , where by the last sOtra there would have
been 'fttsh'. Thus #+3re*T+*T*^+^ ( V. 4. 131 )<-f$jft 'having two
udders ' ; so also 5^\ft 9 ' having three udders \ The above are Bahuvrihi com-
pounds beginning with a Numeral. Similarly *r*2^ ' many-uddercd . ; fk*5?ft
4 having no udders. 9
Why do we say ' beginning with * ? So that the rule may apply to
compounds like firf%>rr*ft and ftfrcttft, in which the words 'dvividha 9 and 4 tri-
vidha', though not SankhyA are words which begin with a SankhyA.
4i«&i<Hi<xiiti h Rvs 11 q^rfa a ^m-^FPF^rac, ^ f ( ferric tf**n
^5^ : ) «
*f*P II tiWtigAft 4tH*IM!HI<£l4M*im*<im fa*tf lr\% JP^T *!*fa «
mffai* ll *ni% *qfa *$*: II
27. The affix 3^ comes, in the feminine, after a
Bahuvrihi compound beginning with a Numcrel, and ending
with the words daman * a rope \ and hayana ' a year f . -
The word spf* was liable to be operated upon by three rules, by, IV.
I. 13 ordaining Yf^.by IV. I. 1 1 prohibiting totally the affixing of sft^and IV.
I. 28 ordaining hip optionally: the present sQtra ordains htp to the exclusion
of all those rules. As ffsnft * a (mare) bound by two ropes \ flc*nft M
Similarly $npr would have taken long srr by IV. I. 4, this ordains long
t M Thus RffPFft ■ two years (old girl) \ Pr^RPft; <*8«taft M
VArt : — The word ' h&yana ' must denote 'age', for the purposes of this
sfltra. Therefore we have no hip here ;— f^iq H I W5T ' a hall of two years ex-
istence '. So also ft?OTrr and ^ffgfcftr l» Moreover in these latter cases the 5f
is not changed into <* ; for when *njsr denotes ' age \ it is then only that the H
is changed into of and not otherwise.
Digitized by
Google
622 *H II [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. § 30
~Md<*qf ( qpffc ^? ) W
28. The affix 5^ optionally comes after that
Bahuvrihi compound, which ending in the syllable z^ loses
its penultimate bt I
Thus TOcnrat is a Bahuvrihi compound ending in wfc in applying fit p f
it loses is penultimate by VI. 4. 134 ( <Httlfls* f: there is elision of a? of v^l
when a bha affix follows). Thus IJJtr^ ' having many kings'. In the alterna-
tive, when ftlp is not added, we may add the affix <n^ by IV. 1. 13. Thus Wjf-
*nrr, 130%, *J*rar: ll Or we may apply the prohibition 'contained in IV. 1. 1 2
and have TOrar, *«<l*tIHt, ggilMH : II when the penultimate is not elided we
cannot apply the affix ^fr^ at all : in cases of such compounds there are
only two forms of the feminine noun as gqqf, gq?f» *friT* or mnf ffnWfc*
qmfm i II That is to say we apply IV. 1. 13 and 12 only; for in the case of jq^
&c. rule VI. 4. 137 prevents the elision of the penultimate sj ; (sf U4MllVH*tilri,
there is not elision'of the bt of ijh when it comes after a conjunct consonant
ending in * or n) H
PUJIH iH^lrf^i^i: II ^ II M^lft II f^RT, ^5T, %**<«•• ( ^W4MW-
29. The affix ^n^ necessarily comes in the Chhan-
das and in forming Names, after that Bahuvrihi compound
which ending in the syllable 3*^ loses its penultimate 3T R
This is an exception to the last rule ; for while that enjoined the op-
tional, the present enjoins the compulsory application of the affix ?*f* II Thus
5H<ft ' the city called Sur&jftt ' ; g rfjftrffi ' the city of AtirAjflf \ Similarly in
the Chhandas we have nt: M^q i tfl, ip^T#i fifcrtf ' a cow having five udders,
one udder, or two udders \ fpK^tiT tf*?R3\Sf II
^^M|l4^ VTFTO ^MNN<^Hl^l^l^dti^^A 3 w«llM II 30 || q^Tfa II
5^it: #r^ f^raf ) II ;,
$fa: 11 %TOif|»*: mftrfllra: d^nia^iM ftq* fferar *K ****** *roflr «
30. The affix ^^ necessarily com es in denoting
the feminine, after the following Nominal-stems when em-
ployed to express a Name or in the Chhandas :;— *fc^, *TTTO 9
HPT^r, to, 3n*> *ww, srr^r, ^r^y and Srrei M
\
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV.Ch. I. §32.) *t%* cn
The phrase s^Tt V5^1<Ti : of the last sfltra is understood here also. Thus
*%&<% in the Chhandas, as opposed to %qmr in the ordinary language, when
not denoting a Name ; so also qpreft and HlfH«hl ; ^nfWt' as frfTOT^ftfn-
^ and *rrnftur ; qrft and qvit ; md as iq|yu>$HM4l ftf*P% ; (Rigveda I. I.
13) and «rro; spmft irepft and OTHT 5 1l4foft and upEgfrf ; J}*i#^ (Rigveda
x - 8 5- 33) 3*JF*T ; wff and >**r II g*Tjp* takes *K also by IV. 1. 41, as
belonging to Gaur&di class Na 86t
* 31. The affix *?ni comes &fter the word ixfk in
the Chhandas, and in denoting a Name, except when the affix
3T^r (nominative plural) is added.
Thus *JT *pft fret, fPftnr- (3rd pi) ; (Rigveda X. 127. 1. I. 35. 1) but in
the nominative plural we Have tpra : » the regular plural of the word qft, as
in the sentence qraiT SHOT, instead of fjsar: II
Vdrt : — According to K&ty&yana, nip is not added, not only when we
apply the nominative plural termination ^tt ; but in all other terminations
beginning with ^w also. Thus uflf MJiRmt ; here in the accusative singular
case also the &t% is not employed
But how do you explain the form mm in the following f frftisAi-
*5F3«TP* top ; This • r&trya ' is the nominative plural of - r£trt * which is
formed by the feminine affix Mp ; and not by hish. The forms evolved by
adding -&% or ^t^ are one and the same, except with regard to accent ; that
formed by hish has ud&tta accent on the final : the other has it on the initial.
The word nftr is formed by the kpt affix fa* (Un. IV. 67), and therefore^
it is a word which is governed by IV. 1. 45 because it is a word falling in
Bahuvadi class, by virtue of the general subrule " a word ending with the
vowel f of a kpt affix, other than n^ belongs to Bahuvadi class ; some say
that every word ending in f , if it has not the force of the affix f%R^ belongs
to this class ". Therefore intakes ift% in forming the feminine.
^dfreqfdcidi^ II ^* 11 q^rfa II *wi4ct-m3««ci :, 3* ■
ff^r: 11 »t^ii<i < rf^ft^*TO^ s*K ** tow* n
32. The augment 3^ is added to the words ai*d&t
and qfcRrac, when the affix ;gftq is added to form the feminine.
This sAtra points out the base and teaches the addition of the aug-
ment *re^ 11 When this augment is added, (and it must be added at the end.
Digitized by
Google
624 *t*M [Bk IV Cil I. §. 3J
by sfltra I. 1.46), the forms become «rer$*i andqfin**; and these words
must take htp by virtue of IV. 1. 5, if not by this sOtra. Thus we have
vrer&t and qftra^t N This irregular formation of the feminine is employed
only then, when the sense of the words so formed is ' a pregnant female *
and € one whose husband is living ' respectively. Therefore we have not the
above forms in the following : — qvft **nr ^fiPRft *ptft ; here the word qfipttft
qualifies the word ^ftrft and has not the sense of ' having the husband living ',
therefore its formation is regular. Similarly when the sense is not of f a preg-
nant female ', the feminine will not be sreresfl ; in fact there will be no affix-
ing of *cj ( 1$^). Because 'TJ^ is added to words possessing certain attribute,
as described in V. 2. 94, while the word *T*tr^ has the sense of location,
and can never be in apposition with the sense of btrh M having "as required
by V. 2. 94. The word *TO^ would not therefore take <r^U It does so
irregularly by this sfltra. Thesis changed to* by VIII. 2. 9 in *ng^il
The change of ir to * in qfwj is however irregular.
The augment 59? is optionally added to these words in the Vedas :—
as tti*ci4cft or dN^r farj^ it qftmu) or qfifccft uvhhii tt
Mc^lf<ia<a*flft II W II W^ II qijl, 5T. f ^TOWFt, ( feprf ) II
33. The substitute ^ replaces the final f of qf^r
before the feminine affix ^r^, when the word so formed means
4 a wife, who takes part in the sacrifices of her husband \
Thus qfir ^rt" *F® M The feminine q£t means legitimate wife, she who
is entitled to take part in the sacrifices of her husband. The word q^rcrafr is
an Instrumental Tatpurusha compound and means * related through sacrifice"
i. e. who shares the fruits of and is entitled to participate in, the sacrifices of
her husband. But when the sense is not that of * wife', the feminine of qf?fr will
be ql% as uttoi M fdRq BTgntf * this Brahman! is the head or mistress of this
village'. If the word *&ft means 'the wife who takes part in the sacrifices of her
husband' , it cannot be applied to the wife of a Stidra, for a S&dra cannot per*
form a sacrifice, a fortiori not his wife ? The term <reft is, however, extended to
the wife of a Sftdra also, by analogy, as the marriage of a Sfldra also takes
place by offering sacrifice to Fire and making it a witness.
fe MiMiti^ ii;«ii q^rfa 11 fewtt, *P£t^r 0^3$:, %*t, *d<4«-
upara <n it
Digitized by
Google
B KJV. CH. 1. 5 37 ] *H" 6 *i
34. Iu forming the feminine with the affix <jft^ f qj is
optionally the substitute of the final f of qi$, when the latter
is preceded by another word.
The word w^% means when the word qtff is not an upasarjana, but
stands at the end of a compound. Thus fCTfih or JpJTTrft; tf^flft* or tfnroft N
This is an example or apr&pta-vibh&sh&. Because it is free from the limita-
tions of 'yajfla-sanyoga* of the last sutra. Why do we say when it is preceded
by another word ? Observe q fciRq Hl^ft «fPTC*T, 'this Brahman lady is the mis*
tress of the village. 9 Here the feminine is <n% and not q& M
35. In forming the feminine with the affix ^^ f the*
word qfo always takes the substitute % in the words like UjMfcft *
and the rest.
This enjoins the necessary and not optional substitution of «t for the
final f of qf?r, before the affix ^fr, in the cases of certain words. The word
'nitya' is used in the aphorism for the sake of precision. Thus CTOft, V^£k II
The compound of the following words with ^ft are governed by this rule:—
I OTPf 'equal* 2 q^ 'one*, 3 ffc 'hero', 4 ft^r 'a cake', 5 ^ •brother* 6 3* 'a son f t
and 7 *rer 'a slave' (this only in the Chhandas ). ^
^ct ^ d ft xl R \$ n TT^rf^ II ^ctfthdl :, ^T, ( feprf ^ )
ffrf : II JcWJ^^l fcl4lVhl<J44il TOf? ti% TOW II
36. In forming the feminine, the letter <fc is the
substitute of the final of the word 4^*3, when the affix s^tr is
added.
Thus jfTSTOft 'the wife of Pfttakratu'. This and the two succeeding
sutras, are in a way more intimately connected with IV. 1. 48, in asmuchas
the sense of the feminine words must be that of 'wife of f otherwise these
sutras will not apply. Thus if the meaning is not that of *wife of, the word
*<PE2: will be both masculine and feminine as well, meaning f sbe by whom
sacrifices fa«nr:) are sanctified (s$r) 9 .
ffrn 11 am^^i^Uitui*! qchi^<it *r*fir f%raf ^t* *r ram 11
37. In forming the feminine with the affix 3?^/
the letter $ having udatta accent is the substitute of the
finals of fmffi , snft, $r<to and $3tf II
Digitized by
Google
626 *t%n [ Bk. IV. Ch. 1. § 3$
The words fTOift and spdV? have udAtta accent on the middle vowel
(PhitSfl II. 19), the feminine of these has ud&tta, however, on the final.
The words 'agnf and the rest have the ud&tta on the final ( Phit sO I. 1 X
their substitute qr will necessarily be udAtta, by the rule of sthAnivat bh*va,
even if the present sfttra had not explicitly declared it to be so. Thus
ysn^?R& ( R«g Veda X. 86. 13 ) 'the wife of VrishakapP, *T*mft, (Rig Ved. I.
22. 12) the wife of 'Agni', srom* 'wife of Kusita', Jjftr^r* 'the wife of Kusidai.
The present rule only applies when the sense of the feminine word is that of
•wife of. Otherwise we have gqrerifr *sfr 'the women Vpshakapi 1 and not
^TOiTOft M For the accent of the word *pt, See VI. 1. 203.
38. In forming the feminine with the affix &r% ?ft
is optionally the substitute of the final of W«J, (as well as the
udatta ^) II
The phrases y and ^nr are understood. The force of ^r Is to make
the substitution optional Thus we have three forms, iftnft or »Rrflr or **:,
all meaning 'the wife of Manu. The word »g has udAtta accent on the first
vowel, as it is formed from h* by the affix * (Un I. 10), which by Ui> I. 9 >*
treated as having an indicatory % and affixes having indicatory ^ throw the
accent on the first syllable. (VI. I. 197)
a? f *r. ( *jt £iuG$wr ) h
39. The affix sefr* is optionally employed after a
Nominal-stem expressive of colour, ending in a gravely accent-
ed vowel, and having the letter ^ as its penultimate letter:
and the letter H is substituted in the room of ^ II
Thus of ipr •variegated 1 ; the feminine is qrlT or ipft Variegated', so *Srar
or &tt 'black*, ^ffor^ 'green'. All these words have udatta accent on
the first vowel either by Rule VI. 1. 197 ( MmiR»*fa * "word formed by
affixes having an indicatory » or * have ud&tta accent on the first vowel";:)
Digitized by
Google
Bk.IV.Ch. I. §40-] rfhtu 627
because these words are formed by the U?adi affixes *w ( Ug III. 86) and
f^[( HI. 93). or by the Phit sAtra II. 10 (^irrci WfilftqWMH "of words
expressive of colour and ending in tr*l , or fir or ft or q 9 the udAtta accent falls
, on the first vowel**).
Why do we say "expressive of color 1 ? Observe i^TT, TOTT N These
words are also acutely accented on the first syllable, by rule VI. 2. 49
(»r ffi<«i*cii : "the first word retains its natural accent in a compound of a
gati word with a word formed by the affix £/o"Jl But as these words do
not express color, their feminine does not take 6\p>
Why do we say "ending in a gravely accented vowel?" Observe *frn
'white.' Here though the word expresses 'color*, yet it has acute ( instead of
grave ) accent on the final ( by rule of Phit sutra I. 21 ^rr^RT *r "the words
ghpta &c have ud&tta on the final* 1 ).
Why do we say "having the letter ft as its penultimate letter** ? Other-
wise the affix riish will be employed in forming the feminine.
The words for the application of this rule must end in the letter *c in
the masculine. Otherwise this rule will not apply. As RlfdtfWft 'a black
Brahmapt woman'. Here ftjfir is a word expressive of color, It has a penul-
timate ff, has anud&tta accent on the final ( VI. 1. 197 ) as it is formed by the
affix rrfFJ, ; but as it does not end with a?, its feminine is not formed with ftfp.
Vdrt: — The affix fitp comes also after the word frojf? as f far$T - of
tawny color*.
Vdrt: — There is prohibition in the case of the words trftnr and qftaT;
as srf^rr 'black' and qf^rr •grey*. -
Vdrt : — According to some, the substitute jr^ replaces the final of
these two words smfcr and qf^r in the Vedic literature. As ttfozft (Rig Veda
IX. 73. 29); Mp.iift (R. Veda V. 2. 4). According to some authorities, these latter
forms are valid in literature other than the Vedic : — As itifr Mui^u i nfafo^Hi 1 ! II
g^ret vt *Jl a* 11 <T^ri5n srerert, ^K, ( MuiUa4 WML feraf ) H
\ 5f%: m s^farfaR: mft4fi«hi^^Mi^niftrat ^h^ ir^wt h*i% m
40. The affix 3-h[ is employed in the feminine after
every other word expressive of color and ending with an
anudatta accent.
, The word *r of IV. i. 38 does not govern this sAtra. The word trenf:
means in other cases than those governed by the last aphorism i. e. after words
which have not 3 as penultimate. The difference between hip and 6ish affixes
consists in accent, the former being gravely accented (III. I. 4) and the latter
acute. Thus srcjft, qf^mft, troft U
4
Digitized by
Google
628 *K M [BK. IV. Ch. I. §. 4«
When the word does not express color, this rule does not apply. As
^U *a bed-sted*.
When the word does not end with a gravely accented vowel, this will
not apply, as, $«*r, ^Rft^r II
41. The affix #r? is employed in forming the femi-
nine after words ending with affixes which have an indicatory
^and after the words *nr and the rest.
Thus by S&tra III. 1. 14S ( filfrlft «g0 the affix «j\ is added to a
root, to form noun of agency, denoting an artist The feminine of the words
so formed, will take riish. As, *fa& c an actress', writ ' a digger"; ni^ff * a
dyer*. So also the words §r &c ; as *ft#, *raft I The following is the list of
words belonging to Gaur&di class.
1 fo, 2 ir^f, 3 roq, 4 ^tjj, 5 ftjp* 6 **, 7 fm, 8 w?ot, 9 qgc*, 10 jr, II
$*rJ2ff<* I3#rn;i4?ft% 15 *r^r, (^HPf,) 16 <i*c, 17 3^, (*nro) 18 tnir-
FS^, 19*3*3, 20 ft**, 21 to, S2 qr^KT (*i%0 23 **ifc, 24 jnfift, 25 51^;
26 ftrcr**, 27 ^f 23 <UM>^ 29 *R-f 30 wr, 31 gtpr 32 bti8^ 33 fTJH,
34 qp** 35 vrrar, 36 anFFJ, 37 wwtT 38 fpn*, 39 STPSW (*mf*Fir), 40
togw, 41 ^5 ( *J2? ) 42 ^, 43 q^r, 44 5^ ( ^ ) 45 ^jr, 46 3?, 47 ?ftr, 48
qa*ff, 49 WTO* 50 3*3*, 51 Hrecfi, 52 *n*T, 53 H\W<h ; 54 ^r, 55 tpr ( f-
S ) 56 ST**, 57 3*9. 58 ijjf • 59 m, 60 ht, 61 fcf, 62 ^r, 63 ** , 64 H%
65 <w^, 6Q STCffr, 67 S HHjift, 68 I qqprs tM^r I 69 fo 70 ^, 71 ^RnVt
72 nwr, 73 ^nr, 74 rsnr, 75 s*ur, 76 ^ Hmrtfri ( flwgmfH ) 77 Ifcpr ( «ft
'mi) 78 qreff, 79 ST*^?r(*r*r**l?0 80 Stftfaf, 81 iftftft, 82 iJttfttJf, 83 qpf
84 ^r, 85 BTFPSf^T, 86 *mr%, 87 *nttf&T, 88 *rnw, 89 q&m, 90 wrnw. 91
sm*r, 92 5jtT, 93 *fcr, 94 %cT, 95 gnitT, 96 ^TcTT, 97 ^fasf, 98 qnPT, 99'qnPf
(to?) 100 miHW , 101 stPtskt*, 102 btPpkr 103 Brqfnr* ( mmguufl ) 104
imwUfrffi 105 %^r, 106 M^i^nmm 1 107 *r*** 108 ^r^, 109 if**, 110
ipm, 111 *TO 112 q*. 113 fr**, 114 *p*v 115 *$, 116 jf, 117 TO, 118
gf, 119 Bfhr(3rrl) 120 ff (15) 121 to*, 122 *tt^ ( w ) 123 3*n**, 124
5B^, 125 3^, 126 *&*, 127 ff^sr, 128 ?rgT, 129 <f»*HiM, 130 f$^, 181 f|^ f
132 ffPT, 133 ^>rf I 134 dr?tf to% 1 135 *fcnft ^% 1 136 fotf*, 137 f5t«c^
1383«cRH I 139 <h«|*ffipin*fl r I ftc^RlTTOV I 140 ftt<Ttft, 141 tft*R& ( jfontft )
142 «ram^, 143 *pft, 144 *tf, 145 *tf, 146 jftrft, 147 9*5, 14fi ^THf,
149 f^Tm9, 150 ginr, 151 g^, 152 ^ 153 ^jg^f. 154 «nfe^t, 155 <im,
156 H 157 Rpr^r, 158 *f, 159 ^T, 160 *&, 161 ci5nr it
^•A — The word ifrc though denoting color, is finally acute by virtue
of this sfttra ; the word if^ &c. being j£ti words having a penultimate n would
\
Digitized by
Google
o
Bk. IV. Ch. 1. 5 42. ] Awn 629
not have taken nip (IV. 1. 63) but for this sfltra; M* and ire* would have tak-
en *T^(IV. I. I3),qvi is formed by ^^ and would have taken ntp (IV. I. 15)
f*H%ssrar -ipr»ft 'a balance, a probe', irfril would take din also by IV. 1. 73.
Similarly it may be shown why the several words have been included in this
list By the vartika qmi fk* given under IV. 2. 36, the affix w*f in TOfTf? i*
treated as having an indicatory qr M The word inTPT? will take ^V* because
it is fan ; its inclusion in the list of Gaur&di indicates that the rule of ^H[
application, because a word is fir?£ is not universal ( viftni: ft^8ffl% ^K) II
Therefore we have forms like tjgt &c.
^rs 11 4iMiifR» n q^rro^: mf^rft*^ fnrrro i*nf****rs «pito*5* #r* iwft *r*firii
42. The affix ^r? is employed after the eleven
words 'janapada' &c..in the sense of 'profession* &c. respec-
tively; i. e. after the words 1. *tM<44 2. 3^, 3. tout, 4. war 5.
^irar, 6. rft, 7. <5T&t 8. sn^i 9. g^r, 10. 5>rgqFr f and s**rc:; the affix
^r^ is employed when the sense is that of 1. 'profession or liv-
ing* 2. 'a bowl', 3. 'a sack or vessel for keeping grain', 4. 4 a na-
tural spot of ground 1 ; 5. 'a cooked food or rice-gruel', 6. 'stout*,
7. 'black-coloured', 8. 'blue-coloured other than cloth 1 , 9. 'a
plough-share*, 10. 'a libidinous female', 11. 'afellct or braid of
hair', respectively.
Thus ^nFflrer 'a profession*, otherwise *jprefr the difference being in
accent only. For this word is formed by adding the affix sr*^ to janapada,
by sOtra IV. I. 86, as it belongs to Utsadi class of words: in forming the
feminine the affix ift\ will be added in this latter case, thus throwing the
acute accent on the first syllable.
( 2 ) So also 5^ 'bowl-shaped vessel', otherwise $*?r f a name of
Durga\ (3) i!pft 'a sack' «re Ml^lfa RftF* *fowr otherwise fftnir, a particular name.
(4) Wft 'a place not prepared by artificial Improvement'; otherwise *q?sr as
WW?* qf0J5,f^T H ( S ) *fr3iT 'cooked', otherwise TOtr, ( 6 ) «mnr 'a stout wo-
man', otherwise *TPTT II The word 5fT«T when a guna-vachana word i. e. a word
expressive of quality, in the sense of 'stoutness', takes the affix /ifsh in the
feminine; otherwise Zf% when expressing general qualities. When it is a jati-
Digitized by
Google
03O it* M [ Bk. IV. Cfl. I. § 44-
vachana word it takes #j^ under all circumstances. (7) qsnft 'a black-coloured
female', otherwise *»rar 'cruel' (8) »{fcft *a blue-coloured animal or indigo 9 The
word troraTCT in the sutra is rather too wide, it should be confined to the two
senses above indicated i. e. when it applies to a plant called indigo or to
animals 9 . Such as qrenfr: , or %3frTrJT; or when it denotes appellative as
ifrft II In other cases we have sfrsr 'a blue-coloured cloth*. (9) gpft 'a
plough share', otherwise ^qf 4 a rope or a kind of grass' (10) *rj^l 'a libidinous
or lustful woman* cthetwise ^TJ^T 'a woman desirous of wealth*. (11) qraft 'a
fillet or braid of hair', otherwise g*ro 'mixed, -variegated'.
sfforrac mixiih n *\ n q^ifcr 11 sftarrac, hmih (jfewx «ft*) n
43. The affix ^k is employed in the feminine
according to the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians, after
the word %xt*t I
Thus fffpft or *fr*TT ^rcr*r 'a red or bay mare*. By Phit Sutra II. 10
referred to already in IV. 1. 39 the udAtta in $r* falls on the first syllable,
and by IV. 1. 40 it would have taken ^* always ; but the present sfltra
makes a niyama rule and restricts the application of ^3 according to the
opinion of Eastern Grammarians only, and not of others.
qtft mJHTMIdl II «« II *T^!fa H STTi ^*, !T* *t^«U< (few! ^) II
ffrV' 11 ^TT^n^[ JiiMsfr^if 4«hrqv3i/i f%ro *i ^1^ n^srat mfii 11
^T* II <stw«4^ih^l«j(Wl*?t *R**Sp 11
44. The affix sfpr is optionally employed in the
feminine after a word ending in short t, and being expressive
of a quality.
The word jjun^: means what expresses quality: i. e. "words not
being words formed by primitive or secondary affixes, or other words entitled
to the name of saqkhya or sarvan Avian, or jAti % or compound words, pro-
vided they are words denoting qualities and capable of being used as adjec-
tives qualifying substantives as the word $$ is, not as the word J5?T,~which
though it expresses a quality, cannot be used as an adjective." (Guide to
Panini). Thus from qj 'dexterous', we have qgt or ^5: (without a feminine
affix); so fj: or jfr 'soft'. Why do we say 'ending in a short ^ ? Observe
JffafTO mwrft 'this Brahmana lady is pure'. Why do we say "expressive of a
quality?" Observe *n^: 'a mouse' (both masculine and feminine).
V&rt .-—After the word **| when expressive of a quality, the affix fttp
Is employed in the feminine; in order to make the first syllable acutely ac*
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. 1. 546] #Km 631
cented. As, i*Q 11 15 is formed by y (V9 I. 10) and is &dyud&tta because
the^risprmi
VArt:— Prohibition must be stated after the word *r& and words
though ending in short Y, have conjunct consonant as penultimate. As ircfti
OTgrtf * a Brahmagt who chooses her own husband \ Similarly qFJ is both
gender, as e^ is a conjunct consonant As qpjft* *T9Pft *
The word Guga ipr * quality ' has been thus defined :—
$frf U 13 !$41lft*q! mfinR<£**: f^rcf *i rt* TOOT **fir M
45. And the affix ^j% is optionally employed in
the feminine after the words *n| and the rest.
As *J: or *ft u The following are the words belonging to the Bahvl-
di class —
1 ww f 2 T3ft» 3 •T^^ft, 4 BljRr, 5 ^njPi f 6 {Rkfc, (fTctift), 7 oft?
ffcr, 8 jnft, 9 *ift, 10 nffir 11 nfa, 12 *nf*. 13 lift, 14 *jft, 15 *ft, 16
3fa, WW:m«*fnil 18 feftiiUHfiM : I 19 u4<flM^ ~ tqf R WV I 20 ^qr, 21 Mm*,
22 $<r* f 23 q>TO t 24 fotff, 25 fa&n*. 26 ft*rg* t 27 *f$if f 28 i*w. 29 ^5f-
*n«iH*TOTC (*W*l|«ll TOR) 30 9iFqn*, 31 ^r, 32 yn^t 33 9TTC, 34 ^^, 35 n?f f
36 g^, 37Prar, 38*Tff, 39 ^nr f 40 3* H mftfiHUflvuHL H %*1 43 «nr, 44 «w;
45 Of f^nf^H
The affix fclsh also comes optionally after words ending in short f
being the names of the limbs of animals ; as, ipvft: or vpFft 11 So also after
the vowel f of a kjit affix, not f^ (1 1 1. 3. 94), as crfir or tpft M Some say that
the feminine affix ntsh may come after any word ending in f, if it has not the
force of the affix fo^ 11 The word WW is a guga-word and would have option-
ally taken fifsh even by the last sfttra, its specification here is for the subse-
quent sfitra,by which it necessarily takes dish in the Chhandas. It is an Akritigaga
fftrs u 4gifV3 w**Ri Rh% Prctf fa*ri ^t% sjurai **% u
46. The affix -^ is always employed in the Vedic
literature, in forming the feminine of the words *r$ and the
rest.
Thus ijflj ft*sr vtft*K M Here Wfgt is the name of a herb.
The word fts* * always * is used in the aphorism, more for the sake of
the subsequent sfltra, which it governs than for this sfltra. For the word
Digitized by
Google
63* *t% * [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. § 48
'optionally* does not govern this, and the aphorism even without the word'
• nitya ■? would have been a necessary rule and not optional : for iMlwmHUiUq
Snr ii u^fa ft^r fe*if 5*1 Pthj ^t^qnpfr *nfllr 11
47. The affix 3ft* is always employed in the
Chhandas in forming the feminine, after the word 3 N
Thus ft*ft, *4t f w»«h q*4t *
But why not so in the case of tro]- ? Because it ends in long ^, while
fawft &c are feminine of ft* &c ending in short ? II In fact the word 79:
u after a word ending in short *" of Sfltra IV. 1. 44 governs this also. The
word 3*: is the ablative case of 3 irregularly formed by the substitution of
3^; this form beftig confined to sfttras only.
^rfrrani 11 sjnfrfacrnri ^rc **&*: ii
48. The feminine affix ^hr comes after a word
when it expresses the name of a wife in relation to her husband.
Relation (yoga) with a male (punsa) is called jspr II Thus the wife
of imr' an astrologer* is called iraraft, so also Tgranft 'the wife of a chief
minister \ wSt € the wife of a chief ; srefr &c Thus the word ir<TO means an
astrologer, a calculator or a mathematician ; and the wife of such a person
will be expressed by the word vmfit M But if a woman is herself an astrologer
&c f she will be called wmx (by *[%) &c Therefore when matrimonial rela-
tion is not denoted, this sfitra will not apply.
Why do we say 'in relation to a husband'? Observe ^^TT *H*W
1 two women of the names of Devadattt, and YajfiadattA, not wives of Deva-
datta and Yajftadatta. 9
Why do we say " uraff or a name " ? The word formed will 'be the
name of a woman whose husband is possessed of the quality denoted by the
word, and not that the woman possesses that quality. In the case of a'
woman, therefore, the word is merely a Name or a Designation, and has no
reference to the etymological meaning of the word. Moreover, the omission
of the word srnBJTqn would have made the sfltra ambiguous, for the phrase
$ 3t*TT* also means • an effect produced by union with a man ' such as pregnan-
cy. And words qfi^ST and snifter would have required f and not «if II
\
Digitized by VjOOQLC
BlC IV. Ch. I. § 4* ] fft% « 633
Vdrt : — Prohibition must be stated in die case of words like nfalfaW
and the rest Thus «TTTTfesT 4 the wife of a cow-herd \
Vdrt : — The affix ^t* comes after ^ in denoting the wife of Sfirya,
when she is a celestial being. As gift 'the celestial wife of the god Sflrya\
while q# will denote a human wife of Sflrya, such as, Kunti &c The affix
^Tl, makes the word acutely accented on the final : for the word qj| has acute
on the initial, and had tftst been only prohibited and no specific affix ordained,
then *r% would have applied, and it would have left the accent unchanged.
Hence a distinct affix nr^is ordained.
fix* s 11 rTfif^ns Jnf?mR5i^? few #fr^ nuwt *nfir 115^ ^pw 11
*T* II 3<HlfemiHl II *!"• W sTOWWnpwrf *f II
*r* tt wnr^ro^r^T 11 *r* 11 tm&nwimUi m
^T* II *|AW^^ft ft^ II
49. The augment a»«^K is added to the Proper
Nouns ^g[, ^jt, sra, 51^, 53C, and zgg, and to the words f^if
' snow ', srcwr ' a forest \ *m l barley ', *ra*T ' a Yavana ', m$&
1 a maternal uncle \ and sn^ri ' a preceptor \ before the fe-
minine affix ^T II
The present sfltra teaches two things, the addition of the augment
apffjc^ (btpO and secondly the feminine affix &% M Out of the above words,
in case of those about which matrimonial relation is desired to be expressed,
i. e. the Proper Nouns up to 3?, the present sfltra teaches only the addition of
the augment <Mij<j>, for in their case, the affix g\% would follow by force of the
preceding S&tra. In the case of the remaining words, it teaches both these
things.
Thus i^jvm * the wife of Indra ', TOtrft f the wife of Varuna V *TCFfr
• the wife of Bhava \ *ripft 'the wife of Sarva', 5*Pfr 'the wife of Rudra',
$4(iH ' the wife of Mfi£a *.
Vdrt: — Of the words f^r and 9TTO, there is the augment fn^pi. in
the sense of greatness. Thus ffHpft 4 a glacier, much snow', trcvqrtt 'a great
forest '. Otherwise these words are always Neuter and never take feminine.
Vdrt .-—After the word m •barley* the feminine affix and the aug-
ment are added in the sense of fault The fault consists in its imitating barley
Digitized by
Google
634 *K M [ Bk. IV. Ch. I.J5 50
while not being a barley. In fact the word denotes a new and inferior sort
of grain. Thus qftpft " a kind of grain, oat ".
VArt : — Alter the word Wf, the affix and the augment are added
in the sense of handwriting. Thus qrcpft 'the written character of the
Yavanas '.
VArt: — Of the words iffy* * a maternal uncle', and T^rara f a pre-
ceptor \ when the feminine affix comes to express the wife thereof, the
augment *n*P£ is optional. Thus IHftpft or HIH& * the wife of a maternal
uncle ' gqimrqpfl or 44im(ift f the wife of a preceptor ',
VArt ; — And there is not the change to the lingual * of the dental %
of the augment «n*gft (VIII. 4. 2) after the word «rpff4 W Thus mremM or
Sflranft ' the wife of a preceptor f .
VArt : — After the words «rtr and *trcq this rule applies optionally :
when the matiimonial relation is not intended but the word retains its own
sense. .Thus wfrtft or *raf ' the female of the Arya or VaishyA class', tftolrft
or cttot * a female of the Kshatriya class '. When matrimonial relation is to
be expressed, then only 3ft* is added. As *r8f ' the wife of a Vaishya', dftrft
•the wife of a Kshatriya 9 .
VArt: — In the Chhandas, the affix <tf^ with the augment *TTTjT is
added to the word nj& ; and the affix is treated as if it had an indicatory 5 N
The force of the indicatory 15 is to make the vowel preceding the affix, take
the acute accent (VI. 1. 193 fofir). Thus Ofn^l 3**5pft nfttfr 11 (Rig Veda
X. 102. 2).
*flduq><ui^U n ^o 11 q^Tft n sftaret , ^rcoHfgfa, (fem &i) n
50 The affix ^Ffr^ is employed in the feminine
after a compound word ending in *&et, the first member of the
compound being the name of the means wherewith the thing
is bought.
The word qflyr^fe , means that compound in which the $*CT or
•means' is the first member. Thus renffrcfl 'a female bought in exchange
for cloth' ; so also TO*f^fcft 'a female bought in exchange for dress 9 .
Why do we say "when the first member of the compound is the
name of the means" ? Observe ,jntftar 'well purchased', jRjfttrr 'ill-purchased';
But why is not the affix tfV^ employed in qrofrfr in the following verse:—
CT ffcrePFtftaff mfr^flfv i «i<faift 'she purchased in exchange of riches is more
dear to him than life'. Here the word sfttr has first taken the affix zi\ form*
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. I. §. 52 ] #t* 11 635
ing 9ftrr and then this feminine word is compounded with H* M The general
rule is «iP i *K^MMHH t $%: qrefmr«Ft *T$ *J5*Pfc "Gati, KArakas and
Upapadas are compounded with bases that end with Kpt-affixes, before a
case termination or a feminine affix has been added to the latter " The
word *H*Qdr is an exception, founded on the diversity allowed by q*$^tft ffflr
*S**(II. 1. 32).
fewr) H
51. The affix ^ft<* is employed after a compound
Nominal-stem in which a name denoting the means wherewith,
is the first member, and the second member is a word formed
by the Participle gr, when the sense is that of 'a small quantity'.
The word ^wi 5^ • preceded by a noun denoting the means where
with ', of the last sfltra governs this also. The participle in sr, must be pre-
ceded by a noun in the instrumental case, and the sense conveyed by *$, to the
action should give the sense of • little * f in connection therewith. The m*j|<KU w
*tn of the sdtra qualifies the whole word. Thus mtfqpTift ifc * a sky covered
slightly with clouds \ JjMRforfl qpft 'a dish slightly covered with soup'.
Why do we say when the sense is that of € little • ? Observe «M«UHfom
mwft " a Brahman! lady covered with sandal essence ?" '
^f%w 11 wdlif^igdH stfrrfrr: it w 11 qrftrqfoqrfrfprf Wfir m
IT* II *44tf*1*lU4il<* ^iftliiftft *«m*ll
52. The affix ^h? is employed in the feminine
after that Bahuvrihi compound, which ending with a word
formed by the affix ^7, has an acute accent on the last syllable.
The word ^m of the last aphorism governs this also. This sfltra
applies to those Bahuvrihi compounds in which the first member is a svAnga
word. But if the antecedent member is not a svdnga word, then the applica-
tion of the rule is optional. As qm PMfr € having a rent on the temporal
bone \ <M*ft»4t ' having a rent on the thigh '. «lt*cft<t>»ft CwaqwwtO f ^TOg^f M
By II. 2. 36 Vart MlRt^H^ rf^: <flT*PPI, the NishthA stands in the second
place, otherwise by II. 2. 36 it ought to have formed the first member of the
5
Digitized by.
.G oogle
636 - ¥t%* [ BK. I V. Ch. 1. 5 $3
compound The words qfcr &c are jAti words, and by VI. 2. 170, the acute is
on the final.
Why do we say u after a Bahuvrlhi compound ? " Observe TPprmwT
which is an Ablative Tatpurusha compound (II. 2. 38)." The compounding is
by II. 1. 32, and it has acute on the final by VI. 2. 144.
Ydrt: — Prohibition must be stated in the case of the participle unr
f born ', which is also acutely accented on the final Thus q^^Ml ' a female
who has cut her teeth ;' cqrorar ' a female whose breast has been developed'.
See II. 2. 36 V*rt
Vdrli — In the case of words qrffopfoft &c » the *& x is employed in
certain senses only. Thus qtf*P5#tft ' a wife '; ( «Tfirerfiftfr «^ff^Tf^n% ) ; but
Slf^Ml^ffl ' a woman whose hands have been taken, but not before the sacred
fire, a concubine &c v
V&rtx — Exception must be stated in the case of compounds, the ante-
cedent member of which is any one of the following words : — *j, «fiT, ?, words .
denoting time, $ps &c. Thus *ge*X % «*5crr, g$<rr, 'TOWerr, SPTOTOTOr, V^TOT
or^.^PTOT&c.
Bahuvrlhi compounds get acute accent on the final syllable when
they fall under the rules VI. 2. 170 and the following.
53. The affix ^t^is optionally employed in the
feminine after « Bahuvrlhi compound ending in ^j, having
acute accent on the final, the antecedent word not being a
word denoting a part of the body.
The words *MHH i MH anc * *WMi m govern this sfltra. This aphorism
lays down an option, where by the last aphorism, it would haye been compul-
sory. Thus OTjpFvj, is a word having acute accent on the final (VI. 2. 170),
but as the first portion of this Bahuvrlhi is not a Sv&nga word, but njdti
word, its feminine will be OTJprcft or tfrj^pqi H So also sui u £*tf$nft or TOPJ-
*rf3rcn and g^rftcft or gwfarr 11
Why do we say 'when the first member of the compoundis not a
svdnga word ' ? Observe j fcgPT^ft, s^f^ft which admit of only one form.
If the final is not acutely accented* the rule will not apply. As
q M*3*m and <KH*a~u which are not acutely accented on thg final (See VI.
\
-I
Digitized by
Google
Bk.IV.Ch. I. §.54 1 *K» 637
2. 170), because the first member is a word denoting dress or «tronPT» which
is- especially excepted from the scope of rule VI. 2. 17a
V&rt: — Diversely in the Chhandas and in Names. As H«*ftfrft or
54. And the feminine affix ^r« comes optionally
after what ends with the name of a part of the body, when
the word is a subordinate member in a compound, and has
not a conjunct for its penultimate letter (i. e. the final a? is
not preceded by a double consonant).
The Anuvritti of the words **pft>, MdWU^jM l fr does not extend
to this aphorism. But the anuvjritti of the word *r 'optionally* does extend
to this Sfitra. Thus <TO3<& or <ra$9T, gtf^fl or gtffr^ftn M The word nRr-
gTOT is*a Tatpurusha compound meaning *JM4Mr %*JFfc and ^r is upasarjana
by I. 2. 44.
Why do we say "what ends with the name of a part of the
body"? Observe Wfftrar *having much barley'. Why do we say "subordinate in a
compound'? Witness srftrar "without crest" (where the ftngr is not subor-
dinate or epithetical). Why do we say "not having a conjunct for its penulti-
mate letter"? Witness gipsr* WJTNT II
V&rt ; — This rule applies to a compound ending with the word vrjf, <TTf
and qp*$ though in all these, the penultimate is a double consonant Thus
$T#r or *r*jjT ; tpmft or gimrr, fH«u* u ^! or fci'Mwtr 11
The word win has a technical meaning as given in the following
verse : —
«t*i*w fcifk ^i%f ^n w^nnjira m
A word denoting a thing which not being a fluid, is capable of being
perceived by the senses because of its having a form, is svafiga ; it must exist
in a living being, but not produced by a change from the natural state ; or
though found elsewhere actually., had previously been known as existing in
pnly a living being, or is found to have actually the same relation to the being
it is in, as a similar thing has to a living -being.
Digitized by
Goojle
638 rh, m [ Bk. IV. Ch. 1.5. 56
^1% II *41HIWU* 3*gW M
55. And the feminine ^7^ comes optionally after
compounds ending with irrrH^T c & nose/ ^^ 'belly/ sffcj 'lip'
sraT 'leg', ^a 'a tooth', snfr 'ear', and 3^ 'horn'.
This is an exception to the last and the succeeding sfttra. Some of
the words above given are either such which have a conjunct penultimate
letter, and thus beyond the scope of IV. i. 54; or they are polysyllabic words
and thus covered by IV. I. 56. Though this rule is an exception to 54 and 56;
yet it is qualified by IV. 1. 57. Thus g^rn^CT or^jniRi^t, RfHUQ or fifHTW,
fWlfcft or Rr^TCT, tf q^ft or tfM«nm, Wf&ft or qm»dl, VlkWt or ^T^k4, tftV*^
or tftvr^JfT M
Ydrt : — So also after the word ys^ tail'. As q>Fqpmgi or ^eUPiyq ft H
Vdrt : — The affix hish comes necessarily and not optionally after
compounds of ^gr with 35*\» *fat fw and qrc 11 As, *M*y°*fl € a peahen
«rf*J^5T» ft^S^ft. 'a scorpion* and XRTSSl tt
V&rt : — So also the feminine affix hish is necessarily employed after
the words q^f and 3*35 when used as a simile or as objects of comparison. As
56. The feminine affix #pr does not come after
a Nominal-stem which denoting a part of the body, belongs to
the class srtct 'the flank &c, of a horse', nor when the word is
a stem of more than two syllables.
The class ^r? &c. is &kriti-gana, that is a class of words constituted
by usage. The following are some of the examples: — As q^rgrrateTi 9i?qn>r
5*r, ggygPTtem ^Mumm^ r , «hwmw<Mt y^pnyff, wimm q i r u So also *pror,
^rainr, &c. Of the case where the word is polysyllabic, the examples ar6
iJMMHI, <JJJMmi, H3TTOTST, H The word ?Fr5T is feminine itself, and in the Bahuvrt-
hi the feminine sign of the first member is elided by pungvad-bhflva, and hfNt
is shortened to %t* because it is an upasarjana (1. 2. 48)1
\
Digitized by
Google
Bk IV. Ch. I. J. 6a ] ^n 639
*tf^j*r ) 1
57. The affix ^fr* does not come in the feminine
after a Nominal-stem denoting a part of the body, when the word
is subordinate in a compound, preceded by the word h^ c with f f
^ 'not', or reqiiM c having'.
Thus sfesrr, «t%ot Rwn^w u So also qsfTfiteg f hhiRnj or ftipinf-
mT^TM The last example shows, that the present rule governs also IV. i. 55
ante: as well as IV. 1. 54
58. The feminine affix ^r^ is not employed after
snsr, and *pr, when (the word at the end of which they stand)
is a Name.
Thus ^T+'raT.-^WgT, SdrpanakhA the sister of RAvaga\ The w
is changed into <^by VIII. 4. 3 ( ^w^ ^ITOTO ) II So also **w, ifaysT?
*WJi<M &c - wh y do wc sa y 'when denoting a Name? Witness m*?pft
QF3T • a copper-faced damsel', or ^Rfjpsfr 'moon-faced*
59. The form q fofefhgt 'long-tongued' is irregul-
arly formed in the Chhandas.
The word $r$5n# is the feminine of frfrtfTff but as the latter has a
conjunct consonant for its penultimate, the feminine affix i^ would not have
applied to it by IV. 1. 54. The present aphorism enjoins #pr II Thus tffcfttf
in the sentence tf*ft#>^pif ^vS^ 1
The word *r 'and* in the aphorism is used in order to draw in the
word sfoT from the last, so that the word dtrgha-jthvt is always a Name.
Moreover by using the feminine form dlrgha-jihvt in the sOtra, it is indicated
that the application of #t* is necessary and not optional, as was the case in
the last sfitras.
gftp H ffr% tf waiiflHfohH ^, garft ^fir m
60. The feminine affix ^ comes after a Nominal
stem which is preceded by a word signifying direction. -
Digitized by
Google
640 *K • f BK - l v - Ch - *• §• 6 *
This aphorism over-rules all the rules and prohibitions contained in
sfltras 54 to 58. Whereever by those rules there would have been tfv, the
present enjoins *H instead. Though the form will be the same, the differ-
ence will be in the accent ; the affix #1* being anud&tta (III. 1.4). Thus
RTfyrff or 9T33OT, HI+«ilRn[> or g kifq<M , But not so in rog*«f;' or qT^StTT or
W«i«iM«H because these words do not take *t% (by IV. I. 56), therefore they
never give occasion to the application of *t* ll The sfitra ought to be read
as if it contained two rules (1) the affix ^v comes after a compound the
first member of which is a word denoting direction and the second is a sv&nga
word or is the word H l lQ^r &c. the penultimate not being a conjunct consonant,
(2) but ?t* is not added to Compounds ending in ^rr &c. or in a word
of more than two syllables. In other words the sAtra may be translated
"^ is the substitute of &\ when the first member is a word denoting direc-
tion". Therefore the affix ^t^ will come only there, where else the
affix #t* would have come and not otherwise. This is the reason why the
anuvptti of ^fr^is taken in the next sfttra (IV. 1. 61) and not that of tft* II
^nr* n \l h <*tift n *rs s ! ( ^K feprf ) n
jfa. 11 *i^iwurtfVM«^ftrar #K,iTRi^r *rcfir 11
61. The feminine affix ^ffrr comes after a Nominal-
stem ending with the word qivl
The anuvptti of &% is to be taken in this aphorism and not that of
rft*, though the latter was nearer. The word ^ is formed from the root ^
with the affix fa (III. 2. 64). The word ST^is never found alone, but as ends
of compounds, hence we apply the rule of tadanta, and have translated it by
saying a "word ending in vAh." Thus ftttft^l 'sustaining the demon.' This
form is thus evolved :— ff^+^+^-f^ + ^+arni + sft^ (VI. 4. 132 *Tf ^»
Uth is the samprasarana of vAh, when this is a ^/wrJ-ftm+^+^v (VI. 1.
108) (mqumiq ' after a samprasarana if a vowel follow, the form of the prior
is the single substitute*), =ft*3r# (VI. I. 89 ip^tHWJ 'vp'ddhi is the single
substitute when eti, edhati or d\h follow'). Similarly irer# 'a young heifer train-
ing for the plough. 9
*fxr. 11 ^reft *fftpft f^rahn^r tfta*& *nsraf Pimd& ii
62. Thq forms ^psft and ?nd»4t are irregular forms
ending in ^fhr found in secular (or vernacular as opposed ta
(Vedic) Sanskrit.
Thus ^ftq^WTiPft, and mOT* ftrcro^>J*ftptft II Why do we say
Digitized by
Google
bk. iv, ch. i. §. 64 j . #r*n 641
in vernacular Sanskrit ? Observe H^IT ^nrrftf^r and •TftpgPW irrt ftr^O*!-
Sometimes we find these forms in the Vedas also, though rarely, as
*\\%w£\ fa^iK^nwK 11 $* n q^r n sntr., ^^flfiwim, *rata-
63. The feminine affix ^? comes after a word
denoting a jati or specfes when it does not express in its
original meaning a feminine, and which moreover has not
the letter ^ for its penultimate.
The word snfi* was defined under Sfitra I. 2. 52. Thus 3*3*} 'a hen';
q^rffr 'a she-hog*, OT€F>ft 'BrAhmanP; y^tft 'a woman of the Sddra caste*, ffnrrarft
'a woman of Nadayana class', ^nppft 'a ChArAyanf, srft 'a woman of Brahmans
who read the Ka{ha', irpft 'a woman of the class of Brahmans who read the
Rig Veda*. % '
1* Why do we say "expressive of a j4ti"? Observe wns\ 'shaven' (where
the word expresses not a jati but a quality). Why do we say "not invariably
feminine'? Witness fftftiT 'a fly' (supposed to breed without a male). Why
do we say "not having the letter a for its penultimate ?" Witness rfro 'a
female of the Kshatriya class 9 .
VArt\ — In excluding words that have the letter ^ as penulti-
mate, there is not involved th* exclusion of the following words which have
a penultimate %) viz, «rro 'the Bos Gaveans', fn ' horse \ j^m € a sort of ani-
mal \ H^q ' a fish ', and ***** ' a man \ Thus intf, f$, **pft, (VI. 4. 1 50 t<rorfir-
Hf* ' there is elision of the 9 of a taddhita affix coming after a consonant
when long f follows ') i^ft II The a of matsya is elided by the v&rtika 'TO***
^mC N See also VI. 4. 149. All these words are also included in the class vhttf^
(IV. 1. 41.) and would have taken tfV* independently of this v&rtika.
Another definition of j&ti is : —
*TCT$ft*Tf *JT# *rf *UT$ StfTOT firj: M (See translation under I. 2. 52)
Digitized by
Google
6+2 *t^M [ Bk. IV. Ch I. J. 66
64. And the feminine affix 5jS^ comes after the
Nominal-stem expressive of j&ti, followed by the following, qre
'cooked', v^ 'ear', vfr 'leaf', yq c flower \ *K& 'fruit', qjgf
1 root *, and ^ra € youth \
Here the affix applies to words which in their original sense denoted
females and therefore were not provided by the last sfitra. Thus 4U«Hl^fl
TO^ft, tirarflf, TOj«ft, wfl*h& *$*#, and *mrfk N
When, however the affix ^^ is not intended to be applied to com-
pounds ending with to, tot, and £<*, then those compouds will fall under
Aj&di class (IV. 1. 4) ; such as tnftT, TOTOT, «wir, «T^pr &c
^it H4**mi3 : 11 ^ n q^n% n ten, *g*T-3n&: f ( %*rf 4PJ
$*X: II WU^lCUI^fHl^^^lfitqiftH : fan? yKTO* W% «
65. The feminine affix ^te comes after a Nominalr
stem ending in short * denoting classes or races of men.
Thus sr^ft 'women of Avanti', j^ft 'women of KuntF, frifr «D4-
kshi\ Thur *rcfStr+s*^(lV. 1. 171) un**: 'men of Avanti'. In the fe-
minine this affix by IV. 1. 176 is elided. Proft "the female descendants of
Plaksha". Why do we say "ending in short f" ? Witness ft^ 'Vaishya', q^
'Darat'. Why do we say "of men" ? Witness Rff*rffc 'partridge*. Though
the anuvptti of the word urm could have been read into this aphorism from
IV. 1, 63, its repetition here indicates that &^ is to be applied even when
the penultimate letter is * Thus «rfc*rft II
Vdrt : — This rule applies to words ending in the taddhita affix nj (IV.
2. 80 ) though they do not denote a jati Thus *fcppft> $Hfti » ft U The,
affix ffr here referred to is the quadruply significant affix taught in IV. 2. 80
and ordained to come after *^MH &c, and does not denote a j&tt.
$Pt: 11 ^HiHi^sm^uRMiPH* MiRmR^hidL fawUKTOPft *wt% 11
qyfWui »wftMfi i «iK*wfri i ffira ****** M
66. After a Nominal-stem ending in short 5f f not
having the letter ^ as its penultimate letter, and being ex-
pressive of races of men, the affix in the feminine is 3^F.
The anuvyitti of the words irj^i^n^ and arotTCT* should be read into
the sfttra to complete it Thus 3*5:: *a female of the country of the Kurus f
*OT^: "a Brahmani of the class of the fallen Brahmans sq called", sfaflF^:
"a woman of the Jlvabandhu class",
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. I. § 68. ] *f « 643^
Thus jtf + •*-&*«*: IV. 1. 172, and this affix is elided by IV. 1. 176
in the feminine.
The indicatory letter f in 9^ is to distinguish this affix in Sfitras like
*T^>iT*ft* (VI. 1 175X for had the affix been enunciated merely as 1;, then the
Sfltra VI. 1. 17J would have run as % %in#fr: and the sense would have been
ambiguous, for we could net have known what affix was particularly
meant there.
The long a? is taught to debar the affix q*^, for a short * would have
also given the form qps ( *J$ + ¥=5*50 M The long i* therefore, indicates that
the affix *jv , enjoined by V. 4 i $4, in Bahuvrfhis, will not apply in the feminine
forms HSN» *?; and the like, by the rule of vipratishedha.
Why do we say "not having the letter ^ as its penultimate" ? Wit-
ness H*q ^fllfl <ift 'a woman of the class of Brahmanas versed in the Yajur
Veda'.
Vdrti — The affix *j^. comes under similar conditions after words
denoting non-animate j&ti, except the words rnr &c Thus smi£: 'the bottle-
gourd' ; ^fc^: 'the jujube tree.' Why do we say "non-animate'? Witness
73ftTOi: • a kind of lizard.' Why do we say "except the word rajju &C*
Witness C5J : Vope' ; JJ: f cheek' &c
67. The feminine affix 3^ comes in denoting a
Name, after a Nominal-stem ending with the word *TJ M
Thus Hfr mf> , Bhadrab4hfi'; Jirewri* &c Why do we say in "ex-
pressing a Name"? Observe $*T*TU 'a woman having rounded hand * which
is an attributive word. In other words, when the compound is a name, *TJ takes
long 3* in the feminine.
?fH: 11 *nmn*ftw5^*wwt *w% n
68. The feminine affix 3^F comes after the word
qg 'lame*.
As t^ • a female lame 1 .
VArt\ — The feminine affix Sfl^is added to V^c, and thereby there Is'
elision of the letter * and of the letter •? of the worti. As H*\ 'mother-in*
law* This debars the puhyoga tft^of IV. L 48.
6
Digitized by
Google
644 Wf » [ BK. I V. CH. L 5 72
69. The feminine affix 3K5F comes after a stem end*
ing in g^ when comparison with something (expressed by the
first term) is meant.
Thus q»qdim*4te 'a female with thighs like plantain-stem', ffpf
Hltfl^ t 'a female with thighs like the nose of an elephant'; iM>fni; *a female
with thighs like the ulnar or tapering fleshy side of the hand \
Why do we say "when expressing an object of comparison"? Wit-
ness i^re oft ' a woman with round thighs'. The word grcqro^ "thigh like
the proboscis ( 3ft) of an elephant ( qft<* )T is a poetic irregularity in the
following VV*FXl ** qfcgtftwfo »
*ftv 11 fcffcr tnr w* *pt fwmft: »iifft4fV*il<**iwii ftrarg^rewt ***fa »
^rfSre^ii sfararfrcf *nt tow* 11
70 The feminine affix 3^ comes in the Vedas after
the word 3W when the words ^fga 'accompanied or joined', she
4 a hoof, &qm c a mark/ and mit l handsome* precede it.
This aphorism applies, when no comparison is intended. As JufiH^t
'a female whose thighs are joined (e. g. from obesity).' qrcrc* 'whose thighs
are put together like the two hoofs on a cow's foot/ B^PTTC* 'whose thighs
are marked/ *\H\q r. ' with handsome thighs.*
Vdrt: — So also with the words o$9T and Qf. As Qitro*.* and sjre : |l
M»g«M|M<«jifctf»4fit B >S? B q^T^ B *>$, <MJU««4t:, g^1% B
71. The feminine affix g^jr comes in the Vedas after
the words *qr 'tawny/ and ctt^ 'a water pot.'
Thus 3TjW^ fJVflf ^T II HIW^H^^^ 5*** WIH M
Why do we say " in the Vedas." Witness **J : and qpp?$ •
For/ : — So also after the words mjRj, ^, ^5 and TO3T3 5 II Thus 3*355,
iffy: || 4ig<fiH u 43\lfc4l*3T ^RIRIJ fa*ft feraf5^«T«Wt «TOft I «T«QP^ vw\*
72. The feminine affix 3HF comes in denoting a
Iffame, after the word «$ and «*TOR5.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Cil I. ! 7* ] *M 645
This rule applies to other than Vedic forms. Thus «l : f a female
named KadrA wife of K&syapa', qprT$* 'Kama^alO*. Why do we say "in
denoting a Name'? Observe «£: 'the tawny color.* *pr»T$: 'a water-gourd.'
73. The feminine affix #Ht comes after the words
Vl]jjf*R and the rest, and that which ends with the affix *nr r
Thus jrTffT^ f a S4r*grava woman', qsrocft c a K&patava woman*. So
also after a word formed with the affix «nt (as ordained in S. 86, and 104 &c
of this chapter), as, \$t 'a female descendant of Bida'. *faf 'a female des-
cendant of Urva'. This sfltra applies to words expressing jAti or kind. In
other words, this aphorism debars the affix #rv of IV. 1. 63 &c where it
came Rafter j&ti-v&chaka words; but it does not debar that ^t^ which is
employed in describing the relation of wife, such as, the A^of IV. 1. 48.
The difference between *ft^ and ^% consists in accent only 9 the
resultant forms otherwise being the same. The words formed by &\ will
have uddtta accent on the first syllable ffamilfiflmn (VI. I. 197 a word end-
ing with an affix having an indicatory *ror ^has ud&tta accent on the first
syllable') : while the word formed by ^t% will have acute accent on the affix.
Thus lift • a female descendant of Bida', and W 'the wife of Baida'.
The following is a list of S&rhgarav&di class words: —
1 ISA*** 2 cti?*, 3 *i(*npn f 4 VT3!% 5>j, 6 nte* N These words are
formed by the affix ir^the first four being formed by the n^ of ( IV. 1. 83 )
from tins, *F1J, 3*35 and w^ ; the word ilhr* is formed from iiftr* by the
«T^of IV. 1. 114. This word is also included in GaurAdi class IV. 1. 41. 7
*PT»l5*, 8 mji^n, 9 *nft^I» 10 mft^q, II «mft%3 M These are formed by
l^(IV. 1. 123) except k4man$aleya which is formed by Vi^(IV. I. 135). 12
qimHH, 13 hU*ihh tt These are formed by <c^of IV. I. 101 and IV. 1. 9%
and denote castes or Gotra. 14 Vfi%U is also formed by 1^(1 V. 1. 123). 15 «ra
16 Vs are formed by s*^fIV. 1. 171). 17 qjj, 18 vftft are formed by f^ added
tonTT + H'to try', and qft+W+f*(Ui> IV. 1 17 *i W3»9 f*0 I9»TJ*TO*» for-
med by qw (IV. 1. 105)1 20 4rf7R is formed by ni» (IV. 3. 76). 21 mn», 22
^P¥IH, 23 ^?pt: are j4ti words. 24 *n*T** 25 infTOl W These take sfat when
denoting a Name. These words are formed by the affix qOT, and are conse-
quently «nr<t» and should have taken #r^ (IV. 1. 6). This ordains vh( ■
Q. The word iftir is formed by tf*^ and iftR is formed by f*l(IV. r.
95), both are &dyudd&tta owing to i» ( VI. 1. 197 ). When fg^is added, the
accent remains unchanged, for matup being yf\ is anud£tta (III. I. 4X There-
Digitized by VjOOQLC
646 rf*M [BK. IV. Cii. I. §. 74:
fore whether i^be added or &n to these words, it makes no difference in
the accent, for they remain adyudatta. Where is the necessity of including
these two words in this list.
Ans. To this we reply tffftsftHniftTOfa II For had these words
taken rft^of IV. I. 6, then the long f would have been optionally shortened
before the affixes q &c by VI. 3. 45. But by taking ^ the shortening is
compulsory (VI. 3. 43), and not optional. Because the ^ in the sAtra Tfimw
(VI. 3. 45) has the force of the word ffif, and means the *r# words formed
by adding f to 3ft?[ words, by enunciating the word ^fing are optionally
shortened. Therefore IV. 1. 6 where the word ^frr^ is used is governed by
this rule of optional shortening, and not the words formed by rffaj fl
26 f 27 m. The word $ would have taken ^hr by IV. 1. 5, and «f*
would have taken ^1 as it denotes, a jfttL These words take vfiddhi before
^t% the form being mQ in both cases.
*reasrr? II vw N *i%ift n w- f ^ R
SlNpTOIISTT***: 11
74. The feminine affix ^n^ corns after a stem
which is formed by the affix sa^ or **i^ R
The affix 3^ here denotes and includes both the affixes sq^(as taught
in S. 171 of this chapter) and «^ (See 78) as it is the common element of
both. Thus «n*TOir € a woman of the race of Ambashthya',^rrffr& 'a woman
of the race of Sauvtrya*, £to*»*TT 'a woman of the race of Kausalya'.
Similarly «*^ formed words, as, qRtftaTOr, qrafjr ; *raHOT »
Vdrt: — The affix ^j% comes in the feminine after a word ending with
the affix irn when the letter ^immediately precedes such yafi. As qnfatq 'a
female descendant of Sarkaraksha', MifiNimi 'a female descendant of PQtimi-
shya', ih^iT^r 'a female descendant of Gokasha'. These words belong to
Gargadi class (IV. I. 105), and by sfttra 16 would have taken ^t^H
"The ^of the affix <qT^. is for the sake of forming a common term *n\
with TT^and zt% ; and the ** regulates the accent making the final acute (VI.
I. 163). The word ftrartq is included in Krautfadi list (IV. 1. 80) and takes
the augment «jy in the feminine, and hence it would have taken ^i^by force
of the present sfltra and need not be included in the VArtika. There is no
Samprasaraga of the q when 3* or <tt* is added to this word ( VI. 1. 13 ), the
form being «fcRT*«(r$*: and not iftarttyr: II
*»<4*ii*i B v*$ n q^rfs? 11 airEisqrTq, **, (ferat *xi$ I
jfir: 11 «nror<i ftrat *fr*«rM* *roft 11
Digitized by
Google
felC. IV. Ch. I. § 78. ] Taddiiita-affixes. 647
75. And the feminine affix ^p^ comes after the
word screw n
The word im belongs to GargAdi class (IV. 1. 105) which after taking-
*w, would have taken <#* (IV. 1. 16). Thus btttot *a female descendant of
Ava{a'. But m M«uq »fl will be the proper form according to the Eastern
Grammarians. See aphorism IV. I. 17.
76. The Taddhita-affixes are treated of here after.
This is an adhikara or govering sfltra. Up to the end of the Fifth
Book, all the affixes that will be taught, are to be understood to have the
name of Taddhita. Thus the affix fir taught in the very next sOtra. As
gqftr: The word so formed is called Pratipadika. The word nfe<j|: is in the
plural number, and not exhibited in the singular, like the words to*: (III. 1.
1) &c; and it, therefore, indicates that it includes also affixes which are not
especially taught in this book. Such as ^fqv* *irift II «nnf| <n*T^firH^ u As
<?rf*W, *tPpc. BTiff*. <rf*nr U See VArt IV. 3. 23. The word Taddhita is used in
Sfttras like g*rfircra*fmP* I.. 2. 46.
g^ftd : II v*v* n q^r II ^r: f far
77. The feminine affix fr comes after the Nominal-
stem 33RC and this affix gets the name of Taddhita.
As 3^1%: * a young maid \ By IV. 1. 5, rf|v would have been other-
wise employed, the present sQtra debars it The word *v% ending in f does
not take the affix ^fr* of IV. 1. 65, for the affix fir itself is a feminine-making
affix though a Taddhita : or the word j^ may be regarded as a non-j&ti word
and hence IV. 1. 65 would not apply.
P)rfwiHtiii?w Wtftaifrrqfa ft9ra% 11 **nra*f > **wm\ Pnryffrpreqwm toto
78. In Patronymics used in a narrower sense
(counting first from the grand-child), which are formed with
the affixes zm^ and jst, the feminine is formed by substituting
Digitized by VjOOQLC
&»» «**i [ Bk. I V. Ch. I. § 79
* (*^) f° r *^ e * an d * of those affixes and adding the long
bit under IV. 1. 74; provided that they do not denote Rishi
clans, and have a prospdially long syllable preceding the last
syllable,
The wording of this aphorism requires a little analysis. It consists
of five* wordsj: (i) trfaifr 'of «r\and fn/ (2) vnrrffr ' of non-rishi • (3) 5c-
^ft'T'rtf* 'having a heavy vowel as upottama i. e. last but one/ (4) cqr ' the sub-
stitute is shyah' (5) «fr% • in denoting gotra.' That is to say, the gotra affixes
«T*^and f^are replaced by «*^ before the feminine affix *fr* f in those words
which denoting non-rishi gotras, have a heavy vowel as last but one. The
word uttama meaning last letter, being formed by the superlative affix tamap %
implies that the word must be of at least three syllables. Therefore, the pre-
sent sAtra does not apply to forms like trfiff &c
Of the substitute «*^ the letter q^and ^ are indicatory, the real affix
is q, the letter ^differentiating this affix from szp^and the letter ^affording a
common hold for both. In forming the feminine we shall have to add <?r? by
IV. 1. 74. Thus 3ifrrnfa? 'having the smell of dung-cake *, is the name of a
person. In forming a patronymic from this word, we add the affix i^ll
Thus srf!ta*if**+*r* (I V.i. 92) Replace this affix by «n and we have qirftavTOT II
^rj^T^vj: gives us ^t*3«TOr M Similarly with words taking the affix f*£ (as
taught in sfttra vnftR IV. 1. 75) : as ^raft*- gives us <mTOT, so also vrerar II
Why do we say 'of «|^ and fw' II Witness ettJptpii from qtCTPT II
Here the word qRHTPT belongs to ftwh ga?a, and therefore by IV. 1. 104, it
would take the affix «TR in forming gotra patronymic : this affix «n^ is not
replaced by «*^, and the feminine is by long f (IV. 1. 15) ; for though, its last
vowel but one is heavy, it is a non-rishi gotra word, yet it does not fulfil the
other condition of taking the affix «T^or fi^ll
Why do we say * of non-rishi gotras * ? Witness *n%tffr and V*rPpft II
Why do we say ' whose last vowel but one is heavy' ? Observe *Wrtfr and
OTf?ft H Why do we say « denoting Gotra ?* Witness wft^mfl ' born in Ahi-
chhatra \ qgFU^nfl ' born in Kanyakubja '.
jftr. n JnftiHift«?i 1 nrerem «rhnf»nT: granwp ^ft^ntf^yroyi q, wtr»ft%f%-
79. After a word denoting a non-principal gotra,
**% is the substitute of sn^and r»»in the feminine, even though
the syllable preceding the final be not prosodially long.
Digitized by
Google
o —
Bk. IV. Ch. 1. 1 81 ] **f II 649
The phrase vrftqn of the last sAtra* governs this also, not so, however,
the word Wi^lmn : II The phrase «fNnm means insignificant or non-famous
gotras. i. e. names of kulas L e. SHnFtT, such as families like jf^Wf, ,JfPw, jQR
which are not famous and are not included in the gotra list Thus qlftw;
HTfaw and 3n3CHT II
The word «rora ln ^e sAtra has various significations, one sense being
' separate from ', another being 'part of, and 'individual members ' &c If
the last sense be taken, then we can evolve forms like ^*TOT unBJW H These
forms may also be explained by taking them as belonging to the £|<MM< class
of the next aphorism. In short, those who wish to apply this aphorism tor
9 the immediate descendant', such as c the son or daughter *, and not to a gotra
descendant, which means a grandson and down ; can also do so.
In fact the word «fnnm is equal to tjqiwTlq or hmmmmIi and b a
karmadh&raya sam&sa, namely gotras not enumerated in the roranc S These
are, however, technically called $tv II
jfrp 11 wtfa* ffinwrf^iw feqf «n^ irarat *nrRr i *i*jvft*iHi4 *nc*f * i •frf^nrfw 11
80. The affix «*r^ comes in the feminine after the
words tfnro and the rest.
This rule applies even where the syllable next to the final is not
heavy, and even where the word does not take the affix in( or f^ N In fact
«*T? is not a substitute here but an augment Thus ^toqr 'a female Krau^i"
HTTQT * a female LAfli '. The following is the list of Krau$Adi words :—
1 *&tfk> 2 rtRt, 3 €! ^nr» 4 *rrft*nfc, 5 *rnfaflr- These are formed by f^
(IV. 1. 95). 6<$nw,7 Wr(Vnw).8Ww(Wnr) 9 V^
These are formed by the affix up? II 10 3ttmfc This is formed by ny with
the substitute «T^np (IV. 1. 97) added to w*n^ II 11 {ui g qmm The word fpr
takes cif^ when denoting a grown-up maiden as jrcqp ; otherwise «nr • a
daughter \ formed V *r* t or gift by &\ denoting a jAti. 12 ifr* tfqftr M This
debars rtv of jAti as *t**ir:, otherwise t^r as ifr*p (iffcrnfir). 13 ifofc 14 *&ft,
15 ^rfisfh 16 *ftftfai» 17 w^ft, 18 trmrerfrt 19 wfirafo* 20 «tNr* (nretw) n
All these except the last are formed by f*j, the last is formed by 33 of Garg-
&di class.
fereflr gftferc% qrergfir muSfafai yfl, wm wim n *U q^r»
lfHr» 11 ^if<r jjhrjfir OTm^fa ^r^ftR* i«whi*whiwu«i$ roqt wfir ■
81. The affix **r^ optionally comes after the words
%^r%, sft^ffa, wwgftr and ^lAfiifa ■
Digitized by
Google
650 A Rule of Taddhita [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. $ 82
These words end in the affix |?T, and the word gotra is not undet stood
in the sfttra. In the case of gotra descendants, the substitute shyaft would
have come by IV. I. 78. but whereas by that sfttra it would have been com-
pulsory, the present aphorism makes it optional But if the sfttra be taken to
apply to ' immediate descendants ' as opposed to gotra descendants, then this
is a new rule altogether and not a rider to IV. 1. 87. In the alternative when
«*n^ is not added, ^tv will be added by rule IV. 1. 65 anU. Thus ^ronr or
%ra<fr, so also tnftftqr or fftf^fjMV, wmjp^ir or OTOTnft, «M U ^R{JI or <M u ^ft4t 11
hQi intf iro*w^fir^rc PraW% 11
82. The Taddhita affixes, on the alternative of
their being employed at all, come after the word that w
signified by the first of the words in construction in an
aphorism.
All the three words, viz. (1) *iptfat f of the words in construction'
(2)inpmi 'after the first; (3) *r f on the alternative \ exert a governing in-
fluence on the subsequent aphorisms, up to the aphorisms which leave to the
words their own denotation : that is to say, up to the end of the second
chapter of the fifth Book ; before the beginning of the sfttra linrf^rir firtfo*
(V. 3. 1). The present sfttra as a whole, of course, has no applicability to
the affixes which * leave to the words their own denotation (HTffai) ; for the
latter affixes are in many cases compulsory and not optional, as are the
affixes to be taught hereafter in Book Fourth and the first and second
chapters of Book Fifth.
These affixes will come after the word, that is signified by the first
of the words in construction, in an aphorism. Thus IV. I. 92 declares ireir-
qnwi * his son \ Here the first word is t&n • his \ therefore, the affixes forming
the patronymics will come after the word signified by • his • : i. e. after the
word in the genitive case. As < <TTnrCTt4'-»B?nra' 'the son of Upagu\ Here
the affix *T$ comes after the word *q*J which is the first word representing
•tasya* in the genitive casein the sentence gwrrsw H Similarly in the
s&tratpiTOi VFMl (IV. 2. 1) ; here the first word is *nr, therefore, the affix will
be added to the word in the instrumental case in a sentence representing the
word *pt ' by which ' ; as 3ranr* (t([W a 3RTO*< 'K&shftya is a cloth, coloured
Digitized by
Google
Bk.IV. Cil 1. 5. 83 J «*■- 651
by KashAyd. Similarly In sfltra *w HI: . there staying' (IV. 3- 53.)>*re the
first word is tpc, 'there', in the locative case, therefore the affix wUl be option-
ally added to the word in the locative case in a sentence, representing the
word tpc 'there 1 : as gfr **: - $te"who stays in Srughna '.
The word qmJHl* is the genitive plural ofQirf, and the force of
the genitive is that of specification or 'nirdh&raija': — i. e. 'among the words
in construction, the first is specifically pointed out as \htprakriti or base, to
which the affix is to be added'. Why do we say "among the words in con-
struction"? Witness qre* 44MHH«1 ^Tf^K* «thc blanket of Upagu ; the son
of Devadatta'. Here the two words ypffcysi are not in construction, for
smfr governs qro«*V and vtvk is governed by 'frfTOf II Why do we say
" after the first"? So that the affix may come after the first word 91% in
the genitive case, and not after *TTrii which is in the nominative case, Why
do we say M in the alternative"? Because the same idea may also be express-
ed by a sentence ; thus we may say 4qiUw4, instead of the Taddhita formed
word wm*: II The same idea may also be expressed by a compound word
(sam&sa) ; as 4q«*mn% 'the son of Upagu'. In fact, the sam&sa rule here
is not superseded by Taddhita-rule, as it otherwise would have been by 1. 4 2.
because the anuvptti of n»q< f wuq, is understood here: so that in the alter-
native when the Taddhita affix is not employed, the sam&sa rules will find
scope.
This sutra has been thus rendered by Dr. Bohtlingk : " when hence-
forth the meaning is specified in which an affix is to be added, then one
should know that the rule applies to the first of those words which are
associated with one another in sense, and that the affix is optional 19 .
83. The affix arqr should be understood to come
after whatever we shall teach hereafter upto the aphorism
tena dlvyati &c.
Up to aphorism IV. 4. 2, the affix n\ has a governing influence, except
where it is specifically superseded by any particular rule. This aphorism
may be looked upon either as an adhikftra sutra or a paribhAshA sutra or a
vidhi sutra. The application of this aphorism will be illustrated throughout
the next three chapters. Thus in IV. I. 92 ftfqrrtq* we read the present
aphorism and add the affix 9^ in the sense of 'his son'. As ijfa«i?: 'the son
of mp f ; 7n7f: 'the son of Kapa{u'.
This affix has various meanings, such as, a patronymic (IV. 1. Q2\
7
Digitized by VjOOQLC
6$i nya. [ bk. iv; ch. i. 5. 85
coloured with (IV. 2. i\ sidereal time (IV. 1. z\ revealed sAraa-veda (IV. i.
7), covered car (IV. 2. 10) &c
84. The affix ^m^ comes after the Nominal-stems
1 asvapati' &c, in the various mentioned senses taught anteced-
ently to tcna divj-ati &c.
This is an exception to the next aphorism, by which the affix °*
would have come after words ending with *pati! The present sfttra enjoins
*T^ instead. ThustrNraft+tPt-tTnTOPl (VIL 2 1 17 f|T>g>W*HHft € when a
Taddhita affix follows with an indicatory *^or <*, there is vpddhi in the room
of the first vowel among the vowels '). The f of qflt is elided by VI. 4. 148
qpift *r where long f follows, and when a Taddhita affix follows, there is eli-
sion of the f or {, or *r or wrr. of a bkct.)
The following is a list of words belonging to MN^Nuft class : —
9 ^Mfil, 10 vtiftf ( , nn<% ) 11 Ml*44l3, 12 v^Tjftr, 13 qpgqft, 14 tffaft, 15 *p*nft»
16 qiniqft, 17 %^|fir M
?fin 11 ftfii *rf*l% «nf^i fSrcNr 4Wt|<4^w mAsR^iWi^ui^i^r^i *** ***&
*lf%^ll*Rr^ J T*IW*ll ^Tf^iHII qi$**ftlfl3H<H tt^H^timiMI U
qifforauifara^n qrfSrarcu i for? g^flfr ii qrfSrcnui pnSrenr- ■ .
qiffawm aflmwlH^ » ^fW i» ^frc «ikmRu wwufr *g w
85. The affix <rcr comes, in the various, senses
taught hcre-in-after antecedently to tcna divyati &c, after the
Proper Names, Diti, Aditi, and Aditya; % and that which has
the word *lfk at its final member.
Thus Rm + ^-W • the son of Diti.* snftcQ: 'the descendant of Aditi',
BTTftWl' sacred to Aditya.* Similarly with words ending with qfil, as innqitt+
** - urarro ; so also Wren w
Tdrt : — So also after the word m ; as, W**L H
VJri:—ln the Chhandas, after the words *|^ t hGi and l^ftfl 11 As *T**Wl
(Vs, 13, 58.) ITmand^fTOUi
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. 1.5.3s! ■*«/ 6 *3
Krf/r;— The affixes h and**^ come after the word ^Prfttt Thus
tfMt + H-<nft*; sflri*+*rw-«nft*» The resulting forms are the same, but
the feminine of the former will be <nnm by IV. I. 4, and that of the latter
<nf$r* applying IV. I. 15.
VA rt .-—The affixes **J and «T^ come after the word ^r ' a god \ As
V*Pl or fai ' divine \
yjrt : _There is elision of the ft of wft^r, and there is the affix *^ % ;
as *fK+*R-*T*P 4 external \ Y&rt .—and the affix fc^ may be employed.
As*ffW+fcF$=*ftHi: •external'. (VII. 2. u8f^ft^, there is vpddhi of the
first vowel when the Taddhita affix has an indicatory *> VArt .-—In the
Chhandas it takes the affix fcff* as ^ff the difference being in the accent
(VI. i.i97>
The word *f|^ is an iron, and the above vArtika declares that its ft
portion is elided. This very fact indicates by implication, that the ft of other
Avyayas need not necessarily be elided before those affixes, before which the
base is called * bha. In fact the following vdrtika mmiUHim (the ft of
the avyaya base is elided) given under sfttra VI. 4. 144 (the ft of the base bha
is elided when a taddhita affix follows) is not a universal rule. Thus from
the aiyaya %^x\ we get ttftnit &c ; here the ft is not elided.
VArt ; — Of the word tqpFl the ft is replaced by bt as tpreira' II *
VArt: — The ft of fspf* is replaced by 5? in the plural when the patro-
nymic affixes follow ; as ^rur?. fttftPlP it Why do we say in the plural
number ? Witness gftfStffr , \\<+\\H- (IV. 1. 99).
V&rt : — When an affix beginning with a vowel presents itself after the
word ift, let the affix ip[ be substituted for it Thus what is descended (or
produced, &c) from nt is expressed by it«p* (VI. 1. 79). Why do we say
• beginning with a vowel * ? O vserve ftr*fr ft* or "PHf ■» TO^ and tipRPi M
VA rt : — These affixes oq &c, taught in this sfltra will come, to the
exclusion of all the other affixes hereinafter taught, which are employed in -
especial senses. Thus n^ is employed especially to denote a descendant But
after the words ftl¥r &c *T5 will not be employed, but oq, as fo a a descendant
of f%f$r *. So also *TWHl -0R*rtfar**J**0> *° *k e exclusion of IV. 2. 37 &c
In fact the rule frofi^fa <ri*sre^*(I. 4- 2) does not hold good here.
If that be so, how do you explain the form ^p 11 This word is not
directly formed from the word fat but from fcft, the feminine of the word '
Rfif t formed by the affix ^ (IV. 1. 45, the word tffi being formed by the Kpt
affix fa?* and therefore it will take rfht in the feminine). To the feminine
word ft* is added z* and we get %tfa: 11 The Paribh&shft Rlfinffoffi pr ftf
ftfiis^nft *$**> ( a ru * c of grammar which applies to a masculine applies also.
Digitized by
Google
654 *W I Bk - I v - Ch *• i 87
to the same word in the feminine) is not of universal application, as this very
illustration shows. Others consider the form Vfa as incorrect, as not to be
found either in the Mah&bhAshya or any V&rtika.
86. The affix 3^ comes after the word ^«r &c.
in the various senses taught antecedently to tena-divyati &c.
This debars the affix «i*r taught in IV. 1. 83 as well as the especial
* affixes here-in-after taught Thus ror+«f3;-*i$tap f «ftairo u The following
is the list of words belonging to TOrrff class.
9 W^f I 10 *«irarct I 11 jfirft, 12 ^l*, 13 qfa; U wrft, 15 pTR, 16 nq^jr, ,
17 SPTTJ, 18 iTOT, 19 *tf*H, 29 iffwf, 21 *g^f. I 22 , ^HIH ^ I 23 yc
fcr, 24 *&&*, 25 w^Hi 26 ipiffH 28 j^ 28 ii**, 29 *r*C?L 39j^ f 31 <FF**FV
32 rerercrc, 33 sffcro, 34 qrjv, 35 5*% 35^, 37 tfrgff^g^fe N
FUr/ : — The word iftwr in the above list, takes this affix, when it does
not mean • a metre of prosody \ Therefore it is not so here : faft ft^3 * The
Graishmi Tristup metre \ But V* : • belonging to summer '. TTie word b^
here means ' metre \ and not Veda. The word resursft -y*^ «f% t the phrase
«*% meaning qtoht%, (*ET being the name given to spto by Ancient Gram-
marians). Thus the compound will be «IUMiR* M The Paribh&shA Kj*m?
mfi > 4fi4rl *R^f RfimRffU * does not apply here. Therefore, tadantavidhi ap-
plies here and we have 5#nn (sf^TP* trgjlO M The word t^toft takes wm %
when meaning a 'place': as »t iq gi ftft **P ; otherwise *fo*vft» 'the son of
Udasth&na/ The word y*n takes vp^when meaning • a share/ otherwise it
will take u^r, as qifrnhfo: II
^t §«lW ^W^ft ^RT?t H tf* R
87. The affixes sn* and 5^ come after the words
^t and ^ respectively, in the senses specified in the apho-
rism reckoning from this one-as far as " dh&ny&n&m bhavane
^she^kha*" (V. 2. 1).
Thus A + H^~f^' feminine/ The sense of the affixes taught in
}he Fourth Book, and Chapter I of the Fifth Book, arc various, Therefore
*\
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. 1. 5. 88 ) Luk in Dvigu 65s
the word &*i* will have all those various significations; thus, it will mean
either oft;** (IV. 3. S3) Existing in females/ or «fcf *$p (IV. 2. 37) «a collec-
tion of females,; or %flmm* Kf (IV. 3. 74) 'what has come from females 9 ; or
*fc* Wf (V. 1. 5) • suitable for females 9 &c
Similarly 3??+ OT^-fcPl * masculine, or existing in males, or a collec-
tion of males, or what has come from males, or suitable for males &c 9
These affixes, however, are not to be employed in the sense of the
affix *^ taught in V. 1 115. For Pacini himself uses the form tpr^(and not
for) in sfttra VI. 3. 34, thus indicating by implication fan*) that in the
sense of *?(, the affix &*i is not. to be used. Thus *4ta{» W The forms rffri,
^ftcTT, 3^* and ^Jre^t are exceptional See V. 1. 12 1. The 5 of 49 is elided
before Ff^ by VIII. 2. 23. had it not been elided, one affix i|W would have been
taught in the sAtra, and not two.
88. A Taddhita affix, ordained to come ou account
of the relation of the words being that of a Dvigu compound,
is elided by luk, when it has the sense of the various affixes
taught antecedent to tena divyati &c, but not so, the affix
having the sense of a Patronymic
The phrase unjlffeRr: of IV. 1. 83 governs this aphorism also^ and
not the phrase vnroi of the last Thus qs*Tjr grcfog tfcytp - sm WIW € pre-
pared in five cups.' Similarly **TIPTPr- M prepared in ten cups." fi^ft « he who
studies two Vedas/ fli%f : " who studies three Vedas." Here the affixes
denoting fc^ (IV, 2. 16), and tr^% (IV. 2. 59) have been elided. Why do
we say " not so when the affix denotes a Patronymic" ? Observe %^nt%t
•a descendant of two Devadattas.' %fro% <a descendant of three Devadattas,'
Here the patronymic affix is not elided, though the compound is a Dvigu.
Why do we say " when it has the sense of the various affixes taught
antecedent to Una divyati ? n Observe Vnuqft i y ll
The Dvigu compound with the sense of a Taddhita affix is formed
under II. 1. 51. The affix will not, therefore, be elided where it does not give
rise to a Dvigu compound. Thus M vq^HH^ - m vh^mhh xx Or the genitive
case in ftifip may be taken as sthAna-shashtht, the sense being • there is the
substitution of £^-elision in the room of Dvigu,' the word Dvigu being here
taken by metonymy for the affix which gives rise to Dvigu. Of course, when
two words have blended into a Dvigu compound, the affixes will not be elided
Digitized by
Google
656 GotraLuk-elision [ Bk. IV, Ch. I. $ fo,
after such a word, because it becomes a pr&tipadika like others, as stawiHl H
If so, how is the affix elided in 4^*HI«U l l&efT- " H^^W ? This is not so ;
there is no Taddhita added, and the word <f?roqm can never be analysed into
H^*MI**1HL fr^W*, N If the latter sense is to be expressed, we must use a
sentence, and no single word. In fact three are the only valid forms, and
they arise without adding of any Taddhita affix to 4±^*4I<4I, viz q***f[ OTi^S
tK&Vt *&mnttm 9t^F, and M^^-*HH ; (a Samah&ra Dvigu). A Sam&h&ra
and a Taddhit&rtha Dvigu of these are analysed in the same way, while the
third 4 ^^lltJIt OTfJT* will always remain a qra and never give rise to a
Taddhita.
How do you explain the non-elision of the affix in \fau: f «ti<s*Hji
and qT^p* ? The word \ft*I s does not mean fitffr ftw *rft% but 5*PRKT r*HT,
faftw, Plftnni^=»^ii: li Similarly qn^RT- dose not mean ^rgsrfts**:
but ^THTRL'f^faT^^nTSir «'faRT* f t^pft w — qf^ff: u So also with mfv^^ W
Why the affix is not elided in $^ror nyq iTPTft » ^mUv-^HL or ^qfr
roi? Because the elision of those affixes only take place which begin
with a vowel.
89. The luk-clisLon of Patronymic .(Gotra) affixes
in the plural, which have Ikjcii enjoined by Sutras II. 4. j53 and
the rest, is prohibited, when the affix has an initial vowel,,
and it has the sense of the various affixes taught antecedent
to tena divyati &c (IV. 4. 2).
Thus the plural of hf4 is nWn (II. 4. 64). But the disciples of ipif*
will be formed by the affix & (IV. 21. 1 14) which is a pragdivyattya affix, and
for the purposes of adding this affix the base will be considered to be irp& as
if there was no elision. Thus HTOT:+9»«Tpffar : (VII. 1. 2 and VI. '4. 151),
and not trtfap 1 Similarly *F?*ftqp, mnrifclPj tHTCTOpfan ^disciples of V&tsyas,
Atreyas, KhArpAyagas/ . - _
Why do we say "Ufa " I e. " when the Gotra affix is elided"? Observe
4tPR*, *TTOIN' Here the affix denoting "fruit" is elided by 3^ by Sfltra
IV. 3. 163. Then when the prAgdivytlya affix **«c is added, the luk-elision
is maintained. Thus the fruit of ^8 is *?{*; from which mm * belonging
to or coming from the jujube-fruit'
Why do we say * having an initial vowel "? Observe iffp* *n»mn=«
iTW^and not mmW^Hl ; and nwi; and not nifrrara, w Here the affix ^p*,
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Bk IV/Ch. 1. J; go/] Yuvan-eusion. 657
a prAgdivyattya affix taught in sfttra IV. 3. 81 docs not begin with a
vowel ; therefore it is added to mf and not «i|»4 n Similarly the next affix
ito:(IV.3.82>
Why do we say u when it has the sense of a prigdlvyattya affix n ?
Thus tnMr ff*Pl/- ? nffa* c who is fit for the Gargas '• Here the affix xs (V. I.
1) has the sense of ' suitable for that \ as taught in SAtra V. 1. 5 not one of
the pritgdivyatiya senses. Hence the Ink elision is maintained
The Gotra-affixes are taught to be elided in the plural only : and
when after such supposed elision a Singular or Dual Person is intended, this
rule will still apply and there will be no elision. Thus fir* will form its Gotra
derivative by *P* (IV. 1. 104) ** ftl+*n^-\*s M The plural of >f will be
faqr* by the elision of «n^H One yuvan or two yuvan descendants of these
f%*T. will be formed by the affix fw (IV. I. 95), for the application of which
the word ftfp will be supposed not to have lost its trsr, therefore f^ will be
added to fo thus>* +f^; then this fi^is elided by II. 4. 58. The resultant
form is\**,\fr M The many ^descendants (in the plural) of one \j: or two
V will be ft*: M
90. There is Ink elision of the Yuvan Patronymic
forming affix (IV. 1. 163) when a pragdivyatiya affix begin*
ing with a vowel is to be added.
The elision of the Yuvan affix must take place mentally ; having done
which, we should then- look out for the proper PrAgdivyatlya affix to be added
to the word-form thus remaining. Thus the Patronymic (Gotra) of qa^m*
'ts'*»F«rtfip (IV. 1. 95) formed by adding f^M The Yuvan form of the latter
(by Sutra IV. 1. 150) will be (fflozTCT* * When we intend to add a PrAgdivya'-
tiya affix to this last word, (c. g. an affix having the sense of " the pupils of* ;)
we should first mentally elide the Yuvan affix w (IV. 1. 150) from this word
qjF*TCT n Having done which we get the form qn**T*fif'; and it is with regard
to this form <*>l u <M£pr that we should search out what is the proper pupil-denot-
ing affix : and that by stitra IV. 2. 1 12 is *r^ll Thus ^r^i&fa + w\= 4J u eigm*
•the pupilsof Ph&Ql&hfitas'. Had we in the first instance applied the pupil
denoting affix to the Yuvan word ^rmgd, such affix would have been fy and
not sr* , for the latter is ordained for those cases only where the word ends
with the Gotra affix IH,(IV. 2. 112).
Similarly the Patronymic of wto^t is wiftfiT (IV. 1. 25). The
Digitized by VjOOQLC
658 YUVAN-ELISIOW. [ BK, IV. CH. I.|. 9*
Yuvan of wrftft is HiMftPri*- (IV. I. 148). The pupils of Bh Agavittflca will
be *UMftHf> by adding the affix «nf IV. 2. H2>
Similarly the Patronymic of fire isltarafi formed by fan (IV. I. 154).
The Yuvan of %3traft is fHsrefi* formed by the affix U (IV. 1. 149). The
word denoting the pupils of %3Si*rffa will be formed by adding 9 (IV. 2. 1 14)
not to this \vord f but to%qcraftN ThusVsTOftaPtf
Similarly the Patronymic of qtffrr^n is frflvM^lfl* (IV. I. 95> The
Yuvan derivative of the latter will be qjfti»JKH4 ; (IV. I. 151)1 The word
denoting pupils of the qnft?3RfH will be ^rfts^nn (IV. 2. 1 12).
Similarly Patronymic from 13^5 is 'jra^mflt (IV. 1. 160), the Yuvan of
the latter is rfrgqRPFT : (IV. 1. 83) ; the word denoting the pupils of the latter
is *&3*mi: by (IV. 2. 112 formed from «ffgqgreft) M Why do we say "an affix
beginning with a vowel " ? Observe qa^gngreq^ md «#a«mw*Wi M Why do we
say u a Prtgdl vyatiy a affix " ? Observe mqflfiHJA ft* - HimftvftqH, 11 (See the
lastSfttra>
91. There is optionally luk-elision of the Yuvan
affixes q?5 and fos^ when a Pr&gdivyatiya affix beginning with
a vowel is to be added.
By the last sQtra, all Yuvan affixes were told to be elided. The
present sAtra declares an option in the case of the Yuvan affixes %% and ftp£
Thus the patronymic of irt is «ir*4 (IV. 1. 105); the Yuvan of nri is formed
by q^(IV. 1. 101) irpqra**: W The word denoting the pupils of GAigy&Qa
will be ntffar or «irnfcq<ifar: ; SP^taP or qrarcrofaf : ll Similarly of the affix
fo^OV* >• l SQ Thus from ****» the Patronymic is mw (IV. I. 112), The
Yuvan of the latter is ro^iraft (IV. I. 146). The pupils of Y4sk&yani will be
called JUMiUff or *lTORPFffap II
«raf unfir, m^A *nfif H^wwRfiiy^MWuif vwuM^if «jw% u
92. The affix 3TH mentioned in IV. 1. 83 and those
which follow it denote ' the descendant of some one \
This sfltra points out the meaning of the affixes ; and it refers to the
affixes that have preceded, beginning from *r*(IV. I. 83) e. g. bt^, ^ n^&c
and to the affixes that follow. The affixes herein taught have the force of
denoting descendant, when they arc added to the word in construction which
Digitized by
Google
BK. IV. CH. L § 93. J GoTRA-AFFIX. 659
is in the genitive case. The translation given by Dr. Ballantyne of this
aphorism is: — "Let the affixes already mentioned or to be mentioned come
optionally in the sense of tlu offspring thereof^ after what word ending with
the sixth case-affix and having completed its junction (with whatever it may
require to be compounded with), is in grammatical relation there to".
Thus we may either use the sentence 44Mlm«JHU or by adding n^
(IV. 1. 83) to the word tHq (which has the 6th. case-affix in construction in
the above sentence), form ifrpTO " the offspring of Upagu *. HIN*U | : (IV. f .
84) 'the offspring of *wrfV, Vv (IV. 1.85) 'the offspring of Diti* ^fen
(IV. 1. 36) "the offspring of Utsa". 8^ (IV. 1. Zj) 'the offspring of a
woman ". fasp (IV. 1. 87) ' the offspring of a man \
The Universal sfltra vrora. (IV. 3. 120) will include this «rra also
for the word f^ may be applied to any-thing likeuro, fT^p^ft^I^f firop
&c Since by that rule IV. 3. I20«r^ &c, may be applied in the sense of
apatyam also, what is the necessity of this present sfitra? The present
sutra is made in order to debar those affixes like 9, (IV. 3. 114) which debar
the affix xc\ &c in the case of n^m 11 How can an «r%for affix debar a
*rfqft> affix ? The TOpfr affixes tr^ &c are treated like (h^i for this purpose.
Thus these affixes *T\ (IV. 1. 83-87) debar the 9 in the Vpddham under
certain circumstances. Thus m'iklt^'VPCT, so also *qpnr*: from MPf!|:
(wnir irirsw) *
93. The one and the same affix is employed when
a more distant descendant, how low so-cver, is to be denoted.
The word Gotra is defined in Sutra IV. 1. 152 and means the offspring
beginning with the grandson. There would have arisen the application of a
separate afnx in denoting the descendant of every one of such persons ; the
present sutra declares a restriction. Thus the son of «rir. is mfli (IV. 1. 95).
The son of nrnr (or in other words the grandson of im) is np^: (IV. 1. 105)1
This is formed by a Gotra affix. Now the son of tirrfc will also be called
ura : , no ne;v affix will be added. In fact, in denoting the Gotra descendants
how low soever, the affix *w will be added to the word trn, though there may
be several intermediate descendants. Thus the sfitra restricts the application
of the affix. Or in another view of the matter, it may be said to restrict the
8
Digitized by VjOOQLC
666 Patronymic *w a [ Sk. IV. Ch. I. § 95
base to which the aftix is to be added. Thus the son of «tp4 will be foimed
by adding the affix **^not to the base «rn4 (which would have been the case
were IV. 1. 92 strictly applied), but to the base irf« So that one base is to
be taken and adhered to throughout, in applying Gotra affixes.
ff%i ii *nwft Pro* s?tt3i fofifir «?irofar *nrft H*fit n «u*mt>«w»*Hjjqm : 11
94. When a descendant of the description denot-
ed by Yuvan (IV. 1. 163) is intended to be expressed, a new
affix is attached, only after what already ends with an affix
marking a descendant as low at least as a grandson (gotra) :
but in the Feminine the word is not termed Yuvan, and no
new affix is added.
This is also a niyama or restrictive rule. Thus the Yuvan of uf4 is
npqfmip (IV. 1. 101). Similarly *ROTH<*, *TOm*, SHRWn, *fh*Tft«, TOrafo M
- Why do we say " but in the Feminine the word is not termed Yuvan'?
Observe *rcft which is the feminine of jrfir: (Gotra) as well as of WITO*: (Yu-
van). Similarly gftft feminine of Rifif: and grOTTO II In short, Yuvan affixes
are not added in the feminine. If it is intended to denote a feminine descen-
dant of the kind Yuvan, the feminine word formed by Gotra affix will denote
such a descendant also.
What is here prohibited i. e. is the term Gotra superseded by the
term Yuvan ? If it is a niyama rule, there will be no niyama with regard to
the feminine, as the prohibition is contained in the same sentence. Therefore
in the feminine, the Yuvan affix will not get the designation of Gotra, because
Gotra-name is debarred by Yuvan Name. Therefore the sGtra should be
divided in two, e. g. ifrsn^sPr TO* *nm (2) TOtsftraPC U (0 After a Gotra-
formed word a new affix is added in denoting a Yuvan descendant, (2) but
not so in the feminine. In fact the name Yuvan is prohibited in the feminine,
therefore, the feminine will be known Gotra always and never by Yuvan.
gffr n n wmmftfirt 1 ^*KMU*nflsfi4» i RH g^*nft*M — ~
95. The affix ^ conies after a Nominal-stem
which ends in short sr, in denoting a descendant.
This debars sn* (IV. 1. 83). Thus w?*nTO=*TfiP 'descendant of
Daksha'. Why do we say short wr (for this is the force of the letter £ added
to *r, by I. 1. 69 and 70) ? The descendant of $ptar. or grffaPTO* (words which
end in long vq) will not be formed by the affix fi\n
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Bk. IV. Ch. I. $ 97. J fs h 661.
The descendant or fror by this sfltra is trcrcftr., but the form OTFPf
formed by«r*is also met with. As "TftalPLOTTOtra^ftpft" € Give Sita to
the son of Dasaratha.'
**• II ^fPNVMHi ^ *THmilWftfatfi II
96. The affix r^ is added in the sense of a descen-
dant, after the words ' Bahu » &c.
Thus *r*ft : * a descendant of the clan of B4hu." The words € BAhu
&c, either do not end in short «T, thus making the last rule inapplicable ; or if
they end in short *T, then some other rule would have prohibited the applica-
tion of TO* Hence the necessity of the present sfltra.
This is a class of words recognizable only by the form (tTTORtTO^
1 TO, 2 lOTTf, 3 *T*T$, 4 ft*r$, 5 Rur^, 6 qsr^, 7 tMft^ ( Vrtt-
*|) 8 w^ f 9 f3tr*T, 10 ^IT, 11 TOftT, 12 gft^ST, 13 $*RT, 14 *nrar ( 5*1-
WT ) 15 J^raST, 16 tfTOT, 17 5pm r 18 *ffar, 19 3^KTOf, 20 l?3t*{, 21 ^*-
%, 22 stffcrenk, 29 TOT**, 24 $*&*, 25 gpir**, 26 ^IPH, 27 <n*^, 28*-
H*, 29 us**, 30 nft&TW. *3nTW, 31 tf*n**, 32 **5^, 33 firc^, 34 «w, 35
firoftH, 36 H<|*ft, 37 Wtvftpi, 38 tJ^H^ftffo, 39 jgHlR^t 40 HWfffc, 41 VX
*H*tfK , 42 Sre* f 43 *nftir$, 44 &m, 45 jftft^ 46 «*£*. 47 m*W, 48 n^
49 irgw, 50 **, 51 i^f , 52 mr. t^TBJK, 53 agqrnrSp SftTOW, 54 p?, 55
3T*T*t 56 qqaff > m i frft«|viuqHL U fr* I 57 m*lfc 58 JlTfft: 59 ^roft* 60
•mfiRftf: |U||ft n
F<fr/: — The words *TW &c must be Proper Names, being heads of
Gotras from whom clans take their name : otherwise the affix f*j will not
be applied. Thus the son of a private person called TO will be WTff : II
YArt : — The operations to be effected upon words denoting relation
are prohibited with regard to the same word-forms when denoting Proper
Names. Thus the offspring of jym meaning • father-in-law ' is "Jji, but
when it means a person called Svaiura, then the derivative will be vrufc M
The *j. in the sfttra indicates that other words not included in the
list also take this affix. Thus iTrf**-, ^5Tlf$ : r HH^fV , iPl^» 4^?ftft: tt
Google
€62 fn* [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. J 98
97. The affix *sr is placed after the word sudhfttri
in denoting the descendant, and the 55 of sudh&tri is replac-
ed by the substitute «ro^ befere this affix.
Thus j| NMi4 WWL - $Nnri%: ' the descendant of Sudhatfl'
Ydrt: — The substitute *n$X replaces the finals of «nrar, *f€, l5qTT,
*rcra and rt^r when the Patronymic fn is to be added Thus W(^,
98. The affix 'chphafi' comes after the words
1 KufljV &c, when a remoter descendant (called Gotra) is to
be denoted.
This debars fH H Of the affix ^T^ the letters* is for the sake of
distinguishing this affix from the affix q»3j ; such as in sGtra V. 3. 113, by
which the words ending in affix ^r?y take the further affix ^ (5^), in order
to form a complete word. The letter aj of this affix causes Vpddhi (VII.
2. 117). Then remains^ which by stitra VII. 1. 2, is replaced by vrnp^ll
Thus a^+^^-^^+STO^+tr^cftrsira?. This is not a complete word
as yet We must add n by sGtra V. 3. 113. Thus the full word is qfcmiH E
€ the grandson or a lower descendant of Kuftja' dual of it is qnrs^Rrah plural
is <*£U*h*H(: ; the affix ?q being elided by II. 5. 62, in the plural, it being an
affix of the mm* class (IV. 1. 174). Similarly ifciPF*:, sFranTOTt WIVTW: M
Why do we say " when a Gotra descendant is to be denoted ? *
Observe $CTf3f: "the son of Kuftja ". Here rj is added by IV. 1. 95 in denot-
ing immediate descendant There is difference in the accent of these words,
in the different numbers. Thus in the singular and dual, the accent will be
regulated by the latter ** of the affix sq which is added in those numbers.
But this affix being elided in the plural, the accent there will be regulated
by the letter ^ of ^ff?x II That is to say, in the singular and dual, the udatta
will fall on the first syllable (VI. 1. 197) ; in the plural, it will fall on the last
.syllable (VI. 1. 164)1
The word iit% of this sutra governs the succeeding sutras up to
aphorism IV. 1. 112: so that all the affixes taught in these fifteen sutras
denote grandsons or descendants lower than that
1 $*m, 2 mw, 3 v^T, 4 to* 5 im f 6 %i?% 7 *|*, 8 ^, 9 5J.
■ST. 10 5pv 11 f^TJf, 12 *&*, 13 ****, U fRi*. 15 jpwflr, 16 ftr* f 17 g*
Digitized by
Google
Br. IV. Ch. I. S ioa ] ** • a *
99. The affix <k* comes, in denoting a Gotra des-
cendant, after the Nominal-stems i** and the rest.
Thus «n¥T*r (*f*+*?-*n*+wniFr VII. 2. 118 and VII. 1. 2).^ Siml-
larly "tort*: " the grandson or a lower descendant of Nafla or Chara*. But
the son of m will be Hlfip (IV. 1. 95>
The word ^^ is changed to wfc before this affix. Thus «!*3m: *
The word mtffct occurs in V*ft class II. 4- 5ft the Yuvan affix is, therefore,
elided after it, thus qrtfto is a common name for • father' and ' son f . It takes
f^ by IV. 1. 96, as belonging to B&hv&di class which is an Akfti-gaga. The
. word •rfircrf* takes q^T when denoting the w**TO gotra, e. g. <MiRl*l*lfw*l**-
iTO ; otherwise the form will be «nfira$ M The word ««* will form «rafof:
when a Br4hmai>a is meant ; otherwise qnffa, so also CFTFH:-<*ifaa> other-
wise qfa: II The word *t^ is changed to ^C as f&tepft: *
1 *T, 2 <*T, (*03**, 4 £*, 5 |Rw f 6 fftre. 7 *TO, 8 **, 9 «.
iiiii 10 trt^tiHf it 11 wr. 12 ^nw, 13 fiw i 1* »iBi«A^mm^ 1 15 nm
16 nT, 17 snw, 18 *ra, 19 Pnc, 20 <K 21 ftj^, 22 ftjp*, 23 ftj^ 24 fc-
p, 25 *nn; 26 m*&, 27 *TOrr(S^r?) 28 TO, 29 *T*H(*iT**) 30 m,
31 try* ( ny*l ) 32 fTO^r *T3Fr*Tflr& I 33 Bifiw, 34 fog, 35 faw, 36 $1^
37 ighfliWf il 38 «rt, 39 tf t 40 *|*f. 41 fW«T. 42 WW, 43 yf, 44 fj**.
45 ginrcr, 46 gim, 47 Rw, 48 *r*, 49 srfrrc, 50 *TO, 51 3*^ 52 t**T»
53 tf**n, 54 tffarn, 55 ft*T, 56 ffr^FT, 57 ip^, 58 &&*, 59 far*?, 60
WW, 61 1***, 62 *** 63 *p** f 64 fgir, 65 «j, 66 p* t 67 mi, 68 m&H
69 *m*> 70 3j*n, 71 vpc, 72 «r%f, 73 ****, 74 *m, 75 w*?, 76 fFf-
«*, 77 lira, 78 «T?rw, 79 iT5cnr^ 80 imr. 81 •ftrar, 82 unr, 83 ^kpt, 84 *nr *
nR<nfi yftssr. n *** n <*nfa 11 gfar- mift yi : , «w: R
tf*r. 11 gfi<i i RPM i iM«fai 1 jfanfl** 3^*$m<3i <i^to* **fa w
100. The affix q^ comes after the words sfer &c,
when they end in the affix 3r?r (IV. 1. 104).
The words tffcf &c, form a subdivision of j%f class, which class by IV.
1. 104 takes the affix srn in forming Gotra words. Thus the Gotra descendant
of $far will be jrffcr ftfaf +**?). The son of $rft*T will be formed by this
sutra and not by IV. 1. 95. Thus STf^+^"*Tft?TFFT: "&*<* son of HArita or
the great-grandson of H&rita ". In fact, the force of the affix qjf? of this SOtra
is that of a Yuvan affix, though it is taught in the chapter of Gotra affixes ;
because according to the general rule IV. 1. 98 one Gotra affix can be only
added to a word, and the word qfa being already formed by a Gotra affix
Digitized by
Google
664 *^f » [Bk. 1 V. Cil .1. |. 103
•jqy will not take again another Gotra affix qft£ u Therefore, q^r is here a
Yuvan-affix.
101. The affix q^ is added 10 denoting a descen-
dant after a Nominal-stem ending in the affixes ^r and ^ H
The qf^ of this sfltra has, like that of the preceding sfttra, the force of
a Yuvan affix, since it is to be added to words formed by the Gotra affixes in;
and f^u Thus irf+49 (IV. 1. ios)-intfc 11 *TF*+q^-*TF*farr. * va+
I^-Jtfir* ; *Tfir+q»^-*TOT*FP M It is not every word which ends in ^ or t^
which takes the Yuvan affix q^ ; but only that word where the affix tr*y or
f^r has the force of a Gotra affix. Thus the affix qsr is added by IV. 3. 10 to
denote proximity to a sea. As <fa + tiTJ-V*P M This wor< * w '" not take ^ c
affix <K3» ti Similarly by IV. 2. 80 the affix f*J is added to the words wft«ra
&c, the force of the affix being 'tfcjtffai M Thus &c|«iP| :. This word will not
take the affix q^ II
102. The affix ^ comes in denoting a Gotra
descendant after the words 'saradvat ', ' sunaka\ and 'darbha*,
when they denote the descendants of Bhrigu, Vatsa and
Agrayana respectively.
Thus m<lMI*Mi »Hpfr. otherwise fmnpr (formed *>y **n) Cm^HH?
»<ro ; otherwise faror., *P*frw*rrRFr*:» otherwise *lf*P, (formed by f*I IV.
1. 95>
The words TOf^ and fPW belonging to forft class would by IV. 1.
104 have taken the affix «T3^ in denoting Gotra, the present sfltra prohibits
that in certain cases and enjoins <kw instead.
mdWIIH ( <K3 ) H
103. The affix <jj^ comes, in the sense of a Gotra
descendant, optionally after the words 4 Drona,' 'parvata/ an4
jivanta.*
Digitized by
Google
bk. i v. ch. i. 5 104 ] ** m a $
This debars f£ of I V. 1. 95. Thus $V*m or rfh^r, qrtaiTO or qrfat
^WIUM* or ^rtfap h
The affix t^ is employed in denoting a remote (gotra) offspring and
not an immediate descendant or son. How is then tj^quuHl the son of
Droga, called jHm: and not itfit* in the phrase " HW*4IH( IPIWV"? The
fpf here does not refer to the Droga of the MahabMrAt, but to some ancient
founder of a clan of that name, and his* descendants were called jramn *
In modern times, by an easy error, ASvatthama was called Drauijayana, owing
to the similarity of sounds.
jfo u <!frTf*frr i ftrciffrfr «iNmfiu«M w& -rift i ^yrCTTgRnwr aanntfrfrvw i
104. The affix *s comes after the words • Bida *
&c, in denoting a remote (Gotra) descendant : but after
those words of this class which are not the names of ancient
sages, the affix *n» has the force of denoting immediate des-
cendant.
This Sfltra consists of four words : traft M non-Rishi or not being the
name of a sage M ; *IF!?lf3 ' in expressing an immediate descendant" ft?tf|»*
"after Bidadi words M ipr " the affix HW." Thus of the words falling in Bidadi
class, the words like yc ' son/ ^Jf* daughter/ HHI«f € s» iter-in-law* are common
nouns and not names of Rishis. When the affix m^ is added to these words,
it has the force of denoting immediate descendant Thus yc+tr^-^pp
•grand-son.' Jfaj Unj-tjhfac* m daughter's son/ But when added to other
words which express the names of Rishis, the affix «n^ makes the Gotra des-
cendants. Thus fir* + *nj«^rf: ' the grandson or a descendant lower than that
of Bida/
How in a context relating to Gotra affixes, we come to this two fold
meaning of this sfltra ? To this we reply, that the phrase »rynpref % should
be thus construed. The word ' anpsht ' is in the ablative case, the case affix
being elided. The word «?R^r4 is the same asiFRr* the affix c^y being
added without change of significance. Therefore the words like for &c denote
the immediate (anantara) descendant of <pc &c, and do not denote a remote
descendant (gotra), nor a descendant in general. Therefore, the above phrase
means : — 'after a Bidadi word which is not the name of a Rishi, the affix 'an •
is added in denoting an immediate descendant 9
— =— — - 1 - Digitize
666 «nf n [ Bjc IV. Ch. I. $ 104
Q. Another way or explaining the phrase is this, the word 'anantarya'
is equal to 'nairantarya'— 'uninterrupted succession.' Therefore, where there is
an uninterrupted succession of Rishis between the first name and the person
to be designated by a Patronymic, there the affix 'aft' will not be added. Thus
the word ^r^TT belongs to the Bidadi class. ' Indrabhu' a seventh descendant
of KaSyapa, will not be denoted by S*T5*TT formed with in*, because between
f^pjand 3P1K, there is an unbroken series of Rishis, but by u* of IV. 1. 1 14.
Therefore the following phrase will be valid fs^nSP OTV WWHUL M For «nf
is elided in the plural by II. 4. 64, but ^>I*^MHIHL is plural of SJT^TT formed with
the general patronymic wr^of IV. 1. 114 and hence not elided.
A. This explanation is not to be preferred, merely in order to explain
the word qiivim«t i *i in fsjpj: WR* ^IVWHII II The general Patronymic ^tft affix
«iw of IV. 1, 1 14 is not debarred by this *T$ 11 Therefore 3TOHT with «^ will
denote fJPf, which may also be denoted by iMWI formed with w^U For had
the above explanation been correct, then ftmfi* the grandson of Kusika could
never be called *£ i ki^v (formed with *nj), for both Gadhi the father of Vtfvl-
mitra, and Kusika the grand-father were Rishis.
In denoting an immediate descendant or a descendant in general,
the Rishi words f^ &c, will take other appropriate affixes. Thus <%q forms
^ft • a descendant of Bida • by IV. 1. m g6 ny and not by St**T* of IV. f . 1 14,
because ft* is supposed to belong to the Akjrtigana of BahvadL
1 RTTf 2 9rt, 3 tff^q?, 4 $ftp^ f 5 TCgnt, 6 <HH«£, 7 ftit4l<f, 8 3F3$
( ftrc* ) 9 ftwrc, 10 ^fti^r ( jifirfrir ) 11 *npn*r, 12 *fo, 13 ffcro, H nr-
IfcW. 15 fTOTC, 16 TOtfj, 17 5pRf ( jpr^ ) 18 ^5, 19 ifrOT, 20 ftr^, 21
fag, 22 %i^, 23 unnr, 24 *rf*hF f 25 srsrwr, 26 wnire?. 27 ww, 28
9n#, 29 ^nn*, 30 tffcr, 31 f%^r, 32 m&s, 33 u*^* («^^) 34 **%-
«T, 35 ftcj, 36 Wyg, 37 *ft*N, 38 <fr<r, 39 rthrc (vrarO 40 nftftt, 41
f^Hf, 42 jprc, 43 sror, 44 »HST, 45 j?T^ f 46 ^qr*, 47 JJ, 48 yrw, 49 J*,
50 $f^ f 51 ros& I 52 <roft qqj *f l 53 (Vj^ , 54 s***5. 55 f^rq^ N
The word qrtfr in the above list is replaced by q*$ when taking the
affix *t»j 11 Thus <TtnafaT BTP^-qindT: (the son of a Brahmaija begotten on a
S&dra woman, who though married to the Brahmaija is q^ft 'a strange woman 9
owing to the great difference of race). .
The word q^ft occurs in i?3QA*irft(VIL 3. 20) and ^gqpinft (IV.
1. 126) classes also. Therefore when the sense is 'a son begotten on another's
wife' who is also called q*«ft, ^the form will be qrc%tfta:, with double vpiddhi
of both members by VII. 3. 20: which docs not take place in the case of
4KW M
Digitized by
Google _
Bk. IV. Ch. I. $. 106] GOTRA 1* II 667
wftf: u 'TtafAft 1 «nfift>* iftTO^t *RW*trtf H^flJ h
105. The affix *jsr comes, in the sense of Gotra
descendant, after the words 4 Garga • &c.
Thus TF^:, * the grandson or a stiil lower descendant of Garga ', so
also fFW &c
1 n*r, 2 tot, 1 3 qnrilr I 4 *N$A, 5 «nr f 6 uun<ii4, 7 ft4?<l» 8 w
^tovpt, 9 unffar, 10 suffer, II ^nw, 12 **, 13 vtfft*, 14 *far f 15 fi* t 16
TO, 17 VK, 18 «*, 19 W, 20 ipis, 21 *%**, 22 pr, 23 frwi*, 24 *C
*im, 25 Srffcr, 26 *lftf* f 27 **, 28 *fg, 29 ipj. 30 ipf, 31 ^5, 32 ftg,
33 Jfj, 34 »RT f 35 *|, 36 nfog, 37 fiplts. 38 113, 39 ipj, 40 qnrft, 41
55, 42 ^ptW, 43 «n|f, 44 «v, 45 3* ( ?V ) 46 nw, 47 ***, 48 irgw, 49
ipV, 50 OTT, 51 *rf^r f 52**|, 53^,54**, 55 &**, 56 ipf^ 57 qrf», 58 3*
«*r, 59 *rf*ft 60 *p»*, 61 TO5H,62iTt5|WT,63mTf^ t 64 $f**4t 65 K^**, 66 q*TO,
67 iTHinTO, 68 Wrffcf, 69 |*i|or, 70 cpnf, 71 qfrr*. 72 *<** ( ■*<** ) 73 33*,
77 Jj^ f 75 3**, 76 *if*flr t 77 TOW, 78 *$&* ( ifTJ^* ) 79 irf^ f 80 trf^RT, 81
KWHT, 82 fff$TCIH, 83 jfiPOT, 84 fipr, 85 VK^R ( UU4i ) 86 q*TOF, 87 ftjpt, 88 f^ f
89 up***, 90 *3^?, 91 Rrfiwr, 92 flur* ( PnnO 93 ft***, 94 ufar, 95 wnr. 96 ***;
97 ^f** t 98 ftrflrffcnr, 99 *Tf, 100 f^, 101 fpffj, 102 ft*?*, 103 *jtffr, 1G4 w^ft*,
105jr?5Tf^, 106****, 107*ft?r f 108 *<?*, 109 to, HO *F5, 111 JJ* f 112 «&*;
113 w. H4 W&*, H5 ftwwr, 116 pf^m H
The word **? is found in the Stfroift sublist of this class. It ought to
take vii after fi^ in the feminine by IV. I. 18, how then the form Hftft in
HFrft W*t ? The affix ifH comes in denoting a Gotra offspring, but in denoting
a descendant in general, this affix will not come, and hence no shpha also.
If so, then why the immediate descendant of *PTTT& is called nmv«* : which
is a Name of Parasuram the son of Jamadagni, or why Vy&sa the soa of
Par&sara is called TOnrf: ? These are exceptions formed by vine VJimilm: i- e*
by superimposing of Gotra-form on these. Their proper apatya forms are
by %m<5 (IV. i. 1 14) i. e. UPTOP and TOTTO M
106. The affix sp; comes, in the sense of a Gotra
descendant, after the words W^J and ^nj when the words so
formed mean * Br&hmana' and * a Kausika * respectively.
Thus lire** ~ wren* 'Br&hmaga.' Otherwise 1TW "son of Madhu."
WW** -$Tftar Otherwise fWf : II
9
Digitized by
joogfe
663 Gotra ^ h [ Bk. IV. Ch 1. |. 108
The word W belongs to the GargAdi class, so it would have taken yafl
by the last sfttra also. The present sOtra declares a restriction, viz. 43 takes
*3£ only then when ^tftw is denoted. Its being read in the Gargadi class
serves another purpose : as it belongs to the sub-classs £tffmi?, the rule IV. 1.
18 becomes applicable to it; so that its feminine is formed by **. Thus
VTO&lRPfr II In fact, it would have been better, if in the body of the Gaijapa-
tha, instead of writing w% alone, there was wg $lfo% II It would have saved
.the repetition of it in the present sfttra.
107. The affix l ^' comes in the sense of a
Gotra descendant, after the words *rfq and tot, when the
special descendants of the family of Angiras are meant.
Thus3tft + q*t«*KTO* € the grand -son or a still lower descendant of
9 Kapi ' of the family of Angiras. 9 So also £to U
Why do we say of the family of Angiras ? Observe snw (IV. 1. 122)
M the gotra-descendant of Kapi " so also 4tft* formed by f*j because it is a
Non-Rishi word or because it belongs to B4hv&di (IV. 1. 96) class.
The word *uft occurs in Garg&di class. The present sfltra declares
a restriction i. e. the 'yafl ' is to be applied only when Angirasa descendant
is meant It is included in the Garg&dt class also for the purpose of apply-
ing IV. I, 18. Thus qsrarapft M grand -daughter or a still lower descendant
of Rapt"
108. The affix * ^' comes in the sense of a Gotra
descendant, after the word * «Ud<Uf/ when meaning a descen-
dant of Anginusa.
Thus top??: » *ril*tap, otherwise TOTT* M —
The word ^j* occurs both in the GargAdi class (IV. 1. 105) and in
the Siv&di class (IV. 1. 112). It would have taken both affixes «n^and m.
The present sOtra declares that when it means an Afigirasa, then q^o? will
not take *T5 of the rffarf? class : and when it does not mean Angirasa, then it
takes both these affixes e. g. tci??: and ^mr: any descendant of V&tairfa.
Digitized by
Google
BR.IV. CH. I. J. 1 10 ) GOTRA «R« 669
109. The affix '*n^ is luk-elided in the feminine
after the word '*%*& when meaning a female descendant
of Angirasa.
Thus from *3"T: we get *ni°OT in the masculine. In the feminine
the n^is elided by luk, and we have *PPW+ tf^ (IV. 1. 73)«-*np3ft •'a female
descendant of Vatairfa of the clan Aftgirasa." Why do we say "of Afcgirasa?"
Observe qrfrWTCPft formed with 'shpha' under lohitadi rule (V. 1 18). When
W7 takes launder Sivadi class, its feminine is *nrnft U Though the word is
formed with •r^yet in the feminine, there is not **^ substitution (IV. 1. 78X
because Vata?£a is a Rishi-Name,
jf%* H «tll$i€T fl% ft^TOLI *fSlft*^ ftlimft ^**m«Wl n^di *
110. The affix Hj^ comes, in the sense of a
Gotra descendant, after the words *w &c.
The anuvf itti of angirasa does not extend to this aphorism. Thus
•TV^-qr^-iTO-i-ininrfVIL 1. 2)- htwr * (VII. 2. 117) 'the grandson or a still
lower descendant of Alva'. Similarly *TT^FW There are some words
in this class which already have taken a patronymic affix, e. g, vrnF9»V*» and
«VR^I7 11 After these words the affix qp; of course has the force of a Yu van
affix. The word unfa is formed by uPc + I^(IV. 1. 122), V?»fti% (a Rajar-
shi)-l-s*^(IV. I 171), and *TPTJU«*PT$f + «m, (IV. 1. 105). The word mm
takes phafl only when it denotes an Atreya, as tfraPFP, otherwise mfc with
TO or TO: with n^M The word smr takes 'phaft* only when the offspring
of a male is to be denoted, as *TT<T**CTTnt - nmrw but ^mrqr *TO**-^flta**
with *\ II The word otN takes 'phaA' when denoting a Bharadvaja, as
Brriro^R:, otherwise it will take the affix fit, which will be elided by II. 4. 28,
leaving the form unro II
The words ?ftfnr *Tftl% of the above list mean that when a person '
born in Atri Gotra is adopted by a person belonging to Bharadvaja Gotra,
then the affix is to be added, he of course is an Atreya but gets a new Gotra
of Bharadvaja. Thus TOfTHRPTf otherwise the form will be *mtnr with,
mi of IV. I. 104.
I m* 2 itot*3 *ra4fry^5ftr?6 3* 7 ttft*8 ^ (fH^O 9 ««*rc 10-
W*l 11 f*3p 12 *ftt* 13 *!*** 14 Hftw 15 Hp»nr 16 q^ir 17 CRT* 18 %fR*r 1» *!*
20 tffoof 21 ifrjh*22 it* 23 f^ 24 f^ 25 n^ 26 *ftg 27 qft** 28 qrf%^r 29 iM*^ 30
WH 31 gif 32 y* 33 *TF*5*34 fan** 35 $* 36 tn? UTift 37 ** 38 -** 39 *rr 40
litwf 41 ^ 42 ftnr 43 fatff 44 firoi* 45 pift 46 nw 47 ^? 48 *rar* 49 V s * 50 (***) *
*!** 51 q*4 52 iTPTffr 53 31% URT 54 wr^t 55 9** 56 £ipt<l 57 jfatf 58 ipr. 69.
Digitized by
Google
670 Gotra %^ n [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. |. 112
67 i|5* 68 qff 69 fa* 70 *rfft 71 ufar* 72 4fcr 73 $* 74 «m 75 if* 76
<fc*, 77 *f, 78 $▼, 79 to 80 «m, 81 «w M
*FifcWl Mil
^f*r ii trfwiiii^i ft%ft\*ni *ii% vtinnd m*i% h
111. The affix *qjs^ comes in the sense of a
Gotra descendant, after the word *nl, when the meaning is a
Traigarta.
Thus *nrf^n«Vr5r ; otherwise mfih (IV. 1. 95).
ffif- 11 *tnc ifir ftjro 1 *nr: ^ji% srnn**«r vnrar fi^ro* 1 ftrof***sq?ais<*in*-
112. The affix anj[ comes in the sense of a descen-
dant, after the words raw Ac,
The anuvptti of the word tine (I V. I. 98) does not extend to this
sutra. The affixes taught hereafter are generic patronymic affixes. The affix
*VH debars fi^ &c, Thus fift-t-*rvta : * a descendant of Siva \ Similarly
$tT> II
The word IWFJ 'a carpenter* occurs in this class; being a common
noun denoting an artisan, it would have taken the affix f^by IV. I, 153 ; the
present sutra prevents that It does not, however, prevent the application of
«ij ordained by IV. 1. 152. Thus *TCP(-l-VT*l-tiWf: » fKPtH^-ftTW M The
IT is elided by VI. 4. 134, The word *tirr occurs in this class, as well as in Sub-
hradi class IV, 1. 123) and Tikadi (IV. 1. 1 54). There are thus thrse forms of
this word : — iuto ; nimuA * and «iHtH: II The word forer occurs in this class
as well as in Kuftj&di class (IV. 1. 98) It has thus two forms : Vtto and
^IUiqH|: with chphaft.
The affix «p^will come after a word consisting of two syllables, when
it is the name of a river: the affix f^(IV. 1. 121 ) would have debarred the
ffifflfoi *?*of (IV. 1. 113) in case of patronymics formed from river names.
However, it is not so, because of this prohibition. The Patronymic from the
river name fi%oft would be formed by «T^(IV. 1. 113), asV^Jf: but this is
replaced by ftro II
lf^2^3$TT§^4^r^5^|T^6^7f^8^lT9^^^(^^^^ 10 *m*
20 <hf 21 *fta* («PnR) 22 <ar*l 23 w* 24 pro* 25 tftf? 26 *rc£| 27 qflw ;
Digitized by
Google
Bk IV. Ch. I. 5. 1 14 ] Patroaymic «m 11 * 671
28<n** 29ftc 30Vff Slqift^f 32iitft*T 33 srfqf^ 34 *ftf^ 35 *NftW 36
Mft* 37 38ifnrCTf 39if*n* 40f**n 41*Wf 42vdt 43^nr U^|45in^W
46 ft***** 47 w* 48 **fawr 49 lftfRT 50 far* 51 ft*W 52 ft^ 53 fRff* 54 mR*
55^Rm56^fW^57^58^rt59 5«ff^ 60 gfcftfifcir 61 fdftW 62 nm-
^f ( WT^l) 63 nf^ 64 iih^iT* 65 Hfw* 66 ^|^» 67 op* 68 *** 69 *rf8**
70 *ror 71 ftqre^2 v&$ 73 fw 74 jjt 75 tnepfq* 76 yiratf (51* *tf) 77 q^ 78 *?t-
5f^73f%^n%f80^81f^82OT#83 8Tft'ron B4 flfrift r*T*TM 85nH*fa*;
86 ftff fi re, 87 *tfn* f 88 ftfniPw. 89 **«, 90 inrrv, 91 **fr; 92 tot u 14
is an ni^im N
«?finpit ^m^»qtdwiSiHii>ii: I \\\ I
113. The affix «m comes, in the sense of a des-
cendant, after words *which are the names of rivers, or women,
when such words are not Vriddham words ; and when they
are used as names and not as adjectives.
The word Vfiddham in the sfltra, docs not mean the technical Pat*
ronymic of that name as defined in other Grammars and used in Stitras like
IV. 1. 1 66, but means the Vpddham as defined in this Grammar Lea word
whose first syllable is a Vpddhi letter (I. 1. 73). The word vra^ro shows the
orthography of the word to which the affix is to be added. The word *rft-
intffcp declares the meaning of that word and both attributes refer to one
and the s?me base, i. e. orthographically the base should have a Vpddhi letter
in the first syllable, and etymologically it should denote a man or a river.
The word flHlft*!**: applies both to the base and the affix.
Thus HJHT — IPfcf: * a son of the Yamuna/ q^m € son of the IrAvatiV
>?r^T. 'son of the VitastA/ sn^: 'son of the NarmaddA/ These are all names
of rivers. Similarly \ri%if. - son of SikshitA ' ^irenr - son of frl^Blf II
Why do we say • when not a Vfiddha word *? Observe ^prr^ri
•TO«t — 1MMIW ; so also **rar^RJ: formed by TO (IV. 1. 120). Why do we say
being * names of rivers or women' Observe trrofap and Wto M Why do we
say "when it is a name ?" Observe OTRTUT «TP*« fafim 'the son of a beautiful
woman. 9
**£(IV. 1. 120) is the general affix by which patronymics are formed
from feminine bases. The present sfltra is an exception to that
skwirfai<h^ftai$wiw 11 \V* R scfrt «ww, ifar, stop ^r R
igitized by VjOOQLC
*7* Patronymic w** [ Bk. IV. Ch. I.|. n$
114. The affix sp^ comes, in the sense of a des-
cendant, after a Nominal-stem denoting the name of a Rishi,
or the name of a person of the family of Andhaka, Vrishni,
and Kuru.
This debars the affix f*r n The Rishis are like Vasishtha, ViJvamit-
ra &c Thus qrftrar*, VttTOP II So also VT5*^, u**|q; being persons belong-
ing to the family of Andhaka ; and mqfa :, VJ^Z' being persons belonging
to the family of Vpshgi, and *$«*:, mftv being persons belonging to the
family of Kuru.
The word m% is the name of a Rishi, in forming its Patronymic, the
present sAtra enjoins ir;; but IV. I. 122 enjoins r$ ; thus there being a con-
flict, we apply the maxim of interpretation contained in I. 4. 2. So that the
Patronymic of «n% will be formed not by *r^ but by i§p 11 Thus UTOl: H
Similarly 4M*H a person of Andhaka family, forms its patronymic iM>nq«q ;
IV. 1. 152 by »* ; and not by n^, so alsoVj^tp* 'son of Vaishvaksena' a per-
son of Vpshrji, family ; so also %PRRt: * son of tihimasena' a person of Kuru
family.
Note — The words or sabdas are eternal ; how is it llien that rales applying to them
should he made dependant uoon their occurring in particular families or not, when families
themselves are non-eternal ? In other word, how a rule affecting a permanent object is con*
ditioned hy an impermanent adjunct ? To this, some reply that Panini has by mere coincidence
(and not as cause and effect) classified certain definite number of words as belonging to certain
families, and then the rule made applicable to them. Moreover a permanent object is some-
times designated by an impermanent object : as the permanent time is designated by the name
of Saka. Others say that the families of Andhaka &c, are also permanent, and the words
'Nakula' -Sihadeva* &c, found therein are, of course, permanent.
$fir 11 nigUMi^u^^ta'l^taffvfaiHui s* ijwrafr *ro%, «™v«unu3*: i
115. The affix snu comes in the sease of a descen-
dant, after the word matri when it is preceded by a Numeral,
or by the words ^n or Tup; and the letter T is substituted for
the final ae of m&tri.
Thus from fiprrj we have Vn^: " son of two mothers i. e. son of one
and adopted by another." ftm$+*^~V^+*+^~\ , n<l-l*+ V 1 "** (*• l * S 1 -)
Similarly qPHTijC:, SPTT3T, and irnRnjC- *
This sQtra is made in order to teach the substitution of short ? for the
Digitized by
Google
Bk IV. Ch. t. 5. 1 14 ] Patroaymic «nm «7»
28<nS* 29ftc 30Vff Slqif^f 32 iitft*T 33 srfqftSRT 34 *ftfo*r 35 rfftsr 36
Mft* 37 38 ifnrw 39 jf*** 40***l* 41 *t*r* 42 «»dt 43^81 U^|45in^W
46 ft***** 47 W* 48 **fawr 49 lftror 50 ft** 51 ft*W 52 ft^ 53 fRff* 54 **!«
55**^56TOw07^58**itt59sa^ 60 gfcftfiter 61 fdft*r62nm-
*CT ( 91^) 63 nft* 64 H**&k 65 HfW* 66 ^|^» 67 op* 68 *** 69 *rf8**
70 *nr 71 ftW72 to* 73*i**r 74 jn 75 tnwg* 76 y*** (y* *<*) 77 q* 78 nw-
5fT 73 ft^qwf 80 ?ft81 f?W 82 **# 83 STft TOP 84 flfrif* r*T* T II 85 ntftfa*;
86&ffRw, 87 stfn*, 88 ftfniPw. 89 **«, 90 inrrv, 91 f*i*; 92 tot tt 14
ii an mgrifrre N
«?finpit ^m^»qtdwiSiHii>ii: I ?« I
*«i$*rit fafforei i n^ift*i*^ ffiir tffarar iiww*H* v*wcfc i tra^roft mft i<W
113. The affix an^ comes, in the sense of a des-
cendant, after words *which are the names of rivers, or women,
when such words are not Vriddham words ; and when they
are used as names and not as adjectives.
The word Vjriddham in the sfltra, does not mean the technical Pat*
ronymic of that name as defined in other Grammars and used in Stitras like
IV. I. 1 66, but means the Vriddham as defined in this Grammar Lea word
whose first syllable is a Vpddhi letter (I. I. 73). The word vra^w shows the
orthography of the word to which the affix is to be added. The word *rft-
iff3<fci: declares the meaning of that word and both attributes refer to one
and the s?me base, i. e. orthographically the base should have a Vpddhi letter
in the first syllable, and etymologically it should denote a man or a river.
The word flHUH^W applies both to the base and the affix.
Thus HJHT — UPRf: • a son of the Yamuna.' qrm • son of the IrivatiV
>?K*P 'son of the VitastA/ Hrfrr 'son of the NarmaddA/ These are all names
of rivers. Similarly \n%Q: - son of SikshitA ' V^f - son of frl^Blf II
Why do we say • when not a Vfiddha word *? Observe ■ qiHMl 1 *!*
•TO«t— 1MMIW ; so also ttotct*: formed by TO (IV. 1. 120). Why do we say
being • names of rivers or women. 9 Observe OTPI*: and ^sfirq: M Why do we
say "when it is a name ?" Observe WRTKr «TP*« Jtv**t& 'the son of a beautiful
woman/
*3£(IV. 1. 120) is the general affix by which patronymics are formed
from feminine bases. The present sfltra is an exception to that
Digitized by
Google
672 Patronymic *r* » [ Bk. I V. Ch. I. J. 115
114. The affix aru^ comes, in the sense of a des-
cendant, after a Nominal-stem denoting the name of a Rishi,
or the name of a person of the family of Andhaka, Vrishni,
and Kuril.
This debars the affix f^U The Rishis are like Vasishtha, Vilvamit-
ra &c Thus qrfov*, ViTTOP M So also VT^Fy. y <l»M<d» being persons belong-
ing to the family of Andhaka ; and qrQ$?:, «TT353P being persons belonging
to the family of Vpshni, and *$<*:, orftf* being persons belonging to the
family of Kuru.
The word «n% is the name of a Rishi, in forming its Patronymic, the
present sOtra enjoins in;; but IV. 1. 122 enjoins If? ; thus there being a con-
flict, we apply the maxim of interpretation contained in I. 4. 2. So that the
Patronymic of m^ will be formed not by u^i but by if? 11 Thus UPTO II
Similarly 4UHH a person of Andhaka family, forms its patronymic n? i qq«q ;
IV. I. 152 by <nj ; and not by ii*r, so also V%3S%^ 'son of Vaishvaksena' a per-
son of Vpshni, family ; so also VrcF*: 4 son of Bhimasena' a person of Kuru
family.
tfoU, — The words or sabdas are eternal ; how is it then that rales applying to them
should be made dependant uoon their occurring in particular families or not, when families
themselves are non-eternal ? Id other word, how a rule affecting a permanent object is con*
ditioned by an impermanent adjunct ? To this, some reply that Panini has by mere coincidence
(and not as cause and effect) classified certain definite number of words as belonging to certain
families, and then the rule made applicable to them. Moreover a permanent object is some-
times designated by an impermanent object : as the permanent time is designated by the name
of Saks, Others say that the families of Andhaka Ac., are also permanent, and the words
'Nakula' -Sihadeva* &c, found therein are, of course, permanent.
3fir II Hltf^MIHI^I^NlllVgiilf^N^ S* TO* *mfr, 4*K«IIHI^: I
115. The affix stu comes in the sense of a descen-
dant, after the word matri when it is preceded by a Numeral,
or by the words hh or ^5; and the letter T is substituted for
the final ae of m&tri.
Thus from ft*n$ we have %*ni*: u son of two mothers i. e. son of one
and adopted by another." flfn^ + «C^-\*nj + * + «T -Vini* * + V" ** • 1. 5 *•)
Similarly qFHtij*:, qfalrii s, and Wffg* »
This sfttra is made in order to teach the substitution of short v for the
Digitized by
Google
BK. IV. CH. 1. 1. Il8 J f ATRONYMIC IfJ^ 6j$
q? of HPJ ; for the word IT* would have taken the affix il*r by the general rule
IV. i. 83. The sQtra contains the word ftror* in the feminine gender, show-
ing by implication that the rule applies where the word ilTf denotes female.
Thus &ft<ft%- s $ | in[ 'he who measures together*. Its patronymic will be
QPiTC: 'son of a fellow-measurer* ; because here the word *n*does not mean
• mother \ but a ' measure \ Nor the word MFWTJ 'barley measurer' will be
affected by this rule. Why do we say * when preceded by a Numeral &c"*
Observe *rfcnp 'son of Sum&tp\ The wordVff%V is formed by IV. I. 123
as belonging to SubhrAdi class.
116. The affix ^ni^ comes in the sense of a descen-
dant, after the word *&n, and when this affix is added, qpikf
is the substitute of € Kan jk \
Thusq^3rar*TO4'»qiFfta: 'the son of a virgin* viz Karga orVyasa*.
This debars the lf> of IV. 1. 121. The word *F*tt means a virgin, the son
of a virgin is produced by immaculate conception. flR VMlHlfl wn ffo fo&foft
f ^P^rrt *5i^ri%, vm y^ftt tot ^rnroft m
117. The affix sot conies after the words frofr 9
5Jjp f and wz& 9 when the sense is a descendant of the family
of Vatsa, Bharadvaja and Atri respectively.
Thus\*rfc-*ra: otherwise VfifSp M Ajp-insnCt otherwise *hffc* 9
OT*F£ ** sn%^ f otherwise 8Ptffc H
In some texts the word $nr is used and not 51T n The former being a
feminine word, its Patronymic will be TOJ^l:, by IV. 1. 120 when it does not
mean a descendant of H*HJ*t< U
ftesm van \%& i
118. The affix ztn^ comes optionally after the word
*fter in denoting a descendant.
The word <<far being the name of a female would haw taken »iw by
Digitized by
Google
6 74 Patronymic tqr [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. § m
IV. 1. 113 ; but this *T\ would have been prohibited by IV. 1. 121 as it is a
dissyllabic feminine word Hence the necessity of the present sutnu Thus
^3* or^* 'son of Pill/
119. The affix yy comes optionally in the sense
of a descendant after the word ing^R as well as the affix smr^i
Thus we get three forms, *r^+t^-iiff%*:; j^+n^-*ti*gwr.; *>
*ifW*n w*Rrs**r^n wrffare 11 n* ys^raiftwrayE n
120. Words ending in the feminine affixes take
the affix g^ in forming their Patronymic
The word «ft in the aphorism means • words ending in the feminine
affixes er^ &c' That is, words ending in long nr and f of the feminine. Thus
fafHr+l^-^KW (IV. 1.2). So also OTpfo **Son of Vinat* or Suparnt".
But qrfrr and qrcj: formed by il*r meaning sons of nf%T and ^tf , for though
these words are feminine, they do not end in feminine affixes.
VArt: — The affix ¥f> comes after *r*T when meaning yqu Thus
*FTta: = ^V "bull." Here '^jthak' has not the patronymic force. The patrony-
mic will be *nrc ' the son of a mare. 9
Vdrt: — The feminine words ws^rr and ^rf^T take the affix *T^ in
forming the patronymic Thus &s*V u the son of a curlew." qfrfaan u the son
of a cuckoo.'
5^n 11 \\\ R q^Tft 11 fic-snr. (sfbraf **) I
ff^r 11 cj^n 4ritauuu«diw£t 1^ irarair *r*fll »
121. The affix < 5^' comes in the sense of a
descendant, after a word ending in a feminine affix and con-
sisting of two vowels.
Thusjwqr «n?«*-*T%«i: 'son of DattA', flft*: u son of Gopi ". This
debars the u«i of I V. 1. 1 1 3.
Why do we say 'having two vowels?* Observe UTS* * son of tnj*r ' f
which is a trisyllabic word, and not dissyllabic
Digitized by
Google
BK. IV. CH. I. 5 125 ] GOTRA 1$ II 675
122. The affix l ^ry , comes, in the sense of a
descendant, after a dissyllabic Nominal-stem ending in shor£
T, but not, however, after a word ending in the patronymic
affix *s^«
The anuvritti of 'strf docs not extend to this aphorism. The force
of the word ^ in the sutra is to draw the anuvrtti of the word STf* of the*
last sutra. Thus BffTO: 'the son of Atri\ ^W: 'the son of fafa*' I
Why do wc say " after a word ending in short j " ? Observe jnfifc "son
of **r" M Here W though a dissyllabic word, yet ends in n II
Why do we say 'not ending in the patronymic affix fn' ? Observe
OTTRF*: 'son of frfir' M Here though $rfir is a dissyllabic word ending in short
f, it does not take the affix f^ for f here is the affix fw (IV. 1. 95.); so also
93njr*H: II Why do we say 'having two vowels'? Observe IRi^ "son of 'ffipr"
jfa* ii jf* T$vnfc*'< w&<ir$ifrft **uwD *hi% 1
123. The affix 'mf comes in the sense of a des-
cendant after the stems giff &c.
This debars f*£ and other affixes. The word ■* in the sutra shows
that some words not occuring in the list of $p*rft may take the fa*, as it is an
»4lt>l«i«i«|2 11 For though the words *rqr, Oji arc not in the list, we find still
forms like imht, <TFTW &c
Thus $pTOrr**~f&nkip 11
1 5*. 2 ft*** (ft^JC) 3*V&«, 4*RT*TC» 5*RTO*, (*Rnm) 6 1HMJ *, ^^0%,
(sagr*), 8 foror, (f^jm), 9tifrft t 10 tf**pft, 11 tfiWh 12 ft^, 13 j^, i4«nraR<c,
is ^r*T^ f I6mrf, 17 ftw, 18 *t*, 10 ft*, 20 **** 21 tr*nr, 22 g*, 23 to, 24 ^m
to **) 25 i Rrcft, 20 ig&rg , 27 fart, 28 Brfaro, 29 %***, 30 $*ir**, 31 ip*^, 32 TOTTO,
33 q«4li*, 34 g^TPT^ 35 ff yi^WIHiinlMg I 36 ffrer, 37 fEKHTCf , 38 *T%W, 39 snnp*.
40hi?t(*ttot)41 TO; 42 y^, 43 ^ 44 f**, 45 *&m, 46 *n#¥, 47 gm
48 g*?L 49 3^**' 50 5*™** 5l ^vf» 52 3* 53«ftrani, 54aprTfa>r, 55 *6 \ R*U
56 fawfoni, 57 tilM*?, 58 farflrfop?, 59 qftr^, 60 ST^^T; 61 ^R!H, 62 tp*reT,
C: * «STft, 6 4 $»fo>T, 65 mjmr, 06 fFirf^psr, 67 ig%T*mr, 08 «T3*fe*, (*3*fe)
69 !*?*' 70 ****** 71 **» 72 **• 73 *&*• 74 ***' 75 *wpi. 76 w. 77 ****
78 *nrm, 79 *Rrar, 80 $qrar, 81 ^, 82 iraj, 83 ^r^j, 84 ^j, 85 i^jg, 86 w&
87 *ȣ, 88^t, 89 n*, 90^, 91 $$ffcffr, 92 *r**, 93 *rf*l II
fni 11 fwrot?r?^Od*u«irw ^r^w sT^rt%tr% t^in^wr h*i% i
10
Digitized by
Google
6y6 Patronymic if » [Bk. IV. Cii .1. 5- 127
124. The affix &*( comes after the words *Vi-
karna 1 and 'Kushita', when they mean the descendants of
Kfcyapa. :
Thus^^fip and 4a<ftd4t4: « ^RST: ; otherwise we have ^ifo and $a*t*
frf^t formed by IV. I. 95.
125. The affix '^ comes in the sense of a des-
cendant, after the word H and the augment g*» is added when
this affix is to be applied.
Thus ^+**-S+3^+ia* (I. I. 46)-?^+*^-$%*: (VII. 1. 2)
126. The affix '%*? comes in the sense of a
descendant, after the words ^^lop r &c. and the substitute j^
takes the place of the final of these words before this affix.
In the case of those words in this list which end in a feminine affix,
the present stitra teaches merely the substituion of fiCg, for they would have
taken the affix l^by IV. 1. 12a But in the case of other words, the Sfltra
teaches both the substitution of ct? and the addition of fa^i
Thus 3r?qpft + ***=* 3Fqrf5fo+ g^° *n*UftPw 'son of KalyAnL' 3*111 +
V^ yrr*P^+ g^,= ^PTTl^ y ll Similarly ^pfrm^i: H In these last two words, there
is Vf iddhi of both the initial vowel * and the second vowel *f of *r. This is
done by the special rule VI I. 3. 19.
8 *Sfcft 9 sqgr, io *Prer, n wwt, 12 <rctfr »
&«mwi m n ^v* ll q^r ll g^rpro , m (^)
inmn ji^far ftRP i
127. The affix 'ST*l/ comes in the sense of a
descendant, after the word ^<s*i, and Spf^ is optionally the
substitute of the final before this affix.
The word £37T means literally one who wanders (<H*Gr) from one
family ($?*) to another, i. e. an unchaste woman. This sfltra is made to teach
substitution only, for a»<*rr would have taken la^by the general rule IV. I.
120. Thus a^CT+^^SPtf^+^-^rafHw or cft<£q : 'son of an unchaste
woman.* This word 3&&1 being a word denoting contempt, will take also the
affix I* by IV. 1. 131. Thus $U$X: ll
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. I. § 131. ) * Patronymic «m$ 1 677
Md«KMir ^K R \\C II M<*lfa > ^d^fcHU !fc^j I
128. The word <<*<HM takes the affix ifccq$ in form-
ing the patronymic.
Thus ^nrHir € son of ChatakS, *.
V&rt : — So also after the masculine word n^f M Thus **t*£v f son of
Cha^aka'.
P^r/: — In forming a descendant denoting a female, there is luk-eli-
sion of the affix. Thus the female descendant of ^rrkt will be <t?CTt the *H,
being added as belonging to Aj&di class IV. i. 4.
^f^ : it «Tlm4i si^ ^^wf nf^Ri ft
129. The affix ' ffj$ ' comes in the sense of a des-
cendant after the word *ftar I
Thus 'fcrrer + f$ »*rT$tf M Of the affix f flhrak \ the letter ^ is replaced
by qa (VII. 1. 2), ^ causes Vfiddhi (VII. 2. 1 18) and makes the ud&tta accent
fall on the final (IV. 1. 165). Thus the real affix is ir*, but the ^is elided by
VI. 1. 66 and so the affix that is actually added is q* II
This word ifr*TT occurs in the Subhr&di class IV. I. 123, also, thus it
takes the affix ' tfhak ' as welL Thus ift^*: H
srr^afi^rn 11 \$* n ^ft 11 arret?, sfNro (nfrirar.) 1
jjPr* 11 "ThiRir ww ^taTfPTrapif j^tt Bin^ it^rat «nfir ft
130. The affix ' *rra$ ', comes in the sense of a
descendant after the word '^fter,' according to the opinion of
Northern Grammarians.
Thus ^farc 11 It might be objected that the smff contains the letter nr
unnecessarily, for qe would have served the purpose as well, because itNtT ends
in long «n already. The objection is valid in the case of iih*r, but the
very fact that PAgini uses this affix *nr?, shows by implication, that there
are other words also which take this affix, and in whose case the affix
^ would not suffice. Thus the words 3|* and <p* also take this affix, as
^rrsrc, <nrrc: 11 The mention of the name of Northern Grammarians is for
the sake of showing respect only.
OTitfrsrriimii <^nft» £5npr. f sr (5^)11
Digitized by
Google
678 Gotra i;n [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. § 135
131. The affix 'ar^* comes optionally, in the
sense of a descendant, after the feminine words denoting
mean objects.
The anuvfitti of $^is to be read in this s&tra,and not of *m%*, though
the latter immediately precedes it The word *pr means those who are
defective or wanting in any bodily limb or organ, or who are low in social
status and religious principles. This sfltra debars ¥$ which would come in
the other alternative. Thus 9ffdro * the son of an one eyed woman ', or qn^RPt
*TCIT: or *T%«F ' son of a female-slave \
132. The affix * &w ' comes in the sense of a des-
cendant, after the word * fq^-*^[ '.
This debars sr^ II Thus ftnc?*[ + 5^-=^a^*IN: ' the son of the father's
sister \ The ^ of the affix is replaced by fa U
^fo «5ta: II ^* II
ffri : 11 ft^Mtjwumuiq <rf%i q*% 3m urefa •
133. The final vowel of 'ft^-**^' is elided when
the affix * #m \ in the sense of a descendant, is added.
Thus ftHc^ + *$»qr7rc3%3|: II This sfttra indicates by jftApaka that the
word fq^c^H takes the affix ' £hak * also.
*n^sng*r 11 \vi 11 q^rft « fflT^» ^ te^i *fc sta ) n
jfri : 11 frfrgft^tT^^r, RgM^&hfe cFHry^gtPi *rei% i trqjnroi *fti $tw* 11
134. So also, after the word € w^^m ' the affix
1 ^m/ is added, and the final is elided when * ST^ ' follows,
in forming patronymics.
The Sfltras IV. 1. 132, 133 above apply to m^mq also. As Hl^<?i>« :
or ir^c^tta: ' the son of a mother's sister *.
*frf: 11 i^iif^rfMNj: sr$f?t>3fcT&( 4*^*441 *nfir 11
135. The affix 1 3^' comes in the sense of a des-
cendant, after the bases denoting quadrupeds.
This debars ar^ &c. Thus qpr^+*Hr'5|iT*FS?&f: (IV. 4. 147, the £
being elided before *). So also dlrH*W and MIH4: from ftlf?f*fi? and ^*f M
Digitized by
Google
BK. IV. Ch. 1. 5 140 ]. GOTRA WJ, ■ 6 79
fftr: 11 swift** ««|s>*nrni mjiw) ^m 1
136. The affix '^ comes, in the sense of a
/ descendant, after the words *^lf¥ &c.
This debars «m and «^ &c. Thus mi*:; «ifq II The word ^»
when it means «a cow' will of course get the affix *H.by the last Sutra. The
present sfltra applies when it does not mean a four-footed animal, but means
'a woman who has one child only*.
1 tf*, 2 ife, 3 «fc 4 1&, 5 ftf*, 6 5fr, 1 vtwfcx, 8 fin gl
Trawg^ro^B *V» II i^ift II ^re-^S^ **M
137. The affix *rac comes in the sense of the des-
cendant, after the words '^nrcr' and 'xt^f.
This debars *»«» and «n* respectively. Thus o^: ( IV. 4. 168) 'a
person of Kshatriya class**. This is the special meaning of the word; it does
not mean 'the son ol a Rftja.' The word <pr: will mean « the son of a King/
So also «3gt$ 'son of the father-in-in-law.*
138. The affix « gha* comes, in the sense of a des-
cendant, after the word ' Kshattra.*
Thus wft* • a Kshatriya.' This is also a class name. The son of w*
will be «n%: « The affix n here should not be confounded with the technical
* which means the affixes inland n*l* (1. 1. 22).
5551^1: IWI
^r: n ^^*w«HHLmrtwfl<M^iWW«^ m **& »wft h
139. The affix 'kha* conies, in the sense of a
descendant, after the Nominal-stem «kula' and a compound
word that ends in 4 kula.'
In the next sutra, it will be taught that the word $* when not preced-
ed by any other word, takes the affixes 'yaf and 'dhakan.' That indicates
9 by implication that the present sutra applies to the simplew ord 3* and to the
words ending in ^ also. Thus fstfsp, WW^:, * (*H$<Q+ »
ai^^K^cK^ I *K**M l H *«• » l^ft " «H<f«KI<. *««w^!.
qtj, T*U5lfr R
Digitized by
Google
^63o Patronymic «h#i u . [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. § 144
wftn 11 btptxrpt ji*i ire* wfj^ft, HirertprPtFr* y£<i4uiiHft<i y^fRfr ft3t*q% 1 u^
140. The affixes 'let' and 'g^Rsr* come optionally
after the word ' kula / when it is not preceded by any other
word which gets the designation of pada (I. 4. 14).
The word bt^TT? means when the word • kula ' is not the last member
of a compound. Thus $?*:, *hi?UH» : II By the use of the word • optionally/
we get the affix 9 also. Thus jfrfln : ll The word ^rj: has udatta on the first
syllable (VI. 1. 213).
The word q? has been defined in I. 4. 14. The word w is not
a pada. Therefore *.£*<* will take these affixes. Thus *§^?*f:, *ltf*cUHi: and
141. The affixes 'afsjr' and '^rs^' come option-
ally after the word ' mahakula.'
Thus in*T$<tf, *tigl*<fl** : and *W^rQn: ll The last is formed by the
affix of of IV. 1. 139.
142. The affix 'z^f comes optionally, in the sense
of a descendant, after the word 4 dushkala.*
Thus ^533: II By the force of the word * optionally ' we get 19 also.
Thus jefttf* II
WQW - II w B <*^ft II ^rg:, ^: R
gfa: II «y<imw3| S : TO* **!% H
143. The affix 'chha' comes in the sense- of the
descendant, after the word ^rg H
This debars *THU Thus CTtfo: ' the sister's son/
%»d»3*i 11 y** n q^ 11 ^13:, **rat * n
31%: 11 *rs*ran<i^ ******* ihtS 1 *i*ui*an 11
144. The affix ' vyat ' also comes, in the sense
of a descendant, after the word 4 HTJ ' II
By the force of the word ^r in the sOtra, wc get the affix & as well
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. I. S 147. ] Patronymic * * 6S1
This debars «r? II Thus %jrron or^T^hr- 'the brother's son *. The 3 of «*^
regulates the accent, making it svarita.
145. The affix * vyan ' comes after the word c *nj f
when the sense is that of € an enemy \
The word HW means € enemy \ The sense of descendant is not
connoted by this affix. The difference between «f* and «q^ is in accent (VI.
I. 185 and VI. 1. 197). Thusqiopir W?^ "by the sinful enemy". HTf^
qr*3?- a u the enemy is a thorn *.
^cqifiv4Uq» II \*$ B *%lft II MMllfapr, Z* I
146. The affix * 3« f comes, in the sense of a des-
cendant, after the words ^ifr &c.
This of course debars ** &c Thus CT^+^-^firtP € the son of
Revati '. So also Mmm fi *: (VII. 3. 50)
8 ^rqif , 9 *°*HT* f 10 f^TO , 11 (*$*W0 12 ^TTOn*
147. And when contempt is to be expressed, the
affix or comes, in the sense of a descendant, after a feminine
word denoting a Gotra-dcscendant.
By the force of the word *r in the sfltra we get the affix n^alsow
When one's father is not known, and he is called by a name derived from his
mother, it casts a slur upon his legitimacy ; hence such an epithet is a fae? or
€ a defamatory or contemptuons epithet '. Thus nrtf is a female gotra-descen-
• dant Her son will be called urip, as *rpf s WF* M So also rnffr*: 11 Similarly
the son of ^cM^hI will be **rp*nFT: and J&«|*|i|ft*: »
This affix being added to a Gotra word has the force of a Yuvan affix,
Why do we say * a Gotra descendant \ Observe qdft&ft wmi* (formed
by 1% IV. 1. 120). Why do we say 'female descendant? Observe ^q*lflr
3TF*: H Why do wc say 'when contempt is meant*? Observe itpWHT^W:
which is to be explained as nn*& WWb JHT* *^T *nR| II IMIItdWItWUtlf* *W*
f fH 'flffcf 3^T II
Digitized by
Google
682 Gctra ft* II { Bk. IV. Ch. I. § i8j>
■ 11 ■ ■ I I . ■ ■
g<tf<iw i *m3ql «ihi**«4««<* ot* »
148. When contempt is to be expressed, the affix
' Z$ ' is diversely added in the sense of a descendant after
a Vriddha word denoting Sauvira Gotras.
Thus NHiftfM* : ' the son of BhAgavitti \ So also *U"lft«ift^ formed
from $*lfa3+sr^(IV. i. 83) m^lPFW , and then adding s^ 11 In the alterna-
tive we have the affix q*$ (IV. 1. 101) as «4l«ift4|IJMVso also *Tr*1%^fft: II The
word graron belongs to Subhr4di class IV. 1. 123 : and forms *TRrof*R(:, his
son will be mHimnfofr or mortify II Of course, when ccntempt is not ex-
pressed, we have MMifl-HUH: only.
The operation of this sAtra is, in fact, confined to the three words
*?piftfa; *»uift»* * > and "n^im as given in the k&rik&. .
Q. What is the necessity of using the word *Vfddha' in the stitra, for
the anuvptti of the word 'gotra' is understood in the sOtra,and a Sauvira class
Nominal-stem formed with a Gotra affix will necessarily have a Vj-ddhi letter
in its first syllable ? The word Vfddha is employed in the sGtra to stop the
anuvftti of ftrar: ; for had 'Vfddha' not been used, then with the anuvftti of
ift* from the last sfltra, there would have come theanuvjtti of fferap also, but by
using • Vp'ddha ' the anuvftti of * Gotra ' only is taken, and not that of < striy4h*.
Why do we say " of the Sauviras M ? Observe BWilWlW II Why do
we say € in denoting contempt ' ? Observe >(Hift*u<Hlr 1WTO* II Why d6 we
say 'diversely* ? The word w*jh indicates the anomalous nature of these four
sutras IV. 1. 147 to 15a Thus the first of these viz IV. 1. 147 only denotes
contempt, the last of these viz IV. 1, 150, denotes 'Sauvira' only and
not contempt ; whilst the middle two namely IV. I. 148 and 189 denote both
• contempt % and • Sauvira \ _
$P53^11*«MI q^ll^:,^-^(5^^-^^5)l'
KArikA «I3^W W^pir ^T *T**faftP fo*f* *y!T I
189. When contempt is to be expressed, the
affix 3 (as well as the affix 8^) comes in the sense of a des- v
Digitized by
Google
Bk.IV. Ch. I. J. ist 1 fa* * 6*j
cendant, after a Nominal-stem ending in the affix (^ and
denoting a Sauvira Gotra*
Thus the son of iftt? will be ttt*H i nfi : formed by the affix ftj3^ (IV. u
t$4) as this word belongs to TikAdi class. The son of Y&mund&yani will b*.
cither gy^Mta* or 4l<w<l4ft<lii H
But when contempt is not to be expressed, the son of qr^n^P will
benrj^rat^it Thus qry3^+^-iny*raft+ o(ii. 4. s8) n ^Hn«ft* *
So also when persons of Suvtra country are not meant, 9 is not added.
ThusVfcl^A* ■ '
The %: of the sAtra refers to f^r and not to fa*, for a stem formed by
ft* will not have a Vfiddhi letter in the first syllable and will not be called
'Vfiddham'; and the anuvritti of this word is understood in the sOtra.
According to the KArikft, three ft^Rr stems, all belonging to Tik&df
class, are only governed by this sfttra viz ngsj, wqpir and qrofart: H The son of
5^ is VArshyAya^L
*ftn 11 <M u *i«fiii*in*ui*ii>3f dtffcftrorapFPit ^fir^ *m*ft *ro?c ; 11
150. The affixes or and fqj come, in the sense of
a descendant of a person belonging to Suvtra country, after
the words PhAne&hriti and Mimata.
This debars <u^l By the rule of composition in II* 2. 34, the
word ft*nr consisting of less syllables than qsr^rrST, ought to have been placed
first Its not being placed first in this sfltra indicates, that SQtra I. 3. 10
does not apply here. So that both the affixes «f and f%^ are applied to each
of these words, and not one to each respectively, Thus_<Ki**TW: or *pzigtir-
1H : ; VIST: or^lTORtf%: U
When not denoting Sauvtra Gotras, tfe have fl^KdHH * and VmnFP
(by <tf*H Sec IV. 1. 101 and IV. 1. 99). The word Pm belongs to Naflftdl-
class. (IV. 1. 99).
5^%^t <nr n \\\ II q^rfo II $^*it^W:, **: I
151. The affix **t comes, in the sense of a descend- •
ant after the words *Kuru' &c.
Thus $$+°*=t&rcs* : II So also «m& H The word ** takes the affix
°H by IV. 1. 172, so that the form £rc*T is evolved both under the present
11
Digitized by VjOOQlC
684 * ■* i [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. 5. 151
sfitra and sQtra 172; but the difference in these two words is this. The word
qftro formed by the ** of IV. I. 172, loses its affix in the plural, because °*
of IV. 1. 172 is a Tadr&ja affix (see II 4. 62): but the word £it*( formed by
the present sfltra retains its affix in the plural. As ^KTW If The word \rr«*
occurs in the Tik&di class (IV. 1. 154), and it takes as such the affix ft**. As
The word U1*K occurs in this class and it means the caste known as
Rathak&ra. Rathak4ra is a caste a little lower than the twice-born. See
Y&jfiyavalkya Smriti, V. 95. But when the word VttK means a person who
makes chariots, that is an artisan, it will take the affix °* not by this Sfitra,
but by the succeeding sfitra.
The word $ftpft occurs in this class. Its derivative will be 3tftF9* ll
There will not be puhvadbh4va as required by VI 3. 34 &c For had there
been puhvadbhAva, then by H^f tn^tit, all Bha bases will become pu&vad
before a taddhita affix except v II Therefore 3iffcft+vq*»%ftFi+ozr it At this
stage rule VI. 1. 144 will appear and cause the elision of fe and we shall have
%*^H*9 s »3i3i| H But this is not the form desired, hence the word ^ftpft Is
read with the feminine affix in the list*
The word %?r takes this affile in the Vedic literature. Therefore; the
form *N( in the modern Sanskrit is incorrect
The word qpror occurs in this class With the exception of accent, it
s treated in every other respect like a word of Kanv&di class, a subdivision of
Garg&di (IV. 4. 105). Thus disciples of qrarcuf: will be formed by the affix
*r* (1 V. 2. 1 1 1> As qmw + *T^=»*T*iW: (VI. I. 105). The plural will be
hfTJflOT: (II* 4* 64)- The feminine gender will be qrroft (IV. 1. 16) or qwmiq.ft
(IV. 1. 17). The Yuvan will be qwmw : (IV. I. 101). So also it will take
vi^whcn the sense of collection &c is expressed ( IV. 3 127 ): as qpranft H
* But as to accent, it will not be like KaQv&di words, for while those words
being formed by the affix *PO vi " havc ud&tta on the first syllable (VI. 1. 197}
the accent of qpftut will be governed by ** n
1 $*, 2 nifc (»rfirX 3 *n^j* f 4 *h*hh (snrarcir), 5 Ktmn, 6 qr-
*S* f 7 mmw- *rf**,8 *ff*, 9 ftitfit (*fir), 10 ^iR^^iR, 11 ^r^(or^r^)
12 *TOW, 13 f^ffj, 14 |55BT*, (rff*lfi*)i W ftf*| # , 16 ^Rfl% # , 17 jtfjwftft,
18 inRiTft, 19 Stfhft, 20 $*, 21 %ps&n ( m<m» i ), 22 g*, 23 3*, 24 q^r (stoX
. 25 5*°, 26 «m t 27 **, 28 *fttflr, 29 qHH^Rl, 30 yyfa, 31 qnmr*, 32
53TCW, 33 W*Xf , 34 ^rafarc, 35 yrttarc, 36 qfa*»rc # , 37 f*, 38 jra^, 39 *ij,
40^, 41 trrfti*, 42 TO*f # , 43 qjw, 44 *£, 45 %*, 46 fWt (nfWt),
47 qiTOW ^^W^WrdWr ( is a Vartika ). 48 ftwfc<ii, 49, 3^, 50 TO***,
51 qfflfci> 52 ^Jift, 53 jffcfttrc.
Digitized by
Google
Bk IV. Ch. 1. §. IS4 ] l**l» «5
(^r.)«
152. The affix 'nt* comes in the sense of a des-
cendant! after a Nominal stem ending in ' sen&, 9 after the
word 'lakshana,' and after words denoting artisans.
The word qjrft means 'handicrafts,* such as weavers, barbers, potters^
&c Thus ^Rfrnt imfrn-p «w*, nr*j*ic*:, £r*>raw, to?**: 11
*fl««iifim n ts* ii
*ftr m ttorarTO^irtWl sra p* vm^r *nrt% ¥ft^f •firt o
153. According to the opinion of Northern Gram-
marians, the affix 'fsr' comes in the sense of a descendant,
after the words ending in * senft/ the word ' lakshana, 9 and
words expressing artisans.
Thus qrrft^ft:, frfWfa:, oraffe, URgqifct ^Rtororft: m As to the word tn&
•carpenter.' See IV. I. 112. It will have m*** and firf*:, but will not take
fw 11 The word sfrf^f being a Vpddha, non-gotra word, will take fo*^ under
IV. 1. 157 according to the Northern Grammarians, as Timnrffr V
?Pr 11 ft* idnrafrq' *r*>**pi% flfHTO* «nrt% u
154. The affix 'fas^ 9 comes, in the sense of a
descendant, after the words fan &c.
ThusWrnr*:, %<rcnift: II The word ^ occurs in this class. In taking
this affix, it adds an intermediate if as qimuufr: II The word eftro occurs in
this class, and denotes a Kshatriya : because it is immediately preceded by
the word «nta-3TOT\ft -TOT* *n%*P, his son will be auraia with, «?st which ends
in an affix denoting a Kshatriya (IV. 1. 168). But the word qgfec* formed by
the affix 04 of IV. 1. 150 will take the affix ny and not fai^ of this SAtnu
See II. 4. 58 and 68. .
lfinir, 2 nffenr, 3 *ar. * fRr (in?) 5 ftrar, 6-toc (ttoX * ion*
(w*r) 8 In*, 9 ujsf, 10 *c*, 11 m**, 12 #*, 13 nf*r, 14 4ta**, 15
5*(*r*) 16 *rcr, 17 hm (%foO 18 •?*** Oftro), 19 *to*. 20 $(ttfc 9
21 iftmfir, 22 ^Jtror, 23 Wr, 24 tfhror ( Wm) 25 faro, 26 *nrar
(**nrar K.) 27 ^^H*, 28 5pr r 29 up, 30 **?*, 31 gqpn*, 32 nm (im?4%
33 HH5T, 34 ismn (fjiwrrj ****) 35 J*, 36 Bfc^ 37 3*9 0n*O 38 *»
Digitized by
Google
686 Rn* O [ Bk. IV. Ch. Lf. 157
*, 39 mipfll, 40 «ft*0s«*X 41 ifar, 42 mn 43 w, 44 «n*. 45 ****?,
46 *$, 47 **$ 48 ttnafCT ( as weU as UTTOCT ).
155. The affix ffcsr comes in the sense of a des-
cendant after the words Kausalya, and K&rm&rya.
This debars fix N Thus gfrqFqruft * and q»T HiJim<?|: II These words> how-
ever, do not mean * the son of qfiNrt* or mk*" but they mean M the son of
qiferc, and srita" because of the following Vftrtika
Vdrt; — The words fij, ^i^ gjinfc qjpt and **t take the augment ge
before the affix fan II Thus qmmmfl: , ^RFOMft :, *h\H\k*SPi ' t mnvoft: and qr»
"iraPn it
*tf*ra* ii ^^rthif *r fan <rr«*: h
156. The affix 'phifi' comes, in the sense of a des-
cendant, after a dissyllabic word ending in the affix « mtj.
This debars f^» Thus qspfogfr s 'son of Kftrtra,' {PiAfr* 'son of a
HArta.'-
Why do we say "which ends in the affix vf*" ? Observe rontTO
4 son of D&ksht' (IV. I, ioi). Why do we say a ;' dissyllabic word? Observe
cfrprft: • son of Awrf u
Vdrt? — The pronouns 'tyad &c/ optionally take the affix fan or *c* (l
Thus mnnri% or **&**, wift» or mv, m^Rift? or m* it
^fNf fgr^Thrac n iv» n q^rft u ^rat, f^crac ^flm^ (&&0 n
157. According to the opinion of Northern Gram-
marians, after words with a Vriddhi in the first syllable, when
U is not a Gotra-name, the affix ' phi$ ' is employed in the
sense of a descendant. "~
Thus mmtlMWfl : " son of «*T»»JR» W JnTHOTTOfa: 'son of nrw 1 U itfwr*
lift: • son of a barber. 9 This latter is formed in spite of IV* i % 152, because rule
j. 4. 2 applies hem,
Why do we say 'according to the opinion of Northern Grammarians* ?
Observe vnvqffr* Why do we say ' after a word having a Vfiddhi in the first
syllable'? Observe qT^TC!% ' son of ng^ .' Why do we say 'not being a
Gotra-name? Observe ifrpift: U ^
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Bk. IV. Ch. 1. 5. 160] . ft* a 687
^ftr- u 4iDm fftwnftm ji^h&sto ftpE^^tzri)' >ro$ WEiBrtrt^ ^taf wnff: •
158. The augment ^ (Kuk) is added to the
words Vakina &c. when the patronymic affix 'phift* follows.
This q i faH<*iiqfl !, «ftwi»nifl * U This debars f^&c But if the anu-
vptti of T^Nt is read into this aphorism, then it becomes an optional rule.
In that case we have in the alternative : — qrftift:, viftfc* tt
1 *lfaT, 2 Hpn (nft* K.) S «f%* («nfcr KX 4 «!*, 5 wp, 6 ^f*f-
159. The augment '5^ optionally comes after
a stem ending with the word p&tra, when the patronymic
affix 'phifl 1 follows.
The anuvritti of the words "according to the opinion of Northern
Grammarians when the word has a Vriddhi in the first syllable" must be read
into this sfitra. Of course, a word ending in <nr cannot be a Gotra-word, for
a Gotra word means a grandson or a still lower descendant Hence a word
ending in yr having Vriddhi in the first syllable will take the affix ftir by
IV. 1. 157; the present aphorism only rules that it takes the augment 3^
optionally.
Thus we have three forms : — «i|fiVjM<*iinfa: or mfi f ymPi* or mfl i Mft; n
So also qinffm^mfa:, *l«8is*niWr: and qinft^fll: 11
«MIHt*lfch«l4«4H II \%o n Vfrffo II MMIH , ^Wl^ ft^Ci f^t ft
jftn 11 «h2ws5**<^it*<^ fa^R^wc h^rt wg% srei *flw u
160. According to the opinion of Eastern Gram-
marians, after a stem not having a Vriddhi vowel in the first
syllable, the affix 'phin* is diversely employed in the sense of
a descendant.
Thus Tj^Mufi: or *Sr^l%: 'son of Gluchuka', u grftygqraft i or *nf|-
gffef: II Why do we say, M not having a Vriddhi in the first syllable n ? Ob-
serve {nrcf%: 11 The words ur^n^, *g# and ^^MWim all denote optional rules,
so the employment of any one of them would have here sufficed. Why two are
used in this sfltra viz. untf and *|* ? The mention of Grammarians is made as
a token of respect, and wjp* is used to express the non-uniformity of the sfltr*
construction. In some places this affix ft* is not at. all added, as^tftfh, %
Digitized by
Google
588 GOTRA AND YUYAN. [ BK. IV* ClI I. $. 1 63
^f*n n *h*imuh i^t^scr sparer ***wiHifii4i«t*i yipni: e^tir ^WTfipf*^ >
'TCITO ^T £JMlQM Rftlfil nr-n* •
161. The affixes sr^r and vm come, after the word
*Manu f , and the augment SFvis added when these affixes follow,
provided that, the whole word so formed denotes a class name
G&ti).
Thus ij+s^+tn^-'njv w a man or man-kind*. So also «qpc*:
formed with u^ ll These affixes here have not the force of Patronymics,
hence they are not dropped in the plural, as nx*pj: "men". When the descen-
dant is to be expressed, we have the affix ir^as 'pr+iT7»'iOT* 'son of Manu 9 ,
as in HIH4H mtt U So also the word jtttt, there ^ is changed into «r and denotes
the descendant of Manu, with the sense of contempt as well as dullness
implied.
Ufa'- u qfani$fi> *vt«4 *f**iprtEl *nfil 11
162. A descendant, being a grandson or a still
lower offspring, is called Gotra.
When an offspring, with reference to a person, is the son's son of that
person or lower than that, it is called Gotra. Thus the son of 'Garga' will be
iTrffc, and the son or grandsons &c of nn*f : with reference to Garga will be
irpfc II Similarly TOW • .
Why do we say 'a grandson or a still lower descendant? The im-
mediate descendants or the son will not be called Gotra. Thus q£ft>*:, urttfc h
^jFrp n srPnrnw^r ^hn i iwift *fas : firoftt wfen ^ft*nr 3flt ^hn^wi 5^W
163. But when one in a line of descent beginning
with a father ( and reckoning upwards ) is alive, the descen-
dant of a grandson or still lower descendant is called Yuvau
only.
The word %*y means an uninterrupted series of family descent— or *a
line*. One who occurs in such a line, like father &c, is called iw- « When such
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. CH. 1. 5. 164 ] YUVAtf 689
a vanfiya is alive, then the descendant of a grandson &c is called Yuvan.
The phrase fonryqro in the sfltra should be construed as ^HFTpK *! >n^L
4 Hc who is the descendant of a grandson &c* In the last sQtra, however, this
phrase <hqiiqt4m<4 was properly construed by putting the word 9hPT$A in the
case of apposition with «TTOK meaning M a descendant being a grandson &c,"
Thus the word Yuvan will be applied to a person who is at least fourth in the
order of descent, from the propositus with reference to whom the derivative is
made. Thus «rfo being the head, we have «rffc
( mfih (son or putra)
•ITOfll— I fF^P (Gotra)
I npifcpr: (Yuvan) if G&rga or GArgi ftc
be alive). The force of the word 5, in the sfltra is that it will be called
Yuvan only, and not Gotra as welL
jftr: 11 waft **rol% ^HfiJ irthn^5*tfjlf mfir th-Hmjukiwi*
164. When an elder brother is alive, the younger
brother gets the title of Yuvan, being the descendant of a
grandson &c.
Even when a *W: like father &c is not alive (and a brother is not
vahiya), the younger brother gets the designation of yuvan, when the elder
brother is alive ; thus:
trf: (dead
•nflfc (dead)
I
npfc (dead)
•if**: nrnfrw:
The word *5* is confined to ancestors like father &c, so a brother
can never be a vahiya, because he is not the source from which the other
brother arises. This sfltra applies to cases when Vaiisya is not meant Thus
GirgyAyflaia the name of the younger brother with reference to the. elder
brother, GArgya; similarly V^tsyiyana, DAkhsAyapa, and Plftkshftya^a.
Digitized by
Google
«90 ^ Yuvah [ Bk. IV. Ch. I. 5 167
165.. The living descendant of a grandson &c is
called optionally a Yuvan, when a more superior sapinda
other than a brother is alive.
The sapinda relationship extends up to seven degrees. The word
fqfrc means 'superior*, and fqftctpc is comparative and means f more superior*,
that is to say, superior both by degree of descent and by age. The word
4fr4Rr is again read in this aphorism, though there is the anuvptti of 4r*ft
also from IV. 1. 163. This **Rr of the sfltra qualifies the word descendant,
the ^rofir which is understood by context qualifies the word sapigfc thus : —
Garga(dead)
Girgi (dead)
Gargi (alive I
I I
Gftigya (alive) Gargva (dead)
GArgyaysa)
or > alive.
Girgya J
Here the uncle or the brother of a grand-father being alive, the des-
cendant is optionally called Yuvan or Gotra.
166. The Gotra is sometimes optionally regarded
as Yuvan, when respectful reference to him is intended.
The word Vpddha is another term for Gotra. As h* **r**mfw*: or
mni: "you honored Gargyftyana or GArgya". This sfttra is in fact a Vftrtika
and not a sfltra of PA^inl Similarly ** *raF**rc*TOf: or ^IRW, W* TO* fWT-
W- or *ifir : M
Why do we say 'when respectful reference is intended ? Observe,
mm: and nn*: H The definition of Vpddham as given by other Gramma-
rians is srotprerffa fOTLH • ■
fftl: II ^TOT «i*wwnii 5* *r «*«d( *nl% II •
167. The Yuvan is optionally spoken of as Uotra,
when contemptuous reference to him is intended.
ThusiTF*^:oriF*^*nwM When contempt is not intended,
the only form is unfa* » This is also a V&rtika and not a bfttra.
Digitized by
Google
BK. IV. Ck L 5 16* ] *T* * «9*
'V
qrftarcm %iffr<wqi*wiai'HWMi*M m»*4«Wi i
168. The affix *rs^ comes in the sense of a descent
clant, after a word, which while denoting a country, expresses
also a tribe of itshatriydS.
Thus qnPnte 'the son of Paftchala', so also vtroff: and^ft afe kshatri-
yas who live iri that country. Of course, when the word is only efcpresfctve
of Kshatriya, but not of the name of a country, ip^will not be used but it* ^
the difference being in the accent Thus itmi • the son of Drfthya'; 9ft*: 4 the
son of Puru. f Why do we say when it expresses Kshatriyas ? Observe ffTgm*
H4-^ l fW4HN i [ »qr^nf» y (IV; I. 95) 'the son of Paftchala a Brahmapa' ; so also
Vdrt: — Let the samfe affix, which comes when the sense is. that of the
progeny, be added to a word denoting a country named after Kshatriyas* to
denote the king thereof. Thus qm?&m*UW-<ff3*n* * the king of the Ksha-
triyas called Paftchala or of the country of PAflchalas *. So alsoq^ • the king
of the Kshatriyas or of the country of Videha*.
The words Paftchala Sccoriginally are names of Kshatriya tribes only,
secondarily they have been applied to the country inhabited by those tribes,
because the l*addhita affik denoting * the country inhabited by them/ is elided
by IV. i. 8t. "thus the same word ^r^m comes to denote the Kshatriya tribe
as well as the country called Paftchala. It will make practically little differ-
ence to consider words like Paftchala &c. as original (not derivative) name of
countries as well as of Kshatriyas. In fact, Panini himself considers them in
the same light in this stitra, and docs not think them to be derivative words,
in spite of his own sfltra 1 V. 2. 81. ThcSse words when denoting a country
arc always iri the plural, as is^m* in denoting the Kshatriya, they are in the
Singular.
4ll«341<ll*Ullft»<lf ^ It \\\ N q^TR || ^Rt^^TFVIlfbPjf,^ (*&0 •
169. The affix ars^. comes in the sense of a descend-
ant after the* words ' Salvcya ' and ' Gtadhftfi \
fioth these are names of countries and denote also Kshatriyas as well*
therefore, by sOtra IV. 1. 171 they having a Vfiddhl j rt the first syllable, would
have taken the affix 'flyah', the present sfitra enjoins 'aft' instead. Thus
*U?>*: 'the son of SAlvcya, or the king of Salvcya*, itt^r: 'the son of GAndhir!
12 .
Digitized by
google
69*. wi? H [ Bk. IV, Ch. 1. 5 171
or the king of G&ndh&ri f The v&rtika under Sfltra IV. 1. 168 given above
applies here also, L e. the affix denotes also ' the king there of 9
^fif: II ^FTTTO^ni ttH^lft^lftHl 5pff *PT>| *ft|r ^<HH X$fo*F*W$CSPnp*&b H*fi| H
107. The affix w^ comes, in the sense of a des-
cendant, after dissyllabic words, and the words ' Magadha \
'Kalinga* and 'S&ramasa', when they are the names of
countries as well as of Kshatriyas.
This debars «n£ II Thus *TPT:» *f»T!; qpn?: t 9nfty, and hK»RP 'the
son as well as the king of Anga, Banga, Magadha, Kalinga and Suramasa/
Similarly 4hnPt HT5P H The Vartika ' ^U^ft ' given above applies to this
also, as aqrWir *nir f «u»*uu fnir &c
a£c^lM<ai«u^M*q^ 11 \*\ 11 q^rfa B i^-^-^^^-^rawfr^wr^
K«WI *Rfil II
^Tfrra^ll Hl u ^44<H41MI^4f*l4U<<ra<*qifctli: n
17.1. The affix ' 5*^25/ comes in the sense of a
descendant, after a word having a Vriddhi in the first
syllable, and after a word ending in short t, and after the words
'Kosala' and ' Aj&da', when they are the names of countries
and Kshatriyas.
This debars srs^M Thus, to give example of Vjriddha words, srn^Q:
&3h£ : ' the sons or kings of Ambashtha and Sauvlra*. Similarly to take words
ending in short f, we have 3trc?3I: and ^ny : ' the son or kings of Avanti and
Kunti '. These are words ending in short f II So also <&ta*4* and 9tniFCI : r
which are neither Vfiddhas nor end in short f ti
V&rt : — The affix * 4yan * comes after the word ' P&n$u ' when it is the
name of a country as well as of a Kshatriya tribe. Thus TOW, otherwise it
will be *!¥*: II See IV. 1. 74.
ffH: 11 ^jfTf^^r^fbiqiRcqi 1 $s*r«*T«nf*>w jnRrfn%^r^J *i*rat *wfir 11
172. The affix *nr comes after the word 4 Kuril V
and a word beginning with *r, when these words denote a
country, being the name of a Kshatriya tribe also.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Cii. I. S 174. ] Tadraja 693
This debars 'ap' and f ah\ Thus qttaq',^TO* 'the son of Kuru and
Nishadha 9 . The affix denotes ' the king there of also, as qhrsjt u*r U How
do you explain the form Viqi g fil ^VWt? This is an Archaic or Vedic form.
How then in qWreinhfr g^TOf ? This is a poetic license.
Kdrikd 4**411 R«H<!4H| ** *TO $*1**HJ* •
173. The affix ^ comes in the sense of a descen-
dant, after a word which denotes any subdivision of the coun-
try of Salva ; and after the words ' Pratyagratha \ 'Kalak&ta',
and ' Asmaka ', when these are names of countries and of
Kshatriya tribes.
The word ^T^r is the name of a Kshatriya woman, her son will be
9THRP (IV. I. 121) formed by i« ; also OT*T formed by *r* M The dwelling
place of CTF? will be also m*1 l which is the name of a country.
The sub-divisions of the country called HT^T are six, viz Udumbar&Jp,
Tilakhalal?, Madrakara^ YugandharAh, Bhulihg&fr and Saradaij^aJ?. The patro-
nymic from these will be : ^nrft^Vwgf^:,!^^!^, 4fa*lft:,$rt?rf|:and TOqfcnil
So also the affix * ift ' will be added to the words f Pratyagratha ' &c As
qraprftr:, frHfrfi : and s?TVrf%? : M The affix has the force also of ' the king there
of. As 8rtj«R!r envr M According to Mahabhashya, the words Busa, Ajaml^ha,
and Ajakanda also take this affix, as fap 9 BTHPftft: and grnrerf^ M
It cRCRir: n ?VW I
174. These (viz the affixes sn^ IV. 1. 168 &c) are
called Tadr&ja (' the king there of 1 ) affixes.
The affixes treated of in these six sfttras 168 to 173 are called
Tadraja, The pronoun % refers to these only and not to all the affixes
treated of before S. IV. 1. 168 ; for they have the special designation of Gotra
and Yuvan see II. 4. 62. The illustrations of these have already been given
under each of the above six aphorisms.
Digitized by
Google
6jH w _ Tadraja [ Bk. ;V. Ch. I. § l 77
175. After the word ' Kamboja*, there is elision
bj l luk * of the Tadraja affix.
Namely the affix vn* -which would have come after the word ^p^f
because it denotes a country as well as a Kshatjriya tribe, is elided. Thus
qpTOTf * The king of Kamboja \
V4rt: — It should be stated rather 'after Kamboja and the like \
because we find the affix elided after • Chola • §c Thus ^pr: • the king of
Cholas \ So also %w: qppi ITFJ* W
VTff ^ n
176. In denoting a feminine name, the Tadraja is
eiideel after the words Avanti, Kunti find Kuru.
That is to say the affix ' gyafc 9 . (IV. 1. 171) after the word f Avanti '
and ? Kunti f f and the affix ' gya • after tfre word * Kuru f are elided when the
word to be formed is the name of a female. Thus «r*stfc J^tft and ^5? • 4
daughter or princess of Avanti, Kunti or Kuru \ The word 3^ takes 5^ in
the feminine by IV. 1.66. Why do we say • in denoting the feminine' 9 ?
Observe *MI«»«I : , <iiU<4* and 4h*w N
177. In forming the feminine of a word which
pnds in the masculine in the Tadr&ja affix *?, the affix is luk-
elided.
Thus m. Ch^H :,/ ^Q*Q ; m. HTf : »/ *nft H The word *np of the sfltra
should not be construed by the rule of tadanata vidhi (I. 1. 72). If so con-
strued it will mean " a Tadraja affix ending in ?T is elided ". There have been
taught five Tadraja affixes, namely • aft («t) \ • an (it) \ 4 fiyaft (if)*, 'nya (*)' and
f in (f)\ Of these the first four all end in «t ; therefore all these four affixes
should be elided in the feminine. But this is not the meaning of the apthor ;
for had it been so, there would have been no necessity of the previous sfltra,
for then the present sfltra would have covered the case of • Avanti \ • Kunti *
and 'Kuru*. But the very fact of this sfttra IV. 1. 176 indicates by QTTOt
that the tadanta vidhi does not apply here Therefore, the feminine *pf
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. 1. 5 178. ] Tadraja 695
178. The Tadarija affix is not elided in the fe-
minine, if it forms the names of the Kshatriyas of the East,
or it comes after the word 4 Bharga f &c and •Yaudheya* &c
This sfltra debars the elision of the Tadraja affix tr (required by the
last sfltra). Thus qhn3t.^& TWt *Wfrt HFnft these being all Eastern people
dwelling in countries east of the Sar&vati river. Similarly of *if &c Thus
wrtf, *r*«h ^%tf tt So also of $ft* &c Thus *ft&, *toW* and &%$ II
The Tadr&ja affixes taught above are five, but besides these there are others
taught in the fifth Adhy&ya (V. 3. 112 to 119). The word qft* is formed by
such an affix (V. 3. 177 trw). The present rule, therefore, indicates by impli-
cation, that the rule of elision contained in IV. 1. 177 applies not only to
the Tadr&ja affixes taught in this chapter, but to the Tadraja affixes taught in
V. 3. 112 to 119. Thus the Tadraja affix tr^in (V. 3. 1 17) added to ?g $c.
is elided in the feminine : e. g. m. <TTTTT. f TJJt m ump f tnvft— -&c
1 H*f f 2 J* V\I ( * V* \ 3 \%R f 4 *E*4fc 5 HTFf, 6 gt^F* 7 ^^
( WQ and *W X 8 ^SNW.
1 $&*, 2 $&&, 3 jftifc, 4 t^t^r (<irci*raX 5 *fr*fa (iRw^flN)
Digitized by
Google
BOOK FOURTH.
Chapter Second.
tta ^fc UMIfll n t N
1. The affix «rm already ordained ( IV. 1. 83 )
comes after the name of a colour in the sense of "colored
thereby*.
The verb *s» — *ans to change white into a r other color. That by
which a thing is coloured is called *jn: 'color*. %f *by which', i. e. after a word
in the instrumental case in construction, being the name of a particular colour.
Thus qraftra {*& *&»3iraraqi'a cloth coloured of a dull red'. So also irfSrOTlt
Why do we say qirn( "after the name of a color'? Observe %*TO%
rffe TO*, here the affix sp^ will not come after the word 'Dcvadattena', for
though it is in construction in the instrumental case, yet it is not the name of
a colour.
In the sentence %miq > «TfTO srffc flftffr $***!&" the words *mm
and fifty are used metaphorically.
From this sfitra up to IV. 2. 12 inclusive, the affixes are to be added
to the word which is in the instrumental case in construction in a sentence
(IV. i. 82) : as in the last chapter, the affixes were added to a word in the
genitive case.
stoeit *N*ir IF*® *t>$m<*< n ^ II q^Tfa 11 sn^rr, item, srassr,
5ftn 11 uRnf^fr cPTT^m^fhiRPi^^r w>ftSwRH*i5f s^[ ifG&ti *rcflir 11
*lftr*T* II »fl*AI «Ti^ii^: II qr* 11 4fcrai ^^6*3*. 11
If • II URRIH<KMHI^IHH3"HiI^i II
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. I. {4 ] tog u 697
2. The affix 3^ comes, in the sense of colored
thereby, after the words Uksh&, rochani, sakala, and kardama,
(which being names of colours, are in the instrumental case
in a sentence).
This debars «r"t u Thus itrarar fi* W^t-*lflTO» so also Vfft**,
According to the opinion of Patanjali, the affix *r\ also comes after
*F*F* and **$*: I Thus tiro** and q*rfc%U According to Mahftbhftshya the
words toh and *& do not occur in the sQtra, but are given in the Vlrtika.
Vdrt:— The affix *F* comes after «(Wh as 4t*HT **- HWi ftir i
Kar/.-— The affix «*(I. 3- 8) comes after <Jhr, as 4ftf C*-<fl*rani;H
K4r/.-— The affix «r» comes after fftgT and H^nPT, as fTftR. and *ajr-
si^tir 3^f ; *$&• > S •
tjf^ Jffci *wilHI *Tfa
3. The affix zn^ already ordained IV. 1. 83 comes
after a word in the instrumental case in construction, which
is the name of a lunar mansion, to signify a time connected
with the asterism.
A time is said to be connected with an asterism when the moon is
in conjunction with any one of such asterism. Thus 313, tf%«* f nm &c are
lunar asterisms, when the moon is in any one of these asterisms, then the
affix is added to the name of such asterism in order to denote time of such
conjunction. Thus^jf ir^qta (VI. 4. 149) e. g. qtfqnFw: "th? night in
which moon is in Pushya". So also imft ufip ; fan* 'the month in which the
moon is full in Pushya i. e. December*, so also inra; 'the month M Agha* &c
Why do we say sftn*flf 'connected with the asterism* ? Observe ^*W*
TOT JrFT tfT^! M Why do we say 55H 'time* ? Observe y^r g^UH F HI : a
^rftsn? II « II VF&ik n g^ flfrfr N
4. The affix above ordained is elided by lup,
when there is no specification.
That is the affix enjoined by the preceding aphorism is elided if no
specification is to be understood of a particular portion of time such as
Digitized
by Google
698 *V [ Bfc. IV. CH. I. g J
flight &c Thus Wt:***:' to day belongs to the astcrism Pushya' meaning
that to-day the moon is in conjunction with Pushya ; but by • to-day f neither
the day time in particular nor the night time in particular is meant, but both
alike. The time is day and night, when there is rio specification of siich
time, whether it is day or night, then there is elision.
*fw. h «n^Mi*H4«iwi«u«iHHi vmm g« qrctfr ftarai ftfa *
5. The affix above ordained is elided by luj),
after the words Sravana and Asvatha, when the whole word
so formed is an appellation, and there is specification of time.
Thus *&* unr* *&&%*&: M the night called 3rava9* ; the MuhftttA
called ASvattha". The affix beTng elided by € lup\ why should not I. 2. 51
apply here ? We should say Vpff: unp and not *T* «%: The reasort is that
^T^jit is an irregularly formed word, as P&^ini himself uses it in sfltra IV. 2. 234
Why do we say *when it is a Name or Safljflft? Observe *wrft or 9tra*ft offc •
<MU^i: Ml q^ft 11 apgrare 11
ffo 11 qqqiHU^cftoiMHuTffrti ^ft en ro* **ft f^fr *rc ftW^r u
6. The affix ^ comes after the Dvanclva com-
pound of the names of lunar mansions, when it is in the
instrumental case in construction, to signify time connected
with the astcrism whether there be a specification or not*..
Thus *j>*T3u*ffqr nfln, ra*qprecpfoW ll So also when there is no
specification : as sro ftqr ;ppfew , *PQ fiftaffrefo l fag H The affirt here in these
two last cases is not elided, though there is no specification of tinie^ because
the present sfltra, being a subsequent sfitra, will debar IV. 2. 4 which ordains
lup (L 4. 2).
rtWR U >s H -
?ftf* 11 iftfir jtitauwifdi *u*l3wiPi~u$ 4*iiftf4<i v&mt *rei% H$e *n* ^*nc*fifr *
7. The affix **r (IV. 1. 83) comes, after a wofd
in construction in the Instrumental case, in the Scrise of seen —
the thing seen by the one whose name is in the Instrumental
case, being the S&tna Veda.
Thus ig5*CT fe-ifers** m* " the portion of the S&rxia seen by (or reveal-
ed to) Kruftcha." So also TTTffg^^fT^ni II
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. II. $ 9 ) *f I 699
jf^r 11 ^sfiro^pyfhim^ i^f^ qfiSmTw^ 1^ raw* **ftn
qirtwi 11 fft*w^*'^ ^nfr *r ^iw: 11 *rRnwi 11 1 ftuwn ••
*tf%qs*n *Jtwrff^R^ > ii
Kiriki je wiPi *fir *r ft<P*ti fiNWfr 1
8. The affix «w comes, in the sense of S&ma-
Vcda seen, after the word * Kali \ being in the instrumental
case in construction.
This debars «rw II Thus tfiftstr \t m*=m$* H "The S&ma Veda
revealed ta Kali ". This sdtra is really a V&rtika and not a sutra of P&Qini*
KJr/; — The affix * £hak 9 comes always after nfir and *ft* ; not mere--
ly in the sense of Sama-Veda seen. Thus *Tfirer jfc SFf=H*l^l* f the Sama-
Vcda revealed to Agni \ •?& h* = bt!&*^ 'who stays in Agni' (IV. 3. 53) *fir-
<jir* "what has come from Agni n =«rmn^ (IV. 3. 74) &c Similarly m***
mear.s « the Sama-Veda seen by Kali, he who stays in Kali, what has come
from Kali &c,
Vdrt:— The affix *r^is optionally treated as if it had an indicatory ^
when the sense is that of Sama-Veda seen. Thus TOTOT ft qm = 4t*H<3* or
*ihr*S (the force of fir* being to elide the f* portion; VI. 4. H3>
Vdrt:— The affix *n$ in the sense of • born \ is optionally treated as
foil provided that it be that «r? which being debarred by IV, 3. II, is re-
ordaincd by IV. 3. 16. The affix *T<^ governs all sdtras up to IV. 4. 2 by
force of IV. 1. 83. ; but it is debarred by v^ of IV. 3. 1 1, and is re-ordained
in IV. 3. 16. Thus TCffH^fr SJTcf: s Wfft*: or WrfHTO: II
Vdrt: — The affix fa* comes, optionally, without changing the sense;
after words ending in ffa 11 Thus fcttf^rn or fttfta**. *tffifa* or ^ft^ni II
Vdrt:— Not so when it qualifies fan, as ffcfhir or ytfhir ftur H
Vdrt:— The affix j^ I V. 3. 126 has the force of " Sama-Veda seen "
when it comes after a Gotra-word. This BfrpTOP* or *n**5|P* • the S*ma-
Veda seen by Aupagava, or Kapatava*. The affix 5^ comes after a word
denoting a Gotra or Chara^a.
?f%: 11 wTiwmk ^^nim*^ jar MiH^i^r^nf ^j* ^q ^a^r TO*}* «roi: 11
KAriU fire n^rf?r^m fa*rif *i*rar faSr i
*?<* krszvb *VHk**m ^pft ii
13
Digitized by
Google
7<*> •?<*• [ Bk. IV. Ch. II $ I f.
9. The affixes *nj and «q> come in the sense of
the S&ma-Veda seen, after the word V&madeva, being in the
Instrumental case in construction.
This debars *T? II Thus *pf^T ftwrnqpfcAt or qpft& II The
indicatory n in 'jiyat' shows that q has svarita accent (VI. I. 125).
Q. What is the use of the indicatory ^?
Ans. The final syllable is elided when a fo[ affix is added, by VI.
4-143-
Q. The final it of WT would have been elided without making this
affix firq[, by the rule VI. 4. 148, then what is the use of making this affix ft^?
Ans. Well, the author here indicates by j ft a pa k a, the existence of these
two maxims of interpretation, viz. Paribhashas f% Cg*-M<hmfr 1 CT flq»M<*iH l"when
a term void of anubandhas is employed, it does not denote that which has
an anubandha attached to it *. ma«»miH<fr HH l <m«*iq»*q " when a term with
one or more anubandhas is employed it does not denote that which, in addi-
tion to those, has another anubandha attached to it "•
For had if and n^ been only taught instead of 'flya' and 'flyat*, then
by rule VI. 2. 156 the final of such word, with the negative particle bt, would
take udfttta on the final, but that is not the case. Therefore snpftG* is not
finally acute, but has acute on the first syllable, taking the accent of the
Indeclinable (VI. 2. 2). As *famq*4 II
10. The affix smr comes, after a word in the
Instrumental case in construction, in the sense of ' surround-
ed' the thing so surrounded being ' a chariot*.
Thus *F5n*<jft?€t W=**T5P a a chariot surrounded with cloth". So
also qsraw , *nfan II Why do we say the thing so surrounded being a chariot?*
Observe tot *ftfJ* S5TO ' the body surrounded with cloth ' the word <rf*fct
means covered from all sides. The affix will not be used if the chariot is
not completly surrounded. As s^f: Hfi«ql HF U
m^^^^ifift 11 \\ 11 q^ifa R qrf ^4^^tdL- ff5r: n
^tfrf: 11 m u j«iiM«wm<i5<ft^i*HNf<t iR^ar w juicCRhh^ %ft *B&it wft It
11. The affix jr comes after the word w§?gto*;,
being in the third case in construction, in the sense of
' surrounded ', the thing so surrounded being ' a chariot \
Digitized by
Google
Bjc IV. Ch. II. 5 14] W *°*
This debars nw U Thus qrnpCT*W« € a carriage covered with a
white woolen blanket*." The word <U U J<**4« means the housing of a royal
elephant The form Wj**«fiH would have been obtained by the affix fft
of V. 2. 115, the present sQtra is made in order to debar the affix mj i
12. The *n^ comes after the words 'dvaipa* and
1 vaiy&ghra ' being in the third case in construction, in the
sense of ' surrounded \ the thing so surrounded being *a
chariot '•
Thus %^i qftfift' ctp =fa f a car*covered with a tiger's skin \ So also
Virm N This affix *n? debars «T^, the difference between these two being
in accent only.
thtuKll^tM^ B H II ^HR-Bf^l-flra^ II
13. The word * kaum&ra * is irregularly formed by
adding the affix «rn^, when meaning ' virginity \
Thus <ftm& Htrr = *T?$Tflr VHflw|4H : 'the husband of a virgin Me,
one whose wife was given to him in marriage while she was a maid (not a widow).
So also 4hn \ (\ Wtt=$m1fr iT^faftr: qfimnHll M a virgin wife" Lea wife who is
taken in marriage while she was a maid ( not a widow ). In both these cases
the word refers to the woman.
The word 9TRTC is formed by adding sr^to jsurffr It Thus $qrafa Hir:
= *I*U<:; *RH *ft tfiftlft *rtf II
14. The affix ^mr already ordained (IV. 1. 83)
comes in the sense of 'placed thereon* after words denoting .
vessels, when such words are in the locative case in construc-
tion.
The word its means, f thereon 'Le.a word in the seventh case in cons-
truction. «t*J means • vessels ' ijgqn, means « placed * f or literally the € refuse
. Digitized by
Google
7« **• [ Bk. IV. Ch. II. 5 17.
of dinner 9 . Thus frn^f^: = QKFf vfnpr " boiled rice placed on a dish." So
also iri^**, Silfo n
Why do we say " after a word denoting vessel" ? Observe mmMfi t
sffaf: € boiled rice placed on the hand '.
The word *pf, denoting € a word in the locative case in construction',
governs the six subsequent satras upto IV. 2. 20 inclusive.
«ra£ru
15. The affix sn^ already ordained (IV. 1. 83)
comes after the word ^qffrg^y being in the seventh case in
construction, in the sense of 'a sleeper thereon', and the
whole word so formed denotes c a person performing a vow \
Thus**ii"3% mkt a*PTOl=Wlf*¥«* : € a person who has taken the vow
to sleep on the bare ground' Lean ascetic or a Brahmach&it
Why do we say *vow'? Observe *qf*s% $% BgrTO: 4 Brahmadatta
sleeps on the bare ground ' f not as a matter of vow, but of necessity or plea-
sure. The word $nf means a € vow or an observance ordained by religious
codes 9 .
The affix 3H|J comes after a word ending in the
locative case, to denote ' what is prepared therein ' — if that
which is so prepared be c granular food \
Thus si]* jfabdf HW= nrer € a cake fried in the pan f . Similarly ^f^rr
jjpvfT: II Why do we say " if it means food "? Observe y*2* Hkt^t frei*p*: »
17. The affix *rac comes in the • sense of prepared
food, after the words ^j? and tot ending in the locative case.
This debars wn^ (IV. 1. 83> As |p* &$% = f[e* € roasted on a spit • —
i e. meat So also §*** ' flesh boiled in a pot \
Digitized by VjOOQLC
bk. iv. ch. ii. 5 21. ] " n* i 703
18. The affix sip comes, in the sense of prepared
food, after the word * dadhi 9 ending in the locative case in
construction.
Thus wft fft$rf = srfwi ' made of coagulated milk \ This form will
be evolved by IV. 4. 3, but the formed by that rule means fw 4t$4 L e.
anything prepared or seasoned with curd ; while the mfa% of this rftra means
'curd itself seasoned with salt or, pepper'.
19. The affix z$ comes in the sense of € prepared
food *, optionally after the word s^farqc ending in the locative
case in construction.
Thus ifttf^ntfVII. 3. SIX or «mf*TO*by or; M
ffa: II MUjimHIlrftaltAHiWi TOT (HNlRiHiif It ^^1% *HfiT W
20. The affix ysr comes in the sense of * prepared
food ', after the word ' Kshira ' ending in the locative case
in construction.
This debars *n* II Thus i&ft cN^TT =$fafr *m*l} f milky gruel f .
21. The affix an^ comes after the name of a full-
moon-night, to denote the division of time in which the
night falls.
The word 9 means ' that \ It is in the nominative case, therefore by
IV. I. 82 it means that " after a word in the first case in construction ". «rftn^
• in it ' i. e. in the sense of a seventh case. qt <fareftfa M if the word in the first
case in construction is the name of a full-moon night "• The word fftf after
qpircrtft is used for the sake of clearness. The word q<um*i does not occur
in the original sdtras of P&nini ; but is added by a Vart»ka ; and means * if
the word so formed is an appellative \ i. e. if it is the name of a month, a half*
month and a year. The whole stitra therefore literally translated means
M the affix «i*j already ordained (IV. 1. 83) comes in the sense of a 7th case
affix, after a word in the 1st case in construction, if that word is the name
Digitized by
Google
704 **■ " [ Bk - iv - Ch - "• 5 2 3-
of a full-moon-night, provided that the whole word so formed is an appella-
tion of a month, a half-month or a year ".
Thus frft3Hbntf«rf?Fl=qKr TCP 'the month Paus L e. that month
in which the moon is full in the asterism Pushya'. Similarly qfas&frcr: and
qfa: 9TOV W But not so in the following <fWfr fafrnSr «Tftri JTCPT, because
daSar&tra is not a month or a fortnight or a year.
The words |ft and ^JTUP* have the same force here, namely, they
make the word an appellative. The word &3TOPI added to the sutra by the
VArtika is a redundancy.
The word^Ttatf is formed by adding *r» to 3<farer U Or it may be
evolved in this way:— ^f Hr^^jfar, jfare f^-V*fal#ll The word «ir:
means M moon ".
ffin n ^rft^HnrrtftRi qfrfg*3% i mmnMlnMis^mmi* ^qiqnufcflffHiqiqift -
^KH^ftnfHiS *iH«iif w^inanfr *iqRr 11
22. The affix s*^ comes in the sense of the loca-
tive case after the words ' agrahAyant ' and ' asvattha ' ending
in the first case-affix in construction and being the name of a
full-noon night.
The words qiffrrftrSwraftfif of the last s&tra govern this also. This
debars 3T\U Thus arprsraftren *TO : * the month called Agr&hAyanika i. e. in
which the moon is full in the asterism of Agrah&yana. Similarly mmRtHi ; II
23. The affix gr^ optionally comes after the words
'PhMguni*, ' SravanA', 'Kartiki* and 'Chaitri* being the
names of full moon nights, the whole word so formed being
a Name denoting a division of time (a month, a fortnight
or a year) in which the moon is full.
Thus 4i|hih: or <cthjPw, vt^t: or mnftaff, ^jtt^i : or *if§fV*:, "$*: or
%fw3?: il This optionally ordains *«£ instead of BT^ll
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. II. S 27. ] *t 70S
24. The affix wqt (IV. 1. 83) is added to the
name of a deity when someting is to be spoken of as his.
OT= 4 after a word in the 1st case in construction 9 9TOI 'in the sense
of a sixth case \ ^Wt ' if the word in the first case is the name of a deity \
Thus f^^ns^^Vn 'oblation sacred to Indra'. Similarly ifowm 'oblation
belonging to Aditya \ So also vrfcren, UIHiHH P U l Why do we say "after the
name of a deity"} Observe, qggqifrmrsw , n° affix is added to «?qr ll In the
sentnces^pfPfsaT: and «TP^r\ *W<*l4i<l*il5 the affix is added by analogy.
The whole phrase crreq *TOT governs up to sfltra IV. 2. 35. Though
the word cr was understood in this sAtra by anuvptti from sAtra IV. 2. 21, its
repetition is for the sake of indicating that the anuvptti of 99T does not
extend to it The affix ordained by this sdtra has the force of indicating
• lord of oblations like Puroflitsi &c offered in a sacrifice \
25. The short * is the substitute of the final *C
of *r, when the affix is added.,
Thus^+sr*=f%+*T*=^i+*l=9*rt "oblation sacred to Ka w . As
26. The affix srac comes in the sense of " that its
deity ", after the word ' Sukra.
This debars *r* (IV. 1. 83). Thus JT^+q^sjfiRWLffPr: (VII. I. 2)
• an oblation belonging to Sukra '. Thus jl faqhmn : N
^ml^i^iMm^l^I v 11 v» 11 v^ift n an: ^, *rcni h^i^ih w B
?RT: II H^TC^ SWIH^ ffiffiP3f *J: JPW **fif STBl 4^1 WlfWI^M^ H
27. The affix *t comes after the words ' aponaptri 9
and * apannaptri ', in the sense of ' that its deity \
This debars HT2J II Thus iTTP^Prt gffr or grrrefaPTO H The words
1H4M4H and si«ihhi^ are the names of two deities ; these words irregularly
assume the form ending in *r*r when the affix is to be added.
ff^T: H *4HM^ ^4IH^ f^RPlrf BRiR: TO^t H^l% ^T^ ^^^R^f^M^ II
^ifrnni ii *rcra[nw*nif u
Digitized by VjOOQLC
7o6 . ** I [ Bk IV. CH. II. §. 32.
28. Also ' Chha f is added to ' Aponaptri ' and
c Apaunaptri ' in the sense of ' that its deity \
The affix or also comes in the sense of " that its deity H after the word
Aponaptfi and Ap&nnaptp. This debars UN! II Thus *MMUmfl4 or mm-tMflwi
4 oblation sacred to Aponap&t or Ap&nnap&t \ This is made a separate stitra,
in order to prevent the application of rule I. 3. 10. For if it was included
in the last, the sdtra would have run thus: M The affixes q and 9 come after
Aponaptfi and Ap&nnaptfi ", the meaning of which according to maxim I. 3.
10 would have been " the affix q comes after Aponaptfi, and or after Ap&nna-
ptp ". But this is not what the author intended. Hence two distinct sfitras.
Vdtt : — The affix 9 comes after the words Ifarcflyi &c As, ^iwft-
3*frWL, qi*ft»q4UHL U
Vdrt: — The word qnr$V takes * and & both: eg. wmffmi and
*RTCft*ll
29. The affix ^r, and 3?w as also the affix ?J, come
after the name Mahendra, in the sense of " this its deity".
As i^fhrc, »»^pwcand m&m ' oblation sacred to Mahendra 9 .
sfbn^ sara^n *© 11 q^rft 11 ^mrac f OTncn
ffrP II UlltlMK *I^W**4*ft *TO% UIW4*3«tfwPlH«l II
30. The affix ^tjj comes after the name c Soma \
in the sense of " this its deity ".
This debars bt^ 11 The ^ of cir^ causes Vfiddhi. The * causes the
affixing of tf% in the feminine. Thus &** %ft: 9 ^H ^j*% itirft *&$ U STTO+
*K(IV. 1. I5)=$t*+f (VI. 4. iSO)=€WV W
srp?^3fof<wt *m 11 ^ 11 q^rft (1 sng-aqj, ft?-OTcn, **( H
31. The affix *!<* comes after the names * Vayu \
1 Kitu , l Pitn * and * Ushas ', in the sense of " this its deity ".
This debars w* II As, tcszPL sCrfs^, fTOH. and 4«lWi ll The form
fsrwp* is thus evolved fi$+*Jl=fol+flr3F+*l?l (VII. 4. 27)=Rthwl (VI. 4. 148).
The ftfe has ud&tta on the first syllable by VI. 1. 213.
tirat, ^facft, g«u*ft<, *res^, 3ttfr-<ffar, yK-di<^i<Hi5, wf^-i-3, ^ f
Digitized by
Google
[ Bk. IV. Ch. II. §. 35- «U W
32. . The affix 9 comes also in the sense of* this its
deity % after the names 'Dy&v& Prithivi', 'Sundsira 1 , <Ma-
ruttvat \ ' Agnlshoma \ ' V&stoshpati 9 and c Grihamedha *;
This debars *n^&c. Thus UHi^^qH or mi^fim* * belonging to the
Gods Heaven and Earth'. yrrcftfoWL or 5pfT*k 'belonging to Suna (Wind)
and Sira (Sun)', *w**<(bFl or ft***!* M »*BihM<HL or ttfftfNft U TC9l«rfa*
or qiwlmmnj l «j*«M*Ulor f^M^n
$f??P.II mfiWMI^*^ TOOT H^flt mm'&fafelfivA •
33. The affix 5^ comes in the sense of € this its
deity \ after the name Agni.
Thus grft^nrn^ ^ iyfirqrsg^im: <
V&rt: — The affix '^hak' always comes after the words Agni and
Kali, in the various senses of the affixes called Prftgdivyatfya. See IV. 2. &
34. After words expressive of time, the affixes
denoting 'who stays there 1 (IV. 3. 11 to IV. 3. 53), come
also in the sense of c this its deity \
Thus by IV. 3. 11 (read with IV. 3. 53), the affix tn. comes after the
words expressive of time, in the sense of • who stays there'. The same affix will
also come in the sense ofCTSftftroril Thus >n% H*=«nftrap*(rar+*^=«»rar
-1* VII. 3. 50) ; ^^Hifti**^ qhmft^n, m&ni (IV. 3. 16), sn^ro. (IV. g;
1 7) : meaning « monthly \ « half monthly \ « annual \ 'vernal', and • rainy f . The
words will also mean 'an oblation sacred to a month L c f as HuSt \*m**
llfa^ll &c
35. The affix a* eomes, in the sense of ' this its
deity', after the words c Maharaja' and € Proshthapada'.
Thus H^Rrat^ms^sHfraf^pi, $te<?ft* n
14
Digitized by VjOOQLC
708 _ ffW^Tl [ Bk. IV. Ch II. 5. 37
Vdrt : — After the words *TO9 & c the affix a^t comes in the sense of
•that exists in it'. As qqnfl^< *^ = *livrt<w TO^ M So also qwrafjarar - &c.
Vdrt : — After the word jopirar, the affix «rw comes in the same sense.
As gdbrotsgri TO% = flfrm*n fifftp 'the day in whicji the full-moon occurs.*
farmer. 11
36. The words 'pitrivya, a father's brother %
'm&tula, a mother's brother', ' m&t&maha , a mother's fa-
ther and ' pit&maha f a father's father are irregularly
formed.
We can infer from these forms, what were the affixes, having what
indicatory letters, employed in what sense and coming after what cases of
the base. Thus if any rules need be formed, we may ennunciate the following
rules : — fifHFf^ hmR «H[ JH^ft " the affixes **&{ and ^pr^ come respectively
after the words pitp and m&tp inthesenseof his brother*. Similarly the second
rule will be m*m firaft 3THT*t Hnrftft* * and the affix d&mahach comes, in
the sense of their father; and their feminine is formed as if the affix had an indi
catory ^u Thus fafSp, «mp*: f font*: (f. fa*rro#), iranr* (f. irtpt#) n
Vdrt ; — The affixes *Jfc, $s f and irffci^ come after the word **flr, in
the sense of € milk'. As 3ft§nra=sTfTOfcC.or arftjEPtor mftqQqqm
Vdrt ; — The affixes fror and %ir come after the word fin*, in the
sense of fruitless. As f%* jre rer* y: = fipsftr*: and ftftfo: ll
Vdrt: — The affix fr*? is treated like fk\ in the Chhandas. As
<TC* ^5: II ^ II ^ffk II cTPT, ^T. II
irnr^.11 5ptTf^*^l' *UH*Wi**: M —
37. An affix is added to a word, when the sense
is ' a collection thereof.
The affix «T°r (IV. 7. 83) already taught, is added to a word in the
6th case in construction, in the sense of collection. What is the example of
this ? In order to apply the affix *nj, we must apply it to those words only,
to which the special rules hereinafter taught do not apply. In other words,
the affix sn^ is added in the sense of collection thereof, to a word which
denotes a conscious being, which has ud&tta accent on the first syllable, which
\
'Uiyi ti^d uyV^OQffl ?
Bk.IV. Ch. II. §- 39 ] wf*«*<r:i 709
does not end with a Gotra-affix, and which Is not a word specifically men-
tioned in the subsequent sfltras. For, a word expressing a non-conscious
being, will take the affix iqp by IV. 2. 47, a word having anudAtta 00 the
first syllable will have the affix tny IV. 3. 44, a Gotra word will take to IV.
2. 39 and especial word* like %fTC &c take ^ &c Making all these exclu-
sions, the example wo ..• t is: — q»TOPii *T2]f: = **WI. € a collection of crows*
TOPUl The phrase H*io ; :f of this aphorism governs all the subsequent
sQtras up to sfttra IV. 2. 51 inclusive.
Vdrt: — The affix unnt comes after the words tr\ &c As vpninr: € *
collection of qualities \ qrcTOPn &c The following is some of such words :—
*T*t *W*9 Tff, JUT, fpwn* &c It is an akritigapa.
f^iRyAu^u^i q^rfa II fa^IT *nf^Fn f *H ft
38. The affix s^r comes, in the sense of ' collec-
tion thereof 1 , after the words ' bhikshA f &c.
The repetition of the word *n\ in this sfttra, though its anuvptti was
here, is for the sake of removing the operation of any obstructing rule.
Thus fwrt sgr: =Wl € what is collected in the shape of alms*. S6
also nfWt+in.siif^+Br^Cthe masculine form of a Bha is substituted, when
a Taddhita affix follows without an indicatory w, *TOf*frfe*D=i|ffa: (VI. 4.
164). In the case of »*fa, the word however is not changed to its masculine
form. Thus gttffti ag?. s star* f a collection of young women \
1 ftOT, 2 wtfvft, 3 %^, 4 «fa, 5 «Tjfrc f 6 <**H {*fik% acconEngto
some texts) 7 «tw. 8 5*tt f 9 ^i% t 10 <reft, 11 *nrf*r f ( also*****.) 12
*fiPIT t 13 jpr f 14 ft** t 15 4rw. also 16 qffcj
39. The affix £**. comes in the sense of ' collection
thereof, after a word denoting a patronymic, and after • uk-
shan ', « ush*ra \ < urabhra \ < rAjan \ « rajanya f , < r&japuttra f
1 vatsa \ * manushya f and ' aja \
The word ifnr is used here in its popular and not technical sense^
meaning any descendant or offspring. Thus *fhPTOi*, «fhf^, ( VI. 4. 144 )
*"*j**' ^' mm, (VI. 4. 144) fnRw% enrjTO*, *rara* t ii^to,
«TT^r?, 11 The final* of 1*3^ and <HF* is not elided when the affix mr
is added (VI. 4. 150) *
Digitized by VjOOQLC
7*0 Wf* «3JF * Bk. IV. Ch. II. §. 42. f
Vdrt: — Also after the word |9T ; e. g. *r&&qt ' a collection of old men'.
frapim*^ 11 «o 11 f^ri^r 11 fc^rerac ^ ^ 11
qiftra^n *rffrqnrcni nsgres** m
40. The affix *rt as well as the affix 33*, comes
after the word %^rc, in the sense of c collection thereof*.
This debars w^ of IV. 2. 47. Thus q^Himm *T3y:=^ri*. or
Vdrt:— The affix qw comes after «rfc«r e. g. «nf*repi>U
41. The affix ssr comes, in the sense of 'collection
thereof, after the word *Kedara f , and also after the word
'Kavachin\
Thus WiftHiH ( VI. 4. 144 ) ; and %*TftfP& We read the anuvptti of.
ilRTC in this SOtra, by virtue of the word *r
mffere^ ii gRresrcfr ynjmii t m«m 11 qirorouivn^CTsratii
*lf%*>^ll tot «rw?K^: ii <rrf%^ ii TO15* m
42. The affix *P* is added, in the sense of 'collection
thereof, after the words 'br&hmana', 'm&nava', and € v&fava\
The indicatovy ^ of ^ makes the word take udAtta accent on the
first syllable (VI. 1. 197). Thus ffTgro*, 1TTOI*. ^TTBH^ll
Vdrt: — Also after the word jgcg. jm: II
Vdrt:— The affix SC is added to ht^, in the sense of a 'sacrifice', e. g.
srtffcf: 'a collection of days of sacrifice*. Otherwise the form is «njp by «rR
see IV. 2. 45.
Vdrt:— The affix m^ comes after q$, e. g. TT>^1 'a collection of axes'.
The final * of qr§ is not changed by guga into sft before the affix, because the
word *?j} is treated as a pada-word (I. 4. 16) and not a Bha-word.
Vdrt:— The affix *& is added to TOT e. g. map: 'a collection of winds
or a mad-man 9 .
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. II. § 45 ] W*««M 7ir \
43. The affix *tal f comes, in the sense of 'collection
thereof, after the words 'gr^ma', 'jana', c bandhu f and 'sahlya'.
Thus qpwr 'a collection of villages'. The words ending in w^are all
feminine. So also vmT 'a collection of persons', w*gm 'a collection of rela-
tives', and cr*nraT 'a collection of allies 1 .
V&rt.—Thc affix t iaT comes after ini also e. g. mmr «a collection of
elephants'.
44. The affix *js^ comes, in the sense of 'collection
thereof, after the words having anud&tta on the first syllable.
Thus wftdMC *T5j|*=*nroiH% , iTS^tV*lt*ii .
qrfaqafoFTO II *\ II *»^Tft II <dfi<*lfl+q. ^ ■
Vl<l4 HU«HS*H^ *WT ^UPHhMtfiP •
%*iRif Rwiitl ^r tot wnSfti ^n*^s*iT *
45. The affix sp^ comes, in the sense of 'collection
thereof after the words 'Khancfika &c.
This sfitra applies to words having anud&tta on the first syllable, and
being names of non-living things, e. g. <mfif^* , «CTT^H
The word jlg^HlH^ is included in this list It is a Dvandva com-
pound of two words *HT^ and iip*?, denoting tribes of Kshatriyas. The TadrAja
affix ipj (IV. I. i6S) is elided after the first, and sm^ (IV. I. 171) after
the second word which is a Vpddham. When these two words form a com-
pound, the acute falls on the final (VI. I. 223), the initial of this compound
is therefore, anud&tta : and therefore by the last sfltra IV. 2. 44, this word
would have taken *nj ; where is the necessity of its being included in this
list ?. It is to exclude the ^nj of IV. 2. 39 which comes after a Gotra word.
But will not the subsequent *n* (IV. 2. 44) debar the preceding 5H (IV. 2.
39) by the rule of paratva ? Moreover, a collection or aggregate of two Gotra
words will not be called Gotra, as an aggregate of countries is not called a
'country* for the application of janapada rule, as qrcfaEKrepftqr does not take
«r and there will not apply tadanta vidhi to the compound word £1**1144,
which ends in a gotra word ?. To this wc reply, that the fact of the inclusion
Digitized by
7ia *****?! [ Bk. IV. Ch. II. 5. 47.
of this woid in the list, is an indication of the existence of these two rules :
(1) that jit affix supersedes a subsequent affix in cases of conflict Thus
* Hl^m and m**** are anud&tt4di words because formed by «ng (III. 1. 2% and
require therefore «TX[ by IV. 2. 44, but 3?^ supersedes it, and we have ifrpT*-
«** and ^n^RPl tt The second rule is: (2) that in STprf^K affixes there is tad-
antavidhi in spite of the prohibition contained in v&rtika under I. 1. 72. As
qiHqRa^, i^g^P^ll The complete sentence in the GanapAtha is flg^Himm
%?Tre9raPl, the first portion denotes the existence of the above two rules,
the second portion %^r &c restricts the application of the rule. The affix
is added when it is the name of a %^r ' army * and not otherwise. As llhpff-
HP*% %5IT, otherwise qftgWMH44 II The existence of above corollaries is
proved by the sfttra of the Grammarian Apisali also Vj^ffH g^yqnprfj f 'the
affix *$ comes after ^5 in denoting collection thereof, when not preceded
by the negative particle «f^, therefore, when preceded by any other word,
the affix will apply.
1 gtffrWi (<af»**l K.), 2 **WT, 3 ^g^HH1 I ^HIiJ^li|l«i ( a VArttika to
4,2,45), 4 pwpr, 5 jpr, 6 *%& 7 njJfc 8 w^% 9 giro*, (TOTv. l.;3*T» TOT
K.% 10 ^W5>f (wnirX
mJh«Hfl vrihrac 11 «$ 11 q^rfa 11 mAw vrihrac u
ffar. M •qrrro^r: q»**<*iHiw y %»q: ^rgtonta: srsj* ypfci mm *nfa w
46. After the name of a Vedic School, the affixes
which denote the rule of that School, come also in the sense
of * collection thereof'.
The Vedic Schools or Charanas are like ^nr, q&HH? &c The affixes de-
noting the rule of the School are those taught in Stitra IV. 3. 126 &c The
word q4 does not occur in the SAtra IV. 3. 126, or any where else, but it oc-
curs in the following ishti under that SAtra : — ^T^RPifarw : 11 Thus *4Mf trf
= 4\ \ *-h% so also *h*Rf ^5? s = ^W*** M Similarly *l*m<=h*t, OT^TOHl, Bfr^RpFF*
and mm4m*i ii
«fa**fafr«ftiwi n «* 11 q^ n «rf^-5fer-^ff--^i h
47. The affix z^ comes, in the sense of ' collec-
tion thereof*, after the names of things without consciousness,
and after ' hasti ' and ' dhenu \
This debars 9?^ and «p^n The «T5HPff a^sBnsjfantll The affix
z% is replaced by f^ (VII. 3. 50) or 3? (VII. 3- 5o)» Thus srfarep*, ^3^PL VJ%r
Digitized by
Google
BkIIV. Ch.II.$. si] frw^yi >ij
Vdrt: — Not so, if the word $5 is preceded by the negative particle
«mu Asm^pniu (See IV. 2. 45).
^^d<WIH II
yftit: n\m *w x&Hirt vnp*^ ^ & *&fo **& **$t vqtiwii irc* *2J f^Wf^l
48. The affixes c yafi f and c 6hha f come optional- -
ly in the sense of * collectioa thereof, respectively after the
words *fcj and «ra K
Thus #tort ngjf: = §ta** or $ftra>*. (IV. 2. 47), iranii s$f: =urv*(I V.u
49. The affix 'ya* comes, in the sense of 'collec-
tion thereof, after the words tmx &c.
Thus tout, ymr &c. These words are feminine.
l ire, 2 y* f 3 ipc, 4 *nr, 5 •tjjtt, 6 qnr«* (tram K.\ 7 *hr, 8 ira, 9
f^RF, 10 ft*W, 11 frajr, 12 *«, 13 W (*¥ K.), 14 **. also 15 *m*.
%wiU * im iHi° " <i^Tfall*ra^-**n?*-*ril
yfcr* 11 w*«iUmii^Hit ** m^rat •ufa ira figj i^wrtWl^'ft w
50. The affix ' ya f comes in the sense of ' collec-
tion thereof', after the words ' Khala ', ' Go ' and 'Hatha 9 .
Thus crtqr, ifsqr and Kua II These three words have not been includ-
ed in the qrarff class, in order that rule IV. 2. 5 1 should apply to them.
tfonrasreaa 11 \\ II **pft ll ^-*-*r*ro f ^ ll
l^r: 11 <*H«ru«mi*K5r mmta** %fH * ^m^ %*ft «roqr **far irw *3f *araft»r-
*lf%^ II f5n*rf**H fPrfcfTO II *rf%^ II 3»»E*Tft»g: l!T¥? H Wfr <Wft <
*iWwfui jrfRHi: srr*r jn^qr *rcflr 11
51. The affixes 'ini f f c tra 9 and 'katyach 9 come in the
senses of 'collection thereof, respectively after the word 'khala',
'go' and 'ratha 9 .
Thus <Hft«ft, flpiT, ^nr^r 1
VArt; — The affix fPt comes after the words isn* &c. Thus 4lf%«ft, y?'
Digitized by
Google
714 *W *S* : * - [ Bk. IV. Ch. II.|§ 54
Vdrt: — The affix ^TT* comes after the words Kamala fix. As *pn*-
w*vi gr^Hhrer^L ii cfb/ *r»fnr, ^ftnft* 3>jf f ^fh^,«rtMV, %uWfr belong to
this class. These are mifffaim* «
FJr/; — The affix fE?S**f^ comes after the words m t ^ft, and jqf II As,
«R«W f *fiWi^f* and *qf**ap II
J/tf r/:— The affix ott comes after the words v$ &c Thus S^TT^
fimt ^5* II «ft II ^T^r II faro, ^fr II
52. The affix snuXIV. !• 83) comes after a word in
the sixth case in construction, in the sense of ' any body's
sphere \ if a country is indicated by such sphere.
The anuvptti of «*£: (IV. 2. 37) does not extend further: but the
anuvptti of she* (IV. 2. 37) is to be read into it The whole sAtra thus
becomes ^^ftWTO* his sphere — in denoting a country*. The word ft^*
'sphere, topic' has many significations. Sometime it means an estate, as
OT^T H*V * a village has been acquired \ Some time it means an object of per-
ception, as *rg ffaift ^r ' c °l° r * s * e object of sight &c\ Therefore the word
^ has been used in the Sdtra, in order to fix the particular meaning of the
word f^nN
Thus ftrfNt ftTOt W=%* : C T^ C country within the sphere of the
Sibi '. So also iftg: &c Why do we say \i( a country is meant ' ? Observe
53. The affix ^sr 'comes after the words rajahya
&c, in the same sense. —
This debars «r* 11 Thus tHROftf ft^r ^ =inRHP, hmtt M It is
an *nfif 3 t*m : u
1 ^nro, 2 «n?cf # , 3 wnro # . 4 vi^im, 5 *frm (^wnr^;^ranf -X
6 btStt, 7 *to*» 8 mfriiiw, 9 *nn*pi # , 10 %$•, 11 mg^iTfr, 12 sr*tfta-
3*, 13 TOnST, 14 %****. 15 %$*, 16 *jwrc, 17 *faf, 18 V^r (*f**c) 19
mfrlWi, 20 m* t 21 *Tfir, 22 **IPT. 23 *uift?r, 24 %fi&, 25 *m* t ||
flR^fa^Kllftvfl ^W^RT^ || <\« j| q^rfa || 4lft«H4lfc ^3-
\
. )igitized'by VjQOgiC
Bk.IV.Ch. II. $55) ■!*• ^ Ji$ %
tfW: m ^Rwi^Hi ^inrfftHiw «*mfrrt Arc* **5i*ft rofr*TOt,fa4r **
64. The affixes •vidhal* and 'bhaktal 9 come
respectively after the words € Bhauriki \ and € Aishnk&ri &c^
in the sense of 'sphere of country 1 .
This debars wj II Thus 5kftftifiw, ^ftqfrft &c \^k\RH^ 9 en!««.
qifo^im (^rkthi; vtfcm, mftiqvX 8 %^n (faror.X 9 Wr. 10 ^w.
l ^s*nft, 2 fnrorapr (qiromX s nronr*, 4 nrero*, 5 ^tjropr*
(*renr*) f 6 sfhrow, 7 *&*&**, 8 omrror, 9 treftflr, 10 fmPhmw, n Ait
** (^nrm X 12 from, 13 ottoot*, 14 mvifrr*, 15 qfont<*, 16 *fNta;
17 &ttOT**t 18 TOHT, 19 &*¥, 20 ww 9 21 Votfiw, 22 WHf, 23 *w
(if) 24 3^^ f 25 f*qft* (ftfft* and VtffX 26 ntPtfiw. 27 -Jto*, 28
*ntf*r, 29 craror, 30 tfomror.
ift^lfifacteg^ : WHT^f 11 Vt H <F{rft II CT, SIFT, «nf^t, tfit-
s^*n-*PiT5*3 11
55. The affix «mr (IV. 1. 83) added to the names '
of Metres, indicates a Prag&tha beginning therewith.
The words of this sfitra require a little explanation. *: 'that'Le;
a word in construction in the first case. *wi • its # I. e. this gives the meaning
of the affix, mfc € beginning ' ; this qualifies the base or prakpti. The word
ffir is added for the sake of precision. S^TO € after the name of a metre *•
This points out the base, spiftv € in the sense of Prag&tha'. This qualifies
the meaning of the affix. To put it in other words, the sfttra means, that
the affix w* is added to the name of a metre, when that metre is the beginn-
ing of a Prag&tha, and the whole word so formed means a Prag&tha beginn-
ing with that metre. Thus qfoj is the name of a metre, adding sr? to it we
get qfcfc which means « a Prag&tha beginning with the metre Pankti ". Simil-
arly W25*:, *n*nr: &c
Why do we say "beginning"? If the metre is in the middle or end
of a « Prag&tha* the affix will not be employed. Why do we say « after the
15
Digitized by
Google
yiQ : m I [ Bk IV. Ch. II. §. 57.
name of a metre 9 ? The affix will not be added to a word which is in the
beginning of a Prag&tha. Why do we say 'in the sense of a Prag4tha'?
The affix will not be added, if the metre is the beginning of an Anuv&ka &c
and not of a Prag4tha. Prag4tha is the name of a particular kind of Mantra
or Hymn. w&\ Jplt i|«lirt«l flrtf* fe*P%, H JPfPPmi Wi4mmI41 *r spire 1*5***% »
Vdrt: — The affix «r*| is added to the name of a metre in a self-des-
criptive sense without changing the meaning of it ; and the word so formed
is in the neuter gender. As, ^yr** r the metre Trishtubha', Jipnr^ &c
nsnfr wiUwft^w u H^ H *&&& n *fcnfc, xratsnr, qtzpFT. ft
Rfit} RSWfr n*fil U
56. The same affix *njr indicates, when it is added
to a word which denotes either the object of a battle or the war-
rior of a battle, a battle fought for that object or by that
warrior as a leader.
The phrase snss* is understood here ; showing that the word in con-
struction to which the affix is to be added must be in the first case: and must
be the name of the * object " irahR*» or of the u warrior n ifaj u The whole
word so formed must denote a 'battle*. Therefore, the word sfaiH gives
the meaning of the affix.
This *HT M*UJHH*M SUTOfcl = iff: "A battle fought for Bhadrft". So also
&*np a a battle fought to gain SubhadrA w . Similarly gyfyrrei 3teH>W I OTPTO
= soft*!** 'battle led by Ahim&l& warriors 9 So also TO^pTR*:, HTO: U
Why do we say "in the sense of a battle ?" Observe gprsT hjNhhw
*PTO 'Subhadr& is the object of this gift*. Here no affix is added. Why do we
say 'after a word denoting an objectora warrior'? Observe,jW5T "itfirarstq OTFTOl I
2R OTftfcT Pltsfe sft*T %*5l ^^ II
• 57. The affix or added to the name of a weapon,
indicates a game played with that weapon.
The sfttra literally translated means: 'that is the weapon in this, denot-
ing play ; the affix <* is added ' L c. to a word in the first case in construction,
Digitized by VjOOQLC
-Bk. IV. Ch. II. 5 59. ] - *1 -y%7
denoting the name of a weapon; w is added to denote a play. Thus *«**
HfWtHri standi » mil* a game played with sticks". So4ta"agame played
with Bsts".
Why do we say *a weapon 9 ? Observe mat wimwi f 43*141 <t the garland
Is an ornament in this play 9 . Here no affix is added to ***** H Why do we
say 'in denoting a game? Observe: — *f^T UJT* *rcitf IpfTOTS 'the sword is the we*
apon in this army 9 . These words are as a rulejn the feminine gender (IV. I.
4 and 15X the feminine being formed by m a
. 68. The affix «r, added to a noun of action ending
in the affix n^, denotes an action occurring in that.
These words are also feminine. The meaning of the words of the
aphorism is:— ip?: "after a word ending in the affix tf^"; or 'that 9 , n&i *in it 9 ,
the feminine gender shows that the word is also feminine, fcqr "action 99 ; this
qualifies the sense of the affix. To put it in other words, the sfitra means,
"After a word ending in q*t, expressing an action, being in the 1st case in
construction, the affix sy is added in the sense of a 7th case-affix, the resultant
word being in the feminine gender 99 .
Thus * 3HmiTlwri TO%-f&*<mrr, so also^fftnTrU The nasal is added by
VI. 3. 71. Thus ^Smnrr yrqr 'a chase with hawks to bring down or fell the
prey 9 . Vfamr wn "an oblation to the ancestors in which sesamum is thrown 9 ".
The repetition of erotf in this sfitra, though its anuvptti could have
been obtained from the last sfltra, indicates that this is a general rule, and
not one confined to "games 99 only. Thus y4Mi<flwtf fipto$%=tF*<rar fitful
59. The affix ann (IV. 1. 83) comes after a word
denoting 'some subject of study 1 , in the sense of 'who ha»
studied that or who understands that'. v
In others words, the sfltra means that the affix is added to a word in
the accusative case in construction, denoting a person who studies or knows,
that As *ff*?rs>ft3 = BT^ 'who studies Prosody 9 . WfiT*: (VII. 3- 3) *****
knows grammar 9 . So also ^*, Vfrr: Svho knows the causes 9 . $*g& f $l*mn •
Digitized by VjOOQLC
f\Z . v$i [ Bk. IV. Ch. II § 6a
The word tr^is repeated in this sfitra, in order to show a distinction between
one who studies and who understands. .
•TOtTO* II _
qiffa* ii ftur ^r gngwi ^fnfPrgrf <
60. The affix s^ comes in the sense of 'one who
studies or one who understands', after the name of a sacrifice,
after ( uktha &e', and after a stem ending with the word 'sfitra'.
This debars «t^U Thus srrfirerfireP 'who understands or studies
Agnbhtoma Sacrifice \ qnftftpff:, tfl^ft*:, Bfantfgfo :, qiffo<hffl^ j %l«^gfiw n
Ishti: — If a word ending in 'sfitra', begins with the word 'Kalpa', the
affix 9T5 is added and not t%. Thus : qnFfinr: 4 who studies Kalpa-sfltra'.
VArt : — This affix comes after words ending in ffor, HST* and ssft, as
qi*Wfifa*s , grtftftWP , flnqpH*: , "miNtWftW, «n^rfFq^, MKmi*fiM<fr: tt
Vdrt : — Not so if the word fam is preceded by the words srjf, W* t q&
$K(if and ft II As ujiifHuiQull =*TTjf ftv, OT^fWi ^nftn:» ^ra^Pun, %ftn: II
All these are formed by «r$ and not *$ n
Vdrt : — The affix «^ comes in the same sepae-afterinrmes^Qf stories
(bttoipO, narratives Omifrmfa^i) , and after the woi qs IgjggTg and * *^3* As
Vdrt : — The affix w comes in the same sense, after words beginning
with h$, and *r f and after Dvigu compounds. As 3$%?:, fforT, ^Rrifoft
?rtTCJ:, ft^T* « l^mi<*»W II
VArt : — The affix k% comes in the same sense after the words sngt
«W, and ww, As *h*hIhm**j wnlfif =*ngg^ f mfiwPi nwfa*: h
Vdrt : — The affix f^m comes in the same sense after a compound
word ending in q^; as, S^rf^P II
Vdrt : — The affix &qp( comes diversely in the same sense, after the
compound words TOfTO and wero As snnfirer. f. TOTCfa^ft IV. 1. 4iV<ftoT-
pRfr (f. Tfintfll^r). By the force ol the word 'diversely* we get the affix w^ 9 as
liHIITO and mfeiv: N
1 Wi 2 h)«M4<|, 3 sqr*, i ^HSTf 5 y-H-rK, 6 ft^rR, 7 Prf%^f t 8 ft-
Digitized by VjUOQLC
BK. IV. Ch. II. 5 64 ] 1*1
719
nir, 15 vft**, 16 »***, 17 tffar, 18 **** (if i«*) 19 ^i^m
daoftgg) "° !*• 21 , rf^ # » 22 *n?, 23 •**, 24 3* (*<««* «t. •!*. y*X
25 «roff . 26 *rjn^
61. The affix 5^ comes, in the sense of " who
studies or who knows *, after the words c Krama &c \
This debars n<5 N Thus WHIP (VII. 1. 1) top &c The words 1 ush,
2 qf, 3 ftwr, 4 *lfw, S «Ffll belong to this class.
ito 11 i^m^miy^ : to* «ml% w*ft% «rt3«u9iPiH* 11
# 62. The affix 'ini* comes in the sense of "who
studies or who knows '\ after the word ' anubrahmana \
This debars «nj u The word Ignwm means 'a book in the imitation
of or similar to a BrAhmaija book \ He who studies an H^aijw is called «?$-
msrf^i which word is thus declined :— JTjmsrtf, *T 3mglfcfr, lyyufa &c.
The affix fPr also has the force of Hj? f and by Sfttra V. 2. 115 mr *Pl *Qt 9 this
word tFTOTglor might have taken both the affixes fpr and ¥^ in the sense of
inrv ; but as a matter of fact, it only takes ffH in that sense.
63. The affix 3^ comes in the sense of " who stu-
dies or who knows ", after the words * vasanta &c. f
This debars «v^n As, qreftrrer* * who studies the book relating to
Spring', jrffo: &CU 1 <RRT. 2 tfr, 3^, ^VRf, 5f^, 6*tpr, 7 ipt,
N 8 -to, 9 vRipr, 10 mH n "J*** 12 **c,
\ Stares* >VU *!%[& n tffarntis^ ■
?f%r: ii m^m^mi^^Rm i whw g***ftc n
64. After the title of a work, which is named
after the Announcer thereof, the affixes denoting " who stu-
dies or who knows that n are elided by * luk\
This sfitra may be rendered in the following way also :— " There is
15^ of these affixes after a word ending with an affix denoting announcer ".
The affixes denoting iffa* or the first propounder are taught in IV. 3. 101 &c
Thus qrftfSRi SniWt=<lrfMfawt • Ae system of Grammar enounced by P&fini V
Digitized by
Google
-7*9 - tffcG-Luit-ELisicm. t Bk - nr. Ch. II. § 66:
mfln«fl*iq*fl*i s miAihU :, so also «nftTPT : II The difference between the word
irf^fa meaning the systempf Grammar, and qrptfHE formed with *P?, meaning
whostudiesthat Grammar, would consist in the accent, and the formation of the
feminine. As qtfMhn »T3Pft U For had there been no elision expressly enjoined
by this sdtra, in forming the feminine, 3^ would be required by IV.1.15, as the
word would end in wp^; and the accent of the word would be finally acute («r^
being acute by the universal rule of affix-accent III. I. 3). But when the
affix is elided, the feminine is formed by *T%, the accent is on the middle,
owing to the 9 affix (Phit Su II. 19)
^TffaiS II TOWH^ttW **r«pj 11
65. The affix denoting " who studies that or who
knows that " is elided by luk, after the title of a sfttra work, *
having ^ as penultimate. ,
Thus *te* is the title of PAnini sfttra. Those who study u*tf will b$
called also stc^, as sre^T: q rfftpfar- * those who study, the Ash{aka '. So also
^TO^jnrrtfar:, Prar ^to^fhi 11
Vdrt: — The elision takes place only where the title is formed by a
numeral ': as in the examples above given. Thus Ji4Hl(<i«K £«W*ft% = 1?raTfiWf
SO also 4ilc^l4^|: N
Why do we say 'having q? for its penultimate" ? Observe ^<}<!Um4UI
s^TTTO*: 11 This sdtra applies, of course, to those words which are not formed
by affixes denoting ift^ or the Announcer.
66. The affixes denoting the announcer, when
added to Chhandas and the Br&hmanas, express this relation
only. .' —
The word qfcs is to be read into this sfitra. The force of the affixes
denoting announcer (IV. 3. 101), when used after a word denoting a Vedic
Text or a BrAhma^a, is that of expressing " one who studies n or M one who
knows w . 9 ftrofo means w this relation ", i. e. the subject treated of in this
section, namely, the relation of «T^f or %f^ ll In other words, the affixes,
which ordinarily denote 'announcer', have the force of " one who studies or
one who knows " Vvhen added to Veda-Text or Brfthmagas. That is, a s^tR
affix should not be added to a Veda or a Br&hmaga, except when an snify or
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. II. 1 67. J .*rrgjfaw-t?w • 721
Vry affix follows it, and as such latter affixes are always elided by IV. 2. 94,
it follows that a ift*ff affix when added to a Veda or a BrAhmaga, means * he
who studies or knows the Veda anounced by*. In fact there is no affix which
can denote merely the announcer of a Veda, perhaps because the Vedas are
eternal and no one can be its announcer only, but must be one who has
studied it and known it, in order to qualify him to promulgate it
Thus from the word *nr, the name of a Veda-Text, we get~4i*p
meaning 'those who study or know Ka{ha Veda 1 . The word Is thus formed.
To the word qj* we add the affix ftr*r denoting announcer, by IV. 3. 104 :
then we elide it by IV. 3. 107, leaving the bare word *ar, then we add u%
which again we elide by IV. 2. 64. qnr-t-ftft=qi?-K> (IV. 3. 107) ; 9f*-f*r*3
q»* (IV. 2. 64) Plural *&v "those who study the Veda announced by Katha".
Other examples to illustrate this sAtra are: 4hff: (IV. 3. 101) 'who
study the Veda announced by Muda\ Wjrf:, irnrtPnr: (IV. 3. 104) *nra%-
fa*: (IV. 3. 106) "who study the Veda announced by PippalAda, RichAva,
or VAjasaneya". Similarly with words denoting a BrAhma^a-Text Thus:
mf^f: (IV. 3. IO4), TTWftf: (IV. 3. 105), tTRTOffrn (IV. 3. 105) ^tfipr. (iv!
3. ios) "who study the BrAhma^as announced by TA^dya, Bhallava, SAtyAya-
na, or Aitareya *.
Why is the word BrAhma^a which is also Chhandas, used separately
in this sAtra ? In order to include only a certain limited number of BrAhma^a-
Textstothe benefits of this rule, and not all. Thus it will not apply to the
BrAhma^a announced by YAjnyavalkya. Thus nrg^gf»< ifhoFl KT*n»nfa=
aiWWllft II Similarly StaHTPr II These BrAhma^as being of recent origin,
the presumption of eternity does not apply to them, See IV. 3. 105.
The word ^r meaning "and* is employed in the sAtra. It has the
force of applying this rule to some other cases not specially mentioned in the
siitra. Thus it will apply to some Kalpa Texts and SAtra Texts also. Thus
9TTOftT:, <ftftii%«i: " who study or know the Kalpa texts announced by K4-
fiyapa or Kusika' so also sAtra : as, qrmrfWt Pw* "the Bhikshus who study
the SAtras promulgated by Parasara ". fe* 1*P. *#&*:, l*ftw &c
Why do we say -Chhandas and BrAhmaflas"? Because the vht affix
after any other word will have its own significance, pure and Simple; as,
c rrf^rtW«ire^^ii ^jftarmui
^ The Quadruply-significant affixes.
3 far: 11 sftfSr \mH\m*h*RH£<\ft m*tft *vrf*ffcf *uwt H^fir, iisroronnfafar <f*r*
wi%, **fafNf*i Prffe^wsi *r*mr h*Rc 11 ;
Digitized by
Google
723 _ <«Stf*WM**i [ Bk. IV. Ch. II. 5 69
67. (An affix is placed after a word expressive of
anything) in the sense of-"that thing is in this" — the place
taking a name therefrom.
The words of this aphorism require a detailed examination. fr^'that\
L e. the word in construction to which the affix is to be added must be in the
nominative case. «lR^ a in this" — this gives the meaning of the affix; srffcr "i* n
this qualifies the sense of the base, fftr & added merely for the sake of distinct-
ness, serving the same purpose as quotation marks in modern writing. ^w i ^flfiM
"a country having that name"; this qualifies the sense of the affix. The sense
is:-"the affixes already taught or to be taught, come after a word being in the
nominative case in construction, in the sense of the location, when the whole
word so formed denotes the name of a country in which that thing exists".
This sAtra and the three subsequent sfitras are in fact one, though
divided into four, for purposes of convenience. The affixes having the sense of
these four sfitras,are called ^TgtfCnff "quadruple significants".
Thus TjRfT BrffcrO* Sfaf =$1J*W. Audumbara-the country in which
there are glomerous fig trees. Similarly *T^c,<Tpfo: &e. all these words are
formed by the universal affix~vr\(IV. I. 83^
This sfitra debars the TOpBta affixes.
68. After a word in the third case in construction^
an affix is added, in the sense of 'completed by him', when the
whole word so formed is the name of a country.
The phrase ^% HH^ l fH of the last sfitra governs this and the two sub-
sequent sfitras. By these four sfitras the names of countries are formed from
various substantives. Thus jflm^H fMnTT= *ftmi*41 *nrft "the city of KauSambf,
completed by KuMmba "• Similarly QTOft t rf^OT M a mote completed by a
thousand (gold coins) or persons ". A place is named after the means or the-
person, by which or through whom'it is established. - —
69. After a word in the sixth case in construction,
an affix is added, in the sense of 'his dwelling-place'; the whole
word expressing the name of a country.
The sOtra literally means M his dwelling place*. A place is some-
times named after the people whose habitation it is. Thus fa: " the country of
\
Digitized by
Google
Bk. I V. Ch. I !. 1 7%. ) *ng«rt*-«»* o 7* J
theSibis", 4lftr M S g yi W l Ew ifl V* « WlfrlW: H The word ^C^Hwts^p*-
nPWW
70. And lastly a place is named after whatever is'
found near it.
In this aphorism the word, to which the affix is to be added, is not
shown. The word ir* must, therefore, be supplied from the last sAtra. It
means, therefore, " an affix is added to a word in the genetive case in cons-
truction, in the sense of not far off" the whole word being the name of a place;
Thus ftRmqi *T^C *rj=VtTO>s the city in the neighbourhood of which the
river Viditt flows. So alsoVraPlll
The ^r has the force of combining the sense of all the three previous
aphorisms with this ; so that the four sfttras 67, 68, 69 and 70 form but one
complete sfitra, and the meaning denoted by these will be understood in the
subsequent aphorisms.
attorn v*tH q^ift* *ffc-*m I
71. The affix ^r^ comes after a stem ending in »
or g;, (in the four-fold senses given above).
This of course debars the universal affix n^(IV. 1. 83). Thus im**a
from «hj ' a tribe of Kshatriyas ' ; ^mi^T*^ from qftfW, and ^rifcn^ from *fafc-
>5 II But from ftj we have f $inft 'the river Ikshumatt, named after the sugar-
canes near it \ Here we add the affix *r$T> taught in the subsequent sfltra
IV. 2. 85, which debars *n* by the rule of a subsequent debarring the prior
when both are of equal force (I. 4. 2). The affix «r^ governs the six sfltras
upto IV. 2. jj. The difference between *fK and vr^ consists in the accent
72. The affix sn^ comes in the quadruple sense
after a word which ends in the affix *rg^, and whose stem is
polysyllabic.
The word *g?r]f is a compound of wff^ meaning literally € many
vowels' i. e. polysyllabic, and of *rjf: meaning stem. A word which, exclusive
16
.-, — . .. JDigfeed-by
Google
7*4 *rnitfNr»THw [ Bk. IV. Ch. II. § 7*/
of the affix *jij f consists of more than two syllables, takes the affix «rs*n
This debars *r*,il Thus ^yi»m*,%>J<Km* »
Why do we say " after a polysyllabic stem"? Observe *TTfiR<f ^ *rm^* 11
Here though the word BTfipP^ ends in the affix *TJ^, yet the irjf or the stem
viz. stftt is a word of two syllables only, hence these words take «r>( in form-
ing names of countries. In fact, the word *g% qualifies the word wrjf, as it
stands without the affix irj$ and not the word inclusive of that affix. There-
fore HTHTTfrf Prcrcp sinsrofa, by in| n
73. The affix srs^ comes in the quadruple sense,
after a polysyllabic Nominal stem when 'a well' is to be
designated.
This debars sf^. Thus flfodfe f PtfrT: $V =$4roc: " a well completed
by Dfrghavaratra". So also nuPHWI* 11
74. The affix snt comes in the quadruple sense,
after any Nominal stem in denoting 'a welT situated on the
northern bank of the river VipasA.
This debars *n$ ; and it applies to all words whether . polysyllabic or
not Thus ^hf: "a well completed by Datta", Ifhp &c
Why do we say on the * northern bank " ? Because if a well is situate
on the southern bank of the river Vip4&, then the affix st*J will apply as *nb
and *frH: 9 the difference being in the accent This sfttra illustrates the refined
distinctions drawn by the author, and the importance attached to accents in
former times. „.
*n<aifiy4&i ll vs<i ll q^Tfa II ^«Miftw ^«wO n _
75. The affix sr^ comes after the words sankala
&c, in the above four-fold sense.
This debars «r^ll The word Q3t3v is equivalent to fcrcr: q&: 11 Thus
1 *fai*, 2 *«?!*<*, 3 ?*P!*, 4 3fT, 5^?(«W). 6*w* f 7jj«T f 8pwpf (firaFf),
95W, 10 ^*r, H^JJI, 12 §<&; l3 5**, H^RJPS*. 15^rftjpj, 16 $*• 17 *%*>*
(fcrarer), I8*fo> (zfHm-, vfNift »*?**, 9Ds*i«» 5iq«ro, 22pftf f 231m,
Digitized by
Google
bk. iv. ch. ii. $ 78. ] ^rnpft*-*?* • 7*$
24irnfo, 25 m. 26«nnr,27«ffH,28«Nn f 29 \** $ SO WW (^W% 31 ««*, 82 *-
^TW, 33 nptf*ns. 34 nr**, 35 fnrj?0 36 *T*v37 ifwi*, 38 «n*. also 39*4*,
40 »if , 41 3*.
^fit: ii wimifim/Vu* 3 * tow* **ft ^nyrt^: &4lrc ^tf^\% m^ en% mfir t
76. So also when the place is situate in the lands
of the Sauvira, or S&lva or of the Eastern people ; and the
word in these cases is always feminine.
The word £rcfc &c, arc attributes of ^viq~ilf& (IV. 2. 67): so also the
word sflj 11 Thus jHTffinfl M the city founded by Datt&mttra n (in Sauvira).
So alsofynftr (in SAlva) *ra?$, HR5*ft f «nf*r^ft, *nwft (in Eastern countries).
77. The affix *n* conies after the words Q^T^J &c f
in the four-fold sense.
This debars the affix in? which would have otherwise come by IV. 2^1
and 73. Thus «3 i *5U|iq* »Hits <?temn« ll So also qnfa^ 11 The use of
the word it^i, though its anuvptti came from IV. 1. 83, is for the sake of
indicating that this sfttra debars sfitra IV. 2. 85. Thus Mllimfl H# II
l^TW, 2,^3 H*J, 4 <g*j ta?y), 5 %*rft^ (d*nf%*X 6 *$**•
7 ftngfrr*, 8 ntf, 9 *&q f 10 ii^JU*< ( ii*ta*X U fwprf (««*X 12 ^
13 ^ fryn ft (**&£ ), 14 nt* (fftfl and nrf*), 15 nfij^T 16 f^tt
^ftn>^B q^Tft B <Mt-(irqc) I
jfa: ii tufluMivgnwft mfa ^njtfihp «
78. The affix *iur comes after urn in the fourfold
sense.
This debars wp( of IV. 2. 74. This sfitra consists of one word frft
in the nominative case. As a general rule all words to which affixes are to
be added are put in the ablative case in these sfitras. The fact of this ex-
ceptional treatment of the word \rflt indicates that this word takes *q^ under
all circumstances, whether alone, or forming part of a compound. In fact,
the nominative case in this sfitra is a very ingenious explanatory artificiality.
Thus ffa:, srnraiiN: or fefcrcfo
*£Nym B >w> B M^ift B i^qvj|ct- s sr-(«rnf) i
Digitized by
Google
7^6 - ^HS^F-jR&c. [ Bk. IV. Ch. II § 8a
79. The affix «rm comes in the fourfold sense after a
• stem having ^ for its penultimate.
This debars *p^ which would have come by IV. 2. 71 and 73. Thus
•ftp m w^nr* otto jrour, «?fttp^TfqisRr *n**fc* m^nft^ror : 1 tnfircro* v*$*w^
sfawfilr i *pc «roi*Frt ottow wfimfwiVn: suro «fwr Hffar ^iifltftnis 11 vm- —
(i) Brfhpnrf^s? **i* *nrcc 11 (2) $tip*rfto*ep**«rar *rcfir iT(3) qnpoflra: *&
ir^rar *rcfir m (*) 4Nj*ifl^«HMwwl *nrtt 11 (5) stotRhi %& inn* **fir 11 (6) y*t
Rkq: jp Jpsrafr «nrf^ II (7) 1ftnff»* |PiH«uil *T*t% II (8) «TOnftHfr C TO* *TO% M
(&) WOTft** t^TO* **f% II (10) ^FTOrff** °* mtrft *TO% II (11) TOlft** * V-
writ T*rfa ii (12) TOTf***: ^ to* **fir ii (13) qFrtffHjs fa^^^wr **fir II (14)
*J*!J*ilR** f 5 ^ TO* *nfir M (IS) WlftMlRHlt «l: TO* *HI§ II (16) WW"
ft*** *r^to* **flr ii (17) 3?2frftHre^ to* *nft w
80. In the above four senses are added the follow-
ing 17 affixes after the following 17 classes of words respec-
tively: —
I. *^(=«rer) after Btftr* &c 2. g^(=fn) after $*ip* &c 3, q? after
q&l &c. 4. s^(=ffj) after 53* &c 5. %* after «re &c 6. *r (or *r) after ^
&c 7. *Fr (= w) after to &c. 8. c after *t^F* &c 9. s^ (=^0 after Sfa &c
ia 011 (=n) after ^faro &c 1 H after v* &c. 12. <^ (=«TW^) after to &c
J 3- fa? (=*n*rf%)» after *n< &c 14. fir (f) after g^ip? &c 15. s^ (n) after rh^
&c, 16. ^ (£) after ^lf &c 17- *? (f^fr) after $3* &c
The above affixes 53^ &c are applied to the above classes of words,
enft is to be added to every one of the above seventeen words. The first part
of the sfitra upto *f? gives the seventeen affixes and the latter part gives the
seventeen word-class. The allotment or assignment of affixes is made by
1.3. KX
The examples of the above are :—
(l) sffftyreCT, ifa^Rin (2) sraffSte, *n3fte, (3) Htw; , «mnra?:, (4)
ggfi^t lHM?fi<g« , (5) *lfifow. «hlRfo« » (6) $*rif:, «nr& f (7) %ft^, **&&, (8)
«T^:, (9) qfaq«, «?ten*3*iq . 10 OTKTAl^ Wfnft^. (H) *F& # «E*5*, (12) *I-
W*R:, ^HiT^:, (13) ^hhrf^:, ^RrHRlft:, (14) ^TJfft:, "WlftWW, (1^) fc»WI
(16) qro^.q^^n^t and (17) lastly ^^%^U
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. II. J 80 ] wfjcfww--jw &c tt 727
The word fwflw will be seen, by referring to the above lists, to occur
In three classes viz wtfTOriw,(36),$3Wft(14X&nd TOJlft (3), Moreover it is gover-
ned by thegeneral affix WW. also inthequadruple sense,according to the opinion
of PatanjalL And because it occurs in the WTOlft class (IV. 2. 82), therefore
this universal WW. (IV. 1. 83) will be elided after it As we have already shown -
before under I. 3. 51 when fwOwww was formed from fwtfWP M
1 wflfW, 2|WW, 3 jro*, 4 »nw, 5 www. 6 (WTO, 7 TOIW, 8 £|£lww,9«Sfr-
giw^*. 10 wrofww, 11 \rorw, 12 wtwtww, 13 wwwrww (also VkhiwhX 14 <n.«Kiiww
(nt X 1* wtowtww. 1? wtarqw, 17 wrwwraw*, 18 £twraw°. 19 wwnww*. 20 ^twr*,
21 wraww. 22 mfrtmm , 23 wwrow. 24 ftww, 25 fwww, 26 wr»w, 27 wtrow»
28 wn»**lTO (wfw X 29 wlro, 30 wra^m (ww-X 31 wpwto (w*w X 32 fa«wr,
33*ww (*w*X 34 fwtW (wfwK.) SSj^r, 36 fa«W, 87 wflW, .38 w*f, 39 wffc,
*0 WWWW. (WWW K.X 41 «ny* 42 WTOfW*. 43 Wl^, 44 WTO* (wwX *5 W3TOI*.
46 «rc, 47 VnftwW (sic) and 48 WPWTWW-
l *viv, 2 wfte, s wftww (witoX 4 w^iw., 5 from, 6 nhiw*, 7 dww*, 8dww,
9 iwww*. 10 m 11 $c, 12 www*, 13 swww*. 14 gw*. 15 gwt, 16 mn OmrcX 17
wiw, 18 $to, 19 jutr*. 20 gwr, 21 jjw, 22 wfww, 28 fwww ( fwror. wror %
24wwww.25fw$*nw(vl. $fttnw; ft$wtwX 26 tow**, 27 ww", 28 wwf*. 29 wfc>
*W; 30 JW* # OfhUFWIWTX 31 WWW., S2ww*,33 WWWTW "»d WWIWW,
l wro, 2 *roYw. 3 to (fwwX 4 fMtw, 5 fwww, 6 fwww, 7 fwwrw, 8 fwww (t. 1.
fwwww . fwwwX 9 fwww, io wft\[», n wwjjw, 12 wwfw, 13 ffrw, 14 ww # , 15 w*ww?.
I6www*iw., I7wwww*. 18 *vw, i9wre fcawwrcX 20wfft, 2iwww, 22wwjg,23
W*J», 24 wftww, 25*3, 26 wlro, 27 wr*w, 28 *»*•! 29 qftfW. 30 wfr. 81 «fg.
1 $2T, 2 www, 3 cwwrw, 4 fue (to*, i^r), 5 Wfc, 6 wf*. 7
ww", 8 w?w, 9 wftwiw, io fwwfw*. n ^pr», 12 ww # , 13 wg*. 14 fwflw, 15 wv*. lft
WV*W, 17 WWW, 18 wwiW, 19 $w, 20 fwWfW, 21 iWWPT. 22 w°*w, 23 qure;
24 Pre, 25 Wf.
l wrw, 2 wiw (wwX 8 ww*w, 4 www, 5 w^wr («ft?wX 8 wro, 7 wrw, 8 ww,
9 WW, 10 w$W, 11 w*qw # , 12 w$*. 13 j^r, 14 fro (fWW and froX 15 WW, ,6 *& 17
wfc # , 18 w«< # , 19 nf (5^) 20 wftnr*, 21 ^5, 22 ^fhim.: 23 iit,24 «nr.
lyr, 2qr, 3w*«,4 qw. 5qx*. 6^, 7 TOW* 8 ftw*. 9 5^, 10 «R* ( 11
•1*l», 12 it*, 13 jut**, 14 w«, 15 WTO, 16 TO- 17 WW, 18 «*
l>«Wf, 2 f??W!T (TOWrX 3 TOJWT. 4 ITOWRT, 5 ftn*WT 6 «TO>W, 7 f*? (rf»)
8 «ST (W^TX 9 WW?, 10 w? # . 11 «pT # , 12 fw*. 13 ^W*. 14 3? # , 15 Hf (u^X 16 Wft-
WTI # , 1' WWIW* (d.i. WWIWX 18 STOT*. 19 WW # . 20 f^W (fTOT) 21 ffc»* # . 22 f^WT,
23^WZT, 24Wf?,253W.
1 WW**, 2 ??T (also^-X 3 WW (WW and ^wX * W?W, 5 w*. 6 qw, 7 JT, 8«H*
9 UT»W, 10 TO, 11 fiRST, 12 *j? (jwe), 13 <jiH ( Wtw! ), 14 w^ # , 15 WSPf •, 17 Wf», 18
5W«, 19 ttf***, 20 tftw*. 21 «,♦.
Digitized by
Google
728 - *rrgtffaMR&c n ' [ Bk. IV. Ch. II. § 81
7 <r ?* (hmmw at. to, «*!?*), 8 m (^r*) f 9 toto^, 10 gim, n «retar, 12 *rtfa,
13 *rcr*», u «?*•, 15 £•, 16 to*, 17 jrftar* 18 #t** (***. €h*), 19 «n* Grot),
20 *ro, 21 ^r\ 22 sro, 23 jot, 24 ^rf, 25 fpnn, 26 «**, 27 *<%<*, 28 TOTO*,
29 ^wj*, 30 TOTO 31 *tfc •
1 $^ro, 2 «nfor», 3 ^>ifk fa**t) f 4 srflft, 5 frcsfc (5O, 6 y<* # » 7 5c*, 8
jpri^ (rightly g^n), i*r taw!) % 9 5* (jtr), 10 inr, n «rjf # , 12 mm*, 13
qfor*. 14 ST^ITO*. 15 *T*H* 16 *$*, 17 irfSpr, 18 TO*, 19^«r« f 20 *ft^, 21 ft**
(f^rT; ft**!) , 22 *h*\ 23 *ffc # , 24 **m\ 25 «fu\ 26 to*, 27*PPI # , 28 *ta*%
29 3f^r»,30yrft* f 31 *fif*° t 32 B^Ni*, 33 $k\ 34 tfu, 35 *nfifcr, 36 ft^ # ,
37 niA<tii, 38 qir, 39 furore, 40 fa*f ,
1 WW, 2^j (y*)* 3 «frT*, 4 ^• f 5 ^r*t 8 WJH*, 7 to* # , 8 5^°, 9 *«*•,
10 *P5, 11 $*, 12 WJf, 13 jiH, 14 5*, 15 WiTO,
lfW, 2jpr°, 3 3*, 4g>«¥ , 5BTT, 6 frHf&M (q»Hl3*) , 7 4&&P, 8 ftp*
9«tR?i , lOirfiraLi^r^r (also q^qripr), 11 3***, I2tfta* (tffc*), i3«T?rr, I4*p*w
(*F*ff). 15 0W, 16 OT*, 17 *jfav« (f^). 18 frFfc 19 •Sjppfc 20 *ffcr*°, 21 1^°,
22Sm^, 23 tf*Y 24 ft*nr°, 25 W, 26 ft^ir, 27 *?$*•, 28 gr*FT, 29$*w
(fcPCT). 30 ftsRi , 31 3**°, 32 fa*°, 33 fa* , 34 iRfi, 35 f^r, 36 ^?r% 37 WRi
<^^r»^i), 38 »ro^, 39 trftOTW II
1 *p*, 2 tffcs, 3 «r*,4ir*gw(gw), 5 y^ (yrr), 6 mnjtu (sfO, 7 qrvcnF*,
Sfar*, 9^i«ft , lO^SY , 11 fic*p*(fiR*), lS^t^r Ofltosr), 13$^, 14 *n*tf-
«m (btf^?0, 15 **°, 16 Spr°, 17 3tpw°, 18 *T3*r, 19 *n* f 20 fttm m
i^f»m, 23pn%?r (f^r), 3ftirf*nr (f^r), 4 **rf*nr* f 5 h*x%*, 6 m« t
7 ***, 8 igfir* («ifiPF) 9 jp*, 10 ft*, 11 tfhrerfH 12 *ri*, 13 t^ ** *$**>
15 ift^, 16 ^Prw # , 17 wr* # , 18 ftm # f
1 JPTf|% 2 HM^<, 3 HlR*, Ou<R«0» 4 3iftf<* fciftf), 5 Q(f*TO (<9&4)f
6nftcr («rft*) t 7 ^rrc, 8 *renr (Hnfrc), 9 jNr°, 10 $if^re 11
1 toj, 2 qwitl, 3 ftrffc, 4 f^RT, 5 Pr^T, 6 WHT?*, 7 fsjjw (^g 1 ^), 8 ft^f,
9 f%ir^, 10 fipnw, 11 Pppw , 12 wtj, 13 f!ri^, 14 ^kr, 15 f^w, 16 ft^r, 17 gW u
1 |t^t 2 ifrTO, 3 n^K, 4 TO^nW, 5 *T*3*U, 6 ^fT^HfH (#), 7 ftrfN", 8 wft-
w, (*??*), 9350^^, 10 g^, 11 tpj^ti, 12 Mmj^ f f 13 jf^ra*, I4 3^r* f 15 sp^ h'
ffrf: II *3t H^illftfl *l*IHi^«fc: SR^t HWf?T, IT^ ^5lR^ ^Pf^Spf^f JfH^fiT U.
81. The name of a kingdom is formed by the
lup elision of these affixes, (when the name of the people
without the change of number and gender, is at the same time
the name of the kingdom).
The words within bracket in the above sfltra are added by the read-
ing together of this sfttra with s&tra I. 2. 51. Dr. Otto J&htlingk the learned
• \
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. II. § 83 ) Elision of ifgrtNr 11 729
translator of PAnini in German, has done $0, and I think this addition is
necessary for the elucidation of the sfttra. "The aphorism literally means:
(The quadruply significant affix) is elided, when the place ( Vff ) to be named
is a kingdom (**m> Thus t^mnrf faret H^ffta^rmn l So also 3***,
*to*p» *nff: f wjfP, hhw, $ot*» s^ff* 11
Why is there no lup-elision of the affix in the following examples :.
•Jtjprcfr^RW ' the Kingdom in which there are fig-trees 9 . Vrot ▼ITO &c ?
Because here the words »fopTO and qftTO are not names of Kingdom, but
are used merely as epithets. In fact the phrase ff»nf**f is understood here
alsa
qiynffora r u ^ 11 q^ n tpnWfcpnw I
82. Also after the word mp* &c, the affix denoting
locality becomes elided, but the number and gender are not
changed.
After the words qro the quadruply significant affix is elided by ^n
The origination of this rule is for the sake of what is not a kingdom (or ?nro?X
to which the last rule applies. Thus W!P!Pr{Ptfl fft^^TOT: "the city (not a
kingdom) not far from the place Vara?*", So slso ^pft, OTtTO*: II
The word ^r in the sfttra implies that this rule applies even to word*
other than those which are given in the list of TCftfi « As «KJ*JWfft "a city
near to bitter Badari tree". :
I ^"ITi (*T*)t 2 ^pffr, 3 tllHuQ, 4 g»ift # f 5 TOP^t*. 6 vflf, 7 ITfWrtft 8 iftf
(j*t «fnt, Ufa «ft$t *nr*r *tt$t), 9 infiqrqrer, to urrrft (*ra<rtfc *mvt) 11 vf*.
12^^*, 13^fP|T # , 14 <!*??*, 15 ***J* 9 16 *3prft (?wft*). 17 HUT, 18 HQQ, 19
nm&t, 20 *ott (*ror) 21 nreft , 22 *****•, 23 ssjCTjft (with **$*), 24
firffito 25 *j|**ft f 26 Wsft, 27 ffort%, 28 Sfln*, Is an «nW%*TB| II
83. Optionally after the word *i&r, the quadruply
significant affix is lup-elided.
Why do we say "Optionally'? The word ipjjjx occurs in the classes *$j-
OT? P) and TO^rff (14) (I V.2.80 classes 4 and 16), and must necessarily take the
affixes 3^ and q* *£ taught therein: for had itnot taken those affixes absolutely,
their would have been no necessity of inserting this word in those classes. The
present rule, therefore, teaches by implication, that the word \\4\Kl takes the
general affix sn^ t besides the above two especial affixes, denoting locality
.Digitized bylv
?le , r
*3<>
^njo** «<a** t Bk IV. Ch. II. §. 86.
And when the word takes this universal affix (IV 1. 83), there the^ option is.
allowed, not otherwise. Thus fj^+*T5» 1 irn^^r^+'^^ a1 0TO»
spy u wmMK^ er tSftfr *wft «wwa<rt<i "
84. The affix z% and s come after the word sf&j
in the quadruple sense.
Thus of the word *r£*j there are altogether six forms denoting locali-
ty, namely two formed by this sGtra, two by the last, and two by the sfttra IV.
2.8a Thus *F&r, *fn**L *n$ft** (formed by r*), tirt^ ( formed by *^),
TO^R^(formed by CT^), and *F&N*(by s>
85. The affix «g<J is added in denoting a river.
When the name of a river is to be designated by something which
is found near it, we add the affix iq* O^and **j> Thus *J**<fa*ft> *W*lft
*fc<fo*, S^rtV, t^rtfh f*ft M See VI. 3. 119 by which the * is lengthened
in these words, and VI. i! 219 by which the udAtta is placed on this vowel
See VIII. 2. 10 by which i^ becomes **tl
The affix qj^ is not however employed in forming the river-names
irpftoft and^mttft, which are formed by *nj added under IV. 2. 68,
86. The affix *g* is added to the words 115 &c
in the four senses given above.
The origination of this rule is for the sake of what is not a river. As
*F*1 ( trfaf ) 11 fQl, 12 tn^*\ 13 TO, 14 f**T f 15 BH^RT, 16 V&f, 17 tmNt, 18
^^19TOTO,20*nf^(«TTft^)21fg,22d'Wt 23 ^(jft^ft) 24 to 25
traftrar, 26 ^r ( iiri ) 27 **°, 28^ ( **t ) 29 ***, 30 w*, 38 in?*, 32 *nfcn*.
fftT'-M JJJJf f¥ ^m f^Hl TOHt ^3* TO* **f% ^irgdsfai: 11
qif%^ 11 ift^rortf ^tR 5 ^ m
87. The affix ^155 comes after the words $g^, *!¥
and ifccTO, in the above four senses, and the final of th^se
words is elided before this affix.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. II."$. 91 ] < *f3tffc$* i 73 r.
Thus «5jt^ ^m» %WflH «
Vdrt : — So also after the word *rfW» as *f|«*n* ll - :
88. The affix J[&% comes after *nr and Wf in the*
four senses given above, the final of the words being, elided*
Thus njpn> and tmpPltt
89. The affix *&% comes after the word fcrtn in*
the above four-senses.
Thus firtgnt**t * the city SikhA-vala ' lit 1 crested as a peacock'.- Hie
word ftrar takes qrT^ by V. 2. Ill, the affix having the same force as «nj^
V« 2. 94, (• whose it Is ' or 'in \vhotn It is *> That ^^ should be distinguished
from the present, in as much as, the latter is employed in making fiaines of
locality, not so the aftix taught in Book V.
ffaf : II TOR fSwirff^H^J: «P«l^ *HI% ^mrftRf: M
90. The affix ^ comes after the words sfe* &c, •
in the four senses?
As TOifopi, W*flfa4 m
1 **snc, 2 *i&, 3 to 4 Rot?, 5 fovftg?*, 6 ix*Hit 1 g^r ( 5^ ) 8 %rti^
si, 9 firar, 10 fa**, 11 *tto # , 12 Vpr # , 13 finrir, 14 tr^^r, 15 qsro, 16 51 ( wst&t
«*. ^ro» gi ) 17 tot, 18 to*, 19 iror, 20 sifarc («rf3Pi ) 21 *rfeg,'22 ***rcr, 23 w^r
( *tr<t ) 24 fcfa, 25 jifanr, 26 ^mro, 27 kiftn ( Vr, ** ) 28 $*r, 29 yrf
30 to^i*, 31 qsro, 32 ftfirita*, 33 fcqftfc, 34 Sun*, 35 **•, 86 tf>
<*\ 37 wfr, 38 it<t, 39 *rftr, 40 Wrer\ 41 f*r, 42 *n°il, 43 foOTO\ 44 q*, 45 Sft«*p
*ra>\ 46 *ft* f 47 armfar, 48 *?rc d , 49 fttin*, 50 to, 51 *tfw, 52<sr>*, 53 tmnrt
54 H^uiitJ% 55 r*f$r, 56 Prrfi^r^r, ( fcm?<TT*3T; Rrm^r, ^r ) 57 mips. 58 jpn, 5*
iro, 60 n**r, 61 a?****,
•Ml{l<lt$qi?r II M B itftfk H «uifl«tiH , $**-* (3:) I
mffei^r it <$s*nm s?*^ 1 TO^rqwii
. 91. The augment $w comes aftci 1 the Words *f
&e, when the affix 5 follows in the above four sonsesi
17
gitized by
73* — ^tyrt* &\w I [ Bk. IV. Ch. II. §. 92.
i
To the words «nr &c. the same affix is added, with the insertion of a ^
after the stenu As TC+$^+tf =HT*t*Pt; *Wft^L &c
The words yp^r and nWl belong also to this class. In the case of
sgs^T the long vowel is shortened, and in the case of front the ^ is elided : e. g.
1 **, 2 to, 3 ft**, 4 **r, 5 **, 6 TO*, 7 f^, 8 ^ 9 ^nr, 10 y*, 11 ^^rr
( ^pp^rnif ) 3=*?* *r, 12 ro^srarcw.
$i^r n ^ n y^iA n $1% i ^
92. The affixes taught hereafter, have senses
othpr than those mentioned above.
The suffixes that will be taught now have senses other than those
already taught in the previous aphorisms. M Let a meaning, other than those
of which' 'progeny* (IV. 1 92) was the first mentioned, and the quadruple
signification ', the last, be called ^re or the remainder ' — and in that remainder
of senses, too, let there be the affix irj &c Thus ^CTWfr 'visible' viz. colour
which is apprehended by vision' from ^JTO^W** 'audible' viz. Sound, from ^w,
tfllsPuH f: ' treated of in Upanishad * L e. soul, ifai from f^* , ' ground on a
stone ' i. e. flour of a fried corn, <*THt ' ridden in by four person' viz. a cart ;
^jfaraL • who is seen on the fourteenth day of the moon ' viz a goblin ; btt^PT*
'pounded in a mortar' viz. barley: 3TPT* 'drawn by horses' viz. a chariot
(Adapted from Dr. Ballantyne's Laghukauroudi).
The regulating influence of the expression qft M in the remainder " ex-
tends from this aphorism forward as far as IV. 3. 134. The affixes 9 &c
taught hereafter, do not come in the sense of ' progeny ' &c, but ihey have,
every one of them, all the senses of Wcf 'being born ' (IV. 3. 25), ^jTrR: (IV.
3. 101), **pnr: (IV. 3. 74) &c. ftrop (IV. 3. 89), &c $*: &c (IV. 3. 38),
Thus^nr means 'born in Srughna (IV. 3. 25), or done in Srughna,
or bought in Srughna, or obtained in Srughna, or skillful in Srughna (IV. 3.
38), or abundant in Srughna (IV. 3. 39), or suited to Srughna (IV.^. 4i),or
staying in Srughna (IV. 3. 53), or what has come from Srughna (IV. 3. 74)
or which has its rise in Srughna (IV. 3. 83), a road leading to Srughna (IV.
3. 85) a messenger going to Srughna (IV. 3. 8s), a gate facing Srughna or
from which men go out to Srughna (IV. 3. 86) a book relating to the History
of Srughna (IV. 3. 87), an inhabitant of Srughna (IV. 3. 89), a person whose
ancestral home is at Srughna (IV. 3. 90) ?
•ftp ii tf£*rcre<m tarcrrai *ranreq q*3nfrarir *owr *m : »
Digirizecfby-vjOO^l-^'
Bk. IV. Ch. IL § 9$ ] W-Affixes. 733
93. The affixes gha and kha are respectively add-
ed after the. words u$ and «reiWT I
The affix f* is substituted for V, and fr for *(VII. I. 2> Thus
tfft* * born &c in a country \ mHm<H: • who or what goes or extends to both
banks'.
VArt: — The affix fsi comes also when the words tnrc and qrc are
taken separately; as well as when compounded inversely: e. g. tnrfN*
' belonging to this bank of the river \ qrfto ' belonging to the other bank \
q mnti^ : * belonging to the other bank as well as to this '• Here as well as
in several of the subsequent aphorisms, merely the stems and their appropriate
affixes are given ; the sense of these affixes are those of ' being born ' &c, to
be taught hereafter in IV. 3. 25 and sAtras that follow It
M These shall now be mentioned derivatives which end with those
affixes the first whereof is S t and the last where of are 15 (IV. 3. 24X with
specification of the original term to which the application of those affixes is
appropriate ; and their varieties of meaning, such as ' being produced there-
from ' IV. 2, 25, and the like, shall be mentioned ; and the declensional cas^s
In connection with which the affixes are appropriately applicable ". (Dr. Ballaii*
tyne's Laghu Kaumudi).
nmrerenr lf *Vi* miA n front 'wwft' ■
%f$F M UH4IMK4 5P? f^niV MWu WW 2 H
94. The affixes zf and *^r ( fa ) come after the
word c gr&ma 9 .
As ftf«! and f|rfhp» f a rustic \
qif%^Pl II JFHTUr iBhfW II
05. The affix ctj^ (q?ni) comes after the words
As tfifctCT* , •ftftaw &c.
ftwi<fti 10 *fcft, ( ^rfr^rtt ) 11 sWi 12 ^Pf» 13 gnrarar ( ffF^rar ) Mhrw, 14 *r*fh
^ — -
Digitized by VjOOQLC
734 - ^-Affixes. JJk. IV. Cii. II. §. 99.)
96. The same affix c^sr is added to the words
: 5^t ^r and ifrar, when the whole words sq formed mean
respectively, ' a dog*, t a sword * and * an ornament \
The force of the affix, as already told above, is to denote 'produce*
&e. (IV. 3. 35«&c): but the whole word has specific significance. As tftftucS :
a a dog (lit pertaining to a family); 5tfwrep = a sword (lit remaining in a
• sheath), t^isa necklace. When not having these meanings, the regular
derivatives from these words are formed by sr^as, 4tt&$ WSF and q*.- u
^jPbp m *jft t^wul**fr «^wTi *rafir 11
97. The affix sw (iw) comes after the words 'nadt 1
&c t in the remaining senses (i. e. IV. 3. 25. &c).
Thus nnw, 'pertaining to a river', *jf?*jn earthen', &c.
l *fl, 2 lift, 3 *ro°r*, 4 *nrefY, 5 *forrN>, 6 ?R?SrcrrNV ( vm ) 7 srnnrfJr*
8 ^nnfft ( itffr ) 9 3n??ft, 10 ifanflr, n <rnrr ( <rrcr ) 12 *nir ( iftt ) 13 ^r^r ( w?
r^r ) 14. *fpfr*, 15 Im'J!) ( ^rtfa^ ) 16 7CTrar j^r, 17 srar.
The word gFPTft occurs In the above list Its derivative will be tft4-
ffifOPUl But some say, it is composed of throe words *r— *f— prft and they
apply the affix to each of them separately. As qfcq*t , qpnwc and Vrt^ U
^fyoim*i|rij<MW4^ II V « l^ri^ II ^f^TT, qsiTcj, S^r:, 31* II
^nr 1 w wph <n*r^ *^*«ep*i*5si^ ip*wt *ro% vPtt«r= h
98. After the words 'dakshinil', 'pasch&t' and'pnras'
the affix 'tyak' (c^) is added in the remaining senses.
As snSNR*; 'pertaining qr produced in the south'; qrara: f ocqdental\
ifttTO: 'oriental 1 ,
5HT: ii *MPnft*iMi<i *&% in*rar *nrc*r %FTCP M
99. After the word 'K&piti'., the affix 'shphak' is
added in the regaining senses: (the feminine being formed
by t^ IV. 1.41), ].",..". /"„ :•
thus qmSwn ^. ^rftw^ jrrw '4 liquor 1 , •• . . •
Digitized
by Google
T Bk. IV. Ch/II. §• "Of. -' ^-Affixes. 73S
V&rt:— So also after *i|ft, iff and *ff as, «i{*!q4h AW, fl^W* •
This debars j^ of IV. a. 125.
?ftr- m Mbfr i wim inqft *wi%i TOrcnp*$^r € fWst sny5FW% •
100. After the word t$ the same affix 'shphak' as
well as the affix «ni[ is added, in the remaining senses, when
. the meaning is a non-human being.
As Ktfkt m or crj^nrtr m: but ufrot **«*« (IV. 2. 134).
Q. The word cj belongs to ^TOTf? class (IV. 2. 133); and when a
f human being is to be denoted, then by IV. 2. 134, it will take the affix %^ %
and when a non-human being is to be designated, then it will take uw by rule
IV. 2. 133; then where is the necessity of the present sfltra by which in[ is
enjoined when a non-human being is to be designated ? To this the reply is
that the force of the negative affix in amanuysha is that of f?; L e. *P»3**
s=l3***rflF: M a being like man, but not man". The word 9TO3** does not
mean 'anything which is not a man'. For had this been its meaning, then
a blanket is also a thing which is not a man, and in denoting a blanket, we
should add «&*£ ; but we never do so. When blanket is to be denoted we add
up* of IV. 2. 133, as gj*: "a woolen blanket". When we want to denote a
Jiving being other than man, then we add *f\ and «q^f of this sQtra. Tho
•T* is repeated in this sQtra, for the purpose also of showing that otherwise
•Fj would have been debarred by the special affix «^f ll
The word v§ is the name of a country, it would have taken sounder
the universal rule IV. 1. 83, but this is debarred by oj^of IV. 2. 125, and to
is debarred by vsr of IV. 2, 1 19, and *^ is debarred by m* of IV. 2. 132, as it
has q^as penultimate, the present sOtra debars that and ordains ir^and «v^g
^wmiUWi<fi*J> *rac b tot n q^ n ^ f m^qmt^^s^Fft-
r
101. After the words 'cftV, % prdch\ 9 apdch % \ 'udach*
and l pratyach\ the affix vfi is added in the remaining senses.
Thus f$m, ifcn*, «rn*4*, *ft**ta, (IV. 4. 130) and rft^N For
accent see VI. 1. 213. When these words are used as Indeclinables, and de-
note time, they take also the affixes * \y\x ' and 4 tyul \ a g, MItMH, (IV. 3. 25).
The word *r*P5 means south.
Digitized by
Googfe;^
73«
^-Affixes. [ Bk. IV. Ch II. $. 104
- 102. After the word « Kantha\ comes the affix z*
in the remaining senses.
As qnfcnp 11
■fa: ■ *wrrar f^w 1 «P# *r **«it swt w^jto* *nfa ^ft* »
103. To the same stem is added the affix 5^
when it treats about some thing which is to be found in the
land of Varnu.
The Varou is the name of a river, and the country near it is also
called Varou, .the affix denoting country being elided by IV. 2. 8 1. Thus
yfo 1 «|fc4<(l«l m «n*rar , wft «Pi«* ; *
104. The affix ' tyap ' comos after an Indeclina-.
ble, in the remaining senses.
This rule is too wide. The affix wrj is restricted to the following
Indeclinables:— «ro 'together', *f •here', $ 'where*, those that end in «l«T
(V. 3. 7) and n (V. 3. io> As *m*W ' a minister *, 1*1*. f^t «iw', WTO: &«•
Why do we say 'its application should be restricted'? Observe 1
whftr 'tos*, 1WW» foniied from the Indeclinables *qft «t, and «m; moreover,
the Indeclinables. that are Vnddha (L e. having m,* and *fr in the first syl-
lable\ take the affix win the same sense. As,«mnfN«
Vdrt.— The w^ is added to fa, in the sense of " fixed " as,fa«q*»
^ rtrt.—The sn.is added to fa^ in the sense of « going?. As faCT«
« Chandalas &c who have gone out of the caste ".
Vdrt:- The «n«rjs added to the word «nf^in the Vcdas : M *nft»
Vdrt:— The affix «r comes after «n«»*s c & il Wy w "
Vdrt:— The affix <p« comes after 5c, e. g, fm 4fH*K M
Vdrt:— The affix wtr? comes after 3*lt e. g. 4lwv «
Google
Digitiz ed by '
KK. IV. Ch. II. §. 107 J w-Afeixes. 737
iftn 11 ^pi^u^ *snj ffift*^ vwwri m ranir mfir W&c* m
105. The affix w* is added optionally after the.
words 'aishamas', 'hyas', and l $vas > ; in the remaining
senses.
As^RPWLor q*TOH*(IV. 3- 23), mm* or hot* (IV 3. 23) ;*****
or *raR*(IV. 3. 23) or f8nfiiMm (lV. 3. 15). The word •avas* takes the aug-
ment 5^ also, hence the above three forms.
?ftfr: 11 rfWfrronnt **3hhh ira wfi i Hl» i »iwi i <iiwi*c *? twtfr ro& *w frror 11
106. The affix sps^ comes after a word ending
with ?ffc f and the «T comes after a word ending with ^*r ; ia
the remaining senses.
This debars tr^ ll Thus ^HTifh*, qrgstffcw, *T$*TOGt, taeTO*N The
words formed by *n*, take the affix #H* n ^ e feminine (IV. 1. 15) ; those in if
take the affix *T^(IV. *• 4). The sfttra is not enunciated as 4UV4l»4Mb for
had it been so, the affix would apply to JJ^* also, where *TO is final, but
cannot be called uttara-pada, as •bahu' is not a pada but Is an affix V. 3. 68.
Therefore, we have jiy»mm formed by «n^W
ihfain 11 •
107. The affix sr comes in the remaining senses,
after a word preceded by another that signifies * direction \
provided the compound is not a Name. t
To a stem, whose first member is a word denoting direction, and
which is not a Name, the affix *f is added, forming the feminine in *tt •• The
word mqfl i qm qualifies the 'base*. This debars *T* 11 Thus vfarer+sf
sftte (VI. 4. 148, VII. 2. 117) 'who is in the eastern hall*. Similarly
*rf*nroi*: f *nroim* II
Why do we say u when not a Name " ? Observe, from the word fjjj-
WHPft (II. 1. 50) we have &PKPTO& (VII. 3. 14), The example illustrates,
how first a compound of Tatpurusha kind is formed by the words j^+fv-
«FPTOpft; w Ishuk&mbhami in-thc-East"; the whole being the name of the city.
Digitized by
Google —
?3* " frfe-w* i [bk. iv. ch.1i, 5 1 id
Then when the Taddhita affix is added to this word, the first vowel b not
Vfiddhied f as is the general rule VI I. 2. 11/; but the first vowel of the second
member of the compound Is vfiddhied, viz the letter % of f ji&Hqtf by rule
VI J. 3. 14. Similarly HM^foimifr •'who Is in Ishuk&mashamt-in-the-West ".
The word • W is used in the sAtra for the sake of percision, for had
the sfitra been ft^qftdtfu f , there would rise the doubt, whether the
the word-form f^ was meant, or Words denoting n? wcre meant In fact the
CTCqftft is debarred by the Use of the word tl For had it meant fa: ; the
rule would have applied to words like ftnnt* &c ,
*dhF?tssi it \ot u q^rf^r h n^prt-^v^r 1 i
108. The affix «i^ is added to the Word *R£ f pre-
ceded hy a word denoting direction ; in the remaining senses.
Thus $tfop / °tfh STfrer*: / # M Mere contrary to the examples
in the preceding sfttra, the initial vowel is vpddhied by VII. 3. 13 which
makes a special exception in the case of the word *flf if
\tikw u ■
109. The affix srej comes in the remaining senses,
after a word consisting of more than two syllables, having
udiUta accent on the final, being the name of a village of the
peoples of the North.
The governing force of the word f^ ceases here. The bt^ debars
&T* 11 Thus % *3H, HP32TO II
Why do we say " village of north-folk "? Observe kiyfa formed by
fcp^; difference in accent ~
Why do we say "consisting of more than two syllables "? Obseve
Why do we say "being oxytotlcf Observe *ll<h<tiM*il Here m id
ud&tta by VI. 1. 194. taking fan accent
«flfc ii H^M<M^ i <t ^TOrf^y ^r^Tilwro nmroft^Kn* *Fmi *nf<r tiPre* 11
110. The affix 4n$( comes, in the remaining senses
after a word ending with~STCr 9 after the words <I3J$r &c, and
~ £«—•-» '»m> *±—^*i' fc» t w^*jr»«h jv\ .i>n»>ii:h.aiMy»tt,'jBij
Digitized by VjOOQLC
1)K. IV. CH. II. § ill. J %faMf<t |
739
after a word having a penultimate % whether these words ex-
press villages of North folk or not.
This debars the ml of the last aphorism.. Thus .nfrfep, n„*ta*.
Wf:, qiR^r. iPfwp. ■ronwr. » ' \ .
In the class Paladyadi, those words which denote villages of «#«'
will not take *w or rSf* affix of I V. 2. i if ; but will take the affix *n* of this'
rule. Such as the words ifttfr and \ip& N **
The word nmfl occurs in Paladt class, and consequently it does not
take the affix j» (IV. 2. 123) which it would otherwise have taken by reason
of its being a Vnddha word ending in long f M
Tl e worJ m#* has a penultimate *, but it is recited in Paladt class,
showing that it docs not take the affix v. of IV. 2. 1 14 though it is a Vriddha
word.
The affix sr« is repeated in this sutfa, (though its anuvritti comes from
IV. 1. 83), in order to exclude the application of any rule which mi^ht have
debarred the general »r^ m **
1^2 «rf» rf) 3d^,4sT^,5^a g (HH^)6wp^(TO^ g )7^
«**, 8«*R*tr, 9****^, 10to%,H «htf. 12Wr(W X 13*^.14*
WT. 15 iiroft. 16 «j«k, 17 7rTm ( waft ) i 8 ,3^ 19 Qffr^ „
*mi*n>A T^r^r vnmr «rff«r kfa*. 11 *
111. The affix «nn comes after the patronymics
formed from *&t &c.
it cive tnl ere thC r^ 1? ^ "* qUaHfy *' ■"* ° f th « *-*■ "«■ docs
21 th °*™ : ^^ U Slmp,y mcanS " that after a w °rd «*«* «ith
a G^l F ^ ^ ° rda,nCd aftef thC W ° rdS K ^ Va &C '* d -«n C
scntt- Thifr^T 5 « C affix ^ i9 «l*V«i in the remaining
ofKanva^ ^n^° *** * (IV ' * "♦> Thus *™ "*• 1*1*
01 Kaova . trrawn (IV. 1. io5>
Why do we say "when denoting Family-names ?» Thus the Word
Wf . when ,t means m^^m^, forms its secondary derivative *r*fo* by * „
^and^r Va ^ ,aSSiSa f b " C,aSS0fGa,?Badl - ^ F^'Jy-names from
Hddcd *^J"** £.**«« by ru,e IV ' '• «* To twC the affix «*
,b addcd ' ^^+T^=^H: (VI. 4. 148 and VI. 4. i S 2>
10
Digitized tjy
740 """ $fk*-9 1 [ Bk. IV. Ch. 11. $ 1 14
112. After a Family-name formed by f5T f the
^affix em is added in the remaining senses.
This debars 8p( ll Thus from to we have Patronymic frftr, from which
SIOT: u the pupils of Dakshi n ; gWT, mitt II The final f is elided before st*
by VI. 4. 14a "
Why do we say • denoting a family-name ' ? Observe gfcrgftr, a word
formed by %r± of IV. 2. 8o^ not denoting a family, but having the four-fold
sense of IV. 2. 68-70. The further derivative from this will be #Hft*fl q» i by
GT(IV. 2. 114).
* s*ra: srerenfog n m n q^rfa n *T-B*ra:, sn^r-?rc^3( arc* ) n
ffir: ii grr ; qi TdMR^iq4i^Hi(i*flMi^M^i^ iTO^ t w h^Rt h
113. The affix zv^ is not however added to a
word which, though ending in the Patronymic afffix *sr , con-
sists of two syllables, when it is the family name of Eastern
people or of Bharata.
This sfltra debars sn* which would have come by the last sAtra. The
_^- result being, that the words answering to the description given in this apho*
^lP^ rism, form the $l^j derivatives by the affix 0* (IV. 2. 114). Thus qtefjfarv
3*nStar: from qtfcr, QjrRr ll Why do we say "consisting of two syllables'? Observe
HMIMlil : formed by «?w from qiMMIlfl II
Why do we say " when it denotes the family-names of East folks or
Bharata " ? Observe : trap from frfif II
Q. How do you form gmtfhi when by rule IV. 2. 1 16, the proper
form would be «fctftl4fr or qftTOCT *
Ans. The word qjrftr of sfttra 1 16 refers to a country because it occurs
with %ft, while the SJTftr of the example under the present aphorism is a
Family-name.
The Bharatas belong also to the East-Folk or PrSchyaa Their sepa-
rate mention here indicates by Jftapaka or inference, that whereever Pr&cbya
is used in these sdtras, it does not include the Bharatas. See; II 4. 66.
^ficf: II fOT^nfirtfl^iTO* R^Wt H^ft fUfa- II
114. After a word called Vriddha, the affix 9f it*
added in the remaining senses.
The word wim does not govern this sfitra. This is a general rute The
Vjiddhais defined in I. 1.73 &c. This debars *?^ ll Thus from «n»4 we
— 1^ -L^tV „..^ r ^ rJTiKt ifM ^
Digitized by VjOOQLC
UK. IV. Cff. II. I 1 16 ] fa«V--*W N 74t
have firtfi ( VI. 4. 148 & 152 ). So also *prf*, unto. *riNtt •
This rule being a subsequent one, debars the following preceding 7
rules in case of conflict of rules (1.4.2)1. The rule relating to Indeclin-
nblcs (104), 2. The rule relating to words ending in iftt and fgc* ( 106 ) 3*
The rule relating to Villages of North-folk (109 ), 4. The rule relating to
penultimate « (1 10). Thus.
ff — «**; *>*»* uro*— *mrito jjrofrr— *&rofh*t; but qprenffc— 4iw4W)«
«r*fre*- -*IMKV*H; but mfttq^- HlfoVWH t: (IV. 2, 21) Rr*$*— Vj**5 but *W
llti ^KV1» < B«- , fttfore -frfrup 5 but $V*f-$VFfrn: tf
#*** M *Tf^«^fOTl *?59*r to** *to fcfrfcr w
115. The affix ot* and ssc come after the Vriddha
word WRL, in the remaining senses.
The word **?( is a Vriddha word because it belongs to tyadAdl class
( I. 1. 74 > This rule debars ^ of the last aphorism. In the affix, tf^jr, the
final 5 is indicatory, showing that the word %rh before this affix gets . the de-
signation of Pada *f (I. 4. 16). Thus «nr^+*^ s *TTOF:; *HPl+GT^= *!*#*: V
But when the word «TO( is not treated as Vp'ddha, then it takes the
general affix «r*i as mw U This is the case when *r*^ is derived by affix-
ing ^rp to i^n
«t»iVjifty4aHfri^ « m » wfa » *iV4iftyr .-gsr-fa& ■
tffcp 11 *>rfar f wniifl^re u ftj^ fdnft srnrflr wro ttt^^ u
116. The affixes s*r and fo^Come, in the remain-
ing senses, after the words *JTT§ &c.
In the affixes nr and ftj^, the ^is replaced by f^, the other letters
arc anubandhas. The form in both cases will be the same, but there is a dis*
tinction in the feminine. Those formed by n^ will take tf* (IV. 1. 15), the
others will take ?rr(I V.i. 4). Thus tow or 3trffeft,%ftaT or^foft*
The word f^T% is to be read in to this sAtra. Those words in the list
which are not ^r will take the affixes, by virtue of being so classified.
The word Vtt*T occurs in the list of words. It gets the designation
of fyg by I. I. 75. Thas ^ff%pff: II But when it is the name of a V&htka
village, it is not a Vfiddha word. The secondary derivative then will be
Q. In the M4h&bh4shya it is salcj that a Proper name is optionally
Digitized by
Google
24* ^nr-«HU [ Bk. IV. Cii. II g 119.
treated as a Vpddha, and it gives example of qqq'tflqi: or VrcTO N So then
^f^Tf is 3 Vpddha word and will take these affixes.
Ana. No. In that very passage of Mah&bhftshya it is further stated
that the option in the case of Propcrr Names is allowed only for the purposes
* of the application of the affix 9 (IV. 2. 1 14) and not the affix remand fa* W
Vdrt: — This affix comes after compound words ending in gjre ancj
preceded by «rn$ 3W and Hf ; as gqyBnfey) or •°«f, iJnfofalft or 0| W» OTfr
jSilf^or ^!!
l wftr, 2 "^f^ (\§ ) 3 afari% # , * sfar?, 5 sr**tr» 6 ^n?rpr ( «fi* , TR ) 7 jtj^j*
*, 8 sfcr*&, 9 jihih^ ( jiiiH< , 10 ftr**» 11 *rt*, 12 «In|m ( rirwR) 13 Hrcjflr*, M
srihr is «rfbc*t I6^^r, 17 TOiipi ( ^wm i h ) 18 ^far^rc ( *ftofT*PT ) i^.f^nr,
205to^j, 21 ^nr, 22 ^i # , 23 npgfta 24 *mft* ? 25 mnfaw*, 26 smftw', 27 &f
nft*c # , 28 sreflr**, 29 mw4ifti^«i ( «rm. «***, *\) wn h, 30 *^t, 31 Htftftr,
82 ift^, 33 sriFnr, 34 *mi*hr 11 .
^fir* 11 ^rtNwwrf^p^ ^^roufqft *&& *r*<f: %f*R?ir 11
117. The affixes 39 and (income, in the remain^
ing senses, after the Vriddha words denoting the villages of
VAhika.
The word f^nt is to be read into this sfttra. This debars the affix
ff(IV. 2. 114). Thus OTTO^ftft or ^RtftCTi HT^rfN* or JJF^ftefT W
f^n^R^g U \\€ 11 q^rif* 11 fbm*t -^1^3 (z% -ffc£r) l
118. The affixes 33* and fifa cpme optionally in
the repiaining spnscs, pftcr Vriddha word? deppting Vahikft
yillages situated in Usinarju
Tl* us H ia*l'ft*1> e ^T a P d ' 5 ^T; so a!»$ft*Wh sft*foRr and ^t
«tfd^RUM »l«p& ■ *ft*i H*i **U
J19. The affix «55j, pomps in the remaining senses,
jvfter a Nominalrstcm denoting a locality and ending in t n
The phrase 'fzm' dpes not govern this sfttra. For had it been
understood in this aphorism, there would have been no necessity of repeating
}t in the next
Thus Nn^?: f ^IN(^^ II Why do \vp say f^ 'denoting a cquij*
\ry % ? .Observe WVf- ' the pupils of ^ ' formed by wpUJi
Digitized by VjVJO^LC
■PK.IV.Ch.II.Si22.-] *ft*«*i 74%
In the previous sutras, the anuvfitti of c*J and far both wete current ;
hence the repetition of fW in this s&tra, because we could not take the
anuvptti of «^ from the last sfttra without drawing the anuvfitti of fc^N
J 20. The affix ssj comes in the remaining senses
after a vriddha word endding in 3r and denoting a locality of
the Bast-folks.
The phrase Hffo is here understood Thus mWiVa^ , m*M*j* :
The affix **i would have been valid by the last sfttra also; tie present
sfitra makes a Frm or restriction, showing that in the case of words denoting
places of East, the rule applies to those words only, which are Vpddha. There-
fore it does not apply to TO*r$J, from which we have <<IA1l«iq: W
•far ii *M*ifa«ft «*^Km^i^^nPr^rpRt f^ii^iRmR^i^^R^wt H*f% \h*w ii
121. The affix £5^ comes in the remaining senses,
after a vriddha word denoting a locality, which has the
letter *r as its penultimate, and after a vriddha place-name
denoting a waste* or desert place.
The words J^m and *$ are understood here. The word to means
a waste or desert Thus qfbFTCP, tpTOcT*** are examples of ^f 11 Similarly
MHiI5*W and ^rf^T^T^ are examples of * penultimate.
J 22. The affix 555 comes, in the remaining senses,
after a Vriddha word denoting o, locality and ending with
*Wi5*or *$.
This debars qr (IV. 2. 1 14), Thus *n*ITOTO:, *fF^5^: t ^TFf^p , ^3-
<!WF, 4>|rjJ*ft^i|S II
The words ending in jt would" have taken the affix 5^ by the next
stitra also, but as that sQtra is restricted to the countries of the East; this sAtra
js general in its sedpe,
$*<F ii trrfl4Hui**ii*i sn^^if^r ymt&^napb mdf $firo 11
Digitized by VjOQQLC
744 ^ft*5*» [Bk. IV. Ch. II. § 12$.
123. The affix 5^ comes iu the remaining senses,
after a Vriddha word denoting a locality of the East-folk, the
word having a penultimate * or ending in f R
This debars 9 n Thus MKtftyn»r* , ^qp ^ HCTT M So also with words
ending in f I As, q»regft— 3raFTO* , HHFJt— TOiFTO (VI. 4. 148).
, Why do wc say VPTPl 4 of the East-folk • ? Observe jnnfNfa : formed
by 9. The n in fij in the sfttra is for the sake of distinctness.
124. The affix 3^ comes in jthe remaining senses,
after a Vriddha word denoting an inhabited kingdom, or a
limit of such kingdom.
The phrases jot* and to sue understood here, being qualified by
arm and in*ft M This debars the affix or N Thus g nfirerrefr and snrfar are
examples of ^m * And trta*?: and ^PTffPWr from «ftj* and TOTRFI two
uninhabited countries, are illustrations of iRTOTftr •
The trcft or limit of an inhabited country or ^TTT must be a country
and not a village. This is so, in order to prevent, by anticipation, the appli-
cation of V by IV. 2. 137 to words like flpr4 which is an arid desert : as
Vnfot n The word ff^ftr means either "the boundary of that (*m?)" or
M that which itself is a boundary ". '
ftS^P 11
125. The affix g^r comes in the remaining senses,
even after a word which is not a Vriddha, and which is
always plural, when it denotes an inhabited country or a limit
of such country, as well as after such Vriddha words.
The words ^m and *?ifir are to be read into the aphorism. This
debars iy and *rq II Thus from trjfT:, *jjt: and ^jftgr: which are non-Vpddha
Kingdom denoting words, always having a plural form, we have «TT(3P, qrjpc 5
and qHUCTTCr* H Similarly tnrfta: and vrcpi7?r: are non-V|iddha always plural
words, denoting boundary of kingdom; we have from them grnrfteq p and Mint*
^4^1 u The affix will apply, of course to Vpddha vnr word by the last sfltra,
though these be always plural in form. Thus *%jr and JtPTO: from jrtf; and
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Cii. if. 5 «; ) 4lft*-f«^» us
v • -■■...
*;n<t: N So also to Vpddha words denoting limit of a Kingdom : qntaRP—
The word fan Is used In the sfltra to indicate that the word should
be plural In essence, having no corresponding singular form. Therefore the
rule will not apply to **** plural of wtHt « The derivative from it will be
*nfar: ii
The word trft is used in the sfltra to indicate that Vfiddha-wordf
which would have taken jt* by the last sfltra are not debarred by this sfltra,
when they are plural In form. This debarring would have taken place, by
the rule of Interpretation known as Ww?£tf*X*F*fm ; but for the use of the
word «rft n This maxim or nyftya is thus explained in Padamanjari : — 3$g%
*nro* KiRwft tot* cr**fhRi prt ii
|fi* w ^OTSpwiVnrf^: Niftwfot>wifrgi*3*i*2M wmr mfir fa* u
126. The affix 5^ comes in the remaining senses
after a word, whether Vriddha or not, denoting a locality and
having as its second term the words # kachchha\ 'agni',
4 vaktra ' and • garta \
This debars 9 and n\ 11 As ir&F&Bu fatf t -h * ®* , tRfftlTC , \piTCJ
wrc^JT*. V^toto:, ^T5«r^«: and ^rntrfa: 11
The word toto in the sfltra should be read with every one of the
words qro &c
127. The affix 5^ comes, in the remaining sens-
es, after the words dhfima &c, denoting country.
This debars *|^ &c {foreF, mr*9** &c The word qft« occttrs in the
list It would have taken ^ by IV. 2. 1 21 as it has 4 as penultimate. Its
mention here shows that it need not denote a locality for the applicatibn of
this affix. Similarly the words fifo and arm* being names of *m* woukl
have taken *** by 124***; here in this list, theitfore; they do not denote
country. Thus fi%HT wfarat rt=V«« M thc property of Vidcha Kshatriy4s*
So also *TPm^ 11 The word * gj occurs in the list. It takes the affix wheo-'the
Digitized by
Google
74 fl fa«39'* [BKlV.CH. I!. $.12*:
derivative word "means a 'ship* or a 'sailor'. Thus QT*i9ct3p and m^jpltt
H$*qi II Otherwise not: OTpra 41 Oceanic water".
l yi , 2 **■* ( fgtf* and m*t ) 3 *rtinF* f 4 ir^m* ( «rr&n? ) 5 innswtfri
<*tf#, 12 jimnHmfl , 13 TOWft, 14 ffa , 15 tf*n? , 16 smTOTf, 17 m, 18 (ftra)
18pPPnl(Pni^;f^,TO)19HOT^ 22«n»Tft
23 ^01^,24^^1(^11)25^, 26^,27 «rH*T^ ) 28 *n$, 29»iT*r f 30
tiT^.3i^ l 32ffF^(^)33imn^ l 34^r€^,35»mw 36 *ft£ (*mmifhij
37 $<*ici<dh4% 38 qggrerft qg^f *r, 39 $iff, 40 srerffo (»rerffo ) 41 <fr f 42 ****,
43 ggrafr, ( SSrfMt ) 44 <nrc # , 45 *fa«!TTO f 46 *!%*, 47 4tTO#t, 48 *wiwft,.
49 «r$f»<*, 50 qpraifo 51jHH0 II.
A. %TOI *ffo: <F*IT m% Wlfe^ : ? B - W H*ft 1^* II A. q»Umdq«HHI<3m II
^h*rft HMK«hi *wfai ii A. ij^ (rrf^nf f^rt" *Rf*r*ft^Tftr *n ? B. $f snft *ttof* m
128. The affix 55^ comes after the word € nagara *
in the remaining senses, when censure or praise is implied.
The word *KTHf which is equivalent to r^T or • blame or censure ';
and m#^f which means %w*t " dexterity w , qualify the sense of the affix.
Thus fTPTOT: € a knave, a cunning person, or a skillful person*. The
word literally means € a town-born, or town-bred', but by the usage of
language, it always denotes a person having the vices or virtues of a town, such
as a thief or an artist
Why do we say " when censure or dexterity is implied n ? Observe
siFTO: WTSPTT: ' the Nagara BrAhmanas "..
w ymiw m fr ii w ii t irri^ n ^RTwirac-w3^-(55T) a
129. The affix cj*r comes, in the remaining senses,
after the word <*K<«f, in the sense of a man.
This debars the affix w . Thus *m u 44i: Hjyv * a forester \
V&rt : — It should be stated rather that the affix £^ is added to BH*qr
In the sense of 'away* f a lesson, or doctrine (Upanishad) ' 'a maxim' 'a
play or game * ' a man ' and • an elephant \ Thus v\ limit s <p*jt:, 3P-3W, *Mt.-
RWVi ^3^ : or *«ft n v v -
Digitized by
Google
Bk.IV.Cm. II. 5 13a] tlft*-tl*« 747
Virt: — Optionally when the sense is that of a cow-dung as imw or
Why do we say - when having these senses' ? Otherwise the affix will
be in;. As vnrnff: to* € wild beasts 1 .
130. The affix g» comes optionally in the re-
maining senses, after the words * Kuril ', and * Yugatidhara \
Thus ^fcf#: or #rrf :, tftmquh: or ^fa^if: II These words denote ifTOf
or inhabited countries, and therefore by sCktra IV. i. 125 they would always,
have taken the affix ro. The present sfltra makgs the application of 51^
optional and not obligatory. The word $1 occurs in the list of JR^OTT? class
(IV. 2. 133). By virtue of its being so* classified, it will take «f^ also. And
when it means man or something found in men, it will take necessarily, not
optionally, the affix *n£ by virtue of sOtra IV. 2. 134. As qfirraft fjs*. *fiftqw-
HSZ SfatPlil This aphorism therefore, teaches option regarding jnf with these
restrictions, while it teaches option absolutely with regard to the word jn^: H
^rc^qh^n wt 11 ^T^B^nr-^ft:-^!
jfor: n 453ft vmi^ ^in^ *nrft fr*re it
131. The affix ^ eomes in the remain! tfg senses,
after the words • madra * and ' vtfji # .
This debars ji* 9 though the words denote inhabited countries. Thu s
Hjnf: * born in Madra \ fftrv II
^ TOTO ■ W^ H ^^B^TO^-I^f
?faP 11 qfttftroni mftMfi*H<g sraft H*fa fcffcip II
132. The affix *rm conies in the remaining senses
after a word denoting a place and having the letter *r as its
penultinate.
This debars jftt in the case of words which denote *mf or inhabited
countries. Of course the words which do not denote ^nr, will have taken n\
even without this rule. Thus mfofr "born in hJm*| :" So also *nffiTO II
The affix 1^ will apply even when the word ends in i, and would have
otherwise taken Ti^by IV. 2. 1 19, Thus^nr "bom in ft^" If The word
>% is understood in this sfltra.
^^Tf^TOIt W* II q^ n «^rf^PT:-^r-(«n^) I
wfti: it fro fSmrf^r "TO*rf*p*ts*nraqt *reft n
19
Digitized by
Google
74* «ftw-3*r i [ Bk. IV. Ch. II. §. 136.
133. The affix incomes, in the remaining senses,
after the words kachchha &c denoting places.
The word to » understood here. This debars 5^ &c Thus*r«8%
*frw» *nfo &c The words ^gr &c are not invariable plural words, because
by the next sfltra, it is shown that these words may signify men and their
habits &c The word frrjnrer occurs in this list It would have taken *rgr by
the last sutra also, because it has q? as its penultimate. Its mention fn the list
is for the sake of the subsequent sutra by which it takes ji^also under certain
conditions.
1 vsr, 2 ftsy, 3 *y, 4 n^nc, 5 h^i 6 *»*tin*, 7 wrfk, 8 *&**, 9 $$, 10 it-
5^¥ (*pr, «r»¥, nmO 11 #<r, 12 «npf, 13 mm?, 14f firm*, 15 *$&* (5351)16*^511
134. The affix ^ comes after the words kachchhrt
&c. in the senses of born &c. when the meanining is a 'man*
or ' what exists in man '.
This debars *r* II Thus OT^erer. * a man born fn Kutch '. 4^*537*99
emct ^P-mIT* II * His joke or talk is of Kutch or a Kutch-laughter '. qiifcpCT
^3T II Similarly V^rrerr | TJW, Vm*HW fra<t srfcm*, 'kFWtt *ntt *
Why do we say * when meaning man or what exists in man ? n Ob
serve m^St *ft: ' The cow of Kutch '. Ibw m*(T. II
ffxf: II «TT^nn%^ H*l^ 13*3^ MIMAIMH.3^ H«wi M^ft W
135 The affix 55^ comes after the word HT** in the
senses of being born &c when denoting a man or what exist*
in man, provided that it does not mean a foot-soldier.
The word STJJ which occurs in the q^OTft class, would have taken wt£
by the last sOtra, when the sense was that of a man or some humariT attribute.
The present sfttra makes a restriction. Thus W%4H I***, mg^Htq ffitf srf^W
&c. But m$i <nifir sfanfr ' the S&lva foot soldier goes.'
*f\fr: II *rf% *l*F*t *T Midi?! H«W*f til**44im^**(TOrat H^fir ftft^fc H
136. The affix gsr comes in the remaining senses
of being born &c, after the words ^rrg, when the word signi-
fies c a cow ' or ' a barley gruel'*
Digitized by
Google
Die IV. Ch. II. §. 138 J At* ** . 749
This debars it* of IV. 2. 133. Thus STJ5T nt: "the cows born in
Salva". mfg^T inrj: 'the barley gruel of SAlva'. In other cases we have
*ivitvKmi*ij: n t V* I mift H tniMWi^m w I
yfo it «nfhjrrofrroftr? : wftMj$*ia«o* rafr **!» ftfty* 11
137. The affix 9 comes in the remaining senses
after a Nominal-stem denoting a place and having the word
ti^ as its second term.
This debars *?$ u The word *% is to be read into the sAtra, This rule
being a subsequent one debars the affixes cw and fsp^of sfltra 1 17 amte. Thus
S^nffii yuHHtfftK , SJlftfmffro "born in porcupine's hole &c\ The word TfTT*
is used in the sfttra, so as to prevent the application of the rule to a word
which ends in tnf , but is preceded by the affix wj, as WTfirfo II Here *J is
an affix (V. 3. 68) and not a pada.
* wftw i 11 \\e n mtfk 11 n*ri%w*-*ar-(w:) I
jrfVf: 11 nf idumftHi: inftnf^traro: iraifr wm fxfar- 11
138. The affix 9 comes in the remaining senses
after the words gaha &c.
This debars it* &c Thus irtfN: « belonging to a cave'. »4*q:Wl3 : &c.
In the list of n*rft occurs the following "iwrart *nfrc^". It
means M The word ijui becomes changed into m*m when the affix 15 is to be
added. Thus RHpfcjr tl But when the sense is that of a Veda-school or
Charana, the affix *r* is added instead of OP as iimnr-" H The word ns*& here
has the restricted sense of ' the middle of the earth \ and not any middle
generally. Thus wfa: means ffrfrp^ *rfT II So also when the affix sr^Is
applied in the case of nw, it has the sense of pr*W of sfltra IV. 3 89 and not
all the other senses. Thus qq: m*q[: t *n vfr#*qr:, *P& HWIP "three Chara?as
dwell in the East, three in the West, and three in the Middle". The words
w^PT^and qr*^: occur in the list They have the affix n^, but before the
affix BT the ^ of *r^ is elided. Thus jsnffa* and qrfoftq^ U * *
The augment 3^? is added to ir and VR before the affix or II As %*-
l5fawc» TC^fa* ll The same augment is added to the word ff also as, VftfrPI M
The affix s<* comes after the words %j &c No list of such words Is
g | vcn ^ !t is an «nf5m«Pf: It Thus Vl^Nt W«ta*. titmmfaR , wftw,
•fWPfiRWU &c,
Digitized by
Google
m '" $fr*-9» [ bk. jv. ,ch ii. $. 141
l nf, 2 troiftr, 3 ten, *fm, 5 »i»^»M4w«c^vr 6 im, 7 *qf, 8 *f, 9 *»ni f
10 jfro, 11 »nrro, 12 *ran qrcr 13 rororer, 14 ^rarcr, 15 gqprong, is mmmH*,
17 *WT, 18 **|W, 19 ^PIBTO, 20 fyr, 21 ij^taf ( f^ift ) 22 BTTOF*«T ( «TTONt
and snr^Rr ) 23 *pnrer, 24 oirzm ( mft^ni^; CT?raft and <aj^n?Fft) 25 srffc-
cPr (^fttfH and qjpft^r ) 26 Bfi*fa* 27 SrtW. 28 $ftrft 29 •n^, 30 *ira#
( m*p 31 j&n%, 32 «nft%. 33snftPf. 34 «grft, 35^fay (|rfftr), 36 *n*^f, 37 «cr-
gtftr. 38 ^fit| f 39 sn^^ft, (\rtM^)40»^,4inra^r(«miTfty), 42^0^,
43 fogfir ( forflfrt ), 44 arTV^T, 45 'iftyiitH i ft •, 46 ^r, 47 ft^ft*i 48*?*ro*, 49
*9*. 50 QTtTO*, 51 **TC, 52»lH5^(tT5^), 53 WJrn^ratHW: (also wjnfNand qr*
rfNX 54 ^n^: ^^n ( also **^ and qt^^ 55 *TO *r, 56 *^Silft**>s*. 57
«ngft, 58 4hfo, 59 «mfo. it is an mgflmm 11
139. The affix 9 comes in the remaining senses;
after the words beginning with ^ denoting the places of the
Kast;folk.
The word ^% is understood here also. The \vord irr^ of the sutra
qualifies j% 11 This debars sr^u Thus q^prfrpfr q^ffpfopL jjfrrffifrrc H
TXT* 3> f J ?«• M *f?lft |l !cnj:-f»-^r-(^:) II
ffa= u *Rr **KiMi<*ri war tp* *«*ro 11
140. Tho letter qj is the substitute of the final
of the word TX&fj when 3 is added.
This sutra only teaches substitution: for <np* would have taken
IS by IV, z- "4- T hus Wf«^H! The won} *«r does riot govern this sutra,
poj being appropriate.
4«l4%<M-d4iili|*l^ll \n II q^ll^I^-3njM3: r 3i^^rqviT^:)
IFv h «3t>wift4r sit tq> ffiwwwfr grasrcfrrat* in- feTtH i ^ g 1 uwrar >nn^ u
H*- T ne *$* ^ comes in the remaining. senses
after a Vriddha word denoting a place and ending with *nr or
$$, qr haying ^ as its penultimate.
The \yord>$ must be read Into the s£tra. This debars thestvof
Sotra 13? ante: as well as the affixes ordained by Sutras 117 and 123.
Thus «r*:— Tmr*».*fa* fweifon 11 ^p- t *UM«frV*hra, fnvuMNcn
Digitized by
Google
[ Bk. IV. Ch. II. $. US- *(** *1 • 751
Vdrt.~ The words jkg* &c are also govpnjed by this rule though
they end in *pj II Thus &rofti$ S|3¥»U|? VO,J*8*M
jf*i: u ^F^T^p^rgf^rofiT^ t*iaiinh(tai^st to^t ^Rr A*r. ■
142. The affix 55 comes in the remaining senses
after the Vriddha words, having tlje words kanth&, palada,
nagara, grama and hrada, as second terms.
This debars the other affixes such as «r^ and fir* of 1 17 anU Thus
frfiw*ft**, hiwV-WU* , fifinwfta^, mftftrrefta*, *|ftroifri *nfti$w<?«*,
qrfiinpfcfr mfltfa mi frM. frfir^fta^, mfgfoF tt wL s
ffv n tfcroranty* jrafr *ifH ftfii** 11
143. The affix ^ comes after the word trfrcr in the
remaining senses.
This debars «r$ H Thus <mf$nir "the hill-king". <rfcft*: 3** the
hill man 9 .
ftro m^ 11 *«« 11 q^rfa 11 ftOTT-tni^^Kii:) 1
?f%f- 11 ^ros^n^u* R«r5r *nfa ^ivij^ *n^ 11
144. The affix u optionally comes in the remaining
senses after the word q^£ when it does not denote a man. •
Thus q*rftarf% or qnfarft sraifa 'hill fruits', Tkftqysw or qmy^ lull
water*.
Why do we say »ng6| 'noj-human? Observe <rftfhfr ****; where there'
is no option allowed.
wmqurtftimi3i 11 W H wft 11 ^TO-^rn^-w?3rt^-) M
ff*r» 11 tdiuiiuwiitii wv*HwiPi*w & «w5t *nfir w^n m
145. The affix 9 comes in the remaining senses
after $^ur and qifr when denoting the country of Bharadv&ja.
The word^t is understood here alsa The word TOinf does not here
mean Gotra, but country. Thus fftrffcrcand Tffacil
Why do we say "denoting country of BharadvAjas?" Observe qntat,
Digitized by
Google
*tm " " "!
BOOK FOUBTH,
Chapter Third.
1. The affix ^rsj also comes optionally in the re*
roaming senses, after the words 'yushmad' and 'asmad.'
The regulating power of the word ^ ceases. The word ^r Indicates
that the affix may be cr as well The word "optionally * shows that the gene-
ral affix ir» may also be employed. Thus there are three affixe?, opr, ty and
vr\ t and hence there being no equal enumeration, the rule of mutual corres*
pondence (I. 3. 10) does not apply.
The words .yn^and *T*r^ are Vfiddha, as they belong toTyad&di
class (I. 1. 74), and would have taken ^ by IV. 2. 1 14 ; the present sfttra en-
joins three affixes for each. Thus «vil-l-«PV* 30^+ btj (IV. 3. 2)= jtaran
3^-1 •s=2^H-fa=5 ,B, rtta : (VII. 1. 2>5o T ^i43rq[ s =5 ,5, ff^- , -H( I V.3. 2)«5Nn5h
or: (VII. 1. 2, and VIII.4. 2). So also &m>irap, *TO<hl; and miwi^q : y
*W1*I R
2. When this affix t^ is added and when srH is
added, then 3*JTR> and WEwrer are the substitutes of *£**% and
The pronoun *(fe{% refers to the visible affix opr. and not to the under*
stood affix u which was drawn into the last sfttra by the word *r II
Why does the rule of mutual correspondence (I. 3. 10) not apply here,
there being two affixes, two words, and two substitutes ? This, however, is not
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. 1 1 1. §. $ ] tWw*i l 753
done, because the stitra can be divided into two separate aphorisms : as (1)
nffrrtgnfr TOTf^rfr%pff»TfHro> *wi : (s) irarcftr n * L c(ii when *iib added,
gcTOff and trarar are the substitutes of y*^ and *tt*T^ respectively (2> So also
when u^ follows.
As for illustrations, see the preceding Sfttra, e. g. fryfffftw; , m**tiq?M:
with *$*{, and §r^?T^ and urafti: with «rf II This substitution does not take
place when & is added, as jWKtfn: and treifta ■
TOT:*
. 3. In expressing one individual, WTO and mrs are
the substitutes of 'yushmad' and 'asmad' respectively ,when ?rct
and *it^ follow.
As nrrtfta: ^belonging to thee', «mr$frf : "belonging to me.* «TTC and
•IPW: II But when the affix is CT, the form will Mfo» *fta.
The word IH»T*% should not be construed as meaning the affix of the
singular number, as the affix ,5 II Because the affix of the singular is always
elided (*=$) after these words, and by rule I. 1. 63, there will not be the
application of this rule. This difficulty is, however, got over by explaining
the word <HPTC> as equal to q^nf II
4. The affix q<j comes after the word *nfr in the
remaining senses.
This debars tnrn Thus •?£* ^belonging to halt'
V&rt:- When it has a prior term the affix *n is used. As «ftmigq p| ,
(**qtrre3=*fot) 11 nnprrfSrercj i
*fa: n q* *nt «m ¥^nr f dri^fanifaTi ***% *ro% 3tfro »
5. The affix *r^ comes, in the remaining senses,
after the word f ardha\ when preceded by 'para', avara\ «adh-
nma\ and 'uttama'.
Thus <*njfa «rcrok, •rorrik, wirckii
Q. Why do we say 5^ 'preceded by 9 ? Its use seems fo be super
focus. If the sfttra stood as qirmwNrt«|:, ?t would have given the same
sense. For the *** being supplied from the last sfitra, the whole sfitra.
Digitized by
Google
?S* &**-** * BK. IV. CH. III. §. 7. }
would have been ^ iriilMAt^^U^ ^ which must mean 'preceded by
para &c M
At The words ^ and *HRC have meanings other than that of f^ 0/
direction. As q* wit • highest pleasure.' vrotjjtg 'lowest ple'asure/ There-
fore, when these words q* and «TTC denote direction, thdn by the subsequent
rule, the affix would have been always Yf? and «fl£ 11 The employment*
of the term g£ in the sfttra, prevents the application of the affix f% even when
the words denote direction*
According to the VArtika M^imi * rt^ given under the last sfltra, the
word «rf preceded by any word would have taken rw, hence the necessity of
this sfttra ordainig n«^ when the first terms are qt &c
6. And the affix. 35^ also (as well as *n0 comes in
the remaining senses after the word 'ardha/ when the prior
term denotes a direction.
By *r, the affix <ft£ is also used. This debars «r^il Thus SjWhl ^rhf 1 -
The word ^j is used in the sfttra in order to prevent ambiguity. Had the
sfitra stood merely as R^yft^ wwF, it might have meant (1. 1.68)/ Ardha preceded •
by the word Retakes r^also\ for then wvfflfo would have applied, and Uitff
^OT: would have taken the affix
STSlfr SJtqqt TOf: $ft?fr IWTTO^I II
7. The affixes siw and 3^ come in the remaining
senses after the word * ardha \ preceded by a word denoting
direction, when a particular portion of a village or an inhabi-
ted country is meant.
The phrase fVft^imifr is to be read into the sAtra. This debars m 11
Thus r* *33?n3ff irtoi snrns* *t q"NHrf: or farf^: u Those verily belong
to the eastern half of our village or country *. So also *Tfir>mtf: or ^rfipff-
ffaj: 11 The word fctafr sup^t frftfiHHJt W and is a Taddhitartha com-
pound.
traro: tun ii^jfttt^rnwih
mffa** u sri^fif t?ito* 11 mf%f^ii *T*ro#*f<m it •
Digitized by
Google
bk. iv. ch. hi. 5 ii ) ffiffi*--c* • m
8. After theword *W there is the affix *r in the
remaining senses.
This debars mr It As IW* " middlemost *.
Vdrt : — So also after the word.«nft • As tnffc: " Adam, or born id
the beginning".
Vdrt :— So also after the words W^and *P|Wi the final ^ bejng elid-
ed. As *nprtu w*n ■ '
«f whlfdii R ^ K U<lAf II 8T-UI<Ulft% H
9. The affix «t comes in the remaining senses
after the word .'niadhya', the meaning being 'fit' or 'proper/
The word sfafir* means •equity,propriety,right l fit*. As 4rft{ft *rf* fft
W SOT* M the proper piece of wood-neither too long nor too short n . qui -
VOTSTO^the fit Grammarian! neither too refined nor too dull", qtqrcft "a
proper wife ".
\F& ii B*jBHiQfo ^ d wi wi^ wi «n«r$r «n<% %flw *
10. The affix incomes, in the remaining sensed)
after the word ^pj, which is near the sea.
The word tf<? occurs in the list of Kachchh&di (IV. 2. 133), and would
have taken ir^; and by sfltfa IV. 2. 134, it Would have taken 5^ also. The
present sfltra debars both those affixes* when the word tfta means bt^SPJI °*
'near the sea*.
Thus VW living on or relating to art island*. As V* Wfrfrsyrefa f
Why do we say BT^jwf ? Observe fcra^orVr^OV- 2 - "33 a " d *34>
The word • anu'samudra ' is an AvyaylbhAva compound (II. 1. 15).
11. The affix z*{ comes in the remaining sensed
after the words denoting time.
This debars BT^tn The affix & which comes after Vp'ddha words is
prohibited by this sQtra. Thus •ttfatf: 'monthly* «ff^mfe^, 'bi-monthly*!
MNHiftfi: * annual \ •
The words which denote time even indirectly, also take this affi*.
As SRTfwrjfa*, &lfi , Hlft4*ll The word ssf* governs all the subsequent sfltra*
upto 25. (inr ^m-y.
20
Digitized by
Google .
\
756 *rf*n>^i [Bk. IV. Ch. III. § is
12. The affix 33^ comes in the remaining senses
after the word ^re?j when expressing snBC n
This debars s^r (IV. 3. i6> The word m% means the 'funeral ob-
lation * ; and not *usiqi< JW: * a faithful or believing person \ Thus TOft^T
W^ 'the autumnal Sraddha'. When not meaning 'Sraddha', it will be
WTO II
fftp II &*t Unfa ^ipftw tK*0I4K*^ vwrar *r «m% ftflrar: II
13. The affix z^ comes optionally in the remain-
ing senses after the word snc? when expressing illness or heat.
Thus Wilfrfi rtPTs ' the autumnal disease 1 , imftt tfnro ' the autumnal
heat or sunshine'.
Why do we say " when denoting sickness or heat * ? Observe, *n*t
*I^ • the autumnal curd \ This r^ debars the «J «T? (I V. 3. 16).
flwiu<fl«ti* qf * 11 *« 11 q^rft 11 ^ot -m^mumih^ (s*0 11
ffitp. 11 fTOm?i'«i{mi»qT Rhihi to srorat *refir %Prp w _
14. The affix 38* comes optionally in the remain-
ing senses after the words * ni*& ', and * pradosha \
This makes optional, where by sfltra IV. 3. 1 1 ante % the *s^ would
have been obligatory. Thus \&L or ^r ui^HL f nocturnal \ qr^ftt or qrtrTTOi'l, H
*iq*si< ^ 11 \\ 11 q^rfa M «rer--35-^-(OT[) u
15. The affix SR comes optionally in the remain-
ing senses after the word ^T^and it takes the augment 3^«
The word ^ takes the affix m* by sfltra IV. 2. 105. This sfttra
ordains arsj ll When free from the scope of these rules, it takes \yu and
tyul affixes also by IV. 3. 23. Thus ^-i^-i-^=*fras-Hl-l-t?ff (VII. 3. 3) =
trNftcrcr: "belonging to to-morrow or ephemeral". Otherwise *ftn(: and *repf: W
^njr n
16. The affix 3nj£ comes in the remaining senses,
Digitized by
Google
Bx. IV. Cii. III. | 19 ) %ft* -¥^« 757
after the words ' sandhi-vela f &c, and the words expressing
* season 9 and 'asterism/
The word wnrn\ is to be read into the sfltra. All the words must be
expressive of time. This debars *H II The repetition of u*| debars or also
in the case of those words, which are Vpddha in this list (IV. 2. 114). Thus
(1) OTfN%?**, STWW.(2J taif.tn'ttol (3) *K*» fo* are examples of sandhiveli
season and asterisms respectively.
The affix it? is added to bfuqx when denoting • fruit* and 'festival,
as qrrort ^rt or <rt 11
jf**: II Hi yHM l VH* **** **fa fcfiPIP II
17. The affix m*q comes in the remaining senses
after the word srr^ II
This debars the irj of the last sOtra, though ' prftvpsh' is a season-
denoting word. Thus xfl^^r ^JT^fT: "the cloud belonging to the rainy
season."
qflma^ ii \t n q^ift ii ^r»r.-«^ I
Sffcr s ii *qfamr^p$ srarat *fi% $rf*nr* u
18. The affix 3$> comes in the remaining senses
after the word *qft II
This debars ir*of IV. 3. 16. Thus ^<»HJiVHHJ The ^ has tho
force of 9T* &c of IV. 3/43 here.
*MlQ S^H l\« <J*Tft N V*(I§-{3M) II
jfap 11 wftmii Graft fvik •frail' **i9 4tfl* : M
19. In the Chhandas, the word € varolii* takes the
affix 55J in the remaining senses.
This debars ^. The form will be the same, but there will be differ-
ence in accent As spi^r *Pra^ 3lffa»Tffr U The word q^$ here means
11 month." i. e. Nabha and Navasya are two rainy months.
. trererra ll \o 11 ^EF?rrac-^r-(5ar) I
*fa» 11 to*?to«*pi> craft faro *n,**wr *nfir ^v w
Digitized by
Google
ysS ^^«mii [Bk. IV. Ch. III. §23,
\
20. In the Chhandas, the ftffixj^ corner ift the
remaining senses after the word € vasanta/
This debars «r?r (IV. 3. 16). Thus n** fjnn* IwfcWfl U
21. In the Chhandas, the affix ssr coi^es in the re-
maining senses, after the word * hemanta. 1
This debars *rg (IV. 3. 16). Thus SfT* <3f***^ V^f^^!^ II V) e m ak '
ing of two separate SOtras of 20 and 21, is for the sake of the subsequent sfttra,
fn which the anuvpitti of word %q?<r only is taken*
22. The affix *nn, comes always after the wqrd 'he-
manta/ and (before this affix) the letter * of ' hemanta' is
elided.
Thus ^*h* ^re: • wintcry residence.' fJTfw^TI^ \\
The word S?PC is used to show that the sfttra applies in the Chhandas
as well as in the secular literature.
The word liTO will take HT5 by sfltra IV. 3. 16 as %H^ft^f%: but
there is no elisiqn of if there. Thus there ^re three forms \*f$i (|V. 3, 16),
$n%* (IV. 3. 21) andTfaroii
qifiroui PumwiR»<ih& tow 11 *rffaratn iprei c^fir «Fsnn* m
mffi^H ii jh**4hji|hh» 11 ^rfrrant ii *raFra% tof** 11
23. After the words hpt * at eve \ (^r: * for a long
time \ xnif ' in the fore-noon ', jft * at dawn \ and after In-
dcclinables expressing time, there are the affixes ^&J and asp£
and their augment is gf |)
The word ^rranj is understood here also. Thus ^ri-l-^=9rt-l-3^l-'3 =
m*fa^ (VII. 1. 1) 4 belonging to the evening'. Prtapt*. Masting', qT^Wf^
• what is of the forenoon ', ^Miq^HL u what is of the early morn ".
The word mn is a word ending in ^and i$ an Indeclinable. These
Digitized by
Google
bk. i v f en. in. 5 2$ ) n**m-*% • <. 759
affixes would also come by virtue of its being an Indeclinable, after that mw U
The present m+ is derived from the root q by adding the affix *a*Jl It
always ends in % when these affixes are added The word fat always ends
fn * 19 *lH?r and qir always end in j H
As regards Indeclinable*, the examples are *)SKH\ 'belonging to the
night '. ft*ppt^ • belonging to the day '.
Vdrt : — The affix M comes after the words Pre, toj and toR ii As
Pror^, TOT^i and TOfrjr3.ll
Vdrt : — The it of jtit in elided in the Chhandas before this affix «. as,
Vdrt : — The affix frr? comes after fnf, njfy and *m\; as, trfinr^,
tnft'PK. and qflnra, N
' Vdrt : — So also after vf*, as, irftraM
The defference between tyu and tyul is in accent, Thus m*&bi and
<IlJ(«44t f**K?fc and far*tf*, hi^kJh and m^T^, HM^H, ipfor, ft^HR and ft^i*
IT^i ffalfa and THpr* g
*fa: II ^ti^WI^WI^ ftWTT gQgnft raft HW, ^^T ftffcpTip H
24. Optionally after the words ^fjf and anvnv,
there are the affixes 3$ and sgRJ and their augment is g^ I
In the alternative **i of IV. 3. n also occurs. As sqffjjlpni, UMi l foTitHq ,
with tyu, or V4l«P»l**l *Amifi(wWi<l with {haft. With tyuL we have f^fcatfr* and
H H< l 5pi*fa II The sign of the locative is not elided by rule VI. 3. 17. When
the word is taken as incapable of having the case-affix, we have, mnyiS«f or
25, The affixes ordained above or here after, coiqe
after a word in the 7th case in construction, in the sense of
1 born or grown or originated there or thea \
The affixes «r^ &c tr &c h^ve been taught, but no particular sense
was assigned to them. See IV. 2. 92. This sfltra gives one of the senses,
and also declares the particular case in which the stem must be, to which the
affix is to be added. Thus *ronT:»5Sr+cT*-«ftp 'born in Srughna'. So
also mqo *born in Mathura', ifro: 'born in Utsa', sffanrs *born in UdapAna',
Digitized by
Google
i\
760 . % v**nr-3*u [BkIV.Ch.IH. §.'291
*j%** (IV. 2. 93), mumflm (IV. 2. 93) tn*rf?w* (IV. 2. 1 17), m**; (iv. 2. 94X
•irthr: (IV. 2. 94), ropy (IV. 2. 95) lfN*TOfc (IV. 2. 9S>
26. After the word jitr being in the 7th case-
affix, there is the affix z% in the sense of produced therein.
This debars q«ij of sfltra IV. 3. 17. The * of s^ is for the sake of
accent OT^ft SKar-'-flTfraP 'produced in the rainy season \
27. The affix 55^ comes after the word src^r in the
7th case-affix, in the sense of 'born therein/ the whole word
being a name.
This debars «n{ ll Thus tillMI vfc f the grass called &&radaka'« OTTOtr
w*T: • the pulse called S&radaka.'
Why do we say H^ml t Observe wof TOP^' the autumnal crop,'
According to some, the word tj^uitf governs all the succeeding s&tras
up to IV. 3. 38.
^i^iMii^uii/i^M^MW^iit 3^c 11 v 11 q^r n ^^r-^nro-
^r-«rr^-q^y-si^w-^4t*h<i4l-5? N •
$R^ : II ^jft^llRl*^: *T^**& .JplHwtl nnfh ?W *ITO ifilHR^Pw^l TOT3T «l«WMI*UH, II
28; The affix 5^ comes in the sense of 'born
therein f after the words ^r^or, 3TTO3?*, *tt$, qm 9 *f$l*$ and
<*hw: , the whole being a Name.
Thus syft^TO:, uwHgW This debars IV. 3. 24. snfo:, f<*gr. II This
debars «r? of IV. 3. 16. UfTOi: This debars r^of IV. 3. 14. m<tfrh<<ft: This
debars the general ir^ affix.
When it is not a Name, the other affixes are employed.
qtr v*v ^ H RM q^nft ll W-vn^r (^jn (
29. The affix 5^ comes after the word w, in the
sense of 'produced therein ', and thereby in the room of TO#
the substitute is qnj H
Thus qftj unr: sq^nr • produced in the way/
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. IIL § 33- ] ***m-«n5! 761
This debars the *^ N -
30. The affix jqc comes optionally after the word
am&v&syi, in the sense of 'born therein 9 .
This debars tt% of IV. 3. 16. Thus HHWWfc; or mumm : H This
* affix jh is applied to the word trarro a'so^ on ^e maxim g^qPndimi«wnm
"That which has undergone a change in regard to one of its parts, is by no
means in consequence of this change, something else than what it was before
the change had taken place ". Thus »HHWh: or WHNW •
31. And the affix «r also is added to the word
am&v&syft, in the sense of f born therein \
This adds a third affix to the ^ and vft already given. Thus tpir-
1TW) HHniHI^ :, W1HIW M So also after the word mitro* a* *PTT*W, mr-
TOftT: and *4HI4W •
^Rif: 11 Rj*y*mn4*<ti*m *j^»^4l H^fiir ipc ^nr |AwR*ifa*ft 11
32. After the words 'sindhu' and * apakara \ there
is the affix ^ in the sense of ' born therein \
The word ftp* occurs in the K^chchh&di class and takes n^and J3|,
(IV. 2. 133) ; and *mx would have also taken «T? under the general rule;
This s&tra debars these affixes. Thus ftF^T', HH<EW N
33. And the affixes «rm and 3rt come respectively
after the words ' sindhu 9 and ' apakara ', in the sense of 'pro-
duced therein'.
Thus &&: and imSX: •
fffer? 11 *R?rita w&ii *writo btptofh siranfsnjrofiu
Digitized by
Google
\
?6i «rw^fnr-w^» [ Bk. IV. Ch. Ill § 36.
. , . ■ : - _-* — i : ,
^Tff^i^ II 4iW^IMU|H ff «T$t *SK*# II
^rffepR^H NRaiHKI^ g^lft ****«: l<
34. The. affix denoting 'borti therein' is elided
by Ink, after the Words ' *ravish*ha ', ' phalgnni \ l anur&dh& ',
* sv&ti \ ' tishya ', ' punarvasu ', l hasta \ ' Vis&kh& \ ' ash&dhfi. \
and ' bahula* all denoting asterisms.
The feminine affixes ate also elided aftei 1 these, wofds by I. 2. 49.
Thus vfourq *Rf: -iTfttf: ' produced under Sravishtha \ So also <&otst:, *Tjtnfi f
mfir, fiw-t Tte£, *W» Rrara:, *T*T*:, *$* il The • Bahula ' is another Name
of the asterism $fo<4i! H
Vdrt: — So also the affix is elided after the asterisms f*ncr, ^ft and
crwft when the word is feminine. Thus PncPW *fatt 'a woman produced
under Chitta ' will be called f*fqr II So also ^*tft, vfirft II The feminine affix
which would have been elided after the two words Re vat! and Rohigf, by I. 2.
49. is reordained by IV. 1. 41, because these words belong to tfhcrft class.
Vdrt: — The affixes t and *n come respectively after qrFij^f and
«TOT*f in forming the Feminine derivatives. As *^fft^ (IV. I. 15) and 3TOTT U
The difference is in accent and meaning.
Vdrt:— The affix or* also comes after 'Sravishtha' and 'ashft^hA*
As wftdhl: and arret*!*: 11 .
*-tes)«
35. There is luk-elision of the affix denoting born
therein after a word ending in * sth&na *, and after the words
1 gos&la* and * kharas&la \
Thus ntwi% itR[: s **trtv[Fl'* •WtMW*, «fhrftrti fsrnrfa: 11
36. There is optionally luk-elision of the affix ;
denoting * born therein * after the words 'vatsasala \ l abhijit \
1 asvayuk \ and ' satabhik \
As ^w^iui «W:^^Erar^ or *raron*, srPrftr^ or sfrfaftrsr:, *reg$ or
•TTOJiC:, *ra?H^ or *imfHW 11 The two words imvj* and TOTOfat are both
to be taken. These are all diversities of TO* as used in the next sfttra.
Digitized by
Google
Ck. IV- Ch. lit. §. $ 1 te*'*l I TSi
done, because the sfttra can be divided into two separate aphorisms : as (i)
frffrFt^m y»Tffg^t^T»T^na H^f:(s)irmsf^^tt I e.(nwheii *w is added,
5«n^ and irww are the substitutes of y^ and ^irrespectively (2> So also
when if*, follows.
As for illustrations, see the preceding Sfttra, e. g. fryfpfo* , miwwih:
with <srsj, and fapm and «m*W: with n<5 U This substitution does not take
place when or is added, as j^ftf* and trcifta V
TO*"
3. In expressing one individual, *ra*R and nm; are
the substitutes of l yu8hmad , and 'asmad* respectively ,when ;rs£
and «|t^foJlow.
As irrafta: 1>elonging to thee*, nt^gtm "belonging to me." *fTO and
•TPW: a But when the affix is tf f the form will «rifo, *frr-
The word f^TC^f should not be construed as meaning the affix of the
singular number, as the affix ^r II Because the affix of the singular is always
elided (tf$) after these words, and by rule I. I. 63, there will not be the
application of this rule. This difficulty is, however, got over by explaining
the word q^rW* as equal to qqsnf 11
4. The affix ipj comes after the word «rjt in the
remaining senses.
This debars *** 11 Thus «r?PI>'betonging to half!'
V&rt:— When it has a prior term the affix *n is used. As wfctntfNp&
jfrf: II TO *T*t HVf **T* fW^fqiVlftl^ TOTCt W*I% 5lfrt<*: H
5. The affix tf*x comes, in the remaining sense*,
after the word 'ardha', when preceded by 'para', avara*, 'adh-
ama' y and 'uttama'.
Thus qtnsfa mrofa, *nnn&*, **mnikii
Q. Why do we say jpfar • preceded by • ? Its use seems fo be super
rtuous. If the sfttra stood as MiUiiMift^Am :, it would have given the same
sense. For the *tix\ being supplied from the last sfltra, the whole sfitr*
Digitized by
Google
7S+ *ft*-*H* Bic IV. Ctt. III. §7- )
vrould have been TOTO>TOfoft»3rs3rTl*9 which must mean • preceded by
para &c w
At The words q* and ittfk have meanings other than that of R^ o^
direction. As q* m& € highest pleasure.' «rat$<9 'lowest ple'asure/ There-
fbre 9 when these words q< and «TTC denote direction, tbeto by the subsequent
rule, the affix would have been always tffj and *jj u The employment
of the term fcf in the sfttra, prevents the application of the affix «TJ even when
the words denote direction*
According to the V&rtika H^imi^ i*^ given under the last sfitra, the
word «TH preceded by any word would have taken ra, hence the necessity of
this stitra ordainig mf, when the first terms are q* &c
fi^4^ifo^ U\i . n^jfSt r ^-^j^-*»-^r ft
^fa: it R^»^Hvim T »Hi€mf84^^ifi vsjiynrfit *rcfilr i*hiw ftflntf* w
6. And the affix. z^ also (as well as ipj) comes in
the remaining senses after the word * ardha,' when the prior
term denotes a direction.
By *c, the affix ^ is also used This debars *r^il Thus ^rf^L «fNf-
The word m is used in the sfttra in order to prevent ambiguity. Had the
s&tra stood merely as ftfj*3T^rc*T, it might have meant (1. 1.68)/ Ardha preceded *
by the word f^ takes rn also', for then HVti^ffr would have applied, and rjirtr
*TO: would have taken the affix.
?f*p 11 ftfrefoiftQi* i' iA<*awiPf4> smNtirciftw tnf^^Rrff^t^»i^rff-
7. The affixes 3?*r and ssj come in the remaining
senses after the word ' ardha ', preceded by a word denoting
direction, when a particular portion of a village or an inhabi-
ted country is meant.
The phrase R^lmifr is to be read into the sfitra. This debars n?j 11
Thus ft or^CTTO *wm SPTT*** IT %rfaft: or faTft^Rt: M Those verily belong
to the eastern half of our village or country *. So also ^TRPinrf: or jrftnHV-
ffar : 11 The word forefr «*iPrei « fc4fi*M 3 W and is a TaddhiUrtha com-
pound.
jf^H II WTOTO **** H*fir %PW: »
Digitized by
Google
bk. iv. ch. in. 5 ii 1 <irfoK--*«« 9S$
8. After the'word «T«T there is the affix n in the
remaining senses.
This debars mi* As twin " middlemost *.
VArt\ — So also after the word.inft II As inftT- " Adam, or born id
the beginning",
Vdrt: — So also after the words W^and •?>!«* f the final ^ being elid-
ed As m*rtU UMTO H
9. The affix «r comes in the remaining senses
after the word .'niadhya', the meaning being 'fit' or 'proper. 1
The word shift* means •equity.propriety.right, fit*. As 4rf<tfti[ lrfw ?ft
>|M9 *TO*t " the proper piece of wood— neither too long nor too short ". if**
UWTO^the fit Grammarian, neither too refined nor too dull", mqnft "a
proper wife "•
10. The affix T5^come8| in the remaining senses,
after the word sfttj, which is near the sea.
The word Ufa occurs in the list of Kachchhidi (I V. 2. 133), and would
have taken tr^; and by sOtfa IV. 2. 134, it Would have taken j^ also. The
present sOtra debars both those affixes* when the word <hr means snjHJI or
1 near the sea \
Thus VW living on or relating to an island'. As V* Wfrfsyrefo
TO*II
Why do we say «TOl*t ? Observe ^CTL or Vn( IV - 2 - ! 33 and *34)»
The word • anu«samudra ' is an AvyaylbhAva compound (II. 1. 15).
11. The affix 3^ comes in the remaining senses
after the words denoting time.
This debars sr* II The affix & which comes after Vpddha words ii
prohibited by this sfttra. Thus *nft*: •monthly' «fr>JNrftraf:, 'bi-monthly',
*rfa^fft3ff: € annual \ •
The words which denote time even indirectly, also take this affix,
As quwMfbitf. 3lim'<4i^4Lil The word *iF* governs all the subsequent sfitras
upto 25. (mr *w>
20
Digitized by
Google-
\
756 fr*HMnii . [Bjc IV. Ch. III. § 15
srrat srcqf. 11 t* H M*ift H «rit- J 5WT : *
5f%: 11 \iwmi«i s^TOraf *ro% *n% sPfift ttfor* 11
12. The affix 35^ comes in the remaining senses
after the word ^p^ when expressing wrac II
This debars *t*J (IV. 3. 16). The word hjt% means the 'funeral ob-
lation ' ; and not *TCTOPl *W: ' a faithful or believing person '. Thus qrcfN?
VTvi 'the autumnal §r&ddha\ When not meaning 'Sr4ddha', it will be
jftn 11 fnt unflr wftft w«ai«it«<3 v«rar *r *ro% fcftsr. 11
13. The affix 3^ comes optionally in the remain-
ing senses after the word sr*3[ when expressing illness or heat.
Thus mifttfi r U*t: ' the autumnal disease', q i Kfi^ T arm*: ' the autumnal
heat or sunshine*.
Why do we say " when denoting sickness or heat " ? Observe, *n*t
qft ' the autumnal curd \ This r^ debars the «CJ *F5 (I V. 3. 16).
frgngforna n ^r 11 *« n q^rft 11 i^- wftM i +nin- ^r (g*U 11
Sffcr: 11 Pwm?imim*sif Rthw «3i qnrair ^fir tW*n » _
14. The affix 35^ comes optionally in the remain-
ing senses after the words * nfc& ', and ' pradosha V
This makes optional, where by s&tra IV. 3. 1 1 ante, the ys^ would
have been obligatory. Thus \*Pt or ^RuiHL * nocturnal \ Jjrfr^or RTfif^nr^ 11
**M<gi< ^ 11 \\ 11 <iTrfa 11 a^-iR-^-fe 5 *) H
15. The affix SR comes optionally in the remain-
ing senses after the word WR^and it takes the augment 3^1
The word ^ takes the affix «r* by sfltra IV. 2. 105. This sfltra
ordains z*$ ll When free from the scope of these rules, it takes tyu and
tyul affixes also by IV. 3. 23. Thus ^-1-^-1-^= w^-Hfl-f^ (VII. 3. 3) =
*Nft<W "belonging to to-morrow or ephemeral". Otherwise *rea(: and *repf: M
3H![ n
$ri'- 11 aPtftttifta *c<P*fr w*r**p* 3*THff%p*&s** iro^f *nfic ftfasn 11
16. The affix 3^ comes in the remaining senses,
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. III. § 19 ) %W*^ii 757
after the words ' sandhi-velA * &c, and the words expressing
' season ' and 'asterism/
The word *>m\ is to be read into the sfltra. All the words must be
expressive or time. This debars en 11 The repetition or *r; debars 9 also
in the case of those words, which are Vjiddha ia this list (IV. 2. 114). Thus
(1) wPm^hh* HT**l*(2j ^>ni,\n%ni (3) fafi tor* are examples of sandhivelft
season and asterisms respectively.
The affix it? is added to dTOC when denoting 'fruit* and f festival,
as CTrort ^* or <rt 11
sn^T *t*m 11 ^ n m\(k n sni^-c^wi: u
jftir: 11 mtstiuiV 1 * 1 «rw& H^ft fcflrcp 11
17. The afBx HT comes ia the remaining senses
after the word sn^t II
This debars the *r»J of the last sOtra, though 'privfish' is a season-
denoting word. Thus srrfq*qir VSTf**: "the cloud belonging to the rain/
season."
qfl+quq^ II \* H <tfpnft II *pfh*r.-sq& I
^fop II wf<IMI{*$ S|K|qt *T^I% Srf^T II
18. The affix z^: comes ia the remaining senses
after the word wft II
This debars ir*of IV. 3. 16. Thus q fffcprgfrpPU The ^f has the
force of m* &c of IV. 3. 43 here.
jflip 11 whim^ croft firo% ^"rartt *rcffi $ft* : u
19. In the Chhandas, the word ' varshi* takes the
affix $s[ in the remaining senses.
This debars *f>. The form will be the same, but there will be differ-
ence in accent As spnpT ITO^ *Tffa»Tffr M The word qj$ here means
" month." i. e. Nabha and Navasya are two rainy months.
. trererra II v u **Fcirac-^-(sw) N
Uto* 11 qq^wi^ croft fts% «i,**wr **ft SWv u
Digitized by
Google
\
7S« ^f^^M t Bk. IV. CH. HI. § 23.
20. In the Chhandas, the affix peonies in the
remaining senses a,fter the word c vasanta/
This debars «TPf (IV. 3. 16), Thus n*w frra^Y JKjpWfl U
^ t*rerra H ** H wft n &4*di< ^-fo?) n
|f*n ii ^Pcf^i«fi^ (p^re fwi *sj insi^ *nfi^ $ft^p 11
21 • In the Chhandas, the affix ^sr comes \\\ the re-
maining senses, after the word ' hemanta. 1
This debars «nj (IV. 3. 16). Thus 53T* qj^^V fo^WL tt Tb e flak-
ing of two separate Stitras of 20 and 21, is for the sake of the subsequent sfttra,
jn which the anuvptti Qf word \h*3 only is taken.
*(4*im *f tttest II ^ II *^f ^ n lEf^^^'^RitT.-^ n
22. The affix «na; comes always after the wqrd he-
manta/ and (before this affix) the letter a* of ' hemanta ' is
elided.
ThusV^^^re*. 'wintery residence.' fo * *|M>H*l M
The word S^PC is used to show that tlie sOtra applies in the Chhandas
as well as in the secular literature.
The wprd^i^r will take htjj by sfltra IV. 3. 16 as Vr^ft TC^ : but
there is no elision of ?f there. Thus there ^re three forms $*^: (|V. 3, 16),
$n%* (IV. 3. 21) and Vrait
ffrf : II OT^pR^rf^n^^fssiWHlW *Mriq|foKl£q JO^T^Rf %*2^ II
«Uf*l«*Hl M f*U44i«4<jR>^Hii *^!W M «UI*l«hHL H 1PTCH \&*ifH «F?faW l|
ftfWni !HMMHjijHHj i *rf%OTii^3T*i%^R**ww
23. After the words hpt ' at eve \ f^ l for a long
time ', snif l h* the fore-noon \ xft ' at dawn \ and after In-
declinables expressing time, there are the affixes ssj and 35*5
and their augment is fjf |)
The word 3iF7n[ is understood here also. Thus qnl-l-^rsQTq-l-^-l-tgs
anfsrfS; (VII. 1. 1) € belonging to the evening'. fctCT*» ' lasting \ sn^TtPT^
• what is of the forenoon \ qftnpret " what is of the early morn n .
The word *m is a word ending in ^ and i$ an Indeclinable. These
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV r Ch. III. § 25. ] jpTOf - 1 ** • . 759
affixes would also come by virtue or its being an Indeclinable, after that qt* N
The present m+ is derived from the root ^ by adding the affix qar^M It
always ends in * when these affixes are added. The word fart always ends
I n 9 91 infer and ipr always end in if II
As regards Indeclinable*, the examples are ftSTWTO, 'belonging to the
night '. ftW** • belonging to the day '.
Vdrt : — The affix V comes after the words Pit, q^ and toR 11 Aa
fanr^, HW^f and rafa^ll
Vdrt : — The n of ppr in elided in the Chhandas before this affix «. as,
Vdrt : — The affix fpr? comes after ff!f» «T|f% and <p*H; as, •rpnp^,
tuftfl and qflnra. 11
Vdrt : — So also after n?*r, as, HftpRil
The defference between \yu and tyul is in accent, Thus «nF$f and
nra^tPf t PWOT and P&Q^t mi^I^ and vr$?TCT, H«l<Jn, litftH, fonR and f|^j»
IPC. fmfa and *hto* n
24, Optionally after the words ^fjf and sttoy,
there are the affixes 35 and zgRZ and their augment is 33 N
In the alternative s^i of IV. 3. r 1 also occurs. As S^frjrtbPt <mHl^ffl«fo
with \yu, or VfrffiHMi flmiffel^ w **h t^ aft - With {yul we have ^fj^ttto and
nmi<jn<fa II The sign of the locative is not elided by rule VI. 3. 17. When
the word is taken as incapable of having the case-affix, we have, nqifufJi'f or
25. The affixes ordained above or here after, come
after a word in the 7th case in construction, in the sense of
4 born or grown or originated there or thea \
The affixes *n^ &c tf &c. h*ve been taught, but no particular sense
was assigned to them. See IV. 2. 92. This sfttra gives one of the senses,
and also declares the particular case in which the stem must be, to which the
affix is to be added. Thustfronrt-jg+srai-shP 'born in Srughna'. So
also m^r. 'born in Mathura', w^: 'born in Utsa', sffanT* l^rn in Udap4na\
Digitized by
Google
\
760 . w**nr-J*u [BkIV.Ch.III. 5/29.
fjfp« (IV. 2. 93), tnrrrrfN: (IV. 2. 93) ui*fo* : (IV. 2. 117), rp^ (iv. 2. 94X
Hrfh* (IV. 2. 94), w*|irp (IV. 2. 95) tfr£t?CT: (IV. 2. 95>
26. After the word sn$?[ being in the 7th case*
affix, there is the affix arct in the sense of produced therein.
This debars q<*i of sfltra IV. 3. 17. The * of s^ is for the sake of
accent sn^ft^ITO^siTfmP 'produced in the rainy season \
27. The affix 55^ comes after the word src^f in the
7th case-affix, in the sense of 'born therein/ the whole word
being a name.
This debars «ng U Thus qrctCT V*i* f the grass called &&radaka'. OTTOr
**T: • the pulse called SAradaka.'
Why do we say u^ltl t Observe vit$ WH^' the autumnal crop,'
According to some, the word q'^mi governs all the succeeding s&tras
up to IV. 3. 38.
28; The affix 5^ comes in the sense of 'born
therein 1 after the words ^r^r, stto^ot, 3WS& q^5T, sr^W, and
?ra^rc, the whole being a Name.
Thus sjft?j**f: f nwm«*h. This debars IV. 3. 24. *rnntf:, 5^: II This
debars iT5 of IV. 3. 16. irtTO?: This debars ss^of IV. 3. 14. %MWfr This
debars the general it? affix.
When it is not a Name, the other affixes are employed.
29. The affix 5^ comes after the word w, in the
sense of * produced therein \ and thereby in the room of *PT#
the substitute is qwj R
Thus qfa son: sqn^i: f produced in the way/
Digitized by
Google
Bk.iv.Ch. in. 5 33-1 ^rww-^i 761
This debars the n^ N .
jffcf: ii i!ii4iHUJim|*<irarit **fir v ipc *mr tttarfofc^% 11
30. The affix J?C comes optionally after the word
am&v&sy&, in the sense of 'born therein 9 .
This debars «N| of IV. 3. 16. Thus mwwt : or hihwiw N This
• affix $n is applied to the word SPITTO also^ on the maxim qy^f^nuFP^ffnt
"That which has undergone a change in regard to one of its parts, is by no
means in consequence of this change, something else than what it was before
the change had taken place "• Thus muHlV- or KIHI4W *
«r*»M» *r*ift II «r-*r ■
31. And the affix «r also is added to the word
am&v&syft, in the sense of € born therein \
This adds a third affix to the jn and irj already given. Thus mr-
*IW, HHniWfr , WHUIW M So also after the word tram*, as imw, *nr-
TOTO and HIHiw M
jffcf: II Rl^fJWWMJIMW ^J^ V?4t W^ft IPC WH |6uiR*lP*'ft II
32. After the words 'sindhu* and ' apakara ', there
is the affix <*^C in the sense of ' born therein \
The word ftpjf occurs in the K^chchh&di class and takes strand 5^
(IV. 2. 133); and in^it would have also taken tnj under the general rule.
This s&tra debars these affixes. Thus ftpgqp, umiW M
srosu <er u $3 N M41P1 B sn^-srsfMr I
jftn 11 ftp^roro^pm nqiriwnmA r **roir *nwr«nr *ro ffiwRjifouft 11
33. And the affixes sn^ and 3R* come respectively
after the words * sindhu 9 and ' apakara \ in the sense of 'pro*
duced therein'.
Thus &&: and tnTOft: M
tJ^Tft II 3rf^ -M^^- 3i5*ivn^^
^fan 11 ^RwftHr: tn^nir *wnta btptoh sinrnfs^'roSii
IfRfrfPlH tJpljiMiil f*IMKq*ft liftoff**: ftPQTffWUWWLH
Digitized by
Google
\
yfo irw^inr-w^» [ Bk. IV. Ch. Ill § 36.
. , , ; ■ - ' ■ « ! ,
*lff*Wift II 4iWI«WI<H**lf €f$t TO*W H
34. The. affix denoting 'borti therein' is elided
by hlk, after the Words ' ^ravishdia ', ' phalgnni \ l anur&dh& ',
4 sv&ti \ ' tishya ', ' punarvasu ', ' hasta \ ' Vis&kh& ', ' ash&cflifi. \
and ' bahula* all denoting asterisms.
'The feminine affixes ate also elided aftei 1 these, wcrtds by 1. 2. 49.
Thus *qYTOT3 SfRf: -*tR* ' produced under Sravishth* \ So also qjwsf:, «CT?nft,
ttrfit:, fifi*, Sffcp, fW s » Rrara:, iraret *$r- ll The • Bahula' is another Name
of the asterism $ftftir ll
Vdrt: — So also the affix is elided after the asterisms PncT, X^ft and
df^t when the word is feminine. Thus PncPW *ffar € a woman produced
under Chitf a ' will be called f*fqr H So also ^*tft, dft^t M The feminine affix
which would have been elided after the two words Revatt and Rohigf, by I. 2.
49. is reordained by IV. 1. 41, because these words belong to tfhcrft class.
Vdrt: — The affixes t and *n come respectively after qrFij^f and
ttTOT?? in forming the Feminine derivatives. As *^fft^ (IV. I. 15) and 3TOTT U
The difference is in accent and meaning.
Vdrt:— The affix s<rt also comes after •Sravishth*' and 'ashft^hA*
As wftdhl: and srnflfpi: II -
*^ )B ,„-
35. There is luk-elision of the affix denoting born
therein after a word ending in * sth&na *, and after the words
1 gositfa f and l kharas&la \
Thus ifrcm% itRTi^^rwt 1 ! «w*<*hs, «frtrftTtt fsrniW: 11
'4<«*Udlftf^*^^J*lfa^ft SIT II 3$ II M^lft II ^c^r*5TR5T, 3 | fafa-
fft<f 5 11 ^^TORiffHiJ qwi ^nn^ irwrcsn 3**r h^Rt 11
36. There is optionally luk-elision of the affix ;
denoting l born therein * after the words 'vatsasala \ l abhijit \
1 asvayuk \ and ' satabhik \
As *s*raranri ^W-.^^tot^- or *raron*, srPrftr^ or aitfaftrcr:, «to$3> or
•TTOjnr:, traPr^ or simfHW ll The two words totof* an <* TOTOfat are both
to be taken. These are all diversities of *m as used in the next sfttra.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. III. J. 41 ] 99*1 763
jftr- 11 *re%*n «tu*4 mm? tow* *yt g***^ M
37. There is diversely luk-elision of the affix
denoting 'born therein *, after an astcrism.
Thus ftfc* or hf&i: (IV. 3. 16) wirfirer or *rnhft4: (IV. 3. 16).
38. An affix (one of. those already taught) comes
after a word in the seventh case-affix, in the sense of € done
there ', ' obtained there 9 ' bought there f ' dexterous therein'.
Thus 4tm* may mean N done in, or bought in, or obtained in, or skill-
ful in Srughna ". So also the words m^: f ttf|pt: H
39. After a word being in construction in the 7th
case, an affix (one of those ordained already) comes in the
6cnse of ' generally found therein \
The word mqt means something less than all i. e. abundant Thus
^inP'whatts abundant or mostly to be found in Srughna ',-^frfflft*! WTg^R
mfa. So also HTgri, CTf^T &c
This sQtra may appear to be superfluous as being covered by the
more comprehensive sfltra tppr?: (IV. 3. 53). If imprc: be explained as «rf%-
mw i. c. what sometimes is to be found and sometimes not, still it will make
little difference.
40. The affix z*§ comes in the sense of ' mostly
to be found there,' after the words 'upajanu,' 'upakama/ and
upanivi/ being in the 7th case in construction.
This debars ar* &c Thus WPIT**:, fllM4iflw ifrrftftqp •
*bj^ II a* 11 q^ 11 *?r^ n
41. After a nominal-stem or a word ending in the
feminine affix # and 3rnj f being in the 7th case in construct
21
Digitized by
Google
7(54 *H-affix. [Bk.IV.Ch. III. $• 43*-
\
tion, an affix comes in the sense of ' adapted therein/
Except the word « adapted ' which is the meaning of the word fcwir,
ajl the other words of the sfltra have been supplied from the previous aphorisms.
The word e?5r does not mean in this sfltra • origin • or 'existence', for the
word ^to an <J ** already express that notion. It here means * suitableness *
* adequacy ' L e.. <Mi4^f qy: and UH i miH&fe: II
Thus$$r*re3rf = *rfcp 'what is suited to the country of Srughna/
So alsd Jfljt:, urg^ II The word m is understood here also.
*RtaTfS5t II «* II Wft » ^t5TraC-5W M
42. The affix peonies after the words WJhff in the
sense of ' adapted to that/ .
This debars BTff ll Thus *TO%^=^M^TO « silken clothes/
The\Vbrd^ro means 'cocoon.' sfffo* may literally therefore mean
4 anything suited to the cocoon/ and may apply to the caterpillar as well as
to the silk made out of cocoon. The word mm is however ^ff and means
•silken/ Nor does it mean € suited to the sheath/ as a sword, though koSa
means 'sheath' also. This sfttra would have been more properly placed after
IV. 3. 134, under the heading of fw* rather than of tf$j: II
In fact after the sfltra tp*&-*H (IV. 3. 159), the addition of «ram
would have been more appropriate.
fftn 11 q»reffifr*n^r» q: CTrftafifci: *m^Tf^$S wiRIM ■*** ^fir 11
43. An affix comes after a word denoting time,
being in the 7th case in construction, in the sense of 'heing
good/ l flowering ' or c ripening therein \
Thus %ip% eT*r=V**«r 2 'what is good or pleasant in autumn • asVrep
qnmc: ^ftiwfo <re i W So also ^r%3^^r=^T^W JpVWT- 'vernal creepers i. e.
which flower in spring \ \f*tq: m*t4|: ll So also TOf T^^^fJTW' WM- u the 1
grains that ripen in autumn \ V*r *TCT: € the barley that ripens in summer \
This sfitra teaches the base and the sense of the affix. It does not
directly teach the affix. The above illustrations are examples of the affix aqroL&c.
^ * 11 w n <i^nft n ^r, ^r n
Digitized by
Google
BK. IV. Ch. III. J. 48 J >*£*! I yS$
44. An affix comes after a word denoting time,
being in the 7th case in construction, meaning ' sown there-
in'. ;
Thus%ij% itq^-^TOf OT: ' the barley sown in autumn/ %mt iftftt m
The separation of this sfltra from the last, is for the sake of the sub-
sequent sQtra in which the anuvfitti of itjf only goes, which could not
have been the case had this word been included in the last sfitnu
ffta m •tt^s^Ivmi^j* TOd **Rr *W •
45. The affix 55^ comes in the sense of • sown f
after the word grrregafi R
This debars *n n Thus mi^sm «WP- tHlM«l*NJ taqr. • the pulse sown
In Aivayujl.' It is the name of the full-moon in the Asterism of AlvinL
Asvayuj and Aivini are the same. Some texts read *T5**ft instead of «tf^ft II
46. The affix 35* comes optionally after the words
' grishma ' and c vasanta f , in the sense of ' sown \
This debars «r^(IV. 3. 16). Thus V*n*or iro^^n^'the crop sown
in summer \ TORI* or frereren , *
%n*iv\ n «\s h q^n% n fcic-scfe N
?f*r. ii OT4tat*fiHii<wift«i: mRmR*if*iP»^R^Hif ipnftlW *srifr w§ q^lnf*
47. After a nominal stem being in the 7tli case in
construction, denoting time, an affix comes in the sense of
/being then diie'; provided that the thing due be ''debt 9 .
Thus in% ^ny* - Tlftre ? M a debt due in a month \ *TTJr*TTftTCTt , 3TTO-
ft^ 11 Why do we say %[§ ' it being a debt'. Observe *P9W PTOT where no
affix is added.
ff^r: 11 *rit<t *p*ht uror *$ra»n: ^TOTrt^rH r: cntfta^^'tayri'^fo^ jn g.
48. The affix 5^ comes in the sense of ' debt then
due/ after the words <*><*! Pm, , sr^v, and 44£*1 denoting time
Digitized by
Google
766 w&ftfHs*: ii Bk. IV. Ch. III. J. 51. ]
and being in the 7th case in construction.
The words qr<rfft &c are words which indirectly denote time. Thus
the time in which the peacocks mate and make noise is called qpsr ft H The
time in which the aSvatha tree fructifies is called 9TCTKT* II The time in
which barley is thrashed out is called q3£*r 'barley-chaff? Thus txm?'
f^RiT% ^yt«*UIVML 'a debt to be paid when the peacocks make noise
(i. e. mating or rainy season) tails/ m^vq+hHi and qqrag^Pill
fimHlWtl^ mil q^Tft II rfhW-BT^-Hm^ 1^«
fRf: 11 ^^M<UHtife*i*3f ,j^ir«rat *refifr ^prffiRrfi*p5i9 n
49. The affix 35^ comes in the sense of 'debt-due'
after the words 'grishma' and 'avarasama*.
This debars the «rov and rail Thus tft^ifoyfr "^refPE II So also
*HI4UW4ii| ll This affix causes Vfiddhi, while w^ would not have done it Hence
the separate affix. The word H*iT is synonymous with ^ 'a year*. The word
miWH*ML means either mimpHf (nmumimwnft TO* or snfHl ro* TO «Hrf* 1
to*u
?Rf5 II 4i4HI<|t|{|ll<4taMI**li > *R*I«Wi H^T^i ^^Ilil^^^^^^PiWldftH^I^ II
*lf%3K*U idiHIU*MMquflfift TO1% H
50. The affix 55$ also (as well as 5^) comes after
the words 'samvatsara' and 'agr&h&yani' in the sense of 'debt
due/
Thusfc*^%*y*-STTOCOtf. and STTOTC* II *nu*TOt%ff or hiiiw** 11.
The word QTCTC occurs in Sandhivcladi Class (IV. 3. 16) and takes 8?w
when 'fruit' or 'festivity* is meant The present sfltra enjoins rs^ when
'debt ' is indicated.
•nnt<fil ijn: II \\\X q^rfa ll *qi*<fo *j*t: n
!^i : ii *iwuPm5 ^H4lMHMl<mRmR^ii^^ii4ii9 **fi {ditiRtfciNft WTfafro ireror
61. An affix comes after a word in the 7th case
in construction, denoting time, in the sense of 'who then
wanders', and the word so formed refers to a wild beast.
Thus ftrorqr «n?0<f ?*T: = H*I: " an animal that wanders at night." So
also inire: or inqfrf^ (1 V. 3. 14) 'a brute that yells in the morning/
Digitized by
Google
[ Bk. IV. Ch. III. §. 54- ****** ii 7*1
Why do we say ipi: • a beast ? Observe fitarqf «*!**!% J&r H Hot
there is no affixing. The word cqifrfr also means 'to make noise. 9 The
SOtra may, therefore, also be translated as : M After a word denoting time, an
-affix (IV. 1.83) comes in expressing a wild beast who makes noise at that
time".
3RPET til«n> II HR II iJ^lft n *l^-3TW-*il««i II
yfM- 11 tiRRi nHm<i*mt**w*if*H2 xnfinfiRiTf^ft roo^f mnWftrt «p«wt **fir *^w
52. An affix comes after a word in the 1st case
in construction denoting time, in the sense of ' this is his
habit or endurance \
The word m*R\ is understood here also, nt-that : srfi-finptor
(THR* M endured or habituated ". Thus Pttlf ^tffrp^m -fkm " reading by
night", ffjj ^(|if^ Bmroi-^rv: or %nnr- 'a student who is habituated or
enured to reading by night '. So qrflfta: or ifftre M
m i&r. n\\* ^rfk n <r* f *w. 11 ?
53. An affix comes after a word in the 7th case
in construction, in the sense of ' who stays there \
The anuvjritti of **renj ceases. The sense of m here is • existence',
and not that of • birth': because the sense of 'birth' is taught in sfttra tra
*ro- (IV. 3. 25). Thus, f & u*: - ^hr: " who stays in Srughna ". m^O, crfg*: U
The repetition of ipr in the sfttra though its annuvptti could have
been drawn from the previous sfitras, is for the sake of stopping the annu-
vritti of tm* n
jftr. h ft^ fni^rrf|Hj: infinf^p% ii<ppii*}f *r*fir m h* (dmRjiPjift 11
siffapui ¥^r^rgro^ 11
54. The affix *rac comes in the sense of ' who
stays there \ after the Nominal stems fat &c.
This debars ir^ and tf II As ftftr *tf ~f*S*Wt 'lying in a particular
quarter ', ^r^ n
The words 3*3 and 3PCT which ordinarily mean 'mouth ' and 'hip'
respectively, have not this meaning when this affix is to be added. They
must refer to non-corporeal or abstract objects. As tpTT3*R 'who stays in
the van of the army'. ^H l *m*q< 'who stays in the rear of the army '. In
Digitized by
Google
\
768 «*****« [ Bk. IV. Ch III. §. 58.
fact, the words • mukha • and 'jaghana' here mean the 'van 1 and the 'rear*
of an army. The word 7?^ takes this affix, when the word so formed is a
Name. As TtTOr^nTCTOTt otherwise we have sftofir »rcw H
1 fa5J, 2 **, 3 syr, 4 m*, 5 to, 6 tfl«l ( ^WT ) 7 flnr, 8?WT, 9 *rarc, 10 qf*r-
*, 11 <f^, 12 i?*fi t 13 TOT, 14 *rfiP*, 15^f # , 16 *nf*, 17 t^T, 18 g^r, 19 *tt f 20
»fr, 21 yr, 22 ¥^KR^cTnff^ 23 gum, 24 »g, 25 ^ (f*v) 26 *&*, 27 irnKTO, 28
55. The affix ^C comes in the sense of 'what stays
there* after a word denoting a part of the body.
This debars sryr 11 As ?%3«rf~*?BPt, 'dental i.e. what stays there,
*pfo, *?***!* 11 So also qff **-<rt (VI. 3. S3), Hlfa*>m r **=»«TOW II
*ffcr: 11 tc?nft»*r. mRmR3i^ir *R*t«uil *r*fir *r» m t&wft+ifcmSi 11
56. The affix gst comes in the sense of c what stays
there*, after the words 'dnitf. 'kukshi', 'kalasi', vasti' 'asti*
and c ahi\ -
Thus *ni3* 'what stays in a leathern bag*, ^rcfcm, qnrefore , TOfa*
*jT$T*T*and mftti^ II vff&Fl is the name of a poison. The word *rfl*r is a noun
and not a verb here. Its use as a Noun is to be seen in phrases like i T ftqitfk l
ftp. *rfwHT^-*FnT* w
rffanprtem^ 11 v* 11 M^ift 11 rfranRn-vm- ^ n
5^r. 11 4hiwiTO»i«Ki> n*fir *i4iHi<f*M» re n* ffimftHP^i ii
57. The affix amr also (as well as gr 3 *) comes after
the word 'grlvi* in the sense of 'what stays there*.
This debars ^ (iy. 3. 55) «itare *r*-*T%nn orVp(,il. The word fftm
means blood-vessels, and as they are many, the word is used in the plural in
the sfltra. 1
n refre rspr. II v > wft ■ «wSkrac-»v: ll
ffrn 11 ir*4kni^i\vn ito*it *refifr re *t* fdidfwfcitfti sn^FHTT 1 h
*iftn»« 11 «ft?w*^4>qtffir tow* u *tJ%^ 11 ^phrr^^r *«ft tow* 11
58. The affix say comes in the sense of 'who stays
there', after the word 'gambhira 9 .
Digitized by
Google
bk.iv.Ch. hi. § 60) ****-*** 76*
This debars nn.it n**ft **- «!!**<* •gravity'.
VArt:— So also after *fip, ** and TT*T As *tu*» V** and *fl^M
The final of <Tf^ is elided by the vArtika under IV. 1. 85. The word Maivym'
could be also formed under another V&rtika of the same.
Virt: The affix flya comes after chaturmisa in the sense of a sacri-
fice; as, ^ M*IlWlfl *mft, ^lyfrTO Wt otherwise ^TOrfe N
59. After an Avyayibh&va Compound, the affix vq
is employed, in the sense of * who stays there/
This debars «nj n The affix ?* however, does not come after every
Avyaylbh&va Compound, but only after the words included in the list of *R-
5*HTft as given in the GagapAtha.
Thus qftg*j «rir-<nftpFra,So also qrftrrenu i Not so $R$ft*, the
word **$H not belonging to the class qftyn n
1 ^ftj^li 2 *ftf3> 3 **&* > * *3?» & ^PT5^» 6 *p*. 7 ?ft?Sft, 8 vr&t, 9 9^fK
10 to*f*» 11 *m*hh > 12 «tjto 13 1*3*1*11, 14 «T3firH, 15 •rjtor, 16 nyiw, 17 «r-
jut , 18 itjft, 19 «ryNr» 20 nyr* , 21 nft^ra, 22 it**?* u
*!• 11 *r*«ir*nft>*w 11 *r* ii «*3?*ra tiptop*: 11
*r% 11 i^fw 11 **• 11 ft<lwww 11
*T* II «{WII^HMP*lf IHWH*Alfl*: imrit TOTO II
m* II ^R^Sfc Ji^T II *T* II «WTOHrflr*: II
wt* 11 *Pijft^ ^t ro4fr **5*5r u *r* 11 »r«5f iu| fanj ^tfttji w
*t« u wrat g»^iw: ii *r* u nftFrren* 11
Kdrikd OTTTOI trill* WU«Hlft;j *TO% I
v^n^^ww Hi<£i%iis^Hi ^r 11
«4asi*4ddifln : ,jpi?prai to* ^r n
fa: 3*rafa *ww 'npfHifr «r^wt *r*n m
quit ip* f^pj ^RHm^mt yifsranw 11
60. After an Avyayibh&va compound, having the
word »RfT as prior term, the affix z^ is employed, in the sense
of l who stays there/
Digitized by
Google
27°
(wra-*? • [ bk. iv. ch. hi. 5 62.
\
This debars n\ II Thus mwrtftq^H; *n**l«f f^CTLH
VArt: — The affix v» comes after OTTT, as srei% *rt-«IHlrt* , tW
Vdrt :— So also after a word beginning with *roPTf as, MHHMlR**
Vdrt:— So also after the words *r*«mpf, &c as, smuntfTO*. *m^f%9i*.
«nftWh§^L II The class aranprft is Akptigaga.
Vdrt.— So also after *^pc: as, «fKtefaff: « The word 'flrdhva* is a
synonym of 3**$* II
Vdrt :— So also ***?*, as £|4f*$CTt M
Vdrt:— So also after a compound having the word «fa? as second
term ; as, qj 3lfa*1 , qnflfa<Mi m
Vdrt:— The words ys and qret ending in *% take the affix fa; as,
Vdrt:— The affix fa comes after *pr and q* with the augment 3*«, as
Vdrt: — Tne affix fa comes after ira, as, iraffo: H
F4r/; — So also the affix »n* and iftn come after if*; As. iraprat,
*n«rftnwii
F4r/.- — So also the affix ftv* ( ffa^in Padamanjari ) comes after iiui,
whereby it be comes qiq* as irafHnq[ in frar^Pf OT^ Tft rffr H
Vdrt: — There is luk-elision of the affix after the word tot*, as,
Vdrt: — So also there is elision after the words ending in atfira, as
__ 61. After the word l grama \ preceded by 'pari*
or 4 anu *, (the whole, being an Avyayibh&va), there is the
affix 5^ in the sense of € who stays there \
This debars wr*ljl Thus MlRmflH? :, srianrpta: M
fegrq^T^g^g : II 5* II q^rft II fcgrq^- 3rqpg&:- g: N
JHT: II fMSI^^^I^^H^MI^tf : TO*T H^ ?|«C ** t«Mfiqfii«fa II
62. After the words 'jihv&uifila 9 , and ^awguli'
there is the affix 3 in the sense of l what stays there \
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. III. 5 66. J imnti y7t
This debars ** (IV. 3.55)1 Thus f*tr$fNw, •!**** N
VfrwW N *% * q^lft II ^IFSRt-^ ( « )
63. After a word ending with ' varga ', the affix
is employed in the sense of • what occurs there f .
This debars n^w As «*«&¥(• Tnffal ■
•fa : o q«ikiiR«M i wwnRimmig *nfarenftqffoi?*m^ vc^ ro«fc i*«r.»
64* After a word ending in € varga \ but not
meaning a ' letter or word \ the affixes *n* and m are option*
ally employed, in the sense of 'who stays there*.
As *Tg*t*»* (by mQ, ICgfrtft* ., (by m), and <n^w<fy (by ») •
JPti^TfWb \4fo.or Vtfa* •
Of course, when the word means ' jut ' it takes one affix only le. ft;
as qfttffa rf: f a letter belonging to m class *.
65. The affix **? comes in the sense of 'what occurs
there', after 'kama* and 'lala**, the word denoting an ornament.
This debars n^ (IV. 3. 55). Thus qtftar 'an ear-ring 9 , <**rftCT »
Why do we say 'denoting an ornament, ? Observe qsoifo'what is in the
ear*, HH|*14 H
titter mi^iidwmm n
66. After the name of a subject of commentary, an
affix comes in the sense of 'its commentary', as well as, in the
sense of 'what occurs there*.
That by which a thing is explained is called cqroqPT 'commentary 9 . The
name of a thing explainable is called mmmnmn i H ■■ After such a name, being
in the 6th case in construction, the affix is added. The affix means < i mmn«l*t
as well as 9**?, the latter being read into the sfltra by virtue of ^ U
Thus yrf cqroqpf : - §nt «^r 'Saupa, a book on the explanation of case*
affixes*. So also W 5 Taihga-a Commentary on Verbal affixes' qtffr 'K4rta~a
Commentary on kpt affixes'. §pf &c. may also mean my Hf &c
22
Digitized by
Google
yyt ma*awift N [ Bk. IV. Ch. III. § 6&
Why do we say mnwq^HIH : 'after the name of the thing explainable?
The thing to be explained must be a Book, therefore, the affix will not apply
to the name of a city &c. For example, if a model be made to describe the
city of Pataliputra, such a model will not be named after Pataliputra by the
addition of affix. Thus ttqsftlHI is a modal giving a description of Pataliputra.
This will not be called P&taliputram.
The anuvfitti of *rc and mnwH runs simultaneosly in all the subsequ-
ent apav&da stitras, and hence we have read the anuvptti of m into this
jsAtra alsa ■ „
67. The affix ssr comes in the senses of 'staying* and
'a commentary', after a polysyllabic word having ud&tta on the
final, (the word being the name of a thing to be explained). .
This debars ir^ U Thus MKqmi8ui»* 'a commentary of the rules of
changes of *r and *r into q and «r* II iH f RfiWt <a commentary on («nw) udAtta
and anudatta (to)' h The radicals qsr>rer and ^noTO are acutely accented on
the final by the rule of a compound having accent on the final (VI. I. 169)
Why do we say WJ^T: •polysyllabic'? Observe fffrw.%yw &c. A word
of two syllables will take sq^(lV. 3. 72). So the counter example must be of
words of one syllable.
Why do we say ^having acute accent on the final? Observe qtQ*^
from siw ll This word has acute accent on the initial by the rule of Gati-
accent (VI. 2. 49)
5^r: 11 w&% qfrm **tti$m*&pw. snfirtft%^r *^iWH%a4teu *rera* **Rnt
68. The affix ssr comes, in the senses of Occurring',
._ and 'a commentary*, after the name of a work to be explained,
provided that such .work relates to a kratu or a yajna.
This debars *nj N Kratu : — mPHfeTifW 'a commentary on a work on
Aginshtoma sacrifices? qnftfo f r , ilM^fiw ll yajfia: — qi^m^ :, sireaffor. M /
This sfltra refers to words which are not aritodatta. The words Srija-
peya' and 'r&jasflya' are acute in the middle.
The words *5J and 115 mean generally the same thing L e. 'a sacrifice',
but the separate mention of q^r implies that the rule applies to yajflas other
than Soma-yajftas because the word 'kratu' is technically applied to Soma-,
sacrifices only. Thus q iveftq i frtP , fHlUffl<t »: It
Digitized by
Google
Bk.IV.Ch. III. S 7i ] ««#*f**ftl^- 773
The sfltra is in the plural to prevent the application of the affix to the
word-forms 'kratu* and 'yajfta* (I. I. 68).
69. The affix s*l comes after the name of an ex-
plainable work called after a Uishi, in the senses of 'occurring
therein* or 'a commantary thereon', when it refers to an Adhy-
aya only.
The word mfa is the name of Ira and those Rishis are only meant
whose names are in the Pravara list The word so formed means always
an Adhy&ya or Chapter of the work. The phrase cqrennraron is understood
in this sfitra, hence the word mfa means M a work the author of which is a
fcishi".
Thus wfegtn mimilW* Hfr^- qtfqfire&SHOT: M V4sishthika — a chapter
containing commentary on Vashishtha ". Vftftfifo: ' a chapter of com*
mentary on VMvimitra 9 .
Why do we say meaning ' chapter * ? Observe qiftrA %l% M
70. The affix OTC comes in the senses of 'occurring
therein 1 and 'a commentary thereon^after the words 'paurocfiUaT
and 'purociaaa*.
The verses on the purification &c of Puro£&$a 'a sacred cake', are
called* qVfnrro, the commentary on such pauro^&sa mantras will be called qftflT*
fira*:. Its feminine will be qfrtinfinfl (IV. I. 41). A book on Puro£&4a cake
is called JlTTTO; a commentary there on will be yteffirap f. gTTTTftre ft (IV.
1. 41). The * of the affix indicates that the feminine is formed by ^tv (IV.
1. 41). The commentary here refers to the 'mantras 9 or verses relating to
Puro£&<a, and not to the sacrifice.
71. The affixes *ra[ and zm come in the senses
of ' occurring therein* and ' a commentary thereon', after the
word Chhandas.
This debars &$ of the following sfitra. As CFTtq: or ot?TO: it
Digitized by
Google
i\
774 w«TPm**« [ Bk IV. Ch. HI. 5. 75.
72. The affix z^ comes in the senses of 'occurring
therein' and € a commentary thereon \ after a word of two
syllables, and a word ending in short 55, and the words * br«h-
mana', l rik\ 4 prathama\ • adhvara \ € purascharana \ * nam* f f
' akhyata* and ' n«makhy«ta f , being the names of explainable
works.
This debars sn^ and mjn 1. Dissyllabic :— ^fir^p, qT^pP II 2. End-
ing in «c :— *rr3sff9p, imrp: h So also nn&rfw-, «nf%v f jrroflrar-, «rwfro*
73. The affix zfl^ comes in the senses of 'occurring
therein'and'a commentary thereon' after the words Vigay ana' &c.
This debars ro, «■$ and 9 M *lpfaFn> qrya^FWPP II
The repetition of tr* in the sOtra, though the annuvptti of this affix
was coining from before, is for the sake of preventing the application of any
subsequent apav&da rule to the words in this list Thus qrcsfTO II
1 «k«l*H , 2 q^qpWPf, 3 ggffcR, 4 g^lS I , 5 tt«ilftfrfd, 6 sum, 7 34V*, 8
f%^K, 9 gqr^n^r , 10 f^m, 11 qreaflror, 12 *reft**r, 13 srjsfour, 14 ftur, 15 **mr. 16
TOT*, 17 OTPT, 18 w?^, 19 RgJ, 20 yrf^ , 21 p(ft% 22 ftrOT, 23 frm, 24 tf^tf*-
fMV26«UR. II
*f^p ii fr*r fflr i^rttomhnnr iwiafwH^ nmfafttf irai* *nrfir 11
74. An affix (IV. 1. 83 &c) comes after a word
being in 5th case in construction, in the sense of * what has
come thence \
Thus Htrnnrer: - &*rt • what has come from Srughna \ iflyT:, trfff*: I
^IRWI^W. II VS^ II <f$lft II 3^-<ai*K*i£lW II
75. After a word denoting sources of revenue,
there is the affix 5*? in the sense of * come thence \
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. III. 5 78] w«n«m-»wii 775
The word «n* means what is the share appropriated by the lord.
The source of «n* is called irt^mr M
This debars ir^ and 9 « Thus O^mfft^ : ■ what is derived from
custom house*, untffrgy * revenue derived from mines \
The plural in the sfttra prevents Svarupavidhi (1. 1. 68).
^fi«*ifoyfl snj 11 *$ 11 g(f^rerf^r.-«nc n
76. The affix «n^ comes in the sense of ' thence,
come ', after the words gRro &c.
This debar* v^ II Thus qrrfc^ •excise-revenue*. «pfa H
The repetition of «n$ serves the same purpose as in IV. 3. 73, qpre
*iNHi*i«t w As iftww *
1 tf*m> 2 ffifr, S wFUft, 4 9?OTt 5 wqm. 6 ifhf f 7 *ft f 8 y*, 9 ^. II
ftflnHPl^^wl 1^11 ** II q^Tfa R ft^-^T-^l^PT.-35r I
n?r wnr fHRiftRp^% 11
77. The affix 5^ comes, in the sense of ' thence
come/ after a word denoting a person connected through the
relationship of learning or family origin.
Persons related (sambandha) through learning (such as teacher and
pupil), or through blood (yoni, e. g. father and son) are called fiwtft«ua**»Ml* •
Words denoting such persons take the affix <ng. This debars wr* and 9. Thus
Wl^lfll^MiHHL-silSI^I^^HL 'knowledge derived from a spiritual teacher.' ^PTO%
»U*ll4'41> it So also qtftH*?** as TTflRyg : ' wealth derived from a maternal
grand-father/ fwr*9T, TPpW- H
78. The affix ssr comes in the sense of ' come
thence/ after a word ending in short ^f, and denoting a person
related through learning or blood.
This debars £» n Thus jiymw firyqpT 'derived from Hotp/
^TfCTL U So also of • blood/ as :— *rg3Pt, CTfCTI, m$m*
The ^ in ^Q is for the sake of facility of pronunciation, there being
no such word ending in long q; II .
Digitized by
Google
~ %-— . — ._•
77* ws itm «^ M t Bk. IV. Ch. Ill § St.
When the words do not denote relationship through learning or blood,
this affix is not employed. As, OTfrPlM
ffin ii ft$*r**r^ ****** **ra «*<*iHJ<**** inr *n*nj tflmRjiPw^ m
79. The affix TF^as well as 35J comes, in the sense
of 'come thence/ after the word c pitri. f
Thus ftgrnnr =$J* or i?m(VII. 4. 27. and VI. 4. 148) • paternal— i.e.
wealth inherited from father/
'I^Kj^di 11 to 11 q^rft 11 ^torrac-aq^ 11
fft: 11 *H<w<inn^iiemraMR^i^qj<nnfti^4^i^ ipt «n*nr fOmferfN^ft 11
80. After a word ending with a patronymic affix,
the rule of affix in the sense of ' thence come/ is like that
relating to the affix denoting ' its mark/
The word *t& in the sfltra does not mean the technical Gotra of
Grammar, but a descendant-denoting affix in general The affixes denoting
erg are taught in IV. 3. 126 and 127. The affix jp^of IV. 3. 126 which comes
after Gotra words, in the sense of * this is his/ is refered to in this sAtra, not
merely the affix sn* of IV. 3. 127, denoting, 'thisjs his mark/
Thus sWiqH l Hfc : =»^qrprer: 'the mark belonging to the descendants
of Upagu/ So also OTTTTOT:, 4l4iq<wi «HUW g : II The same words will also
denote ' come there from ' as btttWS BTPHPir- ^rnr^iH, ^RH^^L irerarcsp*,
■ NHWWI . (formed byjw IV. 3. 126). „
Similarly ^v, irnfc, *TCT formed by sr^of IV. 3. 127 mean not only
f tiie mark belonging to the Vaidas, the G^rgyas, the DAkshis/ but also that
which comes from the Vaidas &c The word ^ has the force of • complete
similarity/ as in *&%** 1***^ (IV. 2. 34), nc%^f WW ' IV. 2. 46).
7 |gJT3^pftS^RTOpn «qp II *\ II M^lA II f^ -^^y ^:, <M^d<4H4 ! -
ffir: 11 %y*r Hg«3w*Muimf g^E imfit *reft inr srnm jfinRqpqs^ u
81. The affix ^&t denotes that which from some-
thing has originated, when it is added to a word denoting
'cause/ or to the name of a man viewed as a cause.
The word 13*3 is used meaning 'men as causes/ %<j means cause or
Instrument. Thus HHrcnur-SNTCTO* or tpfcft by 9 of IV. 2. 138 meaning
' what proceeds from a like cause.' So also Rmhv^HL or FT^pfNWL II So of men
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. III. 5 83. ) . *wil% 11 777
also fn* ! **** or \fT^(I V. 1. 83) • what originates with f^fT**, *3T»T*W*or
The word tgr-p***: is in the plural in the sOtra, indicating that sva-
rupavidhi (I. I. 68).does not apply here.
In denoting fj, there is employed the Instrumental case as taught in
II. 3. 23 : and according to the jAlpaka in the present s&tra, the Ablative
case may also be employed in denoting a)g, n Or the use of the ablative
case in the sense of %J. may be explained by II. 3. 25.
jft^ *r 11 <* 11 <j*rfa 11 ira^-qr u
82. After a word denoting a cause or a man
viewed as a cause, there is the affix 'mayat' in the sense of
1 come theiice \
Thus «****, ftwm*, >*?*pr*w. ^^ifro^ 11
The r of Hur indicates that the feminine of these words are formed by
jft% (IV. 1. 15), as, CRHift II The separation of this sfttra from the last is for
the sake of preventing the application of the rule of mutual correspondence (l.j.
10) which would have been the case had the rule stood as fjpg^H&ssqTO* !
*WW*t 11
snreftr 11*311 <rpft 11 snraftii
jfir- ii hit f^i 4^41^HM\<c^i4,Mir^sr^ia<^^iwiaRHHfiM^ ynftfW to$t *rcft«
83. After a Nominal-stem which is in the 5th.
case in construction, an affix (one of those already taught)
comes in the sense of l what appears for the first time*.
The word 39: is undersood in the sfitra. The word vraft means
what manifests itself, or appears for the first time. Thus fgTOT: sr^ 9 ) 1 ^
" The Haimavatt", a name of the Ganges, meaning * which manifests itself for
the first time or appears in the Snowy Range, its source being unknown 9 . So
also *T*ft " The D&radi " i. e. the Indus appearing for the first time in Dar-
d is tan. The word sprofit has not the sense of TOftTi because that is included
in ipr ^im : ; it therefore means rora%, w*mn. ¥W*%, the source or origin be-
ing unknown. j
fil5J*im : II *i II ^%[fk n f^ast**: ll
Digitized by
Google
\
778 wftftmwffi m [Bk. IV. Ch. III. I 86
>i ' ■ ■ 1 1 ■ ■ ■ ; ■
84. The affix *r comes, in the sense of 'what ma-
nifests itself there', after the words l vidftra\
This debars *T^M. Thus faJJCfil ipTCfa' -^Jjfc 'a kind of gem found at
Vid&ra'. The gem as a matter of fact is not found at Vid&ra, but In a moun-
tain called *n**ra N VidGra is the city where the rough stone is worked upon.
In other words, it may be said that the affix is really added to ^m, when
the latter word is replaced by frgc • such substitute being only shown in the
s&tra, the appropriate sthlni (vAlav&ya) being left to inference. Or the word
VidOra may denote both the city as well as a mountain. If it be said that
there is no mountain known as Vidflra, then we say that the Grammarians call
VaiavAya by the name of Vidftra, as the merchants call Benares by the name
of JitvarL
ffH: 11 crnRr ft* t UiqHui\M^flfr«fwfaM«i wififgq mm »refir 3rafr «rggf3r qrerq
85. An affix (IV. 1. 83 &c) comes after a word,
being in the 2nd case in construction, in the sense of 'what
goes thereto', provided that, that which goes, is a road or a
messenger.
Thus 3MH*iV5l3-#r^: * a road or a messenger that goes to Srughna.*
So also HHJC* II The road may either lead to Srughna, or being in Srughna,
be used for going.
Why do we say sfajHST: u meaning a road or a messenger w . Observe
«rp «r«5f% OT*fc ' be goes to Srughna for his own sake 9 .
Bi ftPjWhinfi i arc* 11 ^ 11 <iTrft » 3^ -ft**wft- grc* 11
86. An affix comes, after a word in the 2nd case
in construction, in the sense of ' a door which looks towards
that'. __
rhus &JJ: 'a gate which looks towards Srughna \ — as a gate of
K4nyakubja. So also RTgc*, tffg** A
Objection. The sfttra would have stood better as ^pHPiM^H^ *rfc for
by using *4piPn*l*ific. you make the word fit as if it was a being endowed
with sense.
Ans. This objection may •be answerd by saying that the gate is the
well-known instrument ( «ET* ) to the action of mfnPiMiHm ; and an instrument
may be used as an agent to a verb : as *nwtfaf>dfr| • the sword cuts nicely/
Digitized by
Google
Bk.IV. Ch. III. 5.98) 1%«i* « 779
Why do we say frc* " when it is a gate"? Observe ^VHptftubP ift
^W: ' a person faces towards Srughna*.
w •wH 11
qift«Mt 11 u*nwift*mt* u«whi ijwi n
87. An affix comes after a word in the 2nd case in
construction, in the sense of ' made in relation to any subject/
when the thing made is a * book/
The word trf^m means f aiming at * ' alluding to, referring to.* Thus
S P*gHfl$m ysfaw -qfprr* 'Saubhadra or a book relating to the history of
SubhadriL* So also «ftftft**, uninr, ftrcrenfrN^ tt
Why do we say n^r • when meaning a book *? Observe, j pTTPrffrfftqqgy
mrrc * a palace built in memory of Subhadra'; where there is no affix;
Vdrt : — The affix is elided diversely when the book !s a stoiy. Thus
qmilMHft yn qprf ss ggTffiPET-*rcHrc*fT u Vasavadatta, a story relating to
Vasavadatta." H*HPH r, ibtit U Sometimes the elision does not take place, • as
•nmft 11
jfln 11 Ri5j*^iR*$t ft*fl*uqH$ N»g: srorcr *mfir *rft$** «% n^r 11 •rnrwif: 11
^if^Wtll I%^4l<i<lltat vfir^f: u
88. The affix u comes in the sense of 'a book made
relating to a subject*, after the following words in the 2nd case
in construction, viz ' sisukranda,' ' yamasabha/ the Dvandva-
compounds, and the words 'indra-janana' &<*•
The word irl(IV. 3. 85) and srfcfRq $% ** should be read into the
sfltra. This debars vr^ll Thus ftr$*;*^fa: 'a book treating of the crying of
. infants.' aprcr*: • a book relating to the court of Yama\ A Dvandva-Compound:
as, srftrerrerfor, ^rorahffot ^Miuu*Wlw*nRr*» ^rwrthWL w
There is no list of fgyvnnft words. They are akritiga?a, and must be
determined by usage. Thus reHPpftqft , HtJHMrmftWL&c.
Vart: — Prohibition should be stated in Jhe case of the Dvanda-Com pounds
>*rg* &c. As Xmpp% * the book of the wars of the Gods and Demons. 9 wfcrc^
23
Digitized by
Google
\
7*> <ns«M5»r: H Bk. IV. Ch. III. §. 91. ]
The words ftr$*«? and *Tg* might have been included in the inchoate
class |Hr«*Hlft M The separate enumeration of these words in the sfttra, is
merely for the sake of amplification.
gffr iii *r fflr UMHwwUutni qwfa TOftfttf mam *nRr «w*4Hiqi3 fiwufrqi
89. After a word in the 1st case in construction,
an affix comes in the sense of ' this is his dwelling place 9
The word tf shows that the word to which the affix is to be added is
in the nominative case. «rei f his' shows that the meaning of the affix »
that of a genitive case. ft*ra% shows that the first word in construction
must signify a dwelling place, firor means "a country L e. where k person lives
(nivasanti asmin) "
5*Tt Erems*q -4M: ' a present dweller of Srughna \ Hen*, trfjj*: &c
ff% 5 11 *TiHi«w 1 ^r %ftt wuuntuwlfik TO*Sf iwiftfw R^lr *nifif icnnn^R^'iPc-
90. After a word in the 1st case in construction,
an affix comes in the sense of ' this is his mother-land \
The difference between ftqro and *rf*r^f: is this. Where a person
lives himself for the present, that is his ftTCT or dwelling-place. Where his
ancestors ( grfinpTp ) have lived, that is his sTPrspr " native country, home or
ancestral abode 9 . Thus £fr*P 'a person whose ancestral home is in Srughna *.
HPgOt KIf%Q II The separation of this sfltra from the last is for the sake of
the subsequent s&tra, in which the anuvptti of ' abhijana ' only runs.
tfr. 11 SrtsrPn** ffiir **% 1 «ng^nftft^ ifit mv% ^ryjf, <rf*ffa nfeRiftftmms, 1
91. The affix 9 comes after a word denoting
mountain, in the sense of ' this is his mother-land \ when it is
a person who lives by arms.
The word m^Tsfffl means a person who earns his livelihood by arms.
The phrase sts*mf5rapf: is to be read into the sfltra. Thus s^iffa: tootsPHR
ipn«n^r=Af^-wrpftir: 'the mercenary soldiers whose ancestral abode is
the Hfidgola mountain*. So also *F»pffreffan y ctffrrfirfap
Why do we say srr3*nftfira: ? Observe nmfar OT8F>m u the Brahmanas
whose native place is Rikshoda mountains". Why do we say 'mountains'?
Observe. qtalWM *TF 5*l*ftflrt* M
Digitized by
Google
t Bk. IV. Ch. 111. 5. 94. <lm i Pm- «c • 7**
•ftr? n ^Pt^t ffcwnft**: *iflroft%*ft **: writ *i(Q iHwAw iftwRtPw* i ■*•
92. The affix wr comes in the sense of ' this is his
native-land \ after the words 3l$TO &c.
This debars «nj &c Thus mfitw , arid*** &c
1 *fi*m, 2 tr&ta 3 oi^ta, 4 mw; 9 5 ipt, (kc\ 6 cv* 7 mpor* 8 *hc .
wstVn
93. The affixes «rn and u*C come respectively,
after the words ' Sindhu ' &c and ' Takshasila ' &c in the sense
of ' this is his native-land \
ThusVn*, *r**:it
Many of the words occurring in Sindhu-class, are found in Kachchh-
&di class (IV. 2. 133) also. Those words would have taken wp; by sfttra IV.
2.133. The present sfttra prevents the affixing of 3* (IV. 2. 134) to those
words under circumstances mentioned in sfttra IV. 2. 134, when the further
significance of iTfwCT- is added to them.
So also intlfip*, *retarcw : &c
1 f&$, 2 ^f, 3 ifynfc 4 **jtm, 5 ^ 6 *?*&*, 7 tf^rc, a ftfepw, 9 im
< *OT ), 10 *t^( TO ), H *TT*m ( «Tft^RT ), 12 JPJ*. IS RwT. II
liroftiHr, 2^h^^,3V^(«Kt^ (****).
7 fanr* (fa^ms), 8 «$frw, 9 ft**, io cttto (fFTOW), n <rt* # , 12 «rar* 9
13 ^k, 14 ^Tt 15 OTTO^T
\ftti w jwnf^Hj^g^: fErsWt iim*Ui4 ^rwt ^ i^r iy*[ **? ^ fftw wrar •uPti ifr-
94. After the words 33ft, girei3*> *riHr, and $^m<,
come respectively the affixes y^ f uor, 5^, and *p$ in the sense
of * this is his native land \
This debars it; II Thus ffrfat, WHmfi*:, *roft: and «ta*T$ 11
Digitized by
Google
\
78* . «fc** *tt*-3* ii [ Bk. IV. Ch III. J. 98.
95. An affix (IV. 1. 83) comes after a word in
the first case in construction, in the sense of ' this is his object
of veneration or love \
^ The word *frK in the sfltra means • serving V worshipping' or € loving '.
Thus qjjt ^f^^-^: 'a person who is loyal to Srughna'. So also
The anuvptti of the word stPt^R: ceases. The word «: and *roi
should be read into the sQtra.
^fa^K%*l4>l<*l<d<M M II V^lft II ^f^yilci , BT^T-^FT^JraC, ^^»
. 96. After a word denoting a thing not having
consciousness, but not being the name of a country or time,
the affix hw is employed, in the sense of * this is his object of
devotion or love \
This debars *th; and iy also. Thus m^l^fihWl - snffi^: € a person
who loves cakes 9 . .tll*$ftt<&, TOfNh M —
Why do we say • not having consciousness ' ? Observe \^^ 11 Why
do we say ' not being the name of a country ' ? Observe 4ttjj- ll Why do we
say € not denoting timef ? Observe \*%: € who loves Summer'.
IU»<Utl<*Mj l V» II q^TI^ II U^KUmU S^ II
^ftr 11 H^KiMy^K,^ if&pit *r*fif *ttw Hp?KftSifrR^ft^ii 1 «rtrt^: 11
97. The affix 33$ comes in the sense of ' this is his
object of veneration 1 , after the word srgrera «
This debars Br^H As fagmnrar* ' who loves or serves the Mah&r&ja \
The difference between this v?^ and the z% of the last aphorism, is in accent
only. __
*n^n#rnptf 5^ 11 \e 11 q^rfa 11 ^i^^i-^^HiyiiH , 5^ 11
fftr: 11 qi^i^nwiw^irarar mft mm MfHiRwrafwfa^ 1 grftroren : 11 (
98. The affix 3^ comes in the sense of c this is his
object of veneration/ after the words * Vasudeva* and Arjuna. '
This debars ^ and *rw II Thus *TjfT^, *H««W tl
Q. The word *njfa being the name of a Kshatriya would have taken
3Rby the next sQtra, and there is no difference here between jn and **j f why
then include the word *rq$? in this sfttra?
Digitized by
Google
Bic IV. Of. III. §. ioo ] Ste** m%-5H" 783.
A. The word JTJf* here is the name of God (in which all dwell TOfa
*rftf^)and not the designation of a Kshatriya.
By the general rule of compounds (II. 2. 34) a word of fewer vowels
is placed first, and so Arjuna ought to have been placed first The not doing
so in this sOtra indicates (jfl&paka) the existence of this rule 'that a word
denoting an object of reverence is placed first*
gsM __
w i n%rcr*« 11
99 The affix incomes diversely, in the sense of
'this is his object of veneration/ after a word denoting Gotra or
a Kshatriya.
This debars *m and jy. Thus: ^^pnra * who loves or serves &c
Gluchuk&yani.' So also •SWn^ff:, ^TT^RP ll Kshatriyas : m^enr-i
The word inw in the sfltr? indicates that the words should be the
names of well-known cr. famous Kshatriyas, and not of any body who is a
Kshatriya by profession.
The word wjps shows the non-universality of this rule. Thus <rrfapft
The word «ftx does not mean here the Grammatical Gotra, but a
word formed by a patronymic affix in general.
100. Of words denoting Princes (lit. who are
lords of janapada) the base and affix meaning 'this is his object
of veneration'are the same, in every respect, like those of a word
denoting kingdom, provided that, the Prince-denoting words
have,inthe plural, the same form,as the kingdom-denoting words.
The words of this sfltra require a detailed analysis. yrrffrfPt gen.
plural of *HMfH meaning 'lord of an inhabited country' L e. Khsatriy&-
Princes, Vgro% * in the plural \ yny i OTFT TOFTT € the same form as the jana-
pada denoting word \ ^pttoI ere* 'every thing is like jana-pada '. In other
words, ' after those bases denoting Kshatriya Princes which in the plural have
Digitized by
Google
7*4 %irtNtM [Bk.IV.Ch.III. $. toi
the same forms as the names of the countries, the affix in the sense of veneration
will be the same as will come after a janapada word 9 Now the affixes denot-
ing *fo as regards ***f words are given in S&tras IV. 2. 124 &c and those
affixes will apply here. Thus irjfT VTTfr *fi*TOI-*njF*?: formed by jnof SOtra
IV. 2/125, meaning l who love^the country of Aiig&s ' Similarly qTJRPy &snt:
Similarly «Tfr: ^Prt' >rf^^-BTTJf^r: formed by the same affix JH,
with this difference of meaning ' who loves the Kshatriyas called Afigas'. So
Why do we say 'of Kshatriya Princes'; (janapadinam). Observe,
4^TTBT VT8PIT */*OTW-qr^TOr: M Here the general affix *r\is employed.
The word erf is used in the sfitra to show that not only the affixes are
the same, but the bases to which the affixes are added will be the same. In
the plural, the Kshatriya and the Janapada bases have the same form, but
in the singular and dual, the forms of Kshatrya-bases are different Thus
qgmmwi ^sing. «rnr» (IV. 1. 170) dual, mit pi. «TffT The form Kff. denotes both
' the Kings or Kshatriyas of Madras ' as well as ' the country called Madras '•
Thus*nff HfaPTCH-'fJW H So also in the singular and dual, Hff: will be the
base to which the affix will be added. Thus mit Tfoftro mil It HfaTCCT
-«mr: 11 Similarly *nri (from wflr IV. i.* 171), as, *ntf *r ifalf q fn4f IT W-
Why do we say ^raftf OTR TOFTO 'the word having the same sound
as the janapada word ' ? Thus iT2T»*r ^Tflf:, <ffc*T CP*r S *fare*-<fMfc|: M
Here Paurava and Anushafi^a have not the same sound.
The word *J*^% is used in the sfitra, to indicate, that, though the HHPf
TOCTI or * the similarity of word-form', occurs in the plural number only, yet
this atideSa rule applies to the same words in the singular and dual also. For
in the plural, the form will be same, because there the Tadraja affix is elided ;
but in the singular and dual, the Tadraja affix is not elided, and therefore, the
word denoting a principality and the word denoting a prince will not have
the same form ; but this rule applies there also. As *IJF or qrft *ftM.W
jRp 11 ?Rf% 5*fi^iy**wfflH"diPi«jf?HHif mnftfW nwit n*fil it
101. After a word in the 3rd case in construction,
an affix (IV. 1. 83 &c). comes, in the sense of 'enounced by
him\
The word ifa* means H^VTi^ 'preeminently spoken 9 . It should be
distinguished from the word f>*r meaning 'done or made'. For the sense of fwt
Digitized by
Google
£n IV. Ch. I it. § 10* ] %ii *n*-«* it 7*5
has been already taught in the sfitra V*t unt (IV. 3. 16). Thus «T^PT wr *nj*W
$PRT-«!Tg$|ftr. » SlfaHUS, 'the system of grammar enounced by Pacini*
•nfircnw, WIf*WL It
Works like Chhandas which were made (c$r) by nobody, but which
were promulgated (sfaft) from time of time by inspired commentators, may
be quoted as examples of the application of this sfitra. Or it may apply to
the case of a book whose author is another, but whose promulgator or expoun-
der is another. In short, speaking roughly, tifcg is a 'revelation 9 , and pf: is a
'composition 9 , one a revealer or prophet, the other an author. •
According to some, this s&tra is almost a superfluity. They argue
thus: The word ifNJ is formed by adding 9 to ff and means to lecture 9 to
teach 9 , and also the 'means of such teaching &c\ In the fit st sense of 'lectur-
ing or teaching 9 , the affix is not- found. For in every village there are persons
who teach or lecture upon Katha, Kal&pa &c For example JjTjpbl may be such
a lecturer, but we do not say jr^r^ xfNt cr^*-^Wf^ll Moreover, where
we find this affix employed, it is with regard to Books, for which the rule y%
TO* is sufficient If it be said that it should be taught for the Chhandas : that
is also unnecessary, as the Vedas are not far but eternal, the agent only remem-
bers them. If it be said, it refers to the sense of the Vedas, the same objection
applies as to the first But the letter of the Veda is not eternal, it is the sense
that is eternal. Therefore the Rishis who revealed, for the first time, at the
beginning of a Kalpa, the sense of the Veda, in appropriate language will
be called- its promulgators/ and the works so revealed will be named after
such Rishis, as qffrqpi, grmrwi and tfmPl II This sutra, however, is confined
to those cases where the author of the book is one person and its promulgator
is another : as irgd ffta II
*if%*R*ii Jterenffoi M*^fl«wwu <* nf|M«ft*«Ti 11
102. The affix crat comes in the sense of 'enoun-
ced by him', after the words 4 tittiri , > 'varatantu', 'khanciika 9 ,
and 'ukha\
Thus trftrffap 'those who learn (IV. 2. 64) the Veda enounced by
Tittiri 9 . frererfan , gnfarefofr , ifNNft n
According to KAaikA this is confined to the Chhandas only. There*
fore it will not apply to secular flokas, as (W*fft«iT frtt*5fcn The word
Chhandas is drawn from sOtra IV. 3. 106. and ftfCTOrf from IV 2 66.
Digitized by
Google
1^
\
78$ %**n*<*iftii [Bk.IV.Ch.IIL § 104
*iVJMiflfci*i^i3fly4l fafo n \o\ h q^rft n yi^PT ^^^i^ i H ,
www 11
103. The affix fapr comes in the sense of 'enounc-
ed by him*, after the words ' KtUyapa ' and ' Kausika ' when
denoting Vedic Seers.
This debars &. The or of f&rfa is for the sake of Vf iddhi (useful in the
subsequent sfitra). This is confined, like the last, to the Vedic works. Thus
«KTWPr- 'those who study (IV. 2. 64) the Kalpa enounced by K&6yapa',
qbraraft: II Why do we say a Vedic Sages " ? Observe ftrtNft* titTOTOlTO
JtoG-OTCTfoul M a work enounced by a modern K&syapa,— one belonging to
the Gotra KAiyapa : not a Rishi \
Pdt4lfew4? f ^r (fiW%) N
wfa: II 4i<4|ilHI4lRl4f q*i"ii<tnint 4lftwi *J^l IPTOT: TO^rai*% faPP ITO^f W^ftf %-
«r ift^ftwKiftHPw^ 1 •rtrrof - - 11
Kdrika ^Rfflsi n*mft|*f*$*|pwjjj* I ^
mnfrnnh* nref M*w*»»mi«fr I
VUHI*W *?l*^H ^IP •M«h«4|fW|: I
104. After words denoting the pupils of 'Kalftptf
and * Vaisamp&yana/ the affiix f&n% is employed in the sense
of * enounced by him.*
This debars an! and & ■■ There are four words which express pupils
of KalApA: as, jftg, ot#, $*&*, OTV U There are nine words expressing
pupils of Vaisamp&yana : as, «?Rfar» TOJf, SFH*, qjTP*, *TrtF&f; tu w v*> VUHMW,
•Wi Sisrft 11
Thus srftffftpr. 'those~who study (IV. 2. 64) the works enounced by
Haridru.'fn5fppr: t ftreffo : and u*r«ft takes flhinuk IV. 3. 109 II trm^Tf:, qn*t|*: t
«frif*Rs» m**lWtoi *WflW:t troftnt** gqmnifiPT : ll The affix is elided after ***
(IV. 3. 107), and is replaced by «T5 (IV. 3. 108) after *&t1t ti
The pupils must be direct ones, and not pupil of pupils. For had
that been the meaning, Kal&pt being a pupil of Vaisamp&yana, the words
• pupils of VaisampAyana • would have included the • pupils of Kal&pt.' But
that is not so, the word Kalapt being separately mentioned in the sfttra. So
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. HI. S io6. ] %i| iJht-WH « 7*r
also Katha is a pupil of Vailamp&ya^a, and Kh&£ftyana is a pupn of Katha
.and had the sAtra applied to pupil's pupil also, then the affix ftft would have
applied to orrcnpt alsa But that is not the case, Kh4£&yana being mentioned,
in Saunak&di class. (IV. 3. 106).
The word nw means ^liHUH :, hence nTOT- means pupils of ^hmi^: H
, (fftifti) n
^Hn 11 ummJftfrtuflq m gfljiumifailft WFi: q*n* **flr **5ft* ^^"i^^wih
105. The affix fuff^r comes in the sense of ' enounc-
ed by him/ aflcr a word in the 3rd case in construction, when
it denotes a Brahmana or a Kalpa-work enounced by ancient
sages..
This sfltra further gives the sense of the affix, ypc means • Ancient *
Sages. 1 equivalent to^ropr. Of Br^hma^a literature f thc examples are»OT«nqfcr*
q%cm^: II Kalpa work : as^^rFT* BTCFTOnft H
Why do we say ^wnfrgfig 'announced by ancient sages. 9 ? Observe
q i ai*-*l i q WTfPRPf, •nwr «FT: M (VI. 4. IS") Yajflavalkya &c being sages of
modern times. The tf^firTO affi x (IV. 2. 66) will not also apply to these, be±
cause the word OT3PT in IV. 2. 66 is restricted to JcpnjfaR of the present sQtnu "
jf*n 11 Vim* f^nprrf^r faFi: srepjt **fir%* mi*hJ*j^h fwP*4*l w^^P^n • ui^
tmv n '
106. The affix ftft comes in the sense of ' enounc-
ed b/him\ after the words gfan s &c 9 in denoting Chhandas. *
This debars <y and *r* II Thus <N«w>H ffrefrnfonl -sfrffaT- 'who study
(IV. 2. 64) the Chhandas enounced by Saunaka.'. OTRRfift: &c
Why do we say f in denoting Chhandas ? Observe WTOiNr fim ' the
orthography of Saunaka.'
The word ^vi* occurs in this list This must always be taken as a
compound for affixing this affix. After the single word qpr the affix is elided
(IV. 3. 107). Thus g>TOT*T»qf liUa'nftfl - frl*mfl*t ; H
7 w«f (**«0, 8 ssywf, 9^fo 10 reyre , 11 Ug* u «, 12 ***!!*, 13 ^m (w«)
14fr** 9 15 ^r*, 16 y^WTO (5^W),17«T^ttW (WW), 18wjf^ t 19c«5f,
80 Wwr*. 21 n^J^irc.
Digitized by VjOOQLC
?8* nwiWH^n [ Bk. IV. Ch. III. § 109
r 107. The affix denoting 'enounced by him' is
elided, by luk-substitution, after the words Katfia and Charaka.
The word *j* would have taken foiRr as it is a ^ftPtTOTT^TCfl word :
and *ft3i would have taken the affix u^ll Both are elided. Thus *j*r: * who
"study the Chhandas enounced by Kafha 9 . *TOip &c
The word 'Chhandas 9 qualifies this sdtra. Observe CT?T: *nt3*fc
***T:ll
f^rs 11 ?ir^rft to*tv* ro*t *T^%**FFfa^wft'Tfa*it i ^HWi^iiliequft^iMqit!
*rf%^ii5TF<raf*3ft Mflgj^ i R«fta^fi^ift$ufH^^
108. The affix *Hff conies in the sense of ' enounc-
ed by him '/after the word Kal&pt.
This debars faPc of IV. 3. 104. Thus q^TTC ' who study the work
enounced by Kalapf \
The word gjrTrm is thus formed : — *farfat+*r*M Here comes in force
SAtra VI. 4. 144 which declares that %% of 5*3Tft^ should be elided before the
taddhita affix. This elision is, however, debarred by sfltra VI. 4. 164 which
declares that words ending in the affix f^ retain their form when *T\ not
denoting a progeny follows. Therefore ^jPf* would have retained its %% but
for this V^rtika.
V&&rt:—Th& fk portion of the following words is elided when a
Taddhita follows ;— qfl»Mlli< , <f Uqff^ frdlfH * 3*Uf*H, tlfilft*, *U*W*, *IJf-
f^,I«nf<^.2fil3l^ SfrUWk Sfq^M Thus fa being elided, we
have q^rff: M
W^fciH) f^3^ll \oi* R M^lPl II *i*lfeH:-fe«J«^ n
*f*V II ^TftRpi^TT ft^HWTO **fiC TR Ul^fild(W< foW I *^W4^^|Ri«||uirufti
109. The affix i£«p5 comes in the sense of 'enounc-
ed by him \ after the word 4 Chhagalin \
The word snfo^ being a word denoting the pupil of q^Jnfr would have
taken faft (IV. 3. 104). This debars that Thus OTTOTOf: * who study the
Chhandas enounced by ChhagalT.
Digitized by
Google
Bk.IV.Ch. III. 5 in] >W*M T*9
mmi4foi<Aifomi fir^fg^pfh I \\o I qnft n ^rcro^-ftRnfe-
•Ft* n faPrftsrywir, h ftj^ t ^nnrtfiaroft^t faPir* vtniit *nftr %f iflFift^sft**
110. The affix firw comes in the sense of 'enounc-
ed by him \ after the words P&rfoarya and Silalin, the works
enounced being Bhikshu-Sfttra and Nafa-Stttra respectively.
The affix fbiFc is to be read into the sOtra and not ftjf ll The Ptjt^
and hz%% are works treating of the duties of ft$li * religious mendicants 9 and
nr. • jugglers, dancers \
Thus qrorcri+fafa-qTOW+faFr (VI.4. i52;-<mrofH 'the treatise,
of PArAsarya on the duties of Bhikshus*. Similarly 3taift^ U These words,
of course, have the additional sense of *he who studies the works so enounced
by PArAsarya and SailAlin '. See IV. 2. 66. As <uiltlR<H) fw* : , 5)**lft«ft «f*T* ll
According to some, it always expresses this relation (frffTOTT IV. 2. 66) and
never a sffti alone. These are treated metaphorically as Chhandas.
Why do we say 4 denoting Bhikshu and Na(a SAtras'? Observe
jfH: m Pryfgywrft^w 1 *h*u*ii mvmi^iPiRs to* n*fir 1 *nfrrcrT: 11
111. The affix ffqr comes, in the sense of 'enounc-
ed by him 1 , the thing enounced being Bhikshu Sfttra and
Nata-Sfttra, after the words ' Karmanda 9 and ' Krisfova \
Thus grif*f3r fro*, € the mendicants who study the Bhikshu-sfltra
of Karmandin\ ^OTftWI TO 'the actors who study the Nata Stttra of KpfiAivin/
Otherwise ssrfc*^ and ^TORTO « See IV. 2. 66.
jf*r. 11 %%fir f^rarcpwfahR Pi 3w fwn «f «imftfW in^ft *rcfif *
112. An affiix (IV. 1. 83 &c) comes after a word
in the third case in construction, in the sense of * in the same
direction with that/
The word ^rf^r means 3** far i. e. a common direction. Thus
^T*^iprt1^ m ^Pl*ft^" a lightening, literally that which is in the same
direction as the hill called the SudAman." So Vrofh ^F^tf, ^&i$t H
The repetition of **, though it could have been supplied by anuvpttf
from IV. 3. ioi, is for the sake of indicating that the anuvptti of the ****
v
\
Digitized by
Google
\
790 v**«tii [ Bk IV Of. III. §. n&
which regulated all the preceding ten sfltras, does not extend to this aphorism,
and therefore the tffTOff of IV, 2. 66 which was applied in those sOtras does
not apply here.
113. The affix 3T§ comes in the sense of 'in the
same direction with that/
This ordains another affix in addition to the previously taught «m &c
V &c. The words formed by this affix are Indeclinables (I. 1. 37). Thus $top
•in the same direction as Himavat' tftggtttr:, ^nm: II
jfrf: II 3*s SI«Sra?I mO$l H^Rf *l<hKI"fft|tl t %^*RPlWIHfW< firair H
114. The affix ^ as well as the affix ^ftr comes in
the sense of l in the same direction with that/ after the
word srt^ I >
Thus 3TOT ipiift^TOH or 3*33: 11 The m§ is read into the s&tra by
force of the word *c tt
115. After a word in 3rd case in construction, an
affix is employed in the sense of * discovered by him \
Knowledge acquired by oneself without being taught is called WiWH,
i. e. an intuition or self taught knowledge. Thus mpJiftHm^M «'*ifa*(l«H k iH*hlwA
WRfT* ' the law of Grammar discovered by P&$ini\ So also ^WfccMHL ?I^nw^
*nfa*p*n l^rr^ll Compare II. 4. 21. The Pacini's Grammar is called
9TOTH* as it does not define zzm or tenses; JJVNM1 is the name of the sciences of
wealth (znftmaiuii ifW bht* f^^%) H The word Duskarana is the name of a
Grammar, so-called because of the technical term 3$ occurring in it Some
say it means <frimuy : II ,
s*r **§ 11 \\\ 11 q?nw 11 ^r-fF5ir n
116. An affix comes after a word in the 3rd case
in construction, in the sense of ' made \ the thing made being
' a book \
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. hi. 5 119 ] ' »nfr*grif— »h*m 79**
Thus TOftrar tWT-mwm v^TO 'the verses composed by Vara-
ruchi \ So also \4mflr \w-* ^jrciit *nr., *Tgj*: 11
Why do we say *a book ' ? Observe tr*T$9 : TOOTH ' the palace made *
by Taksha \
That which one originates is called $9: and is therefore an 'art 9 , while
knowledge of laws &c that already exist, but are discovered for the first time
by some one, is called vqjfnt II
117. An affix comes after a word in the 3rd case .
in construction, in the sense of 'made by him', when the whole
word is a Name.
ThusirRnnft:*^^-Hri%^LWi^^» *TTO*. $tf****M All these are
names of ' honey \ literally ' made by a bee \ iffireiT, srwr and S^TO meaning • a
bee'. lfirar + «TV'«l r flrai (VI. 4. 148). The anuvptti of "vq" does not, erf
course, apply here.
118. The affix 55^ comes in the sense of 'made
by him 1 , after the words Kulola &c. the whole word so form-
ed being a Name.
Thus <£i<M<WiHl * a porcelain • lit • made by a potter '. So also *!*•
1 5735m, 2 **T, 3 **zm* 4 Pwtf, S qpfa, 6%^t, 7 faftw ( Rrft»wr ), 8 Stffcw
( frfar* X 9 ?ro*, 10 qft^ ( **%), 11 «* 12 *$\ 13 **, 14 «», is »nij$. 16 ■**
17 4p>rorr, 18 **ror, 19 wf. 11
5&TUT *?«WTWir* 1 W^M^lf : II
119. The affix stst comes after the words 'kshu-
dr&\ 'bhramara', 'va^ara', and c p&dapa 9 iri the sense of
J made by him ', the whole word being a Name.
This debars bt*, there being difference in accent between *rn and
^m,U Thus qfTpn *RH~fcT*V honey' lit 'made* by a small bee'. So also
Sthts, inland qf^P^M
Digitized by
/GooqI(
A
79a «£frl— **« [ BK. IV. CH. Ill § 122.
I - - 1 1 ■ —
^f*v u ic^ifir Mdl*iWRiPi«wR*iF> "^ wrffiW writ hw^iw w* «i3ra«it' i
120. After a word in the 6th case in construction,
an affix (IV. 1. 13 &c) comes, in the sense of l this is his\
The five universals irw &c (IV, i. 83) and the affixes s &c (IV. 2. 93)
come in this sense. Thus vnffK^-t&nPHW, € of Upagu'. sjnr*^, frf^^ f
WT3XTOrcprU The affixes, however, .do not com^ when the word governed
by the possessive case, is tpRTC &c Thus WMHlMHH^ tl In short the
thing possessed must be property, village, kingdom or men.
Vdrt: — The verb *f takes ^ (tratand y^) and *T*^ preceded by an f^
As,$5rj:**-«W|**i -
Virt: — The affix en comes after en/to, in the sense of € house", and
the base gets the designation of * fl As «nfhP£ll The word «ralfa being
treated as a Bha and not as a Pada, the tf is not changed to f (VIII. 2. 39).
Yirt: — The affix € sheijyai? • comes after 3PPCT» in the sense of placing.
Thus qifipfrqi HW € the verses (recited while) placing the fuel on fire', OTrotft
(IV. i. 41) qR a
121. The affix ^ comes after *3T, in the sense of
* this is his/
This debars *?% 11 Thus w^t=*wp* 'belonging to the chariot — i. e.
wheel or the axle.' The word cur is confined to describe the parts of
chariot This rule applies also to compounds ending with k*t, as, TOR***;
. WPIWW because of the V&rtika TO$nrn^ȣt nfflpltt after w, tferr and fn in .
applying the affix n*i there is tadanta-vidhi.
122. When preceded by a word denoting 'a draught
animal', *?J takes the affix stsr in the sense of * this is his.*. ^
This debars 115 it Thus STTOT* ^afe 'the wheel of a horse-cart* uftgluqtll
•nfa^fr 11
The word to means 'that by which any one goes 9 or a draught-animal,
like camel It is formed by the affix gj (III. 2. 182).
Digitized by '
Google
Bx. IV. Ch. III. $ i2d ] «*W««l. » 793
frffo^ ii imtrd m
123. After a word denoting a draught-animal, and
after the words 'adhvaryu* and 'parishad,' the affix ^^is
added.
This debars «r* il The <nt means fiff II When the sense is that of a
thing to be carried, then is *n* added to a word denoting 'a draught-animal/
Thus *w&Vi *g3frig'»»Tm* < a load to be or suited for being, carried by
horse. 9 So also ifrg^, *tfic*H> il So also «n***f^ and qfftqf* H
124. The affix z*$ comes in the sense of 'this is his/
after the words 'hala* and 'sira/
Thus tt4&4ff~VTft3i*> flftff* II
•nfrnroii
*rf%^ ii ^ Wgcrf***: nftf^r WW: II
125. The affix 3^ comes in the sense of ' this is
his ', after Dvandva compounds of words denoting ' mutual
enmity \ or l matrimonial relationship '
This debars sr; and & ll Thus of •enmity' qmwuiM£l4Puiil, ^TOt^-
firaTT II Similarly of radrried couples as, xfil *KllftW, $ HiaftlfiM» t II
The Dvandva compounds of words denoting natural enemies will be
singular neuter by II. 4. 9. Their secondary derivatives, however, are feminine.
Ydrt : — Prohibition must be stated of the word ^igc &c. As T*HJl* il
mjfift 11 n^nrf^^nwr^rf^^ Mift^ft^^sH^^i^^i^^wrHeiidR^f^M^.^i^i^ii
126. The affix 5^ comes, in the sense of 4 this is
his \ after the words denoting Family-names or names of
Vedic Schools.
This debas W* as well .9 II Thus gotra: — «3 > yhH«HML , ^WPPCTL »
According to Patanjali, the word *IC* which ordinarly means Vedic School,
Digitized by
Google
794 iK*Pl«rM [ Bk. IV. Ch. III. § 127
"\
means here duties or doctrines (dharma), and traditions (Stmnaya). Thus
q&Ftt qk WITOT JT-SjnrcR* 'the dharraa-Sutras or the tradition belonging to
the school of Kaphas \ So also cRTOrTOi*, ^, ^1^ M
*ri%^3. ii $m*4^H* drifts* m
127. The affix Wff comes in the sense of ' this is
his \ after a Patronymic word ending with the affix *T3^, ips^
or r* , the words so formed expressing a multitude, a mark
or a sign.
The word shr means ' congregation \ The word vswt and sij should
be distinguished. S*n* means a mark which is the property of that person
and forms a distinguishing feature of that person, as fror € learning ' is a H^r«l
of the clan of Bidas, the Bidas being famous for learning. The word *tj
is a mark which shows that the thing so marked is the property of another :
is a mark on a cow showing to what person or clan that cow belongs. The
sqg though occurring in a person or thing does not belong to that person or
thing, as the mark of a cow does not belong to the cow, but the «Wf is a
mark which belongs to the person or thing wherein it is found.
This sfltra debars w^ of .the last aphorism.
Vdrt : — The word 4ta f a cow-pen ', should also be read along with
tftf &c. Thus the words so formed denote four things (i) congregation,
(2) mark (3) sign (4) a hamlet or cowpen. This being so, the rule of mutual
correspondence according to order of enumeration (I. 3. 10) does not apply. '
Thus grsreT Pt (IV. 1. 104)—^ \v 'a congregation, or mark or sign or a
liamlet of the Bidas 9 . gsrenft (IV. 1 105) — «m$l+*n^»Tr*P (VI. 4. 148, 151)
'" a congregation, or a mark, or a sign or a hamlet belonging to the G&rgyAs ?
IMHlfr (IV. 1. 95)»— *Tftc+*i*-*T«r- (VI. 4- 148) € a congregation &c of the
D^kshis 1 .
The m of *rqr could not serve the purpose of Vriddhi here, for all the
.words to which this affix is added, have Vriddhi by virtue of the affixes «r?*,
H» origin which they end. The *T would have served the purpose as well,
so far as Vriddhi is concerned, but 9T>r is used to show that the feminine is
: formed by ?ft* (IV. I. 15), Thus^ft II It further prevents vq+W in compounds
4 (VI. 3. 39), as, Xt fcrarcq»%4tFra : i. c f^Hmnwft m faw ot tok^i 9 11 .
Digitized by
Google
'f' w .t v»»nr ' i., ' iyyiRi B
Bic IV. OlIII. §. 130] _ «#*4r-*«ir 99$
128. The affix *n$ optionally comes, in the sense
of ' this is his congregation, mark, sign or hamlet/ after tte
word grrerg ■
Th?s debars fi^ h Thus %n*ffc* gnsinftqft -qregf: (IV. 3. 101 and IV.
2. 64), qrereffiPi 4w: - fTPCT: or QPffffHP (IV. 3. 126) meaning 'a congregation,
&c of the students of the science revealed by Sakala.'
jfta 11 Sennit ftfro:, mmAft Rwnti o»ft<iii)^ ^r^or&q* ra3t *f*fir «i£wPi^
*ffrfonft i ^mfiwu* n
129. The affix **t comes in the sense of * this is
his Law or Tradition/ after the words 'chh&ndoga/ 'aukthika/
1 y^jnika, 1 * bahvncha* and ' nala.'
The anuvrittl of fcn &c ceases. The «| debars wr*! and 3^ It The
phrase ^ rt^rr^W^TnrJt : from sfttra IV. 3. 126 is understood here and applies
even to the word *n N
Thus cr%rrRi vtfi *r ss **lHt m OTNtnnt'the Law or Tradition peculiar'
to the Chhandoga.' So also *h^fc l« w« , tffftnRK, *f «?**H and «n*m H
Not having this sense we have : OT^t*i $<*w 'the family of Chhandoga.*
130. The affix 55^ is not used after a Family-name f
when it denotes a 'beginner pupil', and ' a boarder pupil/
The word y*T*TPHT means a little naughty boy (ifPUT). the only means
of instilling knowledge in whom is the rod (cst), or whose principal sign of
studentship is the 'dan£a' and nothing intrnisic. i. e. a mere beginner. The
n is changed to or in itfTtty IV. 1. 161 karik£, grarerrere : are pupils or boarders
who live in their teacher's house. The word 'gotra' is understood here. " Thus
{TOT "the junior or the senior pupils of Dakshi.' *Tr^jT: h Soalsotfonft
VmUMI srefolfo3frn II
^fcR7ri%^npsj: n m R M^ift n <^fd*if^vr, v I
jftp ii \iRi*iRhpo': Ararat *nfir n^Rpr&wR*r^rii n ^
25 '^'
Digitized by
Google
\
796 irc* fom: ir Bk. IV. Ch. hi. §.134. 1
131. The affix s comes in the sense of 4 this is his\
after the words h(fk*i &c.
All these word* end with Gotra affixes, and require »J^(IV. 3. 126),
this ordains 9 instead. Thus fcrfiWSte. HTfrtfto &c
i^f^,2TOftfv # 3^ftr,4ifMtf% (*Mta), 5«f^%ft (tftffa), 6 *?tf-
132. The affix «mr comes in the sense of 'this is
his', after the words 'kaupinjala' and 'h&stipada*.
This debars 4fH (IV. 3. 126). Thus tftlfM»JW* » *rffcfTC II This sAtra
is really a VStrtika.
wf^' 11 Nfac^q 1 ^iM^*^imiij moot Hiffi mk\fai*ii$i*i %3RcsNm ^^wPt^Rrft^f^f 5 *
<n 1 *um«nimn* a
133. The affix ^ comes, in the sense of 'this is his f ,
after the word 'atharvanika', and the penultimate c ika f is elided.
This debars jpr (IV. 3: 126). Thus miq$Ity^miqV a *TW$«ft f4«n»re
iffar "the Atharvana i. e. the Law or the Tradition of the Atharvanikas". The
phrase *TC*TT^M*fiM(^: is understood here. This sfltra is also a vArtika.
134. An affix (IV. 1. 83 &c) comes after a word in
the sixth case in construction, in the sense of *a modification
thereof.
The word fcfflTC means the change of condition of the original. The
won! *rw, though its aunivptti could have been supplied from the previous
sQtras, has been repeated here, in order to show that the governing force of %%
(IV. 2. 92) does not extend further. The affixes taught, therefore, under *ft
(IV. 2. 92 &c). such as % 13 &c. have not the sense of irw RWR II
No affix has been tanght here in this stitra: the general affix *r^
(IV. 1. 83) therefore will come in this sense, as well as the affixes to be taught
hereafter. To give an example under this sOtra, we must take such a word
which is not governed or provided for, by the subsequent stitras, That U the
Digitized by '
Google
■n««mwr«
n
I Bk. IV. Ch. III. S- 13* wRwiwUli «*mi f9T
word must not denote a living animal for to it *r^ (IV. 3. 154) applies; it must
have udatta on the first syllable, for an anudattadi will have ip^UV. 3. 140);
it must not have a Vpddhi vowel «TT,^, or *fr in the first syllable, to which
«nfl^(IV. 3. 144) applies; and it must not be a word specifically mentioned in
any one of the following aphorisms. Thus it applies to the words vroni and
HFI* formed by irf^ (U$ IV. 146^ 145) and to mnzn formed by flta* (V. 4. 39)
which are adyudatta owing to fkn accent Thus «T5>rit ^n:-«n7R: II The ft
is sometimes elided. (VI. 4. 144 VArt) As *rm : II So also WPf: and *rfifap II
\f*t ii Rr^rf^rfif^r^: vfon-* *fonriMr s*ri% *mWW row *wfir , rorafa-
135. An affix comes after a word denoting an
animal, a herb and a tree, in sixth case in construction, in the
sense of ' this is its part', (as well as 'this is its' modifica-
tion f ). . . .j
By the word ^r in the s&tra, the phtase tff* font* is also read into
the sfttra.
Thus *rihrcq RmOmfr *r - **nihr* (I V.3. 1 54) 11 So also ni^r, wf%* f a
modification, product or part of a peacock &c — viz a fan &c/ So also ^ftfc
as, H&L 'product of Murva i.e. ashes or the stalk of Murva'. So also fqt*
as, qjrffrt meaning " the stalk or the ashes of Karlra tree*.
In the subsequent sfttras, both the words ftarc and inra? have
governing force. But after words which denote non-animals, non-plants or non?
trees, the affixes have only the sense of fTOTC M This is a rather unique case
of double anuvptti, not co-extensive in every respect
ftudifywt smn tw 11 q^r II fcmfaffn, *H N
*f*r: 11 ft** f**vnfv$t s*j irura* **fir flrercmrefto Hts 1 qMi3i«iH*jHii«U<w* •
136. The affix «n^ comes in the sense of 4 its mo-
dification or its part/ after the words f*5* &c.
This debars «?*£ and qit?ti Thus^Ff: 'the modification or part of
Bilwa.' The word *fr v £*fr: occurs in this list It would have taken 'a?' by the
next sfltra also ; its inclusion in the class of Bilwadi is for the sake of prevent-
ing the application of ira^to this word.
1 ftnr, 2 tfft, 3 w, 4$*, 5 *$*, 6 ifr^f, 7 tg, 8 %g, 9 n>>i*r, 10 *qfafc
llfn^*;12qi^5V f 133rfh,
Digitized by
Google
;\
79* w^ftwtmw*-*niii [ Bk. IV. Ch hi. |. 14a
tfrrore ll t$» H **Tfa ll <w, graving (*nj) H
jfti: 11 wt>iam*iq»ffiMfoi»n«* *«wt *rof* **n*nt ftironw%Wr.i«rtriwnr. m
137. After a word having *^as penultimate, the
affir sro^ comes, in the sense of modification or a part, or both,
as appropriate.
This debars in* Thus *^m*^ firffcr^,%?fc^
ITgCTl H The word firnnffrK &c have acute on the middle (Phit Su. II. 16).
^3*i3«ffa 5^ n w* n mtifti n ^j-^^'W "
138. The affix zrqr with the augment 5^ comes
in the sense of ' its modification, 9 after the words 'trapun' and
4 jatun\
This debars «pr (I V. 3. 1 39). As, *yft ft**: - myn; *iyr* H modi-
fication of tin and lac' In these words denoting non-organic beings, the sense
of «TOft is not denoted by the affix.
4U«. ll 13** R m^iA II *it:-*nj H
wftr: ii *W»dia<ira4iH i *H *T*rft »T*fft ft«wn wM4 > > xSmtr. »
139. The affix ais^ comes after a word ending in
short sr, in the sense of * modification or part/ (provided that
the word has not grave accent on the first syllable).
Thus fc^TOTfc nigqmn W The words fW^ and *nr*T* are 4dy-ud4tta
owing to Phit Su. II. 14 (^ffttTHH C— the trees denoting soft timber trees have
acute on the first).
«mimfr*i H V*o 11 q^rft 11 ^wV t ^ (*r*0 II
3f*r- 11 nj^nrifc mfiTOronp^sniwr wfj R<hiuw3k4« >i rttarts h
140. The affix 3?^ comes in the sense of 'modi-
fication or part \ after a word having anudatta accent on the
first syllable.
This debars vn ll Thus tfftmrj, qnftw*, stiffen^ II The word qfam%
is an upapada-sam&sa of qfa + **r, the 9 being changed to <f ; and it is finally
acute by V$3TO SfTftTCTC H
Mdiqifiyft *T II \*\ II *tV&t II ^STOTf^W.-W (*H*) II
Digitized by
Google
I .
Bk.IV. Ch.HI.!. 143 1 ftilTO^ -WH 799
141. The affix *m comes optionally in the sense
of 4 modification or part ', after the words rarer &c*
Thus <jh*nnLorqp*nTC > so also ffliV^or ^nftt*t iifcre^or icrara*. S
This sAtra is an example of prApta and aprApta vibh&shA. The
words q*ra» Qff^t* fWff and fq*** being gravely accented on the first syllable^
the affix *nj was obligatory by the last aphorism. This makes it optional,
and is pr&pta-vibh&shJL In the case of others it is aprtpta- vibh&shJL t
1 WTO. 2 (ftffo 3 ftw, 4 f^fif (f^^r), 5 flflW*, 6 qrffc, 7 ftrffo 8 flffj
^i^nn^R?^ R ?«^ ■ **ifa n ?wr.-^ »
142. The affix ^s^f comes in the sense of * its
modification or part \ after the word *nft. •
This debars sr^ N Thus jrrtW w, ^M 55 (IV. 1. 6o>
>
143. The affix tp^ comes optionally after any
base, in those two meanings of product and part, in secular
language, when neither food nor clothing is spoken of.
ThusiTOTTO^orirnR^l^IV. 3. 134)' wrfrt or 4tf* (I V. 3. 135).
. Why do we say *PTOIPI ' in secular language * ? Witness %**: urtftd' q?
Why do we say 'when neither food nor clothing is spoken of 9 ?
Observe 4bf: fW ' a soup made of kidney beans 9 . 45ITCPC HI«0H4^ H
Why the word ^nfr f in those two meanings 9 is used in the sfltra,
when by context, the words ftarc and «TO? were to be read into the sfitra ?
Its use indicates that the special affixes, such as taught in IV. 3. 135, 136 &c
are replaced also by ira^U Thus wht|*wi or wftir^ (IV. 3. 135), tftfra^ or
Abu
Digitized by
Google
*OC fi«»HIW«> s-«Wfrlt [ BK. IV. CH. III. 5. 184
- 144. The affix *p^ comes in the sense of its pro-
duct or part, when neither food nor clothing is spoken o£ in-
variably after Vriddha words, and after src &c.
Thus after Vpddha— imnm, *rm»RPfc Jl^m, II After traft words : —
*rc*np*, wkwh ?wnpiM
Why do we use the word fh*X* ' invariably' in the sfltra, when by the
mere fact of making a separate s&tra, the affix would be obligatory.? The
affix *m^, according to Patanjali comes invariably after words of one syllable.
That is done by using the word fk*Q in the sfitra. Thus, t^roi, ^•HPtt
*Tter 5^ II \V\ H M^lft 'it:, ^-j€fa H
145. affix l*nr comes after the word *tt in the sense
of * its dung/
Thus ifftmt'cow dung 9 . Dung 9 is neither a modification nor a part
of cow. Therefore this separate sdtra for iff 11 Why do we say meaning f its
dung'? Observe irsq-milk. The affix m here comes in the sense of
product or part (IV. 3. 160), though strictly speaking • milk ' also is not an
« avayava" 9 or a ' viklra ' of ifr II
fanner 11 v*% M ^tA 11 farac-v H
146. The affix wi% invariably comes in the sense
of its product or part, after the word ft* II
This debars *T*JI Thus ftgrq HCT M Otherwise *r* t as^Agir in
the sense of 3TOTON
^rernri q^ ll V** II u<tift R ««wI-«^ K
wf%r: it fimimw^ raft **fir flra>ft 4mm ft^ 1 «w?i^rr 11
147. The affix sn[ comes in the sense of product,
after the word fas, the whole word being a Name.
This debars W ll As ftzm : N
. ^ftMi mwrepro^TO* «ro?r <£n*rtr ftWft 1 fir**ro%m -. 11
148. The affix jpi^ comes after the word rfrffc in
the sense of a 'Purocftoa. 9
Digitized by
Google
Bit IV. Ch. III. S 102 ] ft*rcrm*:-«mO *>*
This debars n^ (IV. 3. I36> rhus iftffW 3^*TO * a sacred cake
made of barley. 9 Otherwise %f^ *
149. The affix xm^ comes in the sense of 4 its pro-
duct or part/ after the words 'tila* and 'yava* — the whole
not being a name.
Thus fitornt qTOPf, 11 Why do we say trajffUPl " it not being a Name?*
Observe in** * oil/ m**Z formed with ** . (qr*fft»«i ^ V. 4. 29)
150. In the Chhandas, after a dissyllabic word f
the affix *pj^ comes in the sense of * its product or part. 9
This ordains TO^in the sacred literature also, secular literature being
dealt with in IV. 3 143. Thus WTO, *$*W» OTTO* in the following q*q vfoGk
^ajifi^ict 11 \\\ n q^ii?r-^c^-^-ft5qrac(jnr^)ii
•fa: 11 +wni MintsR<tiit^AMvm^if ^r HH^TO^t *f **fif M
151. The affix wr^ does not come in the Chhandas
after the dissyllabic words, having a short vowel T in them,
nor after the words ' vardhra • and 4 bilwa/
Thus ftrnf ftrere from js* by «?«? 11 «n^if ^x*% qn!f wnruf%i?n *ro%;
The word 7?(TC means f having ^ or short u (I. 1. 70) 9 The rule does
not apply to words containing long u, as yqqm^m i |Q| II The vjin TO?t shows
that the rule applies not only to words ending in 7, but also to words having
?. Had *cj not been used, the tadanta-vidhi would requite the application oif
the rule to words ending in ?, but not to those which had 7 in any other part
of their form. So that the prohibition applies to q* also, as Vrtf nffc (IV. 3.
136).
The word ipw is Ady-udAtta by gmm^HC (Phit II. 4): and therefore
it takes the universal st^IV. 3. 134). The word «T*^is formed by the affix
&l plus the augment J^(jp*mn:, «njr^ Ui? I. 94 and 95), and is finally acute,
and therefore it takes sn^by IV. 3. 140, and forms ifrjfl M This word has
Digitized by
Google
\
Boa : ft«u<mw -*ntM [Bk. IV. Ch. III." J 104
?u:ute on the final also, as trar q$ «n**r *rt PrtftH M The word *tf is 4dy-
udatta by Phit II. 19. and therefore takes *?*, the feminine being formed by
*K(IV.i.i5>
ciwifti4K ll \*ft N T^r 11 tmnfaw, *n* R
152. The affix sn^ comes in the sense of ' its pro-
duct or part 1 , after the words ' t&la &c \
This debars iri^ &c. Thus trtf ^j:, wrivr*. Vflfor* M
TO» 8 <ft|j^f.
*iuhkQw qftwrfr n im II q^ II ^ i d^Qw - qftniHi (*r?0 «"
153. The affix ara^ conies after a word denoting
% gold \ when the sense is a weight or measure.
The word sutwq means ' gold \ It is used in the plural in the sfttra,
indicating that all words synonymous with gold are to be taken.
This debars irq^&c Thus fr*^f PWT:, *I*tf **r^PP* f *nrOT9, *!*•
Why do we say • meaning a measure \ Observe trffeft^ QU4it4) H
wftK«idifti4l ss* 11 V& ll snf^-^3Riii%w:-Bi^ B
154. The affix *T5^ comes in the sense of c its pro-
duct or part \ after words expressing living beings, and
after ?sra &c.
This debars *r*i &c. The affix tr^has been ordained to come / after
those words that have anudatta in the beginning. This sfitra applies to words
other than those having anudatta in the beginning.
Thus: — srrfnr^, •u«y^» hPt^; IPW^, *Nt*; wt^» & - 1° the class
twft those words like *3RT, wwmi &c, which have anudatta on the beginning
and would have taken uw by iV. 3. 140, have been enumerated to prevent
the application of H^ to them.
,1 nm, 2 tffcc, 3 Af. 4 zpm, 5 fa (*fbr, Wte), Gjn, 7 et^Nw (QftiraX 8 f%-
*fhr% 9 *ito frfrh w)» 10 ifawr*, 1 1 Pot**, 12 w*m.
Digitized by
Google
BK. IV. CM. III. 5 I56 ] faOOTfffr-vPin 9o%
• 155. The affix W* comes in the sense of € its pro-
duct or part', after a word which ends with an affix having
an indicatory s^ such affix denoting c its product or part *.
The affixes having indicatory sy denoting product or part, are m(%
(IV. 3. 139). *H* (IV. 3. 142), *v (IV. 3. IS4) i*(iv. 3. I57X ** (IV. 3.
159), •ra?, *3£ (IV. 5. 168). When a tertiary derivative of a word ending with
these affixes is to be made, the affix «rs( is used. Thus fotrctCT fctfdsfift
wr-V*iwi; so also ?rfcnrw» qn*nn[i jirth**» ^nnn , ftff**- ?^*$ ^l^u
Why do we say f*np ? Witness \m* Here »np^ is used after V*
and the derivative is formed by *T3 of IV. 3. 136. So also VfiT*w N
^IdclcMflmuil^ ll \\% II q^Tfif tl ^6Rraq[ -Mfll4|U| l 4 H
*tar n j r«wr **far ire* faFrc iwifi^faHl i 1 irfrfripmrf* *
156. After a word denoting 'a measure*, the
v> affix expressing * its product or part f is the same as the affix
having the sense of purchased.
The affixes taught in V. 1. 18 &c are the affixes that have the force
of rfhf (V. I. 37). These affixes come also after words denoting measure
(V. 1. 19). The same affixes are employed to denote fforc. after words
denoting qftHPT II This debars tr? &c. Thus fa«%!| tftoL«-*tf*«CTi* (V. 1.
20); It will denote vik&ra also, ft*?ftq fTOTt: "Afa^r* formed by *^ (V. 1.
20). As tRtTOiht-TO or Ufatfrl ( V. 1. 21 ), so wf* ftaro-TO : or trftre
by *^ and** (V. 1. 21), qgfrimfor -*?*«* ( V. 1. 27 ) so «fm*fcfirc: -*!***
(V. 1. 27 by *nj) n
The word W^ in rfhTOl indicates that the similarity is complete
throughout Thus Sfltra V. 1. 28 also applies, by which the affix is elided.
As ffcr**: or tan*** (V. I. 29), ftft**: or fiftftW- II The word <fftnn* in
this sfltra includes tout ' the, numerals ' also ; while the technical word qftHTW
^ does not include sankhyA. See IV. 1. 22 and V. 1. 19 &c. The similarity
extends even to the elision of affix (V. 1. 28; as, fcnpc, fiWTffi: &C.
26
Digitized by
Google
\
804 : pfrtSR H [ Bk. IV. Ch. III. § 162
157. The affix 3** comes in the sense of 4 its
product or part \ after the word ' uslrfra.
This debars 1^(1 V. 3. 1 54). *g*H fofilftsqufr *r- tf^n H
ijftuWtel it \\< n q^rft 11 ^nr-g^pfh-^r (1^)11 • "
ffin ii 4HmMijyifww qT3R*rewt »ref*r R*hHHnq4u4*ii> 1
158. The affix gs£ comes optionally in the sense
of * its product or part, after the words SJJT and 3^.
Thus sftonor Whra*. «?tfiw or «frfa« II
TRnff^ii^^ii q^Tft 11 t^iqptSwii
«f%: 11 ipffro^rtf^in^ "reft foKmraqfrrfrft : 1 m^imi^ 11
159. The affix ys^ comes in the sense of 'its pro-
duct or part/ after the feminine word qtfr K
Thus ^urt TWSt ' the flesh of a female black deer/ But qof^n ffaw «-^-
.«pj/ the flesh of a male deer", formed by utt H
*
Sftn 11 iftro: frorHtf q^irm* **fir RhhKiw4iulO» h
160. The affix q^ comes in the sense of 'its pro-
duct or part,' after the words ifr and qq^R
Thus«nq^(VI. 1. 79>>TO*V
ftfSf: ii gtimuttjuUil *refir ft^iRPrw5rtv5t: i *MH4imu : w
161. The affix q^ comes in the sense of * its pro-
duct or part ' after the word ' dru/
This debars «rs^(IV. 3. 139). Thus f +q^»I«Wt(VI. i. 79).
nr% vr. II t$* 11 q^r 11 HT^r-^r: II
162. The affix qq* comes in the sense of ' its pro-
duct/ after the word c dru/ the word meaning • a measure/
This debars m II As ffsq 1 ^ * a measure. 9
q?& ?5^ II $$3 II q^ift 11 q^, jg^ii
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV.Cn. I!!. $ 16&] q&« •- 805-i
163. The affix denoting 'product or part' is elided
by luk, when such product or part is ' a fruit/
Thus vffTOVW %* - UPTO^ + 1^ 3ft - WW* 'the fruit of Myrobolans.*
* So also mm H The fruit is a " product" as well as a u part " of a fruit-bearing
tree.
164. The affix w^ comes in the sense of * its pro-
duct or part, it being a fruit/ after the wprd 4 plaksha &c. f
This debars mj M Thus <**«*• >qftnTCN
1 WT, 2 *nqtt, 3 1TVKT, 4» (?*$, 5 ftlj, 6 «, 7 JftfJ ( *Hr$. *>*5 JCTH)
8ffft. N
3ff|T *T II «<l II ^ft II 3I*gT:-ST («Uf) II
iftf: 11 qrafnn 1 *»mHnifr sPfira tc<5 raw* *rafir i «r^nrr: 11
165. The affix sru^ comes optionally in denoting a
fruit, after the word 'jambft 1 .
v* This debars m» tt Thus **§ + n%r Hi*** as uramft <KHlPf But
when the general affix *p^ is added, it is elided by IV. 3. 163. As Vf+«n^
(IV. 3. i39)-*7» as *^P* *&&* ( VI - + 8) • *
Q^VIIWH ^T^ H55-^ II
jfti* 11 Ww 1 vjr: q^P^fti toto *r st *nfir 1 y^CTirt Mf 5 ■
^rfWui gnrercfr qr^n*rg^re*wpWL M
^rfrRJ^ 11 5«^^5 *£**> w
166. The affix denoting fruit is optionally elided
by lup after the word c jamb& 9 .
The word *r is understood here. The difference between 1uk' and Hup*
elision is that in the case of 'lup', there is concordance of gender and number.
• See sAtra I. 2. 51. Thus siw+snjJJ^- Wf}, as, *»£ qtf II Optionally ip^n
<K<* =» *wr u^, or 3(T*wi M
1 Filr/.- — There is lup-elision of the affix denoting fruit, after the words
•expressing deciduous plants which wither away as soon as the fruit ripens :
Thus sftf^-sfcfi:, wr, *n^rr : , jjir-i Rtht: m
V&rt ; — Diversely so when the affix denotes flowers and roots : a\
*m*m yt=-*rfw^FiT» wto^st ^rfir:; so also ft*rat$?~fTO(N Tgrft ftft u
Digitized by
Google
806 9~*153 N [ Bk, IV. Ch. III. § 168
In the above example there is concordance. By using 'diversely', this con-
j cordance does not sometime take place. As TiZHlft S**Tf*c, wgrPf 3J*rft II So
gliavtifiyw i 11 SV* li qyfir 11 £Qd<wift+q :-*r 11
167. The affix denoting 'fruit' is elided by §a,
! ~ after the words 'Haritaki' &c.
Here also there is concordance (I. 2. 51), As {{bran ^-f^hnft
instead of {ftror II So also 5TOnreft, TOTCJPft M According to Patanjali, the
concordance is with regard to gender only, the number will be governed by
j the sense, as gfcr^ft *H*» fftlTO qrarPf II
J 1 «Qw<6i» 2 ^HimmQ, 3 <\m*J t ( TO^tf! ) 4 *r«R«tflr ( *rrWt ) 5 *rfr, 6
* «hft. 7 Sfcrcrafr, 8 mj4ii4l, 9 vm, 10 <sm, 11 **wit ( **t^it ) 12 intor ( «mfN?r )
• 13 jymdR<M , M ft«T* # , 15 Fr**r # ( farqr), 16^mfiWT, 17 ffl. 11
I ^^HMm^4l4M4> ^E[^r II w* II q^ 11 ^ft^-qisr^nit:.^^
< treltt ^0^7 II
1 Spfr *P*TCt WTO!** ftre»TC tft|qft*iPlMq, IT HiRqMH ^T ^^WTO^WT^ T <nRf H
{ 168. The affixes *r«gr, and sj^ come respectively in
j the sense of 'its product 9 , after the words 'kansiya 9 and 'paras-
i avya', and there is luk-elision (of the S and *r<j affixes of
j " those words).
] The word %tffa : is formed by BT (V. 1. 1), and TOF3 is formed by adding
j n\ (V. f. 2). These affixes er and n?f are elided when the affiixes zp^and «rH.
I are added. Thus 5Rita+q^«3n7+35i»3ifar: so also toot from tow thus
. ~ HUl** + *T*l k ™^Sr+*T*t ia, Nn*n: M
j The words 9*^1 mean 'there shall be elision'. Of what ? Certainly not
j of the primitive, for *^ is never applied to the elision of a base, but of an affix
only ( I. 1. 61 ). It follows therefore that the elision is of the affixes of -qfcffrt
and qro*q II Now these words have two affixes, thus. To the root ^ is
I added first the Un£di affix *j (U3 IIL62)and we get sifer ; next to sfa is added
j fj. So also to qt + ^ is added the affix * (Un 1. 33) and we have q*y, to which is
then added ^ and we have qro*9 II The question arises, should these affixes
I *T and 3 be also elided. The answer is •no'. The word snf*nft3?ni of IV. 1. I
! is understood is this sAtra ; so the elision will take place of those affixes only
N
Digitized by
Google
Bk IV Ch III 5 168.] 9-**tf*« 8o?
which follow a pr&tipadika. But 9 and v are added to a DhAtu and not a
prAtipadika, hence those affixes are saved from the operation of 5^ II
The word <rara( being gravely accented on the first (VI. 1. 185) would
have taken «rw by IV. 3. 14a The present sAtra teaches the elision only of
its affix mfc ITU being already obtained.
Q. The final it of tafa and tof* will be elided by VI. 4. 148 before
these taddhita affixes, and after such elision, the final « will be elided by VL
4. 150, where is then the necessity of this sAtra?
A. The final « will not be elided, because VI. 4. 150 will apply only
then, when an affix beginning with long f follows, which is not the case here.
•>\
< *
Digitized by
Google
BOOK FOURTH.
Chapter Fourth.
HHtHflmfr II til <I?Tfa II sn^-^^t, Z*i II
*rc%gfa$^rMta*v it
*?• ii *n$nn3Fnf$**s h *i* u s*s^ gsfnrcft**: 11 *i* ii**ro£r qrornft***. 11
1. The affix z& comes as a governing affix, in the
senses enumerated hereafter up to sfttra IV. 4. 76.
This is an adhik&ra sAtra. The affix v^ bears rule from this one for-
ward to the sfltra srf^r &c. Thus in the next sfitra it is said ; M After a
word in the third case in construction, in the sense of "who plays, digs, con-
quers, or is conquered." Now this sfltra is incomplete. We must read the
word ^5 into it Thus srft tffan% =■ snftreT: " who plays with aksha — a dicer/
«ro+^-«nfiws (VII. 3. so>
Vdrt: — After the words trac? &c, the affix 'thak ' comes in the sense
€ he said that' Thus irnggf Ttqry^ qmftHi -' who says 'don't make noise,' qjrif-
*rfi?3i: 11 This is the case of an affix added to a sentence.
Vdrt: — So also after ip^i &c in the sense Tie said': as ip|frHIg" * rHgf fr5 P>
qrSrrfH^: II These are examples of affixes added to an adverb.
Vdrt : — So also after ffHIt! &c in the sense *he asks/ as, ^mf y^affif
"^nRrV * Who asks, have you bathed well". qi<jHff*W , qkqqKlft*: II
. Vdrt : — So also after <mr*T &c in the sense of ' he goes to, or commits
adultery with': as f^TO^ «re5fir - MUqiRcfP, MlVl l fr^ 11 The word ir^T here refers
to * wife".
%% £i*^icl %wft wkI l^iak 11 ^ 11 q^ift 11 c^T-^n^-^fi^-^Rfcr
fddR II
Digitized by
Google
Bic IV. Ch. IV. J 5 ] wRr-¥^n 809
2. The affix sw comes after a word in the third
case in construction, in the sense o£ * he plays \ ' he digs \
4 he conquers ' or ' he is conquered \
Thus «rfrtf«^Rf-*nTv^ 'who plays with dice— a dicer'. mmTW »
Though the rule is couched in universal terms, yet the affix does not
come after every instrumental case. Thus ^f#T fsrapl will not give rise to
any affix, for the word ^qqfcMH is not found in usage having this sense. So
also tfjFqr tSFlfir gives rise to no affix. Though the verbs • dtvyati ' &c, are in
the 3rd Person Present Tense, Singular number, the derivative is not limited'
by these conditions. Thus *rrftn£r and snftnRr. sure also valid, and so also
«T$WNbi will give also infirar- ; so also mfiHi wi ITHfrenw , H Though in a
sentence the verb is generally the principal word (A»iu*rMH)» here owing to the
Taddhita affix, the instrument is taken as the principal
3. The affix 3^ conies after a word in the third
case in construction, in the sense of ' refined thereby \
The word tits** means ' refining or enhancing the quality of a thing*.
Thus tot *R$* - JTflTO* ' refined or made tasteful by curd \ So also mjfcffr*>«,
1 1 lQft*« ll
The separation of this sfttra from the last, is for sake of the next s&tra,
in which the anuvptti of cN$ft only runs,
$<Ac*4«hlHV||^m || « || M<J|ft || 5^c^T^hlMV4|^-BTU^ ||
4. Ofter the word 'kulattha 9 , and after words hav-
ing a penultimate qj f the affix «rnr is added in the sense of
* refined or prepared therewith \
This debars s$ u Thus *famw, Jrnnft^, *rfal^, the two latter be-
ing examples of words ending in v U
5. The affix sqj comes after a word in the third
case in construction, in the sense of ' he crosses there by
.over the waters'.
Digitized by
Google
8id «n*<frl-9*U [ BK.I V. Ch. 1 V § &.
Thus «j"*m^*Hfi l ° *M*lWfo: , i&jfw * who crosses with a iaft\ •
r 6. The affix ssr comes after the word 'gopuchchha'*
in the sense of ' he crosses thereby f .
The difference between &$ and e» is in the accent Thus nfajtOTi' H
^igM^BHL H * H i^Tfa II ^-JFW-s* II
tRfs ii frpQUT^grnr MifaMftfr i ^ i^ rarer **flr qnflSmfw^ i**rt*rr. h
•nrcpnfanrofc far qnr% *«iRi*iK u
7. The affix 3^ comes after the word *fr and after
t>ases having two syllables, in the sense of ' he crosses there
with';
This debars *3> n Thus *mrr frtf^-irflPF* € a sailor'. So also after
dissyllabic words : as, *ri^r, cBft*P, WpP M
The ^T in 8^ in the sfitra is not part of the affix, but comes through
sandhi rules. The feminine of wreqp being WTgCT II In fact the indicatory ^
occurs in these sfitras only IV. 4. 9, IO, 18, 53 and 74, in this book.
^fo 11 < n mtiH n ^rcft («i0 n
8. After a word in the third case in construction,
comes the affix 5*5 in the sense of ' he goes on by means
thereof f .
The word *rcft means both to go on and to eat Thus jot *T*Rr-*rf^lT-
€ who gets on, with being fed on curd, tffcra?: • who travels by an eliphant \
9. The affix g«£ comes in the sense of 'he goes on,
by means there of after the word • akarsha/
This debars r* u The 5 is for accent (VI. 1. 193). The qr of Sphere is
a part of the affix, contrary to what it was in sfltra 7 ante. To remove the
doubt where qr is the part of an affix, and where it is not, the following mr.e
tnonic verse has been composed: "urerini vfftHWTf**: $<JU^I*^> UTTOn*
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Cm. IV. $, ta] )*<<ffA-*^i for.
f**ra* faff: s*% OTffroft 11 In the six SAtras ft 10^ 16, 31, 74, and 53, the affix-
es have indicatory «sh.' Here * being (ig, the feminine is formed by *h^ (IV.
1.41* Thus«n^^^ft-Inirf^/*TWrf^ii «mrf is a touch-stone by
which gold is tested.
<wlfaw S^ll.t * ^^rf^T H 1<4?i$*<f :, W% II
10. The affix 5^ comes, in the sense of 'he goes on/
by means there of after the words 'parpa' &c
This debars *£; the *of t^is for accent (VI. 1. 197), and <r for ^^
(IV. 1.41)1 Thus <Wi*: /qfffik'siAnp /tffaftii ^rt/qf^N The
qTf is changed to ^before this affix (VI. 3. 52).
1 q$, 2 m*, 3 mro, 4 ot, 5 im, 6 ^mr 9 7 «n*. 8 qrf : vt 11
wmn^s*^ ■ tt B ^T^nHrnorracs^vii
11. The affix s^ as well as the affix 9^ come*
after the word ^nr, in the sense of c he goes on by means
there of f
This debars *$ II Thus vtft* *rcft-vrnft«i 'who lives by dogs*.
The form vmf&rer. is evolved by the breach of rule VII. 3. 4. Thus
V*rw+*HH Hcrc b y VII. 2. 117, n requires Vpddhi of n of v * But rule
VII. 3. 4 says that instead of Vpddhi, the letter vfr comes before n in the- case
of ^n &c The proper form, therefore, would have been qjlmPut : 11 The irre-
gularity is, however, explained by saying that the prohibition contained in
VI I. 3. 8 which applies when n*n * s followed by fw, applies also to vn follow-
ed by f^» In fact, the rule VII". 3. 4 does not apply, whenever the word
V^ is followed by an affix beginning with the letter f n
frcHifr*4l tftafo n 1* n q^rft n ^wrf^PP , Otefe n
12. The affix a*? comes in the sense of 4 he lives
thereby \ after the words 4 vetana &c\ being in the third
case in construction.
Thus Vita ^Rr-Vrft^f: 'who lives upon wages — a menial servant*.
In the case of the word **$** the affix applies to the compounds, as well as
to the words forming the compound. Thus M I *3f»W , Wr5«*n, flfere *
27
Digitized by
Google
»ii %*t<a*-WYN Bk. IV. Ch. IV. 1. 16. ]
Wan, 2*npr(*nr)» 3 «rhmpc ( «nf*i? )> *» H3W: 5 *cra, 6 %* (*v), 7
c'flrci ( ^1%*. v^sr ) t 8 Jm* , 9 vrafltr ( nfei )» 10 5^, 11 v&n* 12 tifo, 13 vrtt-
*J, H *<far, 15 ftqr^ # ( fwnr ), 16 f|ff f 17 ww*, 18 ^rww, 19 *ro*r # i 20 W5|. M
13. The affix 3^ comes in the sense of • he lives
thereby 9 after-the words c vasna ', 'kraya', and 'vikraya', being
in the 3rd case in construction.
This debars *^r 11 Thus ^|pf ^ftaftr-qfcrap 'who lives by hire-hire-
ling \ In the case of m* and ft*»n the affix is applied to the words separately,
as well as to their compound. Thus friiftww , atfSrar, foBftfti: * a trader'.
14. The affix 9 as well as 3^ comes in the sense
of ' he lives thereby ', after the word ' &yudha \
Thuswg^^fcrfir-wyfa: (formed by ff), or *rrgfiTO: (by ^) *a
mercenary soldier \ __
15. The affix 59? comes in the sense of ( he con-
veys thereby \ after the words utsanga &c. being in the third
case in construction.
The word ijxfilr means f to take away to or cause to reach another
plate f . Thus ift«u34i : * borne upon the hip '. ^r^ft^ ' borne or transported
on a raft 9 .
1 9«Qf i 2 ?j^ f 3 *?yj ( othi )i 4 4NH*, 5 ^3**, 6 fae^ f 7 fcrai, 8 ot*.
JM^IlRv*: B^C H « II <l^» W!f^*r. f S*ll
if*- 11 ^^HiftHi^i^miiift mr tttftdmftF^t roaro «nRr n
16. The affix ^ comes, in the sense of c he con-
veys \ after the words c bhastra &c f being in the third case
in construction,
Thus Hkkm ?Tft-*?feRRi " who conveys by means of . a leathern bag,
a carrier-. The feminine will be VnsSft (IV, 1. 41). So \$*& f. *tf*5ft H The
Digitized by
Google
[ Bk. IV. Ch. IV. J. 19 %w flr$%-t* 11 * 81 $ •
word mg means a leathern bellows by which the iron is heated, or a leathern
bag in which grain &c r is carried.
17. The affix 5^ comes optionally in the sense of
' he conveys \ after the words c vivadha \ and ' vivadha \ being
in the third case in construction.
In the alternative, the general affix «*g will apply. Thus fira^T ftfll
-flfVw f. ft^faift ; So also fof^rr* f. *NT*$fc M When the affix is TO, we
have \*fi**J : in both cases, the feminine being Vrf^%t II
The word ftw and 4fat 'are synomyms both meaning * a piece of
wood carried on the shoulders to carry loads, on the road.' ftqfim: meaning
• a carrier of loads, a pedler 9 . The real sOtra is fiprm ftrT^, the K4sik& has
added 4tV* from a V^rtika.
^TUF^f^nJPn: II \* B M^lft D BTQ[ 9 $fcfd<hl4i: H
18. The affix WJJ comes, in the sense of ' he con*
veys* , after the word $&f*&^r in the third case in construction.
Thus yfiPwm fifir ?nT «nnfr-^MteRt **: 'a deer which carries (or
entices away) into crooked ways * or • a hunter who hunts by coming stealthily
on his prey'. $Rf&MU f*fl| «Tjjm*-«inftfiW: qwfc c a blacksmith,— who
carries burning coals on an iron forge \
The word jftfeflVM means ' crooked motion, and the iron-forge of the
blacksmiths'.
19. The affix 39^ comes, in the sense of 'comple-
ted thereby* after the words 'akshadyftta &c\being in the third
case in construction.
Thus ira^ft Prfn^-«TRf^f%^ V* * enmity — which was growing but
has been completed by gambling 9 . So 41 ^Ulfil Will
1 WHpr, 2 ^rjgCT (mp ), 3 ^ffqnrw (^ ). 4 *fTO?* # . * TO^F*, *
v**FTfo 7 mrnpnr't 8 »rm*m, 9 *ritronr, 10 ir^r«. 11
Digitized by
Google
-Si* m Kn m*}h~T%\i - I Bk. IV. Ch IV. J. m.
jftr ii Rf*nAn, fjn: ftwftHrti farcft $11% i w*iifM«i 'uroft i**fii ii
, ; 20. The affix xt^ cornea always after the words
ending in the affix pir, the in sense of 'completed thereby \
The Rr here refers to the affix f ktri f (III. 3. 88). Thus the root JTW
takes Pr and forms qfef, which is not a complete word, but must take the
augment H%> to form a full word. Thus ^f+fov+T£-<lfera^ 'what is
completed by being cooked 9 . So from $*v we have q^+fa* + *V-*l9pn|
(VI. 1. 15) : from 5^ we have vftf* N
The word pfc* in the sfttra indicates that the affix for never comes
singly by itself, all words ending in ' Ktri ' are invariably followed by ir^ also*
In fact q^ way be regarded as an invariable augment of the affix * Ktri '•
Vdrt: — After a word ending in an affix denoting 'condition', the
affix fif^ is added. Thus *fapi Pcfrt-qiEw* ( *?+*? IIL 3. i8 + f^)„30
*w R
fff^f!^ 11
21. The affixes 4 kak * and 4 kan * come respective-
ly after the words ' apamitya ' and ' y&chita \ when the sense
is that of completion.
Thus nmffiww* 'debt \ and t ffflrcrepj * a thing begged for use \ The
word iroftttl is formed from the root HI with the prefix «TO, and the suffix Wft
(III. 4. 19). The wit is changed to **^ f and f substituted for *rr (VI. 4. 70).
The word is an Indeclinable, and therefore the anuvritti of In does not run
here.
4n±\L II ^ II M^lPl II HU&> 39^9
ffH: 11 %^^r 1 ^i^iyH^I^i^H^^RHHtJ *^j *(&&& H^l9 w
22. The affix 3^ comes, after a word in the third
case in construction, when the sense is c mixed therewith/
The word ibc is understood here. The word frfnr means unification,
mixing &c. Thus q^iT ^e-^Ff^fflL 'smeared with Curds.* »ttftf*rere, \II^K*ML
qttn^P^U The word 'sanskftam' (IV. 4. 3) and 'sansfshtam' should be
distinguished. The former refers to a case where by the combination of two
things, a something better is produced ; no such idea of bettering is to be
found in Q^V N
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. IV. J. 27 1 *** « . 81$
fftrs u i^wiftft * rad **fir 3^* 1 v^tro* *
23. The affix (ft comes after the word ' chfirna'
when the sense is ( mixed therewith/
This debars *^ II Thus 5$ t tigtr-^frft S ^JIT. • cakes sprinkled with
powder/ ^rfKt WIT: «
^wrog^nwii *&&& n store, fjn.n
ffti: it ^yywRiftFF^q ngt m*wiffln, *qfir a
24. The affix 33? meaning 'mixed therewith',
is elided by luk, after the word lavana.'
Thus **dft &$*:-> *TO 'mixed with salt 9 asmw:^ 'soup mixed
with salt* So wr* *n*. *Wtt mn: (1. 1. 5 1). The 5^ elision takes place when
the word i*to is used as a noun, and not as an adjective.
25. The affix «n^ comes after the word ' mud<*a/
when the sense is 'mixed therewith. 9
This debars r*£ II Thus «fhc •ftfV 'rice mixed with mudga-pulse.' 4Mfr
If* u Iftro 1 hwwAih p q iftMflfr » «Kg«fl*m | ft' g i^fcretwtefaw^ i^ raft
26. The affix 3^ comes, after a word denoting a
condiment, being in the third case in construction, when the
sense is ' sprinkled therewith. 9
Thus tot *rf*r*-*nfrw*' sprinkled with curd/ &fap(, onto* I Why
do we say • denoting a condiment 9 ? Observe 4<%3lM&*i tftf*: *
27. The affix z*i comes in the sense of 'it exists/
after the words ' oj as/ 'sahas,' and 'ambhas' being in the
third case in construction.
Thus *ffrrar *&ft- ^nrftrft : y: ( a hero 9 lit possessed with energy.
So also :_gn(ffTC « a thief.' »TFHT%^ • a fish. 1
Digitized by
Google
816 *roftr n*wm [ Bk. IV. Ch. IV. §. 3d'
28. The affix «* comes, in the sense of l it exists, 9
after l ipa/ l loma/ and ' kftla/ preceded by ' aim ' and ' prati, •
the word being in the second case in construction.
The word n^ shows that the words must be in the second case in cons-
truction. The verb *%% is intransitive, how can it take an object, and how can
it be in construction with an objective case? The words in the accusative after
the verb *&% are not its objects, but are used as adverbs qualifying the sense
of the verb, and adverbs pre always put in the accusative case. Thus mfft
*$%-*nftft*P (qfiftrmr *TNt s fa* the «CT changed to f V. 4. 74 and VI. 3. 97)
retrograde L e. • which is unfavourable. 9 So «ll«4?fi4i : * favorable.' qfimTl*w:
4 inverse ' <Hwfti*Ui» ; * direct/ qiffr$Pw :, HH^ft* . The two words mftrTO and
iMl^ff^cK mean ' unfavourable ' and • favourable ' respectively.
yft: 11 Mft*<aw i iftflqiqHqMg*^fr«"*<t *$ ^mr *m% 11
29. The affix 5^ comes in the sense of ' it exists/
after the word * parimukha/ being in the second case in con-
struction.
Thus qft$g qrffa- «riftgrere : * being before the face,' • being ne^r or pre-
sent.
The word ^ in the sfltra implies that the affix applies to other words
also not mentioned. As HlRmfM*' h The word qft£3T i» a " AvyaylbhAva
compound (II. 1. 12). Ifqft has the force of exclusion (I. 4. 88), then Hlfl^fcw;
will mean * a servant who always avoids the face of his master t*n^S<t
TOftOTT 9'%TOt T WJ%t W and if qft means • all round, 9 then the word will mean
l€ a servant who is always in the presence of his master— inr **tf*PTt J** fNIWnt
^S% w ll
fftt.11 irfSft fW«uuWi«MiCH5<fi«wR*tHi| *$ s^rit outfit, q^t^ftoftarcppi nft ;^-
*nc*Rf 11
wt* ii j^rfeflrtrft qm* ii
30. The affix Zf> comes after a word in the second
case in constrution, when the sense is 4 he gives ', the motive
being mean.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. IV. J 33 ] «^rai9-v^ II Ztf
Thus fjint nraflr -ftgtfNr 'a usurer who gives for the sake of double*
i, e. who charges cent per cent interest The word fopr means fopini 'for the
sake of double*. Similarly Vtf*TO *
VArt:— The word jfar is changed to f$i% before this affix. As,fl%
*vqji%-*n$far 'a usurer* 'who gives for the sake of increase' Or the word
jyft may be taken as a separate word synonymous with |faf H
Why do we say mfrVwith a mean motive*? Observe to* 9ron9 •TH^T.
•the debtor gives double*.
«n*% i ^PtMVi*mnwi»«it iwrthri viv^fdrft raft *ro ■
31. The affixes TJ^t and u^ come respectively after
the words 'kusida' and ' dasaik&da*a \ when the sense is 'he
gives for a mean motive \
The word $&f means 'interest*. The lending of ten (vw) on a condi-
tion that the borrower will pay eleven (qqiTTO) after a month is called jtailWll
This sfttra debars v^ll The difference between the two affixes H* and r* is in
the accent (VI. 1. 197 and 163). Thus $*f +H-^ft?^ fern. .$&*& (VI. U
4i> So ftarjft*' fcm Ifrll
32. The affix 37 comes, after a word in the se^
cond case in construction, when the sense is 'who gleans
that 1 .
Thus gfcpfsgfl l - Wftfop f who picks up jujubes •. W I H l ft^ , *rf*re II
To pick up every grain (qra) fallen on the ground is called **€F N
Tx$Gt n ^5 • m^iA 11 <i$(k 1
33. The affix <r$ comes after a word in the second
case in construction, when the sense is 'he aids or protects
that 1 .
Thus *RT* wfa - *Prinrar< f a spectator \ lit € who aids an assembly by
his presence \ So also friftftftro II
Digitized by
Google
*i« - *TO%-*M t Bk. IV. Ch. IV. $ 36
■ ii 1 ■■! .ii 1 ■ ■ ■ j 1 ■
fi» n msft fmmMH<iM w^wN friUflawfrHig *$ reftr «*ftr it
34. The affix 3^ comes after the words ' Sabda *
and * dardura', being in the second case in construction, when
the sense is " who makes a sound or a croaking \
Thus ^nct ^rrfif--^iTfc^fr. 'who makes a sound' I.e. a Grammarian.
So yfatt ' who makes a croaking noise like a frog (dardura)' f. e. a potter.
35. The affix z% comes after the words in the second
case in construction denoting birds, fishes, or wild beasts, when
the sense is ' who kills that \
Thus qftrto ^T-«nm^ 'a bird-killed. The affix applies not only to
the word-forms qfir &c, but to words denoting birds &c (See I. 1. 68).
Therefore, we have forms trnfffrlP, matter; ftftfoi: II So also with ire*, as,
•irflTO,^, <oniRw: f tlijtQ*: n So also with 5«n f as, mftfc, #f^ t *fo*
mRm*hi*i fegfo B \% B q^B^fop^^ftsfeB
5^1 : 11 qftT^nwraftfi t ft^iqHuffMatfl^dR^g *% *wra* mfiir 11
36. The affix &$ comes also in the sense of
"who stays", after the word ' paripantham \ the word being
in the second case in construction,
Thus qfcFit RrtRr- mRHfow w- i*n4 ^SRcti firefir, * *r <F*n* «qr«*
HfgRT € a thief lit " who stays at roads, a high way man "• The ^ in the sfitra
indicates that the sense of (fcr * who kills ' of the last, is to be connected with
this sfttra by the conjunction • and \ Thus qft^qr ff% -*lftqf**OT. n
The phrase • being in the second case in construction* is understood
in this sdtra, why has then the word q ffrT^Pt been shown in the second case in
the sGtra, for it is jt mere superfluity ? No, it shows the secular form of the
word. The word qftTO is synonymous with qftTO, the latter, however, having
other senses also.
^t^raf& B
Digitized by
Google
Bit. IV. Cn. IV. §. 40) Rift—** i Bij^
37. The affix s*r comes, in the sense of " who
runs ", after a word having *tra as its second term, and after
the words ' padavi ' and ' anupada \
Thus*«*iitf qrcTJr- fr»¥»nftq i > *who runs on a highway*. So also
0*fc»llf*W M Similarly qrtftav T Wifo g * n The word n& means • a way \
grp^rr^^i n 5* n *r&fo 11 *roE*TO s^, *r n
^tfrift mpmi *TPFTO**nTftft ftflMiqHuteiq&t%qIVHi«t *» ra» *nfir, tout-
38. The affix asj as well as z$ comes after the
word ' fikranda', being in the second case in construction, in
the sense of ' who runs \
The word «Tnts*v means • a place where persons weep* e. g. a battle*
field. It also means 'weeping 9 'invoking 9 &c The difference between t$
and wr is in the accent Thus *ff*»t Wft-«fTOfc& or vifefaqp, C «TOft^
• a person who runs to a place where cries of distress are heard \
M<{l*KM<{ IGTf^T II ^ II s<*iA B q^, UVKM^Hj ^RTT1% (zqft U
ffift n <tto*t ?wt ret q wwjmvwmn frftftr fM^tM^wyii*fl<3qftH"i<l *y
39. The affix z* comes in the sense of ' who
takes \ after a word having ' pada f as its second member,
the word being in the second case in construction.
Thus sjfaf i^qrTft«3fafipr*> so also sftMiHRfr : H The word TOCIV k
used in order to prevent the application of the rule when qj is preceded by
the affix *J H
si^r^gpfe^nj * 11 «o 11 q^rft 11 aflwra, *n& f gqmrat, 9 11
40. The affix 5^ comes in the sense of 'who takes'
after the words ' pratikattfha \ 'ortha', and 'lal&ma' being
in the second-case in construction.
Thus qfipR"* yymfir- U l f< I ^P^ : II So also *nfW, fHWfotf » Thd
word ufd<» u * here is an Avyayt-bhAva meaning qpt qjw* qfir, and,, not gfimf. "
«5°*- Jifirsp*, for to the latter no affix is added
28
Digitized by
Google
Sao *pran&**?fti9-«*[ n Bk. IV. Ch. IV. $. 44. 1
•^lf*l«MUI iHNlfafa **i»*ti<ii
.41. The affix 3^ comes after the word 'dharma 1 ,
being in the second case in construction, in the sense of* who
practices, that 1 .
Thus q$* *rcRr-MTffai u religious*. So also STreft^F "irreligious,
undutiful w , by a Virtika.
42. The affix 3^ as well as z^ comds after the
word * prati-patham', in the second-case in construction, in the
sense of ' who goes f .
Thus itffrpreflr -fonfqqp or m R fqt V 4Tt " who goes along the road"
the sqj causes Vpddhi (VII. 2. 118) whilst *^ does not
ff^: 11 ^WRnTfv«r. wfrmwftft fWtaroH*fai: qq3tflwi(W"iq *fj iRiwIr *rarRc n
43. The affix 3^ comes after words in the
second casein construction, denoting combination, in the
sense of l who assembles there f .
The word *mm means 'combination, collection &c\ The word
tpraraPl ls in the P ,ural number in the sfttra, indicating that the svarupa-vidhl
(I. 1. 69) does not apply ; the affix being applied not only to the word-form
OT3TO but to its synonyms also. unqfa means coming totgether. Thus oro-
qpt ot3i% - mmtfw 'who assembles in an assembly'. So also qiHlfcW - W®r
qftjfafT T H VJVi B M<tift II mRh^:, **rc r
$fa* u ^R^ft °^ *wwl *nfir iwqi^iKi*ftkn<«wR*iPqH3l 1 **tmn* 11
44. The affix uq- comes after the word ' parishad 9
in the sense of ' who assembles there ',
This debars TO |l Thus qfar* SPftfir-qifwn* 'one present in a
council, an assessor, a councillor 1 .
lRFn*Tiitt\n q^rAnlRrqrr. l qT(^r-)ii
Digitized by
Google
( BK. IV. CH. IV, |. 48 TOV**» : '•** 8at-
45. The affix **r comes optionally in the *" sense of
1 who assembles there/ after the word senft. . ^
This debars *« which comes in the alternative. Thus Ifrf^tftr-
^F** or Itftqp * a soldier, a member of an army '.
MV4fcl(s^0 1
46. The affix &* comes in the sense of 'who sees'
that/ after the words 'lalfoa* and 'kukkutf', in second case iri
construction, the whole word being a Name.
Thusq^TOftr-Bmrft^ * a non-attentive servant' lit "who alwayp
looks at the fore-head of his master from a distance, keeps himself aloof, does
not come near to perform any work.' So also qfN^Sqf : 'a religious mendic-
ant, a Bhikshu. 9 The space of ground over which a hen can fly without fall-
ing, is to be understood here by the word ffi^gfl U In other words, a small space
of ground, for hens cannot sustain their flight for a long distance. Therefore,
owing to the smallness of space, the mendicant walks looking down over the
ground, and hence he is called &i4$ftq»* II The word also means 'a hypocrite
with down-cast eyes.' ;
wFTvn^TOiittvfO irrfa n ?tft, vp& (ctO a
47. The affix z*z, comes after a word in the sixth'
case in construction, in the sense of 'its usage*.
The word q*k means 'usual/ • relating to custom'. The word ir* shows
the case of the word. Thus jftgyrermrai q*3 q ftlWUlfl»fc* 'the custom-house
laws or usages.' So also «Tra?fopfc mmftWiH, •ftfaqpc, II
48. The affix *nn comes in the sense of * its law/
after the word 'mahishi 9 &c.
This debars thak. Thus *fam ^-mftTO * the usages of queens.' So
irnirnwLii
iifWfc 3inrnRr°, 3*irrofr, 4*tftar. Sflfrftar. 6«r?^f^irr, 7 s^ffcr,
Digitized by
Google
822 TO V«*-«*H t BK. IV. CH IV. J. 6U
vipst n* 11 «mi q*pft 11 *pn, *n* n
• 49. The affix *^ comes in the sense of ' its law/
after a nominal-stem ending in qg |
This debars s^U Thus ^q^-qhlV the office of a Potjt 1 cfftnra
•the office or duties of an Udgitp/ Padamanjari gives the example of frm-
$3 k^pn under this sfttra, though the word ^ occurs in the list given in thfe
preceding sfltrau The Hottf of the preceding sfltra means a Ritvik, here it
means an invoker.
Vdrt: — So also after the \irord h* : As «RCT ^r-llft II
Vdrt :— So also after the word fl*rt%$ the ^ affix being elided Thus
Vdrt :— So also after the word f^nwft^, its fa affix also being elided.
Thus ftm^i^+«n»-%HTI^P^M
gftr: ii ireqfire 1 Hfl«HqU**m tSuiftH-iff *g to» »ra3 1 *rofofor vftm**m n
50. The affix s^ comes in the sense of 'its tax/
after a word in the sixth case in constrnction.
The word «TTO3 means • Government-tax,' •price,' wages/ •rent' &c,
coming from the root «ttoI ' to purchase. 9 Thus jT?3TOlHrai wr^raw «■ <{h*"**llft*i
. So also irrrf^r:, ftfrtt, urefap n
Are not i**4 (IV. 4. 47) and tram the same? No. Dharmya is a legal
due, and religious ; Vhile an 'avakraya' may be a tax exacted from a people by
oppression, and so transgressing dharma.
3^FT VTO II \K tl M^lPl II cTf , «*W, TWHC II
51. The affix 5* comes in the sense of 'this is
whose saleable commodity/ after a word in the first case in
construction denoting the thing to be sold.
Thus STSjir VI srei-snsJ^niP " a cake-vendor/ So also ti|t$nV|i:,
I Digitized by VjOOQLC
Bk. IV. Ch. IV. |. 5« ] WW fa*Pt-«lw » 8*j
52. The affix s*r comes, in the sense of 'this is
whose saleable commodity/ after the word 'lavana.'
This debars *$, the difference being in accent Thus ira^t q°roK*°
mwfamz * a salt-vendor/
ffir: n ftrcrc ff^m^r y^remf *nfir tire s^fiwmRtPw t fOw? »
53. The affix 555 comes in the sense of 'this is
whose saleable commodity/ after the words 'kisara' &c.
This debars r^u The word firot &c all denote perfumes. Thus
fcwn TOTO-ftraft*: f ftroftSft (IV. 1 41), hfar- (itifo m
ft| # , 10 <ntf •, 11 tfiqp*, 12 fAire*.
\f*n n wwww«*wwd UTOft «*ft ire* q^PwwfWSl 1 *0nnre 1 q%qtft
64. The affix 97 comes optionally, in the sense
of 'this is whose saleable commodity* 'after the word 'aal&lun 1 .
This debars sq? which comes in the alternative. ^nHJ is a kind of
sweet scent Thus tram tproq-^ferev / tptrgiftlt In the alternative
with w^ f mrn*&; / tnmgSft *
ftffiroivtit wfa 11 ftrero (s^) 11
55. The affix z* comes in the sense of this is
whose Art, 9 after a word denoting Art, in the first case in
construction.
Thus 3?f?r?* fa^Pre*- irffjfaT: " a drummer n t * an expert in playing
on mpdanga drum". So also qprfir^:, Vw 11
^A*«jii4«iMiawiH 11 \\ 11 tRcrfa 11 iifiw: f F^kr^wi[ f «r«ra-
MrMIR II
gffr 11 H^^mfi^MiNUHHidiwuiin ym» Hqflr tiwi RifrHft^dtlHt^m^ i ffgmre M
56* The affix zn^ comes optionally in the sense
of 'this is whose Art 1 , after the words 'macWuka f f and
'jharjhara*.
This debars z^ which comes in the alternative. Thus *m»*M ftl*f
*W-*l?Htf or 11*$!**:, so (nfrc and croft*: U
Digitized by
Google
8*4 HTO lflr:-*Cu . [ Bk. IV. Ch. IV. §. 66
sr*?jn* ll V9 II <J?rftr II suborn (zm)
*ftr: m «*$$* i nftfir nuHiqquiwfai hot* t^irerar *nRr «wn wrong mri *-
57. The affix sq* comes in the sense of * this is
whose weapon', after a word denoting 'a weapon', and being
in the 1st case in construction.
Thus irffc: TOoprcq-9nfeqn 'a swordsman'. So mfitap, ^ifon*:,
m <> «i vh^ H * I' V H **ift II ^^ «**, ^r II
ff%: II TOMATO**!?! *IJ RHOT H*fir f ^*KHl**$ II
58. The affix ssj as well as z& comes in the sense
of "this is whose weapon ", after the word q <^vi n *
This affix Vfj is added by ^, the difference being in accent Thus
II WA& or fa^qfll*: II qt*V% means' an axe*.
lifoqv^JWu i S^ 11 q^H*ifo-*i^:,frR^II .
Sfa: it iiftwfTO«?rHjnfN^ ro*t *rcfir w*w MgiuiPifiui(tqfi4N*i i sgftTOf* ii
59. The affix |^ comes in the sense of "this is
whose weapon", after the words 'sakti' and 'yashft 1 .
This debars t^ii Thus qfcRt lyyrfHCT ^frntfN^y So also *ff£hli: II
gn%RTfe#g wfa: II $o II q^lfa II ^feMlftd- fcOTC*tfe: (**) »
wfrf s ii «r?&ttft 1 srftfic Jvrra*tfWfr sffer *nfer ft* i^**-. *r^*% stqnr to*** «^
60. The affix g^ comes in the sense of ' this is
whose belief', after the words l asti ', nasti and *dish*a '.
Thus * my n <Tq re-*Trffrre»: 'who believes that It is* i. e. a here aftec
«TTft^: 'whose belief is that there is no Here after", an athiest \(&i: 'whose
belief is that it is fate', a fatalist, feW** 'fate 9 .
The affix does not apply in the sense of belief in general, but to a par-
ticular sort of belief. Thus qi<fi<£N? fr fft 1W iRnffcl *T miRd*:, an Astika
is he who believes that the Hereafter is. Contrary to him is a *TTfltT3P wTio
does not believe in a Hereafter. A person who believes what is demonstrated
by proof, and nothing eke, may also be called VcftT- € a positivist \ These
various other senses are to be found from dictionary and general literature.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. IV. § 63 ] irro «wfa^ppfr -*n| •* '**S
*IWh II ^{ II *I^Tft N %fl<AH (CT[) >
61. The affix ?? comes in the senfe of ' whose
habit is this \ after a word in the first case in construction.
Thusirunwr* *ftara*-*nsfto: "one whose habit is to cat cakes'.
Similarly tn«$6ta s , qtaft^P W The act of eating, and its habit are qualities
understood in the sense of the affix.
62. The affix ur comes in the sense of ( whose
habit is this', after the words • chhatra &c\
This debars *$ tl Thus Qtfqfr*>rei-OTn 'a pupil*, lit • whose habit
is to cover (chhadan) the defects of his master*. The word pn occurs in the
list It must always be prefixed by some upasarga; thus ureiTt &f!V
According to Patanjali &nf means 'a pupil, because, £$»QTOn[ ?p^r fa***
»OT*H OTf Q: M a preceptor is like an Umbrella, the preceptor covers or protects
the pupil like an umbrella **. Or fttSpr ^ 3SWTOI qfc'TCRl: * a pupil ought to
maintain or protect his Preceptor, as an Umbrella \
1 fPii 2 ftror 3 *fij ( jdf ), 4 wr (wwTt ten$ *rewT) f 5 53W f G^nr*
7RrRrw°, 8 touto, 9$ftr(«flO, io*ri*, uftHrar. 12 w^ 9 13 ***, fi* «??er,
15 fmm\ 16 ftfim (jtotom), 17 wr*. 18 w^m\ 19 *a*r (0°, 20 «w°, 21 f-
m •, 22 *f .
63. The affix z$ comes, in the sense of " this is
his act,' occuring in study " after a word in the first case in
construction, if such a word is an act (karma) which has
occurred (vrittam) in study (adhyayana).
Thus qchH»*Kmtfl tfi^'llHi -^fclPw * a pupil who commits one ( q*j )
error (BT^m) in reading*, &c. literal translation being something like "one
errorist**. Similarly W^Hv ifafarars &c He whose, in recitation, at the
time of examination, there is the occurrence of one mistake or false reading!
Digitized by
Google
8*6* «*& frft ft** ft [ BK. IV. Ch. IV. S 66
is*| called V*rfo*ff: u So who commits two mistakes is called W^ttT. d In
short, in giving explanatory analysis of taddhita words like ^rrf^^ &c, the
whole phrase nurafr 9i3*TOL must be employed*
fftr. it wj^^^t *rcii iren^*r»j?farsni%*!f3n* s^» mtfk *rcfir *pr* sfafawft %*
64. The affix 3^ comes, in the sense of c this is
whose act occurring in study ', after a compound having a
polysyllabic word as a prior member.
This debars s$ II Thus ;— mreFUffl *h*fi^mtfi f^TPl •TW-imir-
Pm*i 'an examinee who commits twelve mistakes in his reading 9 . Sotfqfror-
f^P, %j$mf^W || The word * ? sq% in these sfitras means the' • error \ especi-
ally in accent, L e. he who makes an accent •TJ^m which ought to be udatta,
or vice versa.
fifctf W$V> II \\ II M^lPl II ^TO-^IT: (3*"j) H
^nr: 11 iro&drc 1 irflftr wtKiiiAwiffi toqSJ" v^ irarat *ro% QMommtiHtt fWi ^f-
65. The affix W comes after a word expressing
food, in the first case in construction, in the sense of " this is
wholesome diet for whom".
The words tf^and «rcq(IV. 4.51) are understood. The word fW
governs dative (II. 3. 13, Vart). But the sfttra is tr*W fH *WP» the word *TW
being in the genitive case, how is this ? Here «K3 should be changed to
dative viz. tft& f^f HW ' this/or whom is wholesome diet 9 . The best way
however, to remove this objection is to read sfttras 65, and 66 in this wise :
^5ft*TOPire& andtfiR* ftvr&ll Thus ii^rt f?tr^-«TTjft«li: € He for
whom cake is good food ' i. e. who eats cakes with benefit, or who is fond of
cakes. So also mv^ffoft: , *fapW II In analysing these taddhitas, such as
«rrjT^: &c, the word fft or its synonym, and a verb denoting eating should
be employed.
d<**ft ^O^d (^*H II $% II U^lPl II ?T^*w^^Vft^*H-S"^ II
,5^*11
66. TWaffix z^ comes in the sense of " to whom
this is to be given right fully " 9 after a word expressing the
thing to be given, in the first (tad) case in construction, the
force of the affix being that of a dative (asmai).
Digitized by
Google
BKIYCHIV$<58.), W*«* 827
The word tftftft*?* means Prttftn L e. wtf*i^ftm fofe 'to be given
by appointment or rightfully*. Thus «m ^hnnrft fk&t <taft- «rn?3reftre : f a
Br&hmaQa always entitled to occupy the foremost seat at dinner 9 . So also
*n*FnK* 'entitled to get cakes', ^jfw II Some say that the word Pjy*
means ft*t 'always '. According to them «n*fiR|t would mean wgn PmmS*
ffrp% 'to whom always cakes are given *. •
^fa- m w^mfSrrro^Hrf f£*% ?*tfd *nftr tr*& toftr Pts^RftSferfw'nf i *<flsqif t i
67. The affix faaac comes in the sense of * to
whom this is to be given rightfully ', after the words ttror and
This ft** debars «qr I The f of ft is for the sake of pronunciation,
the r indicates that the feminine is formed by^fr* (IV. I. 15). Thus ««pir
ftg*E*nfr <fanfr-*nftra* f. mroU ' who is entitled to get rice gruel \ So also
The difference between *qt and ftz% Is In accent, the former having
udfttta on the final (VI. I. 165X the latter on the initial (VI. 1. 197). The
feminine of TO and fts* will both be formed by <fl* (IV. 1. 15)1 Now the
affix *w resembles ftv^ both in accent (VI. 1. 197) and in feminine (IV. 1. 15)1
Why was not r*£ used instead of ftz% for it would have produced exactly
the same forms ? True, as regards the words WIT and Trafac the affix r3T
might have been employed instead of ftz% U According to some, however,
the affix fw^ applies to *far and iffa* separately also. But z* cannot be
applied to *nvr as it would cause Vrfddhi (VII. 2. 117) which ft*^ does not
Thus i¥tfsi+£v*-tYfcf3raP, f. *rcft?& ll With *n the form would have been
ulUfofc* which is not wanted.
The word vpvr is a Past Participle (?k) of m ' to cook. 1 The W is not
changed to ^ as required by VI. I. 27. This is an anomaly. The nisthA if is
changed to or (VIII. 2. 43;. The form *mrf is also found, as in VI. i. 36, and
the regular form is ^*-*ftal(VI. 1. 27). \
4|Thl4U|r^d<^4IH II \t II ^H^ II TfTgTf-gn ^rHd<^lH II
?(Pff : m "CfTOifRiirRrat *uhwmwu irc& fcnr ftutfifti^firw*!, faro t^Rtsronp 11
68. The affix «ni^ comes optionally after the word
bhakta, in the sense of ' to whom this is to be given right-
folly.'
This debars s^ which comes in the alternative. Thus H^fty <ffa%
fHa^-HnR.* M . In the alternative nn%W- 'a regularly fed 'L c a retainer, . .
29
Digitized by
Google
828 c*TO% **» [ Bk. IV. Ch. IV § 7**
era 1 ftgw. R ^ B q^rft II ssr-fogqnfew) I
3T*n m iniftr UH*fln*wPH*wf; i«wifiH»*i?f w£ irei% *rtfir i Pfjro sftap^r «*rer-
69. The affix &r comes, in the sense of ' appointed
there,* after a word in the seventh case (tatra) in construe-,
tion..
Thus TO^TOTHPEn PVZ^K - qteronS^P 'a superintendent of custom-house. 9
So also «nwrt^n f •mnNr:, nl^firan, tftrrar. U The word ipfftff?* is a Tat-
purusha compound formed by II. I. 46. The word niyukta here has a differ*
ent meaning from that in IV. 1. 60, hence its repetition here.
wu<irdi<tg q c n aso n q^»«nircRri^a5jB
70. The affix aac comes in the sense of "appointed
there," after a word ending with 'ag&ra/
This debars z\l The difference is in accent and want of Vpddhi.
Thus ^mft fajw -^ront*:, «fl«miR<fi* , iimmilUE 11
*Hftll
71. The affix 3^ comes in the sense of " who stu-
dies there," after a word in the 7th case in construction, de-
noting an improper place or time.
The word gyfrrare means the time or place of study, which is pro-
hibited by sacred institutes. «ranrara[ means one who studies. Thus
»TOT5s*ftif " ViHllR^* 'who reads in a funeral ground. 9 ^giqfttfe 1 : 'who stu«
dies where four roads meet' So also Mfl&UlH ^^' Ml ffi^S 'who reads on
the 14th lunar day.' So also suhwSWi* II
Why do we say • improper time and place? 9 Observe $&stfHt, SjfrJ-
72. The affix. 3*5 comes, in the sense of " who
transacts business there in/'after compounds ending in *ka«hina w
Digitized by
Google
Bk. iv. ch. iv. 5 75. ] wrAf-«i* 8*
and after *prast&ra f and 'sansth&na/ being in seventh case
in construction.
Thus *roffe% ^nn%» ^hroWNn * whose occupation is f n a bamboo-
thicket* or 'who does what is proper to be done in such a place* L e. *fo4%
w ftw *ai*Hr *t w^ijfirefir 11 So also gntreftftraE 11 So also uremic
73. The affix 3^ comes in the sense of * who
dwells', after the locative word ' nikata.'
This rule applies in forming epithets, denoting such persons, who am
allowed under the Sacred Institutes, to dwell near human habitations. Thus
«MK U <W : are those ascetics who are ordained to dwell in forests, at least two
miles away from human habitations. tafoRrs are those ascetics who are allowed
*by the rule of their Order to live near human habitations. Thus fro&TOTV
- W*V ' an ascetic 19
74. The affix 355 comes in the sense of € who
dwells there/ after the word l Avasatha ' in the seventh case
in construction.
The $ of 83 is for accent (VI. i. 193X th « ^ k for &$ (IV. 1. 4I>
Thus tfroERr TOm» ni<iJ[w f who dwells in a house 'Lea domestic person
as opposed to an ascetic The feminine will be UPmfu^ a it So far was the
scope of n^as ordained in IV. 4. I. Henceforward other affixes will be
ordained.
75. In each aphorism from this one forward to
€ tasmai hitam ' (V, 1. 5), the affix *n* bears rule.
Thus in the next sfltra fljtffc ciynnHJpi we must read the affix **( 11
<W f 3**:, Rrayq: 11
^f: 11 irftfif flrftarenrcMi itiymi^Hff <nj«ft«iafiH~ni v&*m mfa u
Digitized by
Google
I .
8 jo TOfiMJll t Bk. IV. Ch. IV. 5 78
, ' , . 76. The affix *n* comes in the sense of 'what
bears it \ after the words ' ratha ', ' yuga ', and * prftsanga r 9
Jbeing in the second case in construction.
Thus v& l?Rr-^ 'what bears a car 9 a carriage-horse. Similarly
§**: • a yoke-bearing ox', uro*4: € being trained in a break \ qrajf is a piece of
wood placed on the neck of colts, at the time of breaking. This rule applies
to compounds ending with ratha, as, qrocui II See IV. 3. 121, 123 also. That
which carries will be called 'carrier* or *ft| therefore n^n ^Tf will get the affix *n
by IV. 2. 12a read with IV.3.i2i.Its special mention here indicates that the affix
will come, even after Dvigu compounds and will not be elided by IV. I. 88.
Thus {lr oft **flr = ftWl* M The tadanta-vidhi applies to this word as we have
shown under .' /. 3. 121. The word «*n has been already formed by the kpt
iaffix (III. I. 121), that v*q differs from the present, in accent when the word
takes the negative pnrticle, for that was by tct^ and this is by tflj, and therefore
by VI. 2. 156, srarq^will be finally acute when formed by *njW The word cit
must mean • the portion of a car' for the application of this rule, and not a
cycle of time &c Therefore not here jsnr ^fir KT*tt nfk frit *r U
^frT* M WSftfhifa I *** f^d*Hl^f4^*JltlWl(Wtfl«Ulfi*iHSf ^l tfjfSwHTOzft' H^f:|l
77. The affix *T^ and ^ come in the sense of
? what bears it \ after the word ' dhura* in the second case in
construction,
Thus gt *sfir-2*fc ( formed by *uj) the lengthening ordained by VIII.
2. Jj is prevented by VII. 2. 79 because 5c is Bha-stem, or iffor. (formed by
^$ VII. 1. 2) • a beast of burden '. This sOtra might have stood as^f^%
for mn would have been read into it from IV. 4. 75.
f frfs ii *wj<ft«i* i «^w^i<fiL<n*ii*iH«4fw<(ISIi*iRHHifia: insist *nfir w
78. The affix ' kha ' comes in the sense of ' what
bears it \ after the word 'sarva-dhur^ 1 , being in accusative
construction.
Thus srfgtf ^sfir-sSgfte (VII. 1. 2). The affix or applies to other
compounds also ending in 3c, e. g. ^THyflor, rf^nr^fcp II The word ot*C is a
compound of ^+2^(1 K 1. 49), the samAsAnta *r being added by V. 4. 74.
The word t£ being feminine, the whole compound would be feminine by II. 4.
26. The word *r^r«l in the sfitra should not be taken, therefore, as regulat*
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. IV. 5 82 ) %imMiit 83t
Ing the gender, for though it is in the masculine gender, the affix comes after
the feminine word. In fact erf** in the stttra should be taken as a nominal^
stem or pratipadika equal to OT^cr N
79. The affix ' kha 9 comes in the sense of ' what
bears it', after the word 'eka-dhur&' in the second case in
construction, and the affix is optionally elided also.
The elision is optional Thus qq^tf ^jfir- ^rgdhr. or q^C: N The
compounding is taddhittrtha (q^f $t *?fir) to which is added the sam&s&nta
•r, and then the affix tm T
80. The affix *m comes in the sense of ' what
bears it/ after the word 5PK7 in the second case in construc-
tion. •
ThuS to* *fft-fJF5K?: f an ox ' L e. what bears a car. This could be
evolved by if^miir* as OT37*** *nr a OT3i?: N The specification indicates that
tadanta-vidhi applies here, as % TO? *9ft»\OTi?:» and the affix is not elided
(IV. I. 88>
*Ri* m nwft^w 1 fgfltarara r ftfnra*ni?Htf qyftfimfeiRg va^rofr *n(% h
81. . The affix Z* comes in the sense of ' what
bears it/ after the words 'hala ' and ' 6ira,' in the 2nd case in
construction.
Thus ** **ft«»*TftraP a ploughman %^n *a plough ox. 1 The W£
would have come by IV. 3. 124, the specification shows tadantavidhi and non-
elision, as fcn33?:. WlfaP »
QT *l«kl M
82. The affix ^ comes in the sense of ' what
: bcars it after the word ' janS/ being in the 2nd case in con-
traction, the whole word being a Name.
Digitized by
Google
\
83* trfr-^' » [ BK. IV. Ch. IV. 1 86
Thus *nff **f*°*^T: ( a friend of a bridegroom/ fern. W: f a brides-
maid.' The word *pft means ' bride.' *^r lit means ' what bears the bride f
L e. who carries the coy bride to the bride-groom at the time of play &c
83. The affix qrat comes in the sense of 'what pierc-
es it/ after a word in the accusative case in construction, pro-
vided that, it is not a bow, with which anything is pierced.
ThusqTfrfiwfaf-fan(VI. 3. 53)*rafrp, 'what pierce the feet'Le.
pebbles. *j*ot *i«s*in f thorns ' L e. what pierce the thigh.
Why do we say " provided it is not a bow f tro^qr "? Observe vnft
f^fif ^CT> no affix is added here. This exclusion of ^3^ indicates that the
act of piercing must be such as not to be done by a bow &c Therefore the
affix does not apply to cases like these ^rt ft^lft. srwftwrif 11
^frf- 11 *rf^&* 1 ^MMmiMintf fWhircprnfatf *wJt2M(?n«*i2f *i?j snsq^) *nflr 11
84. The affix *jq[ comes in the sense of ' who
obtains it/ after the words ' dhana/ and ' gana/ being in the
second case in construction.
Thus itf **tt~qF3: 9 so also *mr* a TO^ is formed from «n by w*,
hence it takes the accusative.
araprop II £\ R M<tift II *wmi-*p I
85. The affix *r comes in the sense of 'who obtains
it/ after the word 3F*r, in the second case in construction.
Thus wp^ *cqT-9TTT* * fed ' f who has obtained food.'
*ftr. 11 qwmitiilffi fttftara'nrf^'nr ifiuifriH*! iiejuiq) *nfir ■
36. The affix *icj comes in the sense of ' gone/
after the word vasa, ' control ' being in the second case in
construction.
Thus tamp "for- ' come under control ' i. e. subdued Ua dependant
or servant TO:-**!* T^OT *rf SHI* i. c <it*QM«i|iQ »
Digitized by
Google
Bx. IV. CM. IV. 5 $a ] *nflrtr-**» *31
87. The affix tigf comes in the sense of ' in it is
visible/ after the word ' pada,' being in the first case in con-
struction.
Thus *f iVWl^tl-TO* «fa f mud • lit soft mud in which foot-mark
can be seen at every step. It describes mud which is neither very hard nor
very fluid, but having sufficient consistency to take the impression of the foot
So qup qfcrt: 'dust* fot in it also the impression of the foot can be seen.
It also means • the foot-path.* The word fqiPl means to$ f^t this being
the force of the kptya affix f ya* In fir H
88. The affix z^ comes in the sense of 'whose root
is eradicated/ after the word ' mfila,' being in the first case in
construction.
The word «TTtft from fg'to up root,* means ' uprooting/ -^n^v
y tf nmiinff -|yqr: * a kind of pulse' e. g. ^T I **f: M These cereals cannot b$
harvested without uprooting the whole plant According to Padamaftjarl the
word should be vrraff and not *TRff, with a % and not * tt
89. The word fr^mi is irregularly formed, being a
Name.
This word is formed by adding $*[ and * to VJ u It has ud&tta on
the final \j3«qr means that cow ( ^j ) which is given to a creditor in dis-
charge of a debt or as a pledge to satisfy the debt from her milt It is also
called <fhfjn*T H As^s«ut*j*% fjlft ll
90. The affix sq» comes in the sense of 'joined
with f , after the word ' grahapati ' in the third case in cons*
truction.
Digitized by
Google
\
?54 *n* [Bk. IV. Ch. IV. 5 91
* ■ — — — — — ^—— — ■ ■ 11 « ■ ■
Thus trftftpfr %2^P-nnh^: ' the Garhapatya Fire* :i.e,a Fire parti*
cularly consecrated by the Householder. The word q<u*tf of the last sAtra
should be read into it, thus iit$tois means a particular Fire, and not every
thing relating to a «r$qfif 11 The Fire in which husband (gphapati), together
with or joined with his wife, performs sacrifice is called Garhapatya. That
sacrifice cannot be perforined in Dakshinagni. Or that fire in which Gphapati
hymns are recited is called Garhapatya.
91. The affix 1<* comes after the words $t 'a boat',
q^q ' age \.v& € merit \ fk* l poison ', q-s* € a root % q&
1 capital % *farr € a furrow ', and gpjf i a balance \ in the senses
respectively, of " to be crossed ", " like ", " attainable " 9 " to
\>e put to death ", " to be bent down ", " equivalent to " f
" united with " and " equally measured ,f .
i The words in the above must be all in the Instrumental case in cons-
truction, for the sense of the affix shows that it should be so. Thus.
• • • i. TTOf OTfo-fl^te ' water ' ' a river ', lit what can be crossed by a boat .
2. *srccr,3wn*»*H$Jp 'a friend ', lit one alike in age.
3. qfo HT^R-Wwi 'what is attainable through dharma. Could, not this
form have been evolved by the next sfitra qqt<i«lH<t (IV. 4. 92) ?
No, qt&l formed by that aphorism means ' what is consistent with
* dharma' * what is just \ The present *t*$ refers to the * fruit ', the
other to the* act \
1 4. ft%T TO :s »fifal : r who deserves to be put to death by poison '.
" "~ 5« jtyMMimv * IjRWL w price " lit or to be overpowered or bent by the root *
n> The word STFfTO (which is formed from the root «f^ * to bow * by the
affix »ipj contrary to rule III. 1. 98 which reguired «j?j) f means siPr*
*CTfta* 'what ought to be overpowered': hence hhwl means 'the
price, worth, cost', because articles like 'cloth' &c are produced by
the out-lay of stock or capital («?*) ; ' price ' being a thing which,
because it is capital plus profit is superior to capital, and thus by
price or mfllyam, the capital or mOla is overpowered.
" v <K SfFf *PT*-|f!|: 'purchasable' lit ' equivalent to capital ' e. g. cloth qss
i. e. equivalent acquisition resulting from the employment of capital-
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. IV. $.93] »»*ft-*Hi 83$
7. tfhwr*f*Hf-lfM * a field '.lit * measured out by furrows 1 according
- to Dr Ballantyne. The word qftat is equivalent to %mf * united with
according to K&sika. tf«i therefore literally means 'a ploughed
field • L e. € what is united with furrows \ The affix will apply also to
words ending with tfhir, e. g. TCrcfto, T^PTCfai, ft%T*l *
8. Jpro ^rf^r*-g^HL M equal n lit * meted by the balance 9 , of^nr means
iVok : — The fruiU of good deeds, like happiness Ac, which are attainable or pripys
through • dharma* v may be said also dharmid anapetam bocaose an effect must 1 have a cause*
Hcnoe arises the doubt as to what is the difference between this and the next sntra. The
• anapetam* in the nextsotra means the fulfilling or following tho Law established by the
Bhishthas, and has no reference to its fruits. Because the effect of dharma b to destroy
dharma — L e. the fruits in the shape of happiness Ac lessen, and ultimately extinguish the
dharma. Therefore, the fruit of dharma, which is to be taken in this sutra, as referred to by
the word prlpya, is diametrically opposed to the practising of dharma, referred toby the word
anapeta of the next sutra.
92. The affix *n* cemes in the sense of 'not deviat-
ing therefrom', after the word * dharma,' * pathin/ 'artha' and
1 ny&ya 9 being in the ablative case in construction;
The ablative construction is inferred from its employment in the sfitra
itself. Thus w^m-WWL *just' • not deviating from merit* Similarly
ftro II xrofani <nlT ***fttf n \ 1UI, * 5 H$HnpfaW«fk: 'wholesome diet,' 4vw "fit/
fouVjust, suitable.' The word tfaraf (IV 4- 89) governs this sfltra also, and
hence the derivatives must have the above meanings.
jRr: 11 umni t iqmt4flH ir qiiiftHFta i cf* vm^^WHMli^rtci^nJ^i^Cf n&-
^WfH^Rf 11
93, The affix ^ comes in the sense of * made/
after the word c chhandas/ being in the Instrumental case in
construction.
Thus &im FrftSn-W*** 'made at will/ The word ©^ is here
synonymous with f «OT ' will, wish, desire, fancy' &c, and does not mean 'metre
or Veda.'
30
Digitized by
Google
\
83d will [ B)c IV. Ch. IV. 5. 97
94. The affix *TRf as well as ^ comes after < uras f ,
in the 3rd case in construction, in the sense of 'made/
The nn is drawn Into the sfttra by the particle *r M TOR Plffa:-«ftdr
• own son not adopted, lit produced through the loins/ With ^ the form
will be ro4: M These words denote son, and not anything produced from the
loin, because the word q^uq r (IV. 4. 89) governs this sfttra also.
95. The affix *rac comes in the 6ense of ' loved/
after the word 'hndaya/ in the genitive case in construction.
The construction is shown by the aphorism itself. Thus f&&* f^n: a f^
* pleasant to the heart* e. g. fqfta:, ya TCtlt But we cannot say f& jpcH
the word frgreri (IV. 4. 99) governs this sfitra also, and thus restricts the
meaning of the word.
96. The affix qr<J comes in the sense of a bond,
after the word ' hridaya ', being in the genitive construction,
when the word denotes a ' hymn*.
The word grot*! is understood in the s&tra. The word w^FT gives the
sense of the affix and is qualified by the word qjfif H That by which a thing
is bound is called **tf II The word qgft means here the Veda or the Vedic
hymn. Thus gfqtn I^Tjf^-fe: 'the Mantra by which the heart of another
can be brought under one's control \ I e. a *tffcfiT* if*: U
«^g (iq) ■
^ftf: II H<Jlft**lfaW TOHjfa^* ^i^lRjJtf^ SVRnFJ ^ JP*TOt *nfil »
97. The affix 1^ comes after words ' mata \
'jana f , and 'hala', in the senses respectively of 'means',
1 gossip ', and ' drawing ', the words being in the sixth case
in construction.
Digitized by VjOOQLC
[ Bjc IV. Ch. IV. 5. 101 «*««:« 837
Thus inrw «rt-^B|: 'the means of acquiring knowledge \ w&*
l^-^k» 'a rumour*, fm* qrf:-fa* 'ploughed*. So also ft***, ftfKfe
the tadanta vidhi applies W<fl«n» jfr *flpft V
98. The affix *ra[ comes after a word in the loca-
tive construction, in the sense of c excellent in regard there-
to'.
Thus *mg smj-sroMt (VI. 4. 168) conversant with the S4ma-Veda*.
So also %***:, «W, w**: &c The word *nj here means jrffa, or orm 'ex-
pert • and • fit ', and does not mean 3TOtTOff ' a benefactor or a good person \
When the sense is that of • good \ the sfltra qtSjr ft^K (V. i. 5) will apply.
99. The affix *par comes in the sense of ' excellent
in regard thereto \ after the word 'pratijana' &c.
This debars v\W Thus nftnft ^nf-Ulft^Nhf: (VII. I. 2) 'suitable
against an adversary 9 , or 'who is excellent for every person 9 . So also qj Jpffa,
1 *flWC, 2 f$gir, 3 tfgir, 4 frcgr, 5 t^yr, 6 trc$*, 7 to*5*> 8 *T3**s*, 9 *#
*ro, 10 frror, 11 to**. 12 isto*. •
44th |W| : II ^00 H U4ift II ^ThldLi ^ H
jf%s 11 lifetime **: vnrfr infif ini iii siR«taftHPnrt t iiqtanp v
100. The affix *t comes in the sense of € excellent
with regard thereto \ after the word ' bhakta \
This debars n*; thus, *r% ar^-lTO wfifc •rice* lit suitable or excel-
lent for food, ini? WJGt- II
*ift*^rcr. 11 \o\ 11 wiiA 11 mRn^'i, **rs 11
101. The affix oq* comes in the sense of ' excellent
with regard thereto \ after the word ' parishada \
This debars m« Thus qft*ft mUs-wRTO* • The affix <* is also
employed here. Thus qft^ft GT$: - <nft*f* ' one versed in* the affairs of a coun-
cil* 'a minister 9 .
Digitized by VjOOQLC
\
838 inr sis-* 11 [ Bk. IV. Ch IV. §. 105
^fa* II ^ITfl^: tlt)*48«( TO^fr *nfa f|W W^R^Rlflf^ft I 11911414: M
102. The affix s*r comes in the sense of c excellent
with regard thereto \ after the words ' kathft! &c.
Thus s^nit *nr-9nf*Ftt (gpiT+*^-«fitr+s^ VI. 4. 148-^1^+^
VI I. 2. 116) * a narrator of stories \ So Vliftqr: &c
1 SWIt 2 fofftlT, 3 fi*J4it|| # » 4 33STIT*, 5 ftS°*T» 6 5^1 ( $* ft^f 3PH^l) '
*RTO, 8 iftTO, 9 nr^Tf* (!) 10 jFr, 11 *n* ( «npf ), 12 ij^, 13 ipi, 14 VffgH M
fRf: ii -jpnf^: qfoqg*tirerft *nflt <pt hihRSuiRhP i m^ I qiinW H .
103. The affix ss^ comes in the sense of ' excellent
with regard thereto f , after the words c gucia &c. f
This debars ^ ll Thus g% OTy^nfiH*: 'sugar-cane* lit f excellent
in making sugar'. So q>fa*nfire : 'a kind of pulse' lit. 'excellent for making
gruel '. crr^pT: ' barley ' lit suitable for making saktu.
1 3T, 2 $c*!r*, 3 **$, 4 «^, 5 *i(3m, 6 |^ 9 7^, 8 OTPf f 9 ^tmr, 10 ***-
*•# ii *n*, 12 irare, 13 Prtre, 14 rorcr. « -
104. The affix ^r comes in the sense of * excel-
lent with regard thereto \ after the words € pathi \ • atithi \
4 vasati * and c svapati f .
This debars *i?jit Thus qflr onp-qiifcm, (VII. I. 2) 'provision for
journey', snfttani ' hospitality ', *TO%4 •habitable' as *mw4t nf*P, fW^I
• wealth, property \
*rarar *r. u ?o^ 11 ..qqpft 11 qroren , *: 11
?fa: II OTITO1H! TO^t **!% IT* MI^R^RhP^M^ I^ITO^ II
105. The affix ^ comes after the word -'sabh& 9 '
when the sense is f excellent with regard thereto.*
This debars q<i the difference being in accent (III. 1. 3, and VI. 1. 185)
Thus CTrotf STHf-^w ' refined • lit fit for society.
?r^: ii «*raivi * : **& unfa-** m$fc$HRH&tt &ufit 1 ^ramm \t
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV, Ch. IV. 5. no ] if* c^flr ii *39
106. The affix * comes in the chhandas after the
word 'sabhV in the sense of 'excellent with regard thereto.'
This debars n n Thus tfw in tfWwi &tt ***ITO <Kr *TW* Met a
refined, youthful hero be born to this sacrificer'.
H*4H<fl3 *P$t II \** II q^ II <d*4H<fi% , *T*fr (***) II
6im4l mfll 11
107. The affix *T^ comes in the 6ense of 'resident,
therein 1 , after the word ' sam&na-tlrtha\ in the locative cons-
truction.
The anuvptti of «TJ: now ceases. The word tfhfr means here «pi
•Preceptor 1 . Thus *pn% fftff *rifr-wfh4: (VI. 3. 87)— f a fellow-student \
who both dwell under the same preceptor.
108. The affix m^ comes in the sense of 'who
sleeps/ after the word < s&m4nodara f in the locative construc-
tion! and the ud&tta falls on the letter Bit N
The wot d %jfy$: is equal tofcra* 'remain'. Thus otrH* *lfoS : -tf-
ifRTTO; • uterine brother ' L e. who has slept in the same womb. See VI. 3. 88.
^?toh?omi q^rn^rracvil
109. The affix q comes after the word ' sodara,' in
the sense of ' who sleeps/ the word being in the 7th case in
construction.
By sutra VI. 3. 88 SHI* Is optionally changed to *r before the word
TO when n?i follows. Thus Qnr%?t tiror:**^** M Heretft is not udAtta,
as it was in the last ; the ud&tta here falls on n n
?Ar«*cftrii tt»n q^rfa 11 *&-^ftr 11
?f^5 11 fl%dft I OTPfcRttfira ifiwRHH^ tt^fiJ fofa TOS|^ qqfit I <W1(IhI ^ffrlf
*U<WIV M
110. The affix *nj comes in the Chhandas, after
a word in the locative case in construction, in the sense of
'what stays there/ _
Digitized by
Google
840 «***ii [Bk.IV.Ch. IV. $.114
This debars n^, q &c (IV. 3, 53). Those affixes also are employed
in the alternative, there being much latitude of grammatical rules in the
Vedas. Thus the words *ifa: and firjrfr in the following hymn of the Yajur
Veda (16. V. 38) : mg %cqfa ^ ftj&ra ? M All the sfitras henceforward up
to the end of the chapter, are Vedic sfitras, the word 9^% being understood
in them all. The word qft governs all the sAtras up to IV. 4. 1 18.
jfit * u iwumuQtmra urci rod **fifr *nr ** iftwfaiift 1 ^i^mn* n
111. The affix ^qnr comes in the Chhandas, in the
sense of 'what stays there/ after the words 'p&thas' and 'nadi/
wherby the last vowel, with the consonant following, is elided.
This debars mj 11 Thus qraft «HF -*!***• so also mmi 11 As in the
following hymns : hj^t in4r f*r, *T <fr ^hr HTOT Pt& % II TO* means firma-
ment
gfir* 11 ^*m wflmwmwm raft »rcfa inr ** tfimfiuPmfr 1 nfom* 11 ^
112. The affix zm^ comes in the Chhandas in the
sense of 'what stays there* after the words 'vesanta 1 and
^himavat/ - -
This debars n^ 11 Thus Wtfro *ror f VMV*w* **ht II
«ld4^ fimiNi «qr^ft u ^ n q^Tft n ^tcnsr. firem, wqc-dV B
fRfs 11 <l<mw ( |jnim T^t ^ fjfrfr ireEfr *rerenc »re iawfinfa«ft i nftmtv n
113. The affixes fn^ and ^jr come optionally in
the Chhandas in the sense of l what stays there/ after the word
c srota8 f , and before these affixes the final syllable src^ of srotas
is elided.
This debars «?j which comes 'in the alternative. As cfcrft ^•■wrrf:
or^RT- the difference being in the accent (III. 1. 3 and VI. 1. 185). The
anubandha * causes the elision of «?w of Wcf^r 11 When *n is added the form
lsttftf&it
114. The affix ^ comes in the sense of 'what
stays there,' after the words 'sagarbha/ 'sayfttha* and sanuta.'
Digitized by
Google
s>
Bk. IV. Ch. IV. 5 118 J. Vt, * ». 841
This debars «i| the difference being in accent (VI. I. I97> Thus
**3*mr s*M: • a younger brother *. ir yrawj tg: f a younger friend '. So also
mrn cr***: ¥*r m f^PPj thief lit 'who stays in a concealed place', sanuta meaning
'concealed 9 (see Rig Veda II. 31. 9). The word snif is always changed into #
9 in the Chhandas (VI. 3. 84).
115. The affix qqc comes in the Chhandas in the
sense of 'what stays there/ after the word, tngra/
This debars ** 11 Thus jftta as rvtit fWJ JfaaPit H Which
assumes the form jjqq tugrya alsa As ure fRHL ***t inwnw (Rig Veda 1. 34.
1 5) Tugrya meaning * sunk in the waters '• The word §R means * food, firma-
ment, sacrifice and varish\ha \
116. The affix 11^ comes in the Chhandas in the
sense of ' what stays there \ after the word ' agra \
Thus 1^ H^aJW^ll Why this separate rule, for »jj would have
come after «n* by the general rule IV. 4. 1 10 ? The repetition is to show that
inj is not debarred by q and & of the next sfitra, which would have been the
case, had this sfitra not existed.
jfat u •nrotsroi trafr to4 hww to i&wRHpffli 1
117. The affixes ' ghach 'and c chha ' come in the
Chhandas in the sense of ' what stays there \ after the word
1 agra/
Thus «FT3jt (bywj), «nfo* (by Or) and VTftA (by *^r> And «3ft«*
(by q^) from IV. 4. 115. See $. V. I. 13. 10 (SAyana) £t*t4rorfFq*U
S^r- ii ^jswtwww i: v«raf **flt n* ** fSp^ft , F^I , i ^Jtwp ii
118. The affix c gha 9 comes in the Chhandas in
the sense of 'what stays there 1 , after the words 'samudra'
and l abhra \
Digitized by
Google
$4* irc^KWr fag 5 * n [ Bk. IV. Cit IV. $ xtx
This debars w?j H Thus fRoN: and «rft*: 9 as in osfitar «TOTC*fr 1«ftfa-
^C and tfPTOfir «rf$|CT$* qfap M The word ' abhra ' being a word of fewer-
syllables than 'samudra' ought to have come first Its coming as a second
member is an irregularity.
jfri: ii *nr inr Pif^nt i wff* tmKuwnuiiiffTjft&tafrjiitf *i?j rorafr h*Rt it
119. The affix ^ comes id the Chhandas in the
sense of ' given \ after the word ' barhis f in the 7th. case in
construction.
The anuvfitti of *pc *T- ceases. Thus *ff^£ fafaj ft*s ll 5. V. ia IS $
5?tft srprefofl n ?ro ii q^rft n ^nPT-^m-^nlofr^cj) ii
jf^f: ii PnNri^f *w4fa*iPrfc* i ptiMi<i Md*i*itif«*rt *4i^l ^uW^ft *iujwir *roft i
120. The affix iftt comes in the Chhandas after
the word ' dftta f in the genitive case in construction, in the
sense of ' its share f or ' its duty/
Thus JSWL 'the share of a messenger or the work of a messenger'.
As q% sra* jm« According to VI. I. 213, the accent will be fan, but the
accented Text reads Jjspill
<qft*lk|«tl &rft II &\ II ^ri^ II Wt Hii^iitH ppft (*Ft) II
^fa* 11 Pff^if^T uttfRHfrii* 1 w^MWijjMMWMrf|y*i^f^«i«ft^RH*iif^<MHi9i«nRiru
121. The affix ?jq[ comes in the Chhandas in the
sense of 'killer \ after the words 'raksha* and 'y&tu* in. the
sixth case in construction*
That by which anything is killed is called f^ft 11 Thus to^ and
m<^>4 meaning * that which kills the demons called Rakshas and Y&tus '. As
«tl% «W W*ST **: L e. wd f^fr * O Agni thy bodies are killers of Rakshas".
So HHmi : *3? M The word is in the plural as a mark of respect
*dJU*i&*famn Fr:- sra^ ll m 11 q^rf% u ^^-gp^ -^fc^ i w
STO^ II
122. The affix *R* comes in the Chhandas in the
sense of 'praising* after the words 'revati', 'jagati* and
€ havishya* in the 6th case in construction.
The word TOTO means qsTCPT 'praising, extolling', formed by adding the
Kpt affix w% to the root, with the force of *TTT or 'condition'. Thus l&wi, WldpL
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Bk IV Ch IV § i*S- ) *** 843
and (ft*4* f praising of Rcvatf, Jag&t! or Havishya '. The word ffta*, is thus
formed tf** ffcir-*ft*in f things fit for offering' L e. butter &c, (tjftf +^ V. L
4) fR«wm^inS^-^f^^(fRw+iPlIV.4. i22«(Arai+itii the final •? being
elided by VI. 4. I43=ffov+«m the * being elided by VIII. 4. «4>
WQ<W «Hll W II *nrTft H <Hg<¥r 9 'OT[ II
123. The affix *R* comes in the Chhandas in the
sense of c property \ after the word c asura ' in the 6th case
in construction.
This debars «**£ n Thus tr^&i • belonging to the Asuras 9 . As HTp|
*tt VKH Vfi WWfll* Jk«*HfcOTL • this vessel made on a wheel by a potter belongs to
the Asuras'. •T^'^Pniift ftM^M See Maitr S. I. 8. 3
iTWPnum 11 V& 11 W& 11 «wrani-«rm 11
124. The affix *n^ comes in the Chhandas in the
sense of 'glamour*, after the word 'asura* in the 6th case
in construction.
:y This debars mi u *t*p&i ITO-Uigs feminine mftf? u As «nqQ nm
^iMiH-^Myw*-w ? 9r-^r-i k y.*hi^-5'ii-^-iiats u
125. The affix *ra[ comes in the Chhandas, after a
nominal stem, in the 1st case in construction, ending with the
affix 'inatup', when the sense is "this is their mantra of putting
up", provided that, the things put up are bricks: And the
affix matup is elided by luk.
This sfltra requires analysis. iffT^ is formed by adding HJ^ to tr^ mean-
ing 'having that', and refers to a noun formed by the affix HJ^H The word
r V *rrara is genitive plural fern, of ft meaning 'of them'; the pronoun refers to the
word fW»r H The word TT MR means 'putting up', and technically means 'used
as a Mantra in the putting up of sacrificial bricks, pots &o '. 13T " sacred
hymn " .msr * bricks '. The whole sfttra means u the affix f yat f is used with
31
Digitized by
Google
\
844 *** [ Bk. IV, CH. IV § 127.
the force of a genitive (&s&m), after a word which ends with matup (tadvftn),
and denotes a mantra used in putting up of sacrificial objects ; when such
mantra refers to bricks : and when this affix yat is added, the affix matup
is elided '• Thus rftCTl is a Mantra containing the word *^frj 11 The bricks
put up or collected (wfott) with the recitation of q^VlP* Mantra, will be
called^* (*TO*+ifll-**I+*nt the affix ** (*S<0 being elided -ro* f
fern **feff) H Thus ^hwr VlWlRl 'he collects Varchasya bricks i. e. on which
Varchasvan mantra has been pronounced f . So %*f4r sWJTrtt « So roAr,
Why do we say HlfiC? The affix is not to be added to the whole
Mantra. Why do we say, 3TOPT 'putting up'? The affix is not to be added
to other Mantras such as those used in praying etc e. g. Ww«HK«4fH H*x *U-
qiftte^HlHL , here there will be no affix. Why do we say Mantra ? Observe
•fgfo*ffg*re Hf ^T siren f these bricks are collected with hand having fingers ',
here tliere will be no affix. Why do we say fg^frg ? Observe q^i^NHJ I**
qqt ^m^RPI., here there will be no affix, the thing collected being potsherds
and not bricks.
ffrf: II STpTOsft *lRji*H<£t!>fcr £lPMHI< • mfclH^tfMWS iPTO* **[$ I $£** 4Hm41*: I
126. The affix vu^ comes in the Chhandas, after the
words asviman, to denote bricks put up with the Mantra con-
taining the word Asvin, and the affix matup is elided.
Thus 3tf*rar3TCFft *rai mwiPtekhMi - *nfifrp fern, snflnft: 11 The word
is thus formed HrfvRT^+B^j=*9?flf +«^r the matup being elided IV, 4. I25»*r-
fa^+srw VI. 4. i64=Bnf^f II Thus anf^ft^r^lfilr 'he collects ASvin bricks
i. e. bricks at the time of collecting which Mantras containing srpq^ were
uttered. See Yajur Veda Tait S. 5. 3. 1. I.
qq^ljj q^r w<r* II *RVS II q^Tfa II ^IFITg-^:-«g^ II
jftf: 11 TOtfrsTOT^r *f^t *rai m ^wuttfi^Pfiraiij yjfr hqx iros&r *nfir 11
127. The affix 'matup' is added in the Chhandas,
to the word 'mftrdhanvat', in expressing bricks collected with,
the Mantra containing the word 'vayas 9 .
The word TOTOT means the bricks, the Upadh&na mantras of which Iron-
tain the word qraw II The affix *T3* debars q5j II A mantra which contains
both the word TOi^and yfo that Mantra is both qirerFiand g>&3T^H Now in
denoting sacrificial bricks put up with such a mantra, the affix *ltj£ would have
come by IV, 4- 125 after both these words tohpi and g$**T* » The present
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. IV. § 129. ] ^and^i 845
sfltra ordains ng^ after fdran U Thus gdfrftfoqiHlft <he collects MOrdbanvatt
bricks 9 . The words toot* and gapro: denote the same object See VI. 1. 176.
Why do we say qiiOTQ? The affix 'matup' will not be added to
, ;> * mflrdhan ', if the Mantra contains only the word f mfirdhan ' and not f vayas 9
also. In that case g$R(P will be the form, meaning ' bricks collected with the
Mantra containing the word ?fa\ while $$?ro: means • bricks collected with
the Mantra containing the words mflrdhan and vayas*.
The stitra contains the word jpj: ablative singular of 3$^ u It ought
to have been $fartn, for the affix matup is added to 5^^, the ^ being elid-
. ed then by IV. 4. 125. The author has mentally elided the affix *jj, and
shown in the aphorism the last stage of the word to which ifgv is to be added.
us/ft WMdrcH: n \\c R M^ift H *wi$i-*irar-<i*fti (*nj) H
fftf: M *ft*ni9 *id*RftHWft*IM5^Rl (Wl HWJWWl *TOflt 1Kltl«4l: ***WPj WUR^k I
qtfSre* h *<mq^KHMii^ r 11 wifWi n g*raft*n^P* tc^p p
128. The affix ^ comes in the Chhandos with the
force of matup, after a word in the first case in construction,
the word so formed meaning a month or a body.
This debars the affix 11*^ and those having the sense of 13^11 Thus
'"* *r*riftr ft«J% ufal* «ft"fW 'the month of clouds • i. e. June-July. So also
WWt tITOI* 1W*» being the names of the months Pausha (Nov-Dcc), Phal-
guna (Feb-March) and Vais&kha (April-May). The word *n&V is thus form-
ed:— **+ipi-'m+«fll (VI. 4. I46)«qprap (VI. 1. 79) 'the month of honey \
Similarly ^tar^r iff* ' the bodies full of vigour '•
Why do we say u in denoting a month or a body"? Observe ^mf
qnta *rcfir» here njv is used
Vdrt: — The affix ms\ is optionally employed when the sense is ' im-
mediately after*. As wfcwfet » raft»FRKftft *T-irw* or nrtft TOP tt
Vdrt /—Sometimes the affix is elided, and sometimes the letters u, f
and c serve the same purpose as this affix. Thus nv or uron, «p**^or iprafe
TOJ or ^f^r, all in the neuter gender in the Chhandas. Sometimes sr serves
the same purpose, e. g. fit m& 9 V#mP II Sometimes f, as gftrcfa** Some~
times ce.g.^jrwv 7
jnn 11 ijpmwi'i? t w<ft **fa ^rarcnw i'
129. The affix «r as well as. ^ comes with the.
force of matup, in the Chhandas, after the word n^ I
Digitized by
;y Googl e
\
846 . v^-«f u . [Bk.IV.Ch.IV. 5 132
• > /Thus nrfat or imuh 11 Sometimes the affix is elided, as 13:, all these
mean the month of VaisAkha. So also trw*, *WV and njp meaning trj: or
body.
?Rt: 11 *w«Si«ti I aft** IIMMW*! «wfc **&! WJtS?**lPf^ M
130. The affixes *i<j and *sr come with the force of
matup, after the word ' ojas ', when a day is meant.
Thus aftuHin or 4UtfM - *r?: • the day » lit full of heat
tfalUlWtl^&llflcl II Mill M^lft ll ^W-^TO-W^MIWIdl-^ •
jf^r. 11 *tc*4t^ I'Wrtro* *u$r ^ uiRnRnwi qw i VlUwM'iiHtiwraHR^Hi-
131. The afffix q^ comes in the Chhandas, with
the force of matup, after the word bhaga, having the words
1 vesas 9 or ' yasas ' in the beginning.
The w of 37^ shows that the accent falls on the vowel preceding the
affix (VI. 1. 193). Thus ^prrfr pro% *m tf«TOtfta: 'strong-fortune' so also
trcrnfct: * famous-fortune \ The word to means • strength • : *nr means • for-
tune, desire, effort, greatness, virility and fame.' The word ^rpr^r. may be
taken as a Dvandva compound of %^/ f° r< r e ' and *jip 'fortune.' The .word
^fa 1 *: would then mean • possessed of power and fortune \
«r « I ft* a ^t^ II «-« II
132. The affix ^ also comes after the words c ve-
aobhaga • and s yasobhaga \ in the Chhandas, with the force
of matup.
Thus Xfciffa: and ipfrvpffa: ll This sfitra has been separated from
last in order to prevent the application of the qrarofer nile (I. 3. 10). For had
the sfltra been^ftro stf^Pn^q^fr, as it occurs in Siddhanta Kaumudi, then
the affix 355 would apply to %*ftan, and the affix <g to qtitw- which is not
what is intended. Another reason for making it a distinct aphorism is that
the anuvfitti of <g runs in the next sfltra, not so of ^ n
^f: gcrfonft <* 11 w H <nfrft ll ^•^r-n-^-^r ll
^ii^^Prf^^if^^n^OT^f^rf^ i $fcror* g^n^R^Pr^frm^
n n xmt **& tot : i*TOrcrac*r ti
Digitized by
Google
V
Bk.IV.Ch. IV. I itf] . *H 847
133. The affixes CT and q as weH as ^ come in
the sense of ' made by them', after the word ' purva ' (fore-
fathers) 'in the Instrumental case in construction.
The qi is read into the sfttra by force of the word *r ; the anuvptti
of mri ceases. Thus ^f: $tf - jflH: ' made by the ancestors • i. e. a road So
also 5^: and jjS^: II The word jjf: in the plural means s^g^ro " past gener-
ations, ancestors ". These words occur generally in the plural, and mean
" roads widened by the forefathers ". Thus iT*4ftft* ifilfk* jf^tft : 11 So also,
^% TOT* Gftrar S*nfa* ( Rig I. 35- » ) Another reading of this sfltra is ^ft
tt>flftfi4te ; the affixes then will be ffH (r0# and 1 I and ^ will be drawn in by
virtue of nil The examples then will be jtf*;3rd pL jfftfn: (with f^), as
qfln^* jrtfift, or tffot (or), or <*& (*) m
WpT* M ftlftul* UH*Jft*lfi**. I H**mi*$*fl*H*H«ltJl *S**dlHHlWlRH*l*f <l4JW)l f^fif B
134. The affix 1^ comes in the Chhandas in the
sense of ' sanctified \ after the word * apas ' in the 3rd case
in construction.
Thusucmt * offering purified with water*. As STOP^ ffts u The
case of construction is indicated in the sAtra itself.
jfa: 11 Fffafar *roft*fiKt 1 ^w^Mi^^iu^H^^t^fiit^fHi^ ***** *rcflr n
135. The affix ' gha ' comes in the Chhandas, in
the sense of c like f , after the word * sahasra \ in the 3rd case
in construction.
The case of construction is indicated by the sAtra. Thus 3t§ar 3Plr-
WWfilm* Mike unto thousand \ As in the following verse: — mfqu i Mlvj f ^rf-
n: ll wwfwJ Qtftra* The word stfts means ,jf* 'equal to*. Some read the
word of*Rr instead of crffenr, but the meaning will be the same.
gfir* h **ft n wwwu y raft *rcf» it
136. The affix ' gha 9 comes in the Chhandas with
the force of matup, after the word ' sahasra \
As *n!3TO ftiJ%-^fRw* ll This debars the i&v% affixes Rp| and <p|
and ***; of V. 2. 102 and 103.
Digitized by
jSoogk—
848 * and n M [ Bk. IV. Ch. IV. § 141
' 137. The afiix *r comes in the Chhandas, after the
word ' Soma ', in the second case in construction, when the
sense is that of ' who- deserves that \
* Thus enm^f^T n OT«Tr mjpn': "The BrAhmanas who deserve Soma"
I e. honorable and learned, and worthy of performing sacrifices. The differ-
ence between q?j and q is in accent
«& « 1 tt£ 1 ^fifir n iqfcw (v) I
138. The affix *r comes in the Chhandas, after
the word * Soma \ with the force of the affix mayat;
The force of the affix iroc k that of inn *mw (IV. 3, 74 and 82^
H^tiHJW (IV. 3. 134 and 143) and 113^ (V. 4. 21). The case in construction
will vary according to the sense. Thus *fr*q «rjf: fW^r s -€r | nw 'JJf* U
jfti* 11 *ro^r R^tf: 1 *Qnim**wc5fr «m in*wt *nifir it
139. The affix *ra[ comes in the Chhandas, after
the word * madhu \ with the force of the affix mayat.
Thus iRcqp( wrar^«- tgrw^ w
140. The affix *n^ comes in the Chhandas after
the word ' vasu ', when a collection is meant, as well as with
the force of mayaf.
Thus to*9: ■■ fr?yi f a collection \
Vdrt: — The affix f yat ' comes without changing the sense, after the
word cnre. when reference is made to the collection of letters. Thus the word
15*1** in the following sentence : " qmwmwE^w HMmfiukU ** ftflw". The
17 letters here referred to being i|r *ira» four; *T*2 *fa** four; qm, two; % nnr^
ij| five; and q^r two ll
Vdrt: — The affix v&i comes after *y without changing the sense. As
**& ^hrw JJPri*^* ll Here to&p is equal to *gfa ll Similarly nBrffa TO-
5Reraif tr. n t«t ft q^i& n iiqninfc.tr: »
?fir. h wwwps if^wfr *pn9 finf 11
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IV. Ch. IV. 5 f 44- ] Wfl*$ i 849
141. The affix c gha' comes in the Chhandas after
the word ' nakshatra ', without altering the meaning.
The anuvptti of ggj does not extend to this sfitra. Thus TOftA***
jftf: ii 5r^f^i«^T*nf mfirj nnr& *rcflt or**fa firqii f*rffas i
142. The affix 'tatir comes in the Chhandas
after the words ' sarva ' and * deva *, without altering the
meaning.
As qfalfir: and^^ifir: in the following hymns : "fcftor ** OTIU^lfa*
and nqfttn^iuftjlW. ll
•*: *it |WlR*iH*J WlfiWJ TO** WfRf II
143. The affix 't&tiT comes, in the Chhandas, after
the word '$iva\ 'Jam', and 'arishto' in the sixth case in construc-
tion when the sense is 'he 'docs'.
The word qrc is equivalent to Sfftnt forirtcd by tr^(IH. I. 134)
This shows that the construction must be genitive. With a kfit-form-
cd word, it has accusative force, as, firTOt sk*: -ftri Irftfif ll
Thus faro ^-ftronft.', So tomft* and «Tfe*rft: 11 As m&. *rciHfr
*Wt *frg4 (Rig I. 112. 20) tanft being dual of Tj^dlR f:, and meaning g*R*
qr?ri&; so also *w vtftcfrcqflr n
*n^ ^r n ?«« n y^ift 11 ^n^-^r (difd«*) n
«f^f : 11 *rnr ^vi ©«iRi firor ftraiftHrairfii^, *t&m *ro9 u
144. The affix ' tatil ' comes in the Chhandas,
after the words l jiva ', ' *am ' and l arishta \ being in the 6th
case in construction, the sense being that of condition.
Thus ftfttq HT^: » IXt^rllfd: ' the condition of blissful ness \ tFRTfiw: ' the
state of happiness or peace ', sikstflfa: ll Here these words have the force of
Verbal nouns.
Digitized by
Gooffb
-/
1
I
\
V;
I
<• c r J '
\^ Digitized by VjOOQLC
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Bookbinding Co., Inc.
300 bummer Stroet
Digitized by
Google
THE BORROWER WILL BE CHARGED
AN OVERDUE FEE IF THIS BOOK IS NOT
RETURNED TO THE LIBRARY ON OR
BEFORE THE LAST DATE STAMPED
BELOW NON-RECEIPT OF OVERDUE
NOTICES DOES NOT EXEMPT THE
BORROWER FROM OVERpkKSEtS,
STALWTUDY
Digitized by
Google
I
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11